Volume II 1954-1956 - Technical Bulletins

Volume II 1954-1956 - Technical Bulletins

Сообщение auditor » 27 дек 2016, 16:41

Web auditing in any place on the planet http://webauditing.org/

The
Technical Bulletins
of
Dianetics and Scientology

by
L. Ron Hubbard
FOUNDER OF DIANETICS AND SCIENTOLOGY

Volume
II
1954-1956
_____________________________________________________________________

I will not always be here on guard.
The stars twinkle in the Milky Way
And the wind sighs for songs
Across the empty fields of a planet
A Galaxy away.

You won't always be here.
But before you go,
Whisper this to your sons
And their sons —
"The work was free.
Keep it so. "


L. RON HUBBARD

L. Ron Hubbard
Founder of Dianetics and Scientology

EDITORS' NOTE


"A chronological study of materials is necessary for the complete training of a truly top grade expert in these lines. He can see how the subject progressed and so is able to see which are the highest levels of development. Not the least advantage in this is the defining of words and terms for each, when originally used, was defined, in most cases, with considerable exactitude, and one is not left with any misunderstoods."

—L. Ron Hubbard

The first eight volumes of the Technical Bulletins of Dianetics and Scientology contain, exclusively, issues written by L. Ron Hubbard, thus providing a chronological time track of the development of Dianetics and Scientology. Volume IX, The Auditing Series, and Volume X, The Case Supervisor Series, contain Board Technical Bulletins that are part of the series. They are LRH data even though compiled or written by another.

So that the time track of the subject may be studied in its entirety, all HCO Bs have been included, excluding only those upper level materials which will be found on courses to which they apply. If an issue has been revised, replaced, or cancelled, this has been indicated in the upper right-hand corner along with the page number of the issue which should be referred to.

The points at which Ron gave tape recorded lectures have been indicated as they occurred. Where they were given as part of an event or course, information is given on that event or course on the page in the chronological volumes which corresponds to the date. The symbol "**" preceding a tape title means that copies are available from both Publications Organizations. A tape preceded by "*" means that it will soon be available. No asterisk (*) means that neither Publications Organization nor Flag has a master copy of that lecture. If you have, or know anyone who has, copies of these tapes, please contact the Flag Audio Chief, P.O. Box 23751, Tampa, Florida, 33623, U.S.A. The number in the tape title is a code for the date; example: 5505C07—55 = year, 1955; 05 = month, May; C = copy; 07 = day, 7th; 7 May 1955. The abbreviation tells what group the tape is a part of. For an explanation of the abbreviations see Volume X, page 539.

At the back of this volume is a Subject Index covering only the material in this volume. Use the index to locate the LRH source material in context, don't just get data from the index. This index has been combined with indexes from other volumes to form the Cumulative Index which is in Volume X, starting on page 287.


TECHNICAL BULLETINS
1954-1956


CONTENTS



1954

ca. Jan. Future Processing (PAB 17)
4 Jan. 3rd American Advanced Clinical Course Lectures (4 Jan.—12 Feb.) 4
15 Jan. Man’s Search for His Soul (JOS 23-G) 6
ca. Jan. Overt Acts (PAB 18) 8
31 Jan. SOP-8-C: The Rehabilitation of the Human Spirit (JOS 24-G) 10
ca. Feb. The Circuit Case (PAB 19) 19
ca. Feb. Two Answers to Correspondents: the Non-Persistence Case
and Ridge Running (PAB 20) 22
15 Feb. 4th American Advanced Clinical Course Lectures (15 Feb.—29 Mar.) 25
ca. Mar. Report on Certainty Processing (PAB 21 ) 27
10 Mar. Dear Associate 32
ca. Mar. The Road Up (JOS 26-G) 35
2 Apr. Havingness (PAB 23) 38
30 Mar. 5th American Advanced Clinical Course Lectures (30 Mar.—7 May) 40
10 Apr. Data Sheet—Advanced Course Procedure 41
15 Apr. SOP 8 D 45
ca. Apr. Scientology: A New Science (JOS 28G) 46
16 Apr. Certainty of Exteriorization (PAB 24) 47
21 Apr. Special Group Processing Sessions (21 Apr.) 50
30 Apr. Basic Procedures (PAB 25) 51
3 May Viewpoint Straight Wire 55
5 May Public Lecture Series (5 May—5 June) 56
10 May 6th American Advanced Clinical Course Lectures (10 May—18 June) 57
5 June Universe Processes Congress Lectures (5 June—8 June) 59
June Group Auditor’s Handbook 60
11 June Answer to a Letter (PAB 28) 61
23 June 7th American Advanced Clinical Course Lectures (21 June—30 July) 65
15 July Training 67
23 July Group Auditing Sessions 70
Aug. Scientology: Auditor’s Handbook 71
7 Aug. Why Doctor of Divinity ? (PAB 32) 72
20 Aug. Axioms Lectures (20 Aug.) 75
Sept. Group Auditor’s Handbook, Volume 2 60

1954 (cont.)

4 Sept. Opening Procedure, SOP-8-C, A Basic Course in Scientology
(part 1 of 7) (PAB 34) 76
18 Sept. “What I Learned in Training” (part 2 of 7) (PAB 35) 79
ca. Sept. Dianetics and Scientology Organizations United Again (JOS 36G) 83
ca. Sept. Fighting Process 85
Oct. The Use of Scientology Materials (part 3 of 7) (PAB 36) 86
4 Oct. 8th American Advanced Clinical Course Lectures (4 Oct.—12 Nov.) 90
8 Oct. Route One Lectures (8 Oct.—10 Oct.) 91
15 Oct. The Communication Lines of Scientology (part 4 of 7) (PAB 37) 92
ca. Oct. Dianetics and Scientology . . . a Crusade 94
20 Oct. Public Lecture and Group Processing Series (20 Oct.—15 Dec.) 95
29 Oct. The Auditor’s Code 1954 (part 5 of 7) (PAB 38) 96
12 Nov. The Auditor’s Code 1954 (Concluded) (part 5 of 7) (PAB 39) 99
ca. Nov. Validation of Scientology (JOS 40-G) 102
15 Nov. Phoenix Certification Course Lectures (15 Nov.—4 Dec.) 103
26 Nov. The Code of Honor (part 6 of 7) (PAB 40) 104
Dec. Accent on Ability (Foundation Bulletin 1-3) 106
ca. Dec. Is It Possible to Be Happy? (JOS 41-G) 111
6 Dec. 9th American Advanced Clinical Course Lectures (6 Dec.—21 Jan.) 113
3 Jan. 10th American Advanced Clinical Course Lectures (3 Jan.—6 Jan.) 113
10 Dec. The Code of a Scientologist (part 7 of 7) (PAB 41 ) 115
24 Dec. Six Basic Processes (PAB 42) 118
Dec. Dianetics ‘55! 124
28 Dec. Unification Congress of Dianeticists and Scientologists
Lectures (28 Dec.—31 Dec.) 125

1955

Jan. Public Lecture and Group Processing Series (1 Jan.—11 May) 126
7 Jan. Plotting the Preclear on the Tone Scale (PAB 43) 128
16 Jan. Third International Congress of Scientologists
Lecture (16 Jan.—19 Jan. ) 132
ca. Jan. Phoenix Clinic (JOS 43-G) 133
21 Jan. Two-Way Communication in Action (PAB 44) 136
4 Feb. Mimicry (PAB 45) 140
18 Feb. Straight Wire (PAB 46) 142
4 Mar. Opening Procedure 8-C (PAB 47) 146
8 Mar. LRH Auditing Demonstrations (8 Mar.—29 Apr.) 149
14 Mar. Hubbard Professional College Lectures (14 Mar.—14 May) 150
ca. Mar. The Scientologist—A Manual on the Dissemination of Material
(Ability Major 1 ) 151
18 Mar. Opening Procedure by Duplication (PAB 48) 172

1955 (cont.)

ca. Apr. The Way Ron Works (Ability Minor 3) 175
Apr. The Remedy of Havingness (PAB 49) 176
15 Apr. Remedy of Havingness—The Process (PAB 50) 180
Apr. The Creation of Human Ability 187
29 Apr. Spotting Spots (PAB 51 ) 188
ca. May The Scale of Awareness (Ability Minor 4) 191
13 May Auditing the “Whole Track” (PAB 52) 195
27 May Ownership (PAB 53) 198
3 June Anatomy of the Spirit of Man Congress Lectures (3 June—6 June) 203
4 June The Tone Plotting Scale 204
10 June Reality Level of Preclear (PAB 54) 205
ca. June The Hope of Man (Ability Minor 5) 209
July Straight Wire—A Manual of Operation (Ability Major 4) 216
8 July Axiom 51 and Communication Processing (PAB 56) 240
11 July Academy Lecture Series (11 July—21 Sept.) 239
ca. July The Adventure of Scientology (Ability Minor 6) 244
ca. Aug. An Idea Versus War (Certainty 2-8) 245
ca. Aug. With A-R-C (Ability Major 5) 246
5 Aug. “Old Cuff” from PAB 58 248
ca. Sept. Basic Processes (Ability Major 6) 249
2 Sept. “Anything—Everything—Nothing” (PAB 60) 256
Sept. Dianetics: The Evolution of a Science see Vol. I— 11
ca. Sept. Start That Practice! (Ability 14) 261
16 Sept. Selling (PAB 61) 264
30 Sept. Psychiatrists (PAB 62) 267
3 Oct. 4th London Advanced Clinical Course Lectures (3 Oct.—5 Nov.) 270
8 Oct. London Public Lecture Series (8 Oct.—29 Oct.) 271
14 Oct. Playing the Game (PAB 63) 272
20 Oct. Operational Bulletin No. 1 275
28 Oct. First Postulate (PAB 64) 279
ca. Nov. The Six Levels of Processing (Certainty 2-11 ) 282
8 Nov. Six Levels of Processing—Issue 5 see footnote—291
8 Nov. Hubbard Professional Course Lectures (8 Nov.—10 Nov.) 286
11 Nov. From a Lecture by L. Ron Hubbard on Mest Processing, July 7, 1951
(PAB 65) 287
11 Nov. Operational Bulletin No. 4—Six Levels of Processing—Issue 5 289
ca. Nov. What Are You Going to Do About It? (Ability 16) 292
ca. Nov. Operational Bulletin No. 5 294
25 Nov. First, Second, Third and Fourth Postulates (PAB 66) 297
ca. Nov. Letter to Ability Editor (Ability 18) 301

1955 (cont.)

ca. Nov. Operational Bulletin No. 6—Processing Futures 303
1 Dec. London Auditors’ Meeting Lectures (l Dec.—14 Feb. 1956) 306
6 Dec. Operational Bulletin No. 7 307
13 Dec. Operational Bulletin No. 8 309
19 Dec. Operational Bulletin No. 9 311
23 Dec. First and Second Postulate (PAB 68) 316
28 Dec. Operational Bulletin No. 10—The Management and Activities of
Scientology Organizations 318


1956

3 Jan. Operational Bulletin No. 11 320
3 Jan. Six Levels of Processing—Issue 7 see footnote—326
6 Jan. Six Levels of Processing—Issue 7 (PAB 69) 322
10 Jan. Operational Bulletin No. 12—An Experimental Arrangement of
Level One 327
17 Jan. Operational Bulletin No. 13 330
17 Jan. Operational Bulletin No. 13 Appendix 1—Scientology Schools
Curriculum 339
20 Jan. Training (PAB 70) see footnote—347
24 Jan. Operational Bulletin No. 14 348
25 Jan. Recent Reports on Preclears 356
31 Jan. Operational Bulletin No. 15 357
3 Feb. Bachelor of Scientology and Hubbard Advanced Auditor Classes
(PAB 71 ) see footnote—347
7 Feb. Operational Bulletin No. 16 360
7 Feb. Founding Church of Scientology Funeral Service 363
6 Feb. Hubbard Professional Course Lectures (6 Feb.—14 Feb.) 365
14 Feb. Operational Bulletin No. 17 366
21 Feb. The Importance of Havingness (PAB 72) 371
28 Feb. Three Methods of Dissemination (PAB 73) see footnote—385
6 Mar. Office in Ireland (PAB 74) 376
13 Mar. Exteriorization Today, Two-Way Comm and New Auditing Style
(PAB 75) see footnote—385
20 Mar. Comparison of Results; Earliest Findings on Havingness;
An Organizational Principle; Funeral Service (PAB 76) see footnote—385
3 Apr. Administration (PAB 78) 386
10 Apr. The Open Channel (PAB 79) 389
17 Apr. Scientology’s Most Workable Process (PAB 80) 395
24 Apr. Purpose (PAB 81 ) 400
May Basic Principles, Scientology—Translator’s Edition
(part 1 of 7) (PAB 82) 404

1956 (cont.)

8 May The Conditions of Existence (part 2 of 7) (PAB 83) 410
8 May Test Results 417
15 May The Reason Why (part 3 of 7) (PAB 84) 421
15 May Scientology Wedding Ceremony 425
22 May The Parts of Man (part 4 of 7) (PAB 85) 428
29 May Causation and Knowledge (part 5 of 7) (PAB 86) 435
5 June Scientology Processing (part 6 of 7) (PAB 87) 441
12 June The Conditions of Auditing (part 7 of 7) (PAB 88) 446
19 June Scientology—Revision of Translator’s Edition (PAB 89) 452
26 June Current Processes 454
26 June The Organizations of Dianetics and Scientology (PAB 90) 456
3 July The Anatomy of Failure (PAB 91 ) 462
10 July A Critique of Psychoanalysis (PAB 92) 465
14 July Five Types of Valences 471
20 July How to Really Split a Valence 472
22 July Technical Bulletin 473
24 July A Critique of Psychoanalysis (Continued) (PAB 93) 475
3 Aug. Organizational Health Chart see OEC Vol. 7—114
13 Aug. Scientology Process Chart 483
15 Aug. The Anatomy of Traps (PAB 94) 485
ca. Aug. The Goal of Auditors 487
Aug. Hubbard Professional Course Lectures (Aug.) 487
20 Aug. HGC Procedure of Aug. 20 488
21 Aug. Summary of Intensives Since June 490
25 Aug. Addendum to HCO B 20 Aug. 56 see footnote—489
ca. Aug. Havingness (Ability 34) 491
31 Aug. Games Congress, Shoreham Hotel 503
31 Aug. Games Congress Lectures (31 Aug.—2 Sept.) 506
Sept. Valences (PAB 95) 507
12 Sept. The Summary of a Bulletin from the Academy in Washington, D.C.,
Concerning Training 509
15 Sept. Justice (PAB 96) 514
20 Sept. HCO Processing Sheet 516
24 Sept. Organizational Indoctrination 519
26 Sept. Procedure for Putting Auditors on Staff 519
26 Sept. Flow Line for Personnel OEC Vol. 4— 20
Sept. Scientology: The Fundamentals of Thought 520
Oct. Start—Change—Stop (PAB 97) 521
4 Oct. High School Indoctrination 524
5 Oct. London Congress on Human Problems Lectures (5 Oct.—8 Oct.) 525

1956 (cont.)

10 Oct. Recall Processes and Confrontingness 526
15 Oct. Creative Processes, Motions, Stops and Perceptions (PAB 98) 528
15 Oct. Summary Research Project 531
ca. Oct. Randomity and Automaticity (Ability 36) 533
15 Oct. 15th American Advanced Clinical Course Lectures (15 Oct—23 Nov) 543
18 Oct. Organizational Series Lectures (18 Oct.—13 Dec. ) 544
26 Oct. HPA-HCA Training Processes 545
Nov. Facsimiles & Solids (PAB 99) 546
15 Nov. HGC Preclear Complaints 549
15 Nov. The Auditing of Solids (PAB 100) 550
30 Nov. SLP 8 553
Dec. Games Conditions Theory (PAB 101 ) 556
3 Dec. B.Scn.—H.A.A. Techniques 559

15 Dec. A Case Report—Comments and Information on Back of APA Sheet (PAB 102) 560
Dec. The Problems of Work 563
29 Dec. Anti-Radiation Congress Lectures (29 Dec—31 Dec.) 564


Subject Index 565
Alphabetical List of Titles 599

PERIODICALS BY ISSUE NUMBER


JOURNAL OF SCIENTOLOGY

Issue
23-G 15 Jan. 54 Man’s Search for His Soul 6
24-G 31 Jan. 54 SOP-8-C: The Rehabilitation of the Human Spirit 10
26-G ca. Mar. 54 The Road Up 35
28-G ca. Apr. 54 Scientology: A New Science 46
36-G ca. Sept. 54 Dianetics and Scientology Organizations United Again 83
40-G ca. Nov. 54 Validation of Scientology 102
41-G ca. Dec. 54 Is It Possible to Be Happy? 111
43-G ca. Jan. 55 Phoenix Clinic 133


PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR’S BULLETIN
No.
17 ca. Jan. 54 Future Processing
18 ca. Jan. 54 Overt Acts 8
19 ca. Feb. 54 The Circuit Case 19
20 ca. Feb. 54 Two Answers to Correspondents: the Non-Persistence
Case and Ridge Running 22
21 ca. Mar. 54 Report on Certainty Processing 27
23 2 Apr. 54 Havingness 38
24 16 Apr. 54 Certainty of Exteriorization 47
25 30 Apr. 54 Basic Procedures 51
28 11 June 54 Answer to a Letter 61
32 7 Aug. 54 Why Doctor of Divinity? 72
34 4 Sept. 54 Opening Procedure, SOP-8-C, A Basic Course in
Scientology (part 1 of 7) 76
35 18 Sept. 54 “What I Learned in Training” (part 2 of 7) 79
36 1 Oct. 54 The Use of Scientology Materials(part 3 of 7) 86
37 15 Oct. 54 The Communication Lines of Scientology (part 4 of 7) 92
38 29 Oct. 54 The Auditor’s Code 1954 (part 5 of 7) 96
39 12 Nov. 54 The Auditor’s Code 1954 (concluded) (part 5 of 7) 99
40 26 Nov. 54 The Code of Honor (part 6 of 7) 104
41 10 Dec. 54 The Code of a Scientologist (part 7 of 7) 115
42 24 Dec. 54 Six Basic Processes 118
43 7 Jan. 55 Plotting the Preclear on the Tone Scale 128
44 21 Jan. 55 Two-Way Communication in Action 136
45 4 Feb. 55 Mimicry 140
46 18 Feb. 55 Straight Wire 142
47 4 Mar. 55 Opening Procedure 8-C 146

48 18 Mar. 55 Opening Procedure by Duplication 172
49 1 Apr. 55 The Remedy of Havingness 176
50 15 Apr. 55 Remedy of Havingness—The Process 180
51 29 Apr. 55 Spotting Spots 188
52 13 May 55 Auditing the “Whole Track” 195
53 27 May 55 Ownership 198
54 10 June 55 Reality Level of Preclear 205
56 8 July 55 Axiom 51 and Communication Processing 240
58 5 Aug. 55 “Old Cuff” 248
60 2 Sept. 55 “Anything—Everything—Nothing” 256
61 16 Sept. 55 Selling 264
62 30 Sept. 55 Psychiatrists 267
63 14 Oct. 55 Playing the Game 272
64 28 Oct. 55 First Postulate 279
65 11 Nov. 55 From a Lecture by L. Ron Hubbard on MEST
Processing, July 7,1951 287
66 25 Nov. 55 First, Second, Third and Fourth Postulates 297
68 23 Dec. 55 First and Second Postulate 316
69 6 Jan. 56 Six Levels of Processing—Issue 7 322
70 20 Jan. 56 Training see footnote— 347
71 3 Feb. 56 Bachelor of Scientology and Hubbard
Advanced Auditor Classes see footnote— 347
72 21 Feb. 56 The Importance of Havingness 371
73 28 Feb. 56 Three Methods of Dissemination see footnote— 385
74 6 Mar. 56 Office in Ireland 376
75 13 Mar. 56 Exteriorization Today, Two-Way Comm and
New Auditing Style see footnote— 385
76 20 Mar. 56 Comparison of Results; Earliest Findings on
Havingness; An Organizational Principle;
Funeral Service see footnote— 385
78 3 Apr. 56 Administration 386
79 10 Apr. 56 The Open Channel 389
80 17 Apr. 56 Scientology’s Most Workable Process 395
81 24 Apr. 56 Purpose 400
82 1 May. 56 Basic Principles, Scientology—Translator’s
Edition (part I of 7) 404
83 8 May. 56 The Conditions of Existence (part 2 of 7) 410
84 15 May. 56 The Reason Why (part 3 of 7) 421
85 22 May. 56 The Parts of Man (part 4 of 7) 428
86 29 May. 56 Causation and Knowledge (part 5 of 7) 435
87 5 June. 56 Scientology Processing (part 6 of 7) 441
88 12 June. 56 The Conditions of Auditing (part 7 of 7) 446
89 19 June. 56 Scientology—Revision of Translator’s Edition 452
90 26 June. 56 The Organizations of Dianetics and Scientology 456

91 3 July. 56 The Anatomy of Failure 462
92 10 July. 56 A Critique of Psychoanalysis 465
93 24 July. 56 A Critique of Psychoanalysis (Continued) 475
94 15 Aug. 56 The Anatomy of Traps 485
95 1 Sept. 56 Valences 507
96 15 Sept. 56 Justice 514
97 1 Oct. 56 Start—Change—Stop 521
98 15 Oct. 56 Creative Processes, Motions, Stops and Perceptions 528
99 1 Nov. 56 Facsimiles & Solids 546
100 15 Nov. 56 The Auditing of Solids 550
101 1 Dec. 56 Games Conditions Theory 556
102 15 Dec. 56 A Case Report—Comments and Information on Back
of APA Sheet 560


ABILITY MAGAZINE


Major 1 ca. Mar. 55 The Scientologist—A Manual on the Dissemination
of Material 151
Minor 3 ca. Apr. 55 The Way Ron Works 175
Minor 4 ca. May. 55 The Scale of Awareness 191
Minor 5 ca. June. 55 The Hope of Man 209
Major 4 1 July. 55 Straight Wire—A Manual of Operation 216
Minor 6 ca. July. 55 The Adventure of Scientology 244
Major 5 ca. Aug. 55 With A-R-C 246
Major 6 ca. Sept. 55 Basic Processes 249
14 ca. Sept. 55 Start That Practice! 261
16 ca. Nov. 55 What Are You Going to Do About It? 292
18 ca. Nov. 55 Letter to Ability Editor 301
34 ca. Aug. 56 Havingness 491
36 ca. Oct. 56 Randomity and Automaticity 533



CERTAINTY MAGAZINE

Vol.-No.
2-8 ca. Aug. 55 An Idea Versus War 245
2-11 ca. Nov. 55 The Six Levels of Processing 282



OPERATIONAL BULLETIN

No.
20 Oct. 55 275
4 11 Nov.55 Six Levels of Processing—Issue 5 289
5 ca. Nov.55 294

6 ca. Nov.55 Processing Futures 303
7 6 Dec. 55 307
8 13 Dec. 55 309
9 19 Dec. 55 311
10 28 Dec. 55 The Management and Activities of Scientology
Organizations 318
11 3 Jan. 56 320
12 10 Jan. 56 An Experimental Arrangement of Level One 327
13 17 Jan. 56 330
13 Appendix 1 17 Jan. 56 Scientology Schools Curriculum 339
14 24 Jan. 56 348
15 31 Jan. 56 357
16 7 Feb.56 360
17 14 Feb.56 366

LONG CONTENTS



PAB No. 17, ca. Jan. 1954 FUTURE PROCESSING, 1

Attitudes of the pc about time,
Measurement of sanity,
Avoidance of work indicator of a decayed state, 2

JOS Issue 23-G, 15 Jan. 1954 MAN’S SEARCH FOR HIS SOUL, 6

PAB No. 18, ca. Jan. 1954 OVERT ACTS, 8

Methods of handling overt acts, 8
Going into the valence of another individual, 9
Reason the preclear is stuck in the mest universe is the overt act phenomenon, 9

JOS Issue 24-G, 31 Jan. 1954 SOP-8-C: THE REHABILITATION OF THE HUMAN SPIRIT, 10
Cycle of action, 11
The use of SOP-8-C, 12
SOP-8-C formulas and steps, 13
SOP-8-C Opening Procedure, 13
SOP-8-C Step I: Location, 13
SOP-8-C Step II: Bodies, 13
SOP-8-C Step III: Space, 13
SOP-8-C Step IV: Havingness, 14
SOP-8-C Step V: Terminals, 14
SOP-8-C Step VI: Symbolization, 15
SOP-8-C Step VII: Barriers, 15
SOP-8-C Step VIII: Duplication, 15
Group C, 16
Special notes on SOP-8-C, 16
Opening Procedure of 8-C, 17

PAB No. 19, ca. Feb. 1954 THE CIRCUIT CASE, 19

Characteristic of circuit case, 19
Getting into communication with pc, 20

PAB No. 20, ca. Feb. 1954 TWO ANSWERS TO CORRESPONDENTS: THE NON-PERSISTENCE CASE AND RIDGE RUNNING, 22
Non-persistence case, 22
How to handle non-persistence case, 22
Ridge running, 23

PAB No. 21, ca. Mar. 1954 REPORT ON CERTAINTY PROCESSING, 27

10 Mar. 1954 DEAR ASSOCIATE, 32

JOS Issue 26-G, ca. Mar. 1954 THE ROAD UP, 35

Role of medical doctor, 35


PAB No. 23, 2 Apr. 1954 HAVINGNESS, 38

Remedy of havingness, 38

10 Apr. 1954 DATA SHEET—ADVANCED COURSE PROCEDURE, 41

Target of the auditor, 41
Problem with universes, 41
Key command in Universe Processing, 41
Know—Sex Scale, 42
Graph of communication, 42
Non-exteriorized cases, 42
Change of Space, 42
Interiorization-Exteriorization, 42
Havingness, 42
Grand Tour, 43
SOP 8-C, 43
Other processes, 43
Advanced Course procedure, 43

15 Apr. 1954 SOP 8 D, 45

JOS Issue 28-G, ca. Apr. 1954 SCIENTOLOGY: A NEW SCIENCE, 46

PAB No. 24, 16 Apr. 1954 CERTAINTY OF EXTERIORIZATION, 47

Mechanisms of communication, 48
Mechanisms of interiorization-exteriorization, 49
Does the preclear know he is exteriorized, 50

PAB No. 25, 30 Apr. 1954 BASIC PROCEDURES, 51

Keynote of any process is the skill of its application, 52

3 May 1954 VIEWPOINT STRAIGHT WIRE, 55

Viewpoint Straight Wire questions, 55
Goal of Viewpoint Straight Wire, 55

PAB No. 28, 11 June 1954 ANSWER TO A LETTER, 61

Letter regarding insanity as a defense and criminal sexual psychopaths, 61
Criminality, 62
Law’s own definition for insanity: the inability to differentiate
right from wrong, 62
Treatment for criminality, 64

15 July 1954 TRAINING, 67

What the student should know, 67
Remembering-forgetting process, 68
Opening Procedure of 8-C, 68
Opening Procedure by Duplication, 68
Remedying Havingness, 68
Spotting Spots in Space, 68

Consideration in the form of Significances, 68
Granting of Beingness, 69
Intensive Procedure, 69

23 July 1954 GROUP AUDITING SESSIONS, 70

PAB No. 32, 7 Aug. 1954 WHY DOCTOR OF DIVINITY?, 72

History of knowledge, 72
Why Scientology allies itself with religion, 73

PAB No. 34, 4 Sept. 1954 OPENING PROCEDURE, SOP-8-C, 76

A Basic Course in Scientology—Part 1
Opening Procedure, SOP-8-C, part (a) auditing commands, 76
Opening Procedure, SOP-8-C, part (b) auditing commands, 77
Opening Procedure, SOP-8-C, part (c) auditing commands, 77

PAB No. 35, 18 Sept. 1954 “WHAT I LEARNED IN TRAINING”, 79

A Basic Course in Scientology—Part 2
Reason for new processes, 79
Getting a person into present time, 80


JOS Issue 36-G, ca. Sept. 1954 DIANETICS AND SCIENTOLOGY ORGANIZATIONS UNITED AGAIN, 83

ca. Sept. 1954 FIGHTING PROCESS, 85

Techniques, Dianetics, 85

PAB No. 36, 1 Oct. 1954 THE USE OF SCIENTOLOGY MATERIALS, 86

A Basic Course in Scientology—Part 3
Materials of Scientology designed to communicate, 86
Dissemination, use a proper gradient, 88
Rules for the use of materials of Scientology, 88

PAB No. 37, 15 Oct. 1954 THE COMMUNICATION LINES OF SCIENTOLOGY, 92

A Basic Course in Scientology—Part 4
Word of mouth communication, 92

ca. Oct. 54 DIANETICS AND SCIENTOLOGY . . . A CRUSADE, 94

Dianetics and Scientology are more a crusade for sanity than a business, 94

PAB No. 38, 29 Oct. 1954 THE AUDITOR’S CODE 1954, 96

A Basic Course in Scientology—Part 5
1. Do not evaluate for the preclear, 96
2. Do not invalidate or correct the preclear’s data, 96
3. Use the processes which improve the preclear’s case, 97
4. Keep all appointments once made, 97
5. Do not process a preclear after ten p.m., 97
6. Do not process a preclear who is improperly fed, 97
7. Do not permit a frequent change of auditors, 98
8. Do not sympathize with the preclear, 98
9. Never permit the preclear to end the session on his own independent
decision, 98


PAB No. 39, 12 Nov. 1954 THE AUDITOR'S CODE 1954 (Concluded), 99

A Basic Course in Scientology—Part 5 (Concluded)
10. Never walk off from a preclear during a session, 99
11. Never get angry with a preclear, 99
12. Always reduce every communication lag encountered by continued use of the same question or process, 99
13. Always continue a process as long as it produces change, and no longer, 99
14. Be willing to grant beingness to the preclear, 100
15. Never mix the processes of Scientology with those of other practices, 100

JOS Issue 40-G, ca. Nov. 1954 VALIDATION OF SCIENTOLOGY, 102

PAB No. 40, 26 Nov. 1954 THE CODE OF HONOUR, 104

A Basic Course in Scientology—Part 6

Foundation Bulletins Vol. 1, No. 3, Dec. 1954 ACCENT ON ABILITY, 106

New trend takes form, 106
Two sides to dynamics: aberration and psychosomatic illness, and ability, 109

JOS Issue 41-G, ca. Dec. 1954 IS IT POSSIBLE TO BE HAPPY?, 111

PAB No. 41, 10 Dec. 1954 THE CODE OF A SCIENTOLOGIST, 115

A Basic Course in Scientology—Part 7
Code of a Scientologist, 1954, 116

PAB No. 42, 24 Dec. 1954 SIX BASIC PROCESSES, 118

Two-way Communication, 118
Elementary Straightwire, 118
Opening Procedure of 8-C, 119
Opening Procedure by Duplication, 119
Remedy of Havingness, 119
Spotting Spots, 119
Precision definition of communication lag, 119
Auditor willingness to duplicate, 121

PAB No. 43, 7 Jan. 1955 PLOTTING THE PRECLEAR ON THE
TONE SCALE, 128

Preclear's position on the Tone Scale established by communication lag, 128
Communication lag, what it tells you, 129
Chart of processes, where they are on the ARC Tone Scale, 131


JOS Issue 43-G, ca. Jan. 1955 PHOENIX CLINIC, 133

Hubbard Certified Auditor certificate, 135
Advanced Clinical Course units, 135

PAB No. 44, 21 Jan. 1955 TWO-WAY COMMUNICATION IN ACTION, 136

Communication formula, 136
Communication is part of the triangle of affinity, reality and communication, 136
Knowingness, higher than ARC, 136
Thetan, behaving like mest, 137
Chart of processes, where they are on the ARC Tone Scale, 138

PAB No. 45, 4 Feb. 1955 MIMICRY, 140

PAB No. 46, 18 Feb. 1955 STRAIGHT WIRE, 142

Term "straight wire" itself is meant to describe the imaginary straight line between cause and effect, 142
Basic confusion of a preclear, 143
Commands of Elementary Straight Wire, 144

PAB No. 47, 4 Mar. 1955 OPENING PROCEDURE 8-C, 146

Three parts to Opening Procedure of 8-C, 146
Benefits from Opening Procedure of 8-C, 147
Basic theory of Opening Procedure of 8-C, 147

Ability Major 1, ca. Mar. 1955 THE SCIENTOLOGIST—A MANUAL ON THE DISSEMINATION OF MATERIAL, 151

Purposes of organization, 151
A description of Scientology, 152
Dissemination of material, 153
Public word-of-mouth, the ideal scene, 155
Scientologists to the general public, 158
Member HASI to member HASI, 161
Trained Scientologist to a member of the HASI, 161
Member of the HASI to a preclear, 161
Trained Scientologist to preclear, 161
Trained Scientologist to trained Scientologist, 162
HASI to the membership, 164
HASI to trained Scientologist, 169
HASI to the general public, 169
Best dissemination is good auditing results, 171

PAB No. 48, 18 Mar. 1955 OPENING PROCEDURE BY DUPLICATION, 172

Prerequisites to Op Pro by Dup, 172
How to run Op Pro by Dup, 173
R2—17, 173

Ability Minor 3, ca. Apr. 1955 THE WAY RON WORKS, 175

PAB No. 49, 1 Apr. 1955 THE REMEDY OF HAVINGNESS, 176

Thetan creates mest to have a game, 176
Thetan cuts down knowingness to have a game, 176
Game conditions, 177
Havingness processes, 177


PAB No. 50, 15 Apr. 1955 REMEDY OF HAVINGNESS—THE PROCESS, 180

Remedy of Havingness for Exteriorization, 181
Havingness, use of “push” instead of “pull”, 182
Havingness, reason it drops, 182
Havingness process, End of Cycle Processing, 184

PAB No. 51, 29 Apr. 1955 SPOTTING SPOTS, 188

How to run Spotting Spots, 188
“Hello” and “Okay”, 188
Grand Tour process, an example, 189

Ability Minor 4, ca. May 1955 THE SCALE OF AWARENESS, 191

Communication and the Scale of Awareness, 191
Think a Thought, a process, 193
Separating universes, 193

PAB No. 52, 13 May 1955 AUDITING THE “WHOLE TRACK”, 195

Pc is interiorized into universe, 196

PAB No. 53, 27 May 1955 OWNERSHIP, 198

Ron’s research, 198
Ownership of Scientology, 199

PAB No. 54, 10 June 1955 REALITY LEVEL OF PRECLEAR, 205
Acknowledgment of the preclear, 205
“Think a thought” “Receive a thought”, a process, 206

Ability Minor 5, ca. June 1955 THE HOPE OF MAN, 209

Survival of spirit, 209
Scientology, a religion, 210
Physical sciences and religion, 211
Difference between good and bad control, 213
Thought, the most senior thing there is, 215

Ability Major 4, 1 July 1955 STRAIGHT WIRE—A MANUAL OF OPERATION, 216

How to run modern Straight Wire, 216
The history of Straight Wire, 219
The theory of Straight Wire, 222
Theory of memory, 222
Description of valence, 224
Straight Wire and present time, 227
Straight Wire and pictures, 228
Psychoanalysis and Straight Wire, 232
How to do Straight Wire, 234
Scientology and Straight Wire, 237


PAB No. 56, 8 July 1955 AXIOM 51 AND COMMUNICATION PROCESSING, 240

“Give me some things you could say to ______ “
“Give me some things ______ could say to you”, a process, 241

Ability Minor 6, ca. July 1955 THE ADVENTURE OF SCIENTOLOGY, 244

Certainty Vol. 2, No. 8, ca. Aug. 1955 AN IDEA VERSUS WAR, 245

Ability Major 5, ca. Aug. 1955 WITH A-R-C, 246

Interrelationship of life, understanding and ARC, 246
Affinity-reality-communication, understanding—interrelationship, 247

5 Aug. 1955 “OLD CUFF” FROM PAB 58, 248

Ability Major 6, ca. Sept. 1955 BASIC PROCESSES, 249

Find a pc, 250
Establish the existence of the auditor, 250
Establish the existence of a session: Locational Processing, 250
Two-way communication recalling pc’s secrets, 250
Discuss present time problem, if any, 250
Hello’s and OK’s to Pictures, 250
Splitting Universes, 250
Problems and Solutions (R2—20), 250
Think a Thought, 250
Consequences, 25 1
Elementary Straight Wire (above 1.0), 251
Straight Wire on secrets, knowingness, 251
Opening Procedure of 8-C (A, B, C) (above 1.9), 251
Opening Procedure by Duplication (above 2.6), 251
Remedy Havingness (above 3.1), 252
Spotting Spots in Space (above 3.6), 252
Route One: 5, 6, 7 (for exteriorized pc), 253
What the HAA should be conversant with, 253
Cognition, 254
Granting of beingness, 255
Acknowledgement, 255

PAB No. 60, 2 Sept. 1955 “ANYTHING, EVERYTHING, NOTHING”, 256

LRH session, case who answers with generalities, 256
Two things which will create change, 258

Ability Issue 14, ca. Sept. 1955 START THAT PRACTICE!, 261

Advertising auditing as “personal relations”, 261
Auditor as minister, 262

PAB No. 61, 16 Sept. 1955 SELLING, 264

Selling Scientology services, 264
Disseminate with “something can be done about it”, 264
Disseminating auditing, 265


PAB No. 62, 30 Sept. 1955 PSYCHIATRISTS, 267

Attack from psychiatrists, 267
Scientology is not political, 268
Auditors, don’t work with the severely ill or insane, 268

PAB No. 63, 14 Oct. 1955 PLAYING THE GAME, 272

Differentiation and identification, 272
Game conditions, 273

Operational Bulletin No. 1, 20 Oct. 1955, 275

Six Levels of Processing, auditing commands 1955, 275
Rudiments of auditing, 275
Starting a session, 275
Level One, 275
Locational Processing, 275
Separateness, 275
Separateness from People, 275
Waterloo Station, 275
Level Two, 276
Level Three: this is a subjective level, 276
Creative Processing, 277
Definition Processing, 277
Invention Processing, 277
Engram Running, 277
Modified Gita, 277
Level Four, Opening Procedure 8-C, 277
Level Five, Opening Procedure by Duplication First Postulate, 277
Level Six, Remedy of Havingness and Spotting Spots, 278

PAB No. 64, 28 Oct. 1955 FIRST POSTULATE, 279

Native state of a thetan, insisted on all the way down scale, 279
8-C, why it works, 280
Auditor can assume that pc is in a native state, 281

Certainty Vol. 2, No. II, ca. Nov. 1955 THE SIX LEVELS OF PROCESSlNG, 282

Basic theory, 282
Rudiments of auditing, 283
Starting a session, 283
Level One, 283
Locational Processing, 283
Separateness, 283
Separateness from People, 283
Waterloo Station (First Postulate Union Station), 284
Level Two, 284
Level Three: this is the subjective level, 284
Definition Processing, 284
Invention Processing, 284
Engram Running, 284
Modified Gita, 285
Level Four, Opening Procedure 8-C, 285

Level Five, Opening Procedure by Duplication by First Postulate, 285
Level Six, Remedy of Havingness and Spotting Spots, 285


PAB No. 65, 11 Nov. 1955 FROM A LECTURE BY L. RON HUBBARD ON MEST PROCESSING, JULY 7, 1951, 287

Self-determinism goes down as a person goes down the Tone Scale, 287

Operational Bulletin No. 4, 11 Nov. 1955 SIX LEVELS OF PROCESSING —ISSUE 5, 289

Level One, Rudiments, 289
Level Two, Locational and Not-Know Processes, 289
Level Three, Decisional Processing, 290
Level Four, Opening Procedure by Duplication, 290
Level Five, Remedy of Communication Scarcity, 291
Level Six, Remedy of Havingness and Spotting Spots in Space, 291

Ability Issue 16, ca. Nov. 1955 WHAT ARE YOU GOING TO DO ABOUT IT?, 292

Atomic bomb, 292
Fourth dynamic responsibility, 292

Operational Bulletin No. 5, ca. Nov. 1955, 294

“Problems of Comparable Magnitude” process, how to run, 295
Exteriorization during a process, how to handle, 295
Two-way comm, what it is, 296
Attitude toward psychiatry, 296

PAB No. 66, 25 Nov. 1955 FIRST, SECOND, THIRD AND FOURTH POSTULATES, 297

Forget and Remember, relationship to each other, 298
Principle of mystery, 299

Ability Issue 18, ca. Nov. 1955 LETTER TO ABILITY EDITOR, 301

Ron’s activities in Britain, 1955, 301

Operational Bulletin No. 6, ca. Nov. 1955 PROCESSING FUTURES, 303

Substituting for the present time problem, 303
Adding creativeness to spotting, 304
Organization, operational stabilities, 305
How to send tapes airmail, 306

Operational Bulletin No. 7, 6 Dec. 1955, 307

Purpose of Central Org, 307
Process stabilities, 308

Operational Bulletin No. 8, 13 Dec. 1955, 309

Handling press, 309
Brainwashing manual, “Psychopolitics”, 309


Operational Bulletin No. 9, 19 Dec. 1955, 311

Good press on Scientology, 311
Brainwashing manual, history, 312
Washington Congress, 313
Newest processes, 313
New auditing style, 314
Reports from Washington, 314

PAB No. 68, 23 Dec. 1955 FIRST AND SECOND POSTULATE, 316

Remember and Forget, 316
Know and Not-Know, 316

Operational Bulletin No. 10, 28 Dec. 1955 THE MANAGEMENT AND ACTIVITIES OF SCIENTOLOGY ORGANIZATIONS, 318

Operational Bulletin No. 11, 3 Jan. 1956, 320

Book distribution and selling, 320
Six Levels of Processing Issue 7, 321

PAB No. 69, 6 Jan. 1956 SIX LEVELS OF PROCESSING Issue 7, 322

Level One: this is what gets the case moving, 322
Problems, chronic somatics, 322
Steps of Level One, 323
Level Two: this is what changes the Scientometric Tests, 324
Waterloo Station, 324
Level Three: this is what exteriorizes them, 324
Decisional Processing, 324
Level Four: this builds back their willingness to live, 325
Opening Procedure by Duplication, 325
Level Five: this makes them able to play games, 325
Remedy of Communication Scarcity, 325
Level Six: this exercises their exteriorization and stabilizes, 326
Remedy of Havingness and Spotting Spots in Space, 326

Operational Bulletin No. 12, 10 Jan. 1956 AN EXPERIMENTAL ARRANGEMENT OF LEVEL ONE, 327

Process, flattening and unflattening, 328
Brainwashing books recalled, 329

Operational Bulletin No. 13, 17 Jan. 1956, 330

Purpose of Operational Bulletins, 330
Distribution of Operational Bulletins, 330
Effort Processing, to handle serious illness, 331
Drama of Dianetic auditing, 332
When to run Havingness, 334
Havingness, Repair of vs. Remedy of, 335
Don’t neglect Havingness Processes, 336


Operational Bulletin No. 13 Appendix I, 17 Jan. 1956 SCIENTOLOGY SCHOOLS CURRICULUM, 339

The indoctrination week, 340
Hubbard Certified Auditor and Hubbard Professional Auditor Courses, 342
Bachelor of Scientology and Hubbard Advanced Auditor classes, 345
The Advanced Clinical Course, 346

Operational Bulletin No. 14, 24 Jan. 1956, 348

The only ones, 348
Comparison of results, 348
Earliest findings on Havingness, 349
Utilization of Operational Bulletins, 350
Three methods of dissemination, 351
“I will talk to anyone”, 352
Illness researches, 353
Casualty contact, 3 54

25 Jan. 1956 RECENT REPORTS ON PRECLEARS, 356

Operational Bulletin No. 15, 31 Jan. 1956, 357

Scientology creates a changed new world, 357
Ad interim SLP, 3 58
An organizational principle: statistics and results count, 359

Operational Bulletin No. 16, 7 Feb. 1956, 360

“Scientology U.S.”, 360
Change in publications, 360
Sacrifices, 361
SSBS, Silver Spring Business Service, 362
Church of Scientology Funeral Service, 363

Operational Bulletin No. 17, 14 Feb. 1956, 366

Processing results, 366
Games Processing, 366
Definitions and elements of Games Processing, 367
Reason for memberships, 367
Basic course for auditors, 368

PAB No. 72, 21 Feb. 1956 THE IMPORTANCE OF HAVINGNESS, 371

How to run Havingness, 371
Repair of Havingness vs. Remedy of Havingness, 372
Sacrifices, 374
Chronic somatics, 375

PAB No. 74, 6 Mar. 1956 OFFICE IN IRELAND, 376

The atomic fizzle, 378
Basic course material, 382

Training cost change, 383
Books in progress, 384

PAB No. 78, 3 Apr. 1956 ADMINISTRATION, 386

How to obtain org stability, 387

PAB No. 79,10 Apr. 1956 THE OPEN CHANNEL, 389

Psychology, an agreement point in society, 390
Basic course material, 391
What LRH thinks of auditors, 393

PAB No. 80,17 Apr. 1956 SCIENTOLOGY’S MOST WORKABLE PROCESS, 395

Confusions of earlier philosophies, 395
Terrible Trio, 396
Bottom rung of Dianetics found, 397

PAB No. 81, 24 Apr. 1956 PURPOSE, 400

Purpose of PABs, 400
Fourth dynamic responsibility, 400

PAB No. 82, 1 May 1956 BASIC PRINCIPLES, 404

Scientology Translator’s Edition—Part 1
What is Scientology, 405
Basic principles, 407
The cycle of action, 407

PAB No. 83, 8 May 1956 THE CONDITIONS OF EXISTENCE, 410

Scientology Translator’s Edition—Part 2
Condition of being, 410
Condition of doing, 410
Condition of having or havingness, 410
Eight dynamics, 411
A-R-C triangle, 412
Interrelationship of the A-R-C triangle, 413
Some important auditing don’ts, 414
Can’t have processes, 415

8 May 1956 TEST RESULTS, 417

PAB No. 84, 15 May 1956 THE REASON WHY, 421

Scientology Translator’s Edition—Part 3
Elements of games applied to life, 421
Barriers, how they can trap a man, 423
A person begins to suffer from problems when he does not have enough of them, 424 Scientology Wedding Ceremony, 425


PAB No. 85, 22 May 1956 THE PARTS OF MAN, 428

Scientology Translator’s Edition—Part 4
Spirit, 428
What people see when they close their eyes, 429
Mind, three main divisions—analytical, reactive and somatic mind, 429
Physical body, 431
Spiritual destiny, the individual comes back, 433

PAB No. 86, 29 May 1956 CAUSATION AND KNOWLEDGE, 435

Scientology Translator’s Edition—Part 5
Axioms of Scientology, 1-10, explained, 435
Three classes of universes—physical universe, other fellow’s universe,
one’s own universe, 436
Know and not-know, 440
The goal of Scientology, 440

PAB No. 87, 5 June 1956 SCIENTOLOGY PROCESSING, 441

Scientology Translator’s Edition—Part 6
The Auditor’s Code, 442
The Code of a Scientologist, 442
The conditions of auditing, 443
How to run Trio—Havingness Process, 444

PAB No. 88, 12 June 1956 THE CONDITIONS OF AUDITING, 446

Scientology Translator’s Edition—Part 7
Things which one must avoid in auditing, 448
Significances, 448
Two-way communication, 449
Too many processes, 449
Failure to handle the present time problem, 449
Unconsciousness, “dopiness” or agitation on the part of the preclear, 449
The future of Scientology, 450

PAB No. 89, 19 June 1956 SCIENTOLOGY—REVISION OF TRANSLATOR’S EDITION, 452

Current processes, released to HGC staff, 454
Auditing don’ts, 455

PAB No. 90, 26 June 1956 THE ORGANIZATIONS OF DIANETICS AND SCIENTOLOGY, 456

History of organizations, 458

PAB No. 91, 3 July 1956 THE ANATOMY OF FAILURE, 462

How to run Rising Scale Processing, 463

PAB No. 92, 10 July 1956 A CRITIQUE OF PSYCHOANALYSIS, 465

Psychoanalysis, its failings and dangers, 466
Over-communication, 467

Recalling, 467
Transference, 468
Concentration on sex, 469
Reading of sexual significances into each and every action, 470

14 July 1956 FIVE TYPES OF VALENCES, 471

1. Own valence (identity), 471
2. Body valence (human identity), 471
3. Exchanged valence (direct assumption of another valence), 471
4. Attention valence (valence assumed to get attention from another), 471
5. Synthetic valence (valence described to pc and assumed), 471

20 July 1956 HOW TO REALLY SPLIT A VALENCE, 472

22 July 1956 TECHNICAL BULLETIN, 473

Formula for handling vacuums, 473

PAB No. 93, 24 July 1956 A CRITIQUE OF PSYCHOANALYSIS Continued, 475

Invalidation, 476
Failure to observe, 476
A true and proper scientific method, steps described, 477
Hypnotism, 478
Abandonment of cases, 479
Failure to validate by testing, 479
Auditing don’ts, 480
Importance of delivering Dianetics and Scientology, 481
Influence of psychoanalysis, psychology and psychiatry, 481

13 August 1956 SCIENTOLOGY PROCESS CHART, 483

Processes on the Know—Mystery Scale, 483
Know—Not Know, 483
Look (perceive), 483
Emotion, 483
Effort, 483
Think, 483
Symbols, 483
Eat, 484
Sex, 484
Mystery, 484

PAB No. 94, 15 Aug. 1956 THE ANATOMY OF TRAPS, 485

Desire for a game, 485
Denied havingness, 486

ca. Aug. 1956 THE GOAL OF AUDITORS, 487

HCO B 20 Aug. 1956 HGC PROCEDURE OF AUG. 20, 488

Processing do’s and don’ts, 489


21 Aug. 1956 SUMMARY OF INTENSIVES SINCE JUNE, 490

Processes that reduce havingness, 490

Ability Issue 34, ca. Aug. 1956 HAVINGNESS, 491

Communication can make space, 492
Secondary universes, 493
There can’t be enough havingness, 495
The only reason a person can get trapped is that he can’t have traps, 496
Subject of the engram is the subject of “can’t have”, 497
Havingness scale, 498
Auditing the Havingness scale, 499
Absence of barriers is the trouble with a preclear when a preclear is
having trouble, 499
Auditing Havingness, 500
How to handle can’t have barriers, 501
Scarcity, 501
Physical universe remedy, 502

Briefing Bulletin 31 Aug. 1956 GAMES CONGRESS, SHOREHAM HOTEL, 503

Games condition list, most processable, 503
No-games condition list, most to be avoided, 503
Best processes, 504
Vacuums, 504
Restimulation, 505
How to separate valences, 505

PAB No. 95, 1 Sept. 1956 VALENCES, 507

Synthetic valence, 507
Keynote of synthetic valences, 508

12 Sept. 1956 THE SUMMARY OF A BULLETIN FROM THE ACADEMY IN WASHINGTON, D.C., CONCERNING TRAINING, 509

Free Course, 509
Advanced Course, 509
Elementary Scientologist, 509
Hubbard Certified Auditor, 510
Hubbard Advanced Auditor (B.Scn.), 510
Hubbard Graduate Auditor (D.Scn.), 510
Organizational internship, 510

PAB No. 96, 15 Sept. 1956 JUSTICE, 514

Justice, what it is, 514

20 Sept. 1956 HCO PROCESSING SHEET, 516

Havingness, 516
Difference between terminals and conditions, 516
Solids, 5 16

Observation of objects, 516
Alternate commands, how to run, 516
Stop processes, 517
Connectedness, 517
Stop-C-S, 517

HCO B 24 Sept. 1956 ORGANIZATIONAL INDOCTRINATION, 519

Reason for post clearing, 519

Org. Bulletin 26 Sept. 1956 PROCEDURE FOR PUTTING AUDITORS ON STAFF, 519

PAB No. 97, 1 Oct. 1956 START—CHANGE—STOP, 521

Start, change, and stop is the anatomy of control, 521
How to run Start—Change—Stop, 522

HCO B 4 Oct. 1956 HIGH SCHOOL INDOCTRINATION, 524

17 Oct. 1956 RECALL PROCESSES AND CONFRONTINGNESS, 526

PAB No. 98, 15 Oct. 1956 CREATIVE PROCESSES, MOTIONS, STOPS AND PERCEPTIONS, 528

Facsimiles, why they float, 528
How to get out of a stuck point, 529

HCO B 15 Oct. 1956 SUMMARY RESEARCH PROJECT, 531

Ability Issue 36, ca. Oct. 1956 RANDOMITY AND AUTOMATICITY, 533

Vocabularies of science, 533
Randomity, 535
Minus randomity, 537
Plus randomity, 537
Necessity level, 540
Tolerance for speed, 541
Automaticity, 541
Toleration of random action, 542

HCO B 26 Oct. 1956 HPA-HCA TRAINING PROCESSES, 545

Confront a Preclear, 545
ARC Straightwire, 545
Subjective Havingness, 545
8-C, 545
Opening Procedure by Duplication, 545
Over and Under on the Bank, 545
Keeping Things from Going Away, 545
Terrible Trio, 545

PAB No. 99, 1 Nov. 1956 FACSIMILES & SOLIDS, 546

Types of blackness, 547
Types of bank, 548


HCO B 15 Nov. 1956 HGC PRECLEAR COMPLAINTS, 549

PAB No. 100, 15 Nov. 1956 THE AUDITING OF SOLIDS, 550

Trio, 551

HCO Training Bulletin 30 Nov. 1956 SLP 8, 553

Twenty-four steps of Six Levels of Processing—Issue 8, 553

PAB No. 101, 1 Dec. 1956 GAMES CONDITIONS THEORY, 556

Games condition list, most processable, 556
No-games condition list, most to be avoided, 556

HCO B 3 Dec. 1956 B.SCN.—H.A.A. TECHNIQUES, 559

Havingness Scale, 559

PAB No. 102,15 Dec. 1956 A CASE REPORT—COMMENTS AND INFORMATION ON BACK OF APA SHEET, 560




P.A.B. No. 17
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR’S BULLETIN

From L. RON HUBBARD

Via Hubbard Communications Office
163 Holland Park Avenue, London W.11
__________________________________________________________________________________

[1954, ca. mid-January]

FUTURE PROCESSING


There is a basic rule which is covered in the first book and which was more specifically delineated by Fellow of Scientology Dick Halpern, that the psychotic is concerned with the past, the neurotic is barely able to keep up with the present, and the sane, as we jokingly called homo sapiens in 1950, are concerned with the future.

This division could be more specifically made by realizing that the neurotic is barely able to confront the present but that the very, very sane confront the present entirely and have very little concern for the future, being competent enough in handling the present to let the future take care of itself. Looking into the past and looking into the extreme future alike are efforts to avoid present time and efforts to look elsewhere than at something.

You have known people who would reply on an entirely different subject when asked about anything; when consulted concerning the weather, they would reply about a meteorologist. The inability to look at something becomes first manifest by thinking before looking; and then the actual target at which one should be looking is more and more avoided until it is hidden entirely in a mix-up of complications comparable to a government bureau. This is the mechanism of the post-hypnotic suggestion as covered in Book 1.

Here basically we have people’s fear of things exploding. Any and every serious injury which has left the preclear hung up on the time track appeared to him at the time as an explosion and actually might have contained an electrical discharge. You will find preclears with ailing stomachs who will trace the moment when they began to have stomach trouble to the feeling that something had exploded in their stomachs. Thereafter they will be trying to keep the explosion from happening again and will avoid looking at the explosion. Running cycles of explosions as covered in PAB No. 12 resolves this condition. It permits people to look straight at things again without fear. People who wear glasses and, indeed, people who are blind, cannot look straight at something but must either avoid looking at it or not look at it at all.

The avoidance of reality is merely an avoidance of present time. Theta could be considered to be a sort of scanner which is motionless. It is not moving. The MEST universe is changing and interchanging, and the products and forms constructed and organized or regulated by theta change, and this change is in itself time. Time depends mainly upon the creation of new space in the MEST universe. It could be hazarded that new space is created in the MEST universe at the rate of l/c,* which is to say that each new motion of a particle is a creation of new space. What is happening is that the

[ * In physics “c” represents the velocity of light in a vacuum: approximately 186,000 miles or 299,793 kilometers per second.]

Copyright (©) 1954 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.

particle seems to be moving in space and the space is motionless. Space disappears at the rate of l/c and new space is created at this rate. This gives to particles apparent motion. The boys in nuclear physics will be discovering this in a couple of hundred years but there is no harm in giving a tip-off of it here. This is of no great concern to the auditor but might clarify for him the apparent change of theta itself. If theta itself is apparently changing, remember that it is visible only because particles change. The theta is not moving; it is a true static.

An individual who will not look at the MEST universe must look either ahead of it into the future or behind it into the past. One of the reasons he does this is because there is insufficient action in the present to begin with; and then this thirst for action develops into an inability to have action and he decides that all must be maintained in a constant state and he seeks to prevent action. This also applies to pain. People who are somewhat out of present time have a horrible dread of pain, and people who are truly out of present time—as in a psychotic state—have a revulsion towards pain which could not be described. A person entirely within present time is not much concerned with pain and even might create some for the sake of randomity. Although people have hard words for the sadist, it must be remarked that the sadist rarely permits any pain to happen to himself.

The avoidance of work is one of the best indicators of a decayed state on the part of a personality. There are two common denominators to all aberrated personalities; one of these is a horror of work and the other is a horror of pain. People only mildly out of present time, which is to say, people who are categorized as sane, have already started to apologize about work in that they work toward an end reward and no longer consider that the output of effort itself and the accomplishment of things is sufficient reward in itself—thus the whole network of gratitude or admiration as necessary pay for energy put forth. The parental demand for gratitude is often reflected in a severely aberrated preclear who is given to feel he can never repay the enormous favors conferred on him by being worked for by his parents. Actually, they need not be paid; for, flatly, if it was not sufficient reward to do the work of raising him, they are beyond being paid; in other words, they could not accept pay.

Taking the very, very sane person in present time, one would mark a decline of his sanity by a shift from an interest in present time to an overwhelming interest in the future, which would decline into considerable planning for the future in order to avoid bad things happening in it, to, finally, a shunning of the future because of painful incidents, to a shuddering and tenuous hold on present time, and then an avoidance of both the future and present time and a shift into the past. This last would be a psychotic state and is, indeed, the definition of a psychotic state in Scientology.

An extremely effective remedy for a person whose concern about the future is great is the application of Creative Processing in brackets, having him mock up repeatedly and in great quantities, as in PAB No. 8, horrible things happening to himself, to others, and others making horrible things happen to others, all in the future. One would find out what this person had originally worked toward in the future, and then would discover its decline. One would then have horrible things mocked up to make the goal impossible and unreachable. In the case of a mechanic, one would have him mock up being fired, being mangled by the machinery, being left by his wife and children because he was only a mechanic, being shunned by the factory, making terrible mistakes which brought death to his fellow workers, having other people have similar things happening to them, and other people making other people undergo similar future experiences.

One holds on to things in the past on the postulate that they must not happen in the future. This sticks the person in the past. This is, in essence, the whole goal of education and experience. One is trying to instill into somebody sufficient fear of the

future in order to cause him to be cautious. This, of course, holds the individual on the track.

The ultimate failure, of course, is death, and an auditor will be surprised how avidly a preclear will mock up his own death, death for members of the family now living, and how rapidly this will bring into view grief charges on people who are already dead. But one should not merely have the preclear mock himself up dead; one should have him dying several varieties of deaths; and then, of course, being put into a coffin, stuck in the body and unable to get out and lying there in a mouldering or formaldehyded corpse for aeons and aeons and never escaping. Edgar Allan Poe, by the way, is a wonderful source of such mock-ups.

This method of processing the future can be combined with SSSA.

Inaction and indecision in the present is because of fear of consequences of the future. Once one has made the preclear mock up these consequences in quantity, he can more comfortably face present time.

L. RON HUBBARD

3RD AMERICAN ADVANCED CLINICAL COURSE LECTURES
Phoenix, Arizona
4 January—12 February 1954

L. Ron Hubbard gave the following lectures to the twenty-two student auditors attending the 3rd American Advanced Clinical Course (3rd ACC) at Phoenix, Arizona, from January 4th through February 12th, 1954. Included here are his lectures on SOP-80 (O.T.).

* 5401C04 3ACC-1 Introduction to 3rd ACC
5401C04 3ACC-2 Perception and Ownership
** 5401C05 3ACC-3 Communication and Not Over-instructing the Pc
* 5401C05 3ACC-4 Boredom, Pace of Living, Truth
5401C05 3ACC-5 Symbols
** 5401C06 3ACC-6A Symbols and a Group Processing Demo
** 5401C06 3ACC-6B Symbols and a Group Processing Demo (cont.)
5401C06 3ACC-7 Processing Demo: Automaticity
** 5401C07 3ACC-8 Communication
* 5401C07 3ACC-9 Anchor Points, Flows
5401C08 3ACC-10 Exteriorization from Masses
5401C11 3ACC-11 Exteriorization from Masses (cont.)
5401C11 3ACC-12 Exteriorization, Theory & Demo
* 5401C11 3ACC-13 Exteriorization Demo
5401C12 3ACC-14 Exteriorization and Motion
* 5401C12 3ACC-15 Exteriorization, Lecture & Demo
* 5401C12 3ACC-15 Spl Special Message to London College of Dianeticists
and Scientologists
5401C12 3ACC-16 Exteriorization, Demo on Group
5401C12 3ACC-17 Machines, Demonstration
5401C13 3ACC-18 Competence of Prediction, Demo
5401C13 3ACC-19 Competence of Prediction, Demo (cont.)
5401C13 3ACC-20 Exteriorization : Step I, Procedure
5401C14 3ACC-21 Labels: I n Society and Preclears
5401C14 3ACC-22 Labels: Beingness and Justice
5401C14 3ACC-23 Labels: Beingness and Justice (cont.)
** 5401C15 3ACC-24 Present Time, Self Analysis
** 5401C15 3ACC-25 Present Time (cont.)
5401C15 3ACC-26 Present Time (cont.) & Demo
5401C18 3ACC-27 Time: Barrier
5401C18 3ACC-28 Time: Basic Procession
5401C18 3ACC-29 Time: Sense, Particles, Survival Place
5401C19 3ACC-30 Summary of Course to Date
5401C19 3ACC-31 Exteriorization: Demonstration
** 5401C19 3ACC-32 Comm by Emotion: Flows, Ridges

5401C20 3ACC-33 E-Meter, Use of
5401C20 3ACC-34 Audio (Beep) Meter Demonstration
** 5401C20 3ACC-35 Exteriorization, Communication
* 5401C21 3ACC-36 Livingness Processing Series
5401C21 3ACC-37 Livingness Processing Series (Dyingness)
* 5401C22 3ACC-38 Livingness Processing Series (Machinery)
* 5401C22 3ACC-39 Livingness Processing Series (Demo)
* 5401C25 3ACC-40 Goals of 8-0 (O.T.), Abilities
* 5401C25 3ACC-41 Basic Data on 8-0 (O.T.)
** 5401C26 3ACC-42 Exteriorization, Knowingness, Reality
* 5401C26 3ACC-42A Instruction, Simplicity
* 5401C27 3ACC-43 O.T., Inversion: Courage and Mobility
* 5401C28 3ACC-44 Exteriorization: Courage and Serenity
* 5401C28 3ACC-45 Courage Processing
* 5401C29 3ACC-46 Exteriorization, Stuck Flows
* 5401C29 3ACC-47 Evaluating Cases
* 5402C01 3ACC-48 Exteriorization, Taking Direction
5402C01 3ACC-49 Processing Havingness Lecture
* 5402C02 3ACC-50 Havingness Series (cont.)
* 5402C02 3ACC-51 Havingness Series(cont.): Comm Lines
* 5402C03 3ACC-52 Havingness Series (cont.): Ownership
* 5402C03 3ACC-53 Repairing a Case & Demo
* 5402C04 3ACC-54 Review on Havingness & Demo
* 5402C04 3ACC-55 Certainty: Maybes, Problems, Entrance
5402C05 3ACC-56 Endowment of Livingness
5402C05 3ACC-57 Group Processing on Certainty, 8 Dynamics
* 5402C08 3ACC-58 Summary of Course Data & Machinery
* 5402C08 3ACC-59 Group Processing, Automaticities
* 5402C09 3ACC-60 Auditing Groups
* 5402C09 3ACC-61 Group Processing on Class: Barriers
* 5402C09 3ACC-62 Short Discussion & Group Processing Demo
* 5402C10 3ACC-63 Group Processing on Class: Being MEST
* 5402C10 3ACC-64 Group Processing on Class: Black/White
* 5402C10 3ACC-65 Group Processing on Class: Being MEST
* 5402C11 3ACC-66 Group Processing on Class: Things to Be
* 5402C11 3ACC-67 Group Processing on Class: Resist Effect
* 5402C11 3ACC-68 Group Processing: Exterior
* 5402C11 3ACC-69 Group Processing on Class: Sound
5402C12 3ACC-70 Group Processing on Class: Balance
5402C12 3ACC-71 Group Processing on Class: Time

T H E J O U R N A L O F
SCIENTOLOGY

Issue 23-G 15 January 1954

Published by
The Hubbard Association of Scientologists, Inc.
Camden, New Jersey


Man’s Search for His Soul

L. Ron Hubbard

For countless ages past Man has been engaged upon a search.
All thinkers in all ages have contributed their opinion and considerations to it. No scientist, no philosopher, no leader has failed to comment upon it. Billions of men have died for one opinion or another on the subject of this search, and no civilization, mighty or poor, in ancient or in modern times has endured without battle on its account.
The human soul, to the civilized and barbaric alike, has been an endless source of interest, attention, hate or adoration.
To say today that I have found the answer to all riddles of the soul would be inaccurate and presumptuous. To discount what I have come to know and to fail to make that known after observing its benefits would be a sin of omission against Man.
Today, after twenty-five years of inquiry and thought and after three years of public activity wherein I observed the material at work and its results, I can announce that in the knowledge I have developed there must lie the answers to that riddle, to that enigma, to that problem, the human soul, for under my hands and others’ I have seen the best in Man rehabilitated.
For the time since I first made a theta clear I have been, with some reluctance, out beyond any realm of the scientific known and now that I have myself cleared half a hundred, and auditors I have trained many times that, I must face the fact that we have reached that merger point where science and religion meet and we must now cease to pretend to deal with material goals alone.
We cannot deal in the realm of the human soul and ignore the fact. Man has too long pursued this search for its happy culmination here to be muffled by vague and scientific terms.
Religion, not science, has carried this search, this war, through the millenia. Science has all but swallowed Man with an ideology which denies the soul, a symptom of the failure of science in that search.
One cannot now play traitor to the Men of God who sought these ages past to bring Man from the darkness.
We in Scientology belong in the ranks of the seekers after truth, not in the rearguard of the makers of the atom bomb.
However, science too has had its role in these endeavors, and nuclear physics, whatever crime it does against Man, may yet be redeemed by having been of aid in finding for Man the soul of which science had all but deprived him.
No auditor can easily close his eyes to the results he achieves today or fail to see them superior to the materialistic technologies he earlier used. For we can know, with all else we know, that the human soul, freed, is the only effective therapeutic agent that we have. But our goals, no matter our miracles with bodies today, exceed physical health and better men.

Copyright(©) 1954 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.

Scientology is the science of knowing how to know. It has taught us that a Man IS his own immortal soul. And it gives us little choice but to announce to a world, no matter how it receives it, that nuclear physics and religion have joined hands and that we in Scientology perform those miracles for which Man through all his search has hoped.
The individual may hate God or despise priests. He cannot ignore, however, the evidence that he is his own soul. Thus we have resolved our riddle and found the answer simple.

P.A.B. No. 18
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR’S BULLETIN

From L. RON HUBBARD

Via Hubbard Communications Office
163 Holland Park Avenue, London W.11
__________________________________________________________________________________

[1954, ca. late January]

OVERT ACTS


Earlier material in Scientology has adequately covered the phenomenon of the overt act. More is known about this phenomenon today.

The overt act is the manifestation of retaliation. There are two types of overt acts. One is the simple motivator-overt act whereby something is done to the preclear and then the preclear does the same thing to somebody else. There is the second type called the DED-DEDEX wherein the preclear all out of his own imagination has done something to somebody else and then it has been done to him. In both of these one will find the motivator and overt act in a bundle and the DED-DEDEX in a bundle; in other words, the overt act phenomenon is the interlocking of incidents so that both incidents become more or less obscured.

There are several ways of undoing these. One of them is with Acceptance Level Processing. Where a person continues to complain about the things another person has done to him, all the auditor has to do is to discover what the preclear did to that person. In other words, a preclear who complains about A in actuality is suffering from a hunger of overt acts from A. The preclear has done something to A (or thinks he has done something to A) which makes it possible that A will retaliate. The retaliation has not occurred. This leaves the preclear with a hunger of overt acts from A. All the auditor has to do is listen to the complaints the preclear makes about the various people, and then have the preclear mock up as happening to himself these people causing dreadful things to occur to the preclear. This solves the bulk of overt act cases. Remember that the things happening to the preclear have to be done in quantity.

Another method of handling overt acts is to finish off the cycle of action. The preclear has wanted to kill somebody. He has wanted to kill somebody repeatedly and yet has not done so. The matter is obvious. One uses Creative Processing and has the preclear sufficiently and often in large quantities kill this other person. This finishes the cycle of action.

Yet another method is simply to have the preclear, without any further investigation of his case, start mocking up the side of the overt act phenomenon which seems to be missing. If this preclear is complaining about terrible things having happened to him, the auditor can be sure that the preclear has a hunger for things to happen to him. The preclear is started then on a process of simply having things happen to him. All manner of terrible things are made to occur to him at other people’s hands. His father shoots him many times, his mother repeatedly strangles him, his dog bites his head off, his wife runs off with another man and so on and so on until the starvation is remedied.

In the opposite case where the preclear is tremendously pugnacious and very threatening toward all the world, the auditor can be certain that the preclear, by this

Copyright(©) 1954 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.

dramatization in present time, is trying to fill in a stagnation of action against other people. In this case one simply has him kill, maim, blow up and generally dispose of in many ways, shapes and forms, a great many people, particularly those he says he would like to murder.

One must not omit the overt act phenomena concerned with spirits, ghosts and God. People who spend too much time propitiating God are in actuality certain beneath the surface that they deserve a great deal of punishment from that being. People get to such a level of identification with Christ that they will run the Crucifixion complete with somatics and, indeed, there are several instances in history where on the holiday of the Crucifixion persons spontaneously bleed from the “thumbs.”

Where you have an individual going into the valence of another individual, you have the overt act phenomenon so interchanged and mixed up that you are only certain of the fact that the preclear is in the valence of the other person. Handling this overt act phenomenon one would simply create with mock-ups many things happening to the person whose valence has been taken, and then, in reverse, the person whose valence has been taken making many things happen to the preclear. This is run back and forth, back and forth, first with the preclear receiving overt acts, then as the other person receiving overt acts, until the gap between the two personalities widens sufficiently to inhibit further identification. Where you have a preclear solidly in grandmother’s valence, you can be certain there was a lot of trouble between the preclear and grandmother. The way to run this is to have the preclear injuring, maiming and killing grandmother in various ways and then having grandmother injure, maim and otherwise harm the preclear. This is helped out by having grandmother injure others than the preclear and having others than the preclear injure grandmother.

In this manifestation of sudden assumption of valence on the death of an ally, the preclear is certain he is responsible for the death of that ally. He does not know how this can be, but he is certain that it has taken place. An auditor can be certain that the preclear, prior to the death of the ally, actually was guilty of many overt acts towards the ally. The death will not come to view until the auditor has run the preclear doing many things to the ally and the ally doing many things to the preclear as above.

In some of the very difficult cases, the most serious problem is this assumption of another person’s identity in this lifetime. The solution of this affords great relief to the preclear.

In honest truth, the reason the preclear is stuck in the MEST universe is the overt act phenomenon. Space, energy, objects and time have done so many overt acts to the preclear and the preclear actually has done so many overt acts in the opposite direction, that the preclear now considers himself MEST. If you happen to be processing a scientist, be sure to remember this: he is not only studying the significance which immediately followed the explosion (the total of which significance is that there has been an explosion), but is also guilty of a great many activities which he at least thought were detrimental to the MEST universe at large; and the MEST universe in the form of inflicted accidents, explosions and so forth, has done many acts to him. We find these fellows, quite ordinarily, with many physical attributes of the MEST universe; which is to say, impartiality, a rotund body (imitating planets) and in a situation of stopped motion which would do credit to a policeman, or a Federal court judge.

L. RON HUBBARD

T H E J O U R N A L O F
SCIENTOLOGY

Issue 24-G 31 January 1954

Published by
The Hubbard Association of Scientologists, Inc.
Camden, New Jersey


SOP-8-C: The Rehabilitation
of the Human Spirit


Scientology, the science of knowing how to know, has been developed for various applications in the field of human experience.
Where it is utilized by skilled persons to enhance the personal ability and knowledge of others, the recommended process is Standard Operating Procedure 8-C.
SOP-8-C was developed after almost a year of observing SOP-8 in action in other hands than mine, and after observing the frailties and talents of human auditors. SOP-8-C might be called SOP-8 modified for clinical, laboratory and individual human applications.
The goal of this system of operation is to return to the individual his knowledge, skill and knowingness, and to enhance his perception, his reaction time and serenity.
It is entirely incidental that SOP-8-C is effective on “psychosomatic” illness, on human aberration and social difficulties. It is not the intent or purpose of Scientology to repair. The science is a creative science. Despite the fact that human illness, disability and aberration uniformly cease to be because of Scientology, the effect is not intended to be primary and the goal of SOP-8-C is not their remedy. Indeed, if SOP-8-C is used to remedy these only, it fails as a system. SOP-8-C succeeds only when it is addressed toward higher knowingness and beingness—ironically, in using it, human ills vanish only when the auditor concentrates on the goals of the system and neglects the obvious physical disabilities of the preclear.
In that one creates that which one concentrates upon, a treatment of illness which validates it in treatment will always tend to be unsuccessful.
SOP-8-C was the subject of the Camden Indoctrination Course B [2nd American ACC], from November 16 to December 23, as well as the subject of the Phoenix International Congress of December 28, 1953.
Specifically, the use of these processes obtains, when correctly used, without further evaluation for, or indoctrination of the preclear, the knowledge that he is not a body, that he is a creative energy production unit, and demonstrates to him his purposes and abilities.
This energy-space production unit we call a “thetan,” that being a coined word taken from a mathematical symbol, the Greek letter “theta” [ ø ] . This is the preclear. One does not send “one’s thetan” anywhere. One goes as a thetan. When a preclear is detected being in one place and finding “his thetan” in another (“I’m over there”) he is not exteriorized. To be “exteriorized” the preclear must be certain that he is outside his body. An uncertain “exteriorization” requires more work before it becomes an exteriorization.
SOP-8-C brings about a condition designated as “theta clear.” This is a relative, not an absolute term. It means that the person, this thought unit, is clear of his body, his engrams, his facsimiles, but can handle and safely control a body.

Copyright (©) 1954 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.

The state of Operating Thetan is higher than Theta Clear and means that the person does not need a body to communicate or work. It is accomplished with SOP-8-0.
The highest theory of SOP-8-C is that the being is engaged upon a game called Physical Universe. This is a game requiring barriers, which is to say, walls, planets, time and vast distances (which last two are also barriers). In engaging upon this game he has at last become so conscious of barriers that he is limited in his actions and thoughts. He thinks, in the case of homo sapiens, that he is a body (a barrier) hemmed in by vast distances (barriers) and pinned in a time stream (a system of moving barriers) so as to reach only the present. These combined barriers have become so formidable that they are not even well perceived, but from being strong have become unreal to him. The matter is further complicated by “invisible barriers” such as the eyes or glasses.
In actuality, the thetan is a knowingness, total in a cleared state, who yet can create space and time and objects to locate in them. He reduces his knowingness only to have action. Knowingness is reduced by assuming that one cannot know or knows wrongly. Knowingness is reduced by assuming one must be in certain places to perceive and so know, and that one cannot be in certain places.
Space is, but does not have to be, the first barrier of knowingness. With Scientology we have the first definition of space—Space is a viewpoint of dimension. Given a viewpoint and four, eight or more points to view, one has space. Space is a problem of observation, not of physics.
There is no question here of whether space, energy or objects are real. Things are as real as one is certain of their reality. Reality is, here on Earth, agreement as to what is. This does not prevent barriers or time from being formidably real. It does not mean either that space, energy or time are illusions. It is as one knows it is. For one makes, by a process of continuous automatic duplication, all that one perceives. So much for theory-in application this theory obtains results of considerable magnitude in changing beingness.
The thetan is continuously engaged upon cycles of action. The basic cycle of action is “Create, resist effects (survive) and destroy.” This can be stated in various ways: “Create an object, have it resist effects (survive) and then destroy it.” Or, “Create a situation, continue it and change it, and destroy or end it.” When a thetan leaves a cycle which is important to him unfinished, he tends to strive to finish it elsewhere or later in disrelated circumstances. Further, he can become overly concentrated upon creating or persistance (surviving) or upon destroying and so form an unbalanced state of beingness.
Time exists in those things a thetan creates. It is a shift of particles, always making new space, always at an agreed upon rate. A thetan does not change in time, but as he can view particles (objects, spaces, barriers) from many viewpoints, he can consider himself to be in a “time stream,” which he is not. A thetan’s ideas (postulates, commands, beliefs) change; particles change; the thetan does not change either in space or in time.
Just as he is making an effort to do something he cannot help but do—Survive—he is also fighting against doing the only thing he does—sit fixed in one “position.”
The thetan, to produce interest and action, operates as a paradox. He cannot die, so he firmly insists and proves continually that he can die. He never changes location, but only views new locations and constantly lives in horror of being fixed in time and space. Above that, he knows the past and the future and all of the present, and so fights to obscure the past and guess the future.
Less theoretically, the individual who is processed is at first, usually, “in” the body and perceiving with the body’s eyes. When exteriorized (placed “three feet back of his head”) he is actually out of the body and still “in” physical universe space. He can, exteriorized, move about and be in places just as though he had a body, seeing without eyes, hearing without ears, and feeling without fingers—ordinarily better than with these “aids.” This is not like “astral walking” which is done by the individual who “sends a body” or a viewpoint to some other place and perceives with it. A thetan is as much present where he is as if he were there in body. He isn’t “somebody else” than

the preclear moving dimly about. He is the preclear, he is there. At first he may be uncertain as to what he is seeing. This faculty becomes better as his ability to look, hear and feel while exteriorized improves. SOP-8-C improves this perception. Because the body only perceives what the thetan is perceiving anyway, looking, feeling, hearing of the body is also better with SOP-8-C but this is only incidental.
When a thetan believes too thoroughly he is a body, he is generally unhappy, afraid, doubts his own (and validates the body’s) existence and worries about his inabilities. When he is out of the sphere of influence of the body (a very small one) he becomes serene, confident and knowing. He can handle a body better, can act faster, can recall more and do more while exteriorized than he can while in a body.
Society, thirsting for more control of more people, substitutes religion for the spirit, the body for the soul, an identity for the individual and science and data for truth. In this direction lies insanity, increasing slavery, less knowingness, greater scarcity and less society.
Scientology has opened the gates to a better world. It is not a psychotherapy, nor a religion. It is a body of knowledge which, when properly used, gives freedom and truth to the individual.
It could be said that Man exists in a partially hypnotized state. He believes on other-determinism in many things, to his detriment. He will be as well as he is selfdetermined. The processes of Scientology could be described as methods of “unhypnotizing” men to their own freer choice and better life.

THE USE OF SOP-8-C

This process is designed to be administered by one person (the auditor) to another (the preclear).
SOP-8-C is first used step-by-step from Step I on until the person to whom it is addressed knows he is back of his head and no longer in the body. If the preclear is very difficult to exteriorize, the person should be referred to an auditor trained at the HAS Clinical Center (for there are special methods of exteriorization for difficult cases which are contained in but are not at once visible in SOP-8-C). The first three steps are exteriorization steps. They should be repeated over and over until certain exteriorization takes place.
The auditor can go through the first steps many times one after the other with the preclear until exteriorization occurs. Doing Steps IV to VII on a person not exteriorized should be minimized. (Earlier SOPs used all seven steps for exteriorization, a practice not followed in SOP-8-C, where only the first three steps are used.)
When the preclear has exteriorized one then begins again with Step I and continues to Step VII, in order, with the preclear exteriorized. Here in SOP-8-C the emphasis is upon an exteriorized thetan. When the auditor has taken the exteriorized preclear thoroughly, and correctly, through Steps I to VII at least twice, one has then what may be considered a theta clear.
To repeat, one uses SOP-8-C Steps I to III in that order. On one of these, the first time through, the majority of people exteriorize with certainty. As soon as exteriorization takes place, the auditor starts with Step I again, does it thoroughly on the exteriorized preclear, then the auditor applies Step II thoroughly and so on until all seven are done.
The auditor knows when the preclear exteriorizes by asking him or by the preclear volunteering the information. CAUTION: Do not ask the preclear to look at his body .
If the preclear fails to exteriorize sometime during the first three steps, the auditor should simply do them again. If the preclear fails the second time, the auditor patiently goes through them a third time, and so on. If the matter then seems too difficult, contact an auditor trained during late 1953 at Camden, by the HAS itself.
The least possible result in going over these first three steps many times will be a considerably bettered condition of the preclear, superior to all past results. Only a very

few preclears fail to exteriorize after Steps I to III have been several times repeated. CAUTION: Although this process is as foolproof as it can be made, it can be maliciously used in this wise: by giving the preclear constant losses—by giving him no chance to win—by bullying him—by evaluating for him—by insisting he is “outside” when he is not—by invalidating him—by pretending to see him or his mock-ups or saying that one does if he does.


SOP-8-C FORMULAS AND STEPS

Opening Procedure: (10 minutes to two hours—with MEST body)
(a) Send preclear to exact places in room, one place at a time.
(b) Have preclear select places in the room and move to them one at a time, still under auditor’s direction.
(c) Have preclear drill in physically holding on to and letting go of objects and spaces on his own decision to hold on, decision to let go.

Step I: Location
PRE-LOGIC: Theta orients objects in space and time. AXIOM: In life experience space becomes beingness.
FORMULA I: Permitting the preclear to discover with certainty where people and things are not in the present, past and future recovers sufficient orientation to establish his knowledge and certainty of where he is and they are; the application of this is accomplished by negative orientation of beingness, havingness and doingness on each of eight dynamics in the present, past and future.
STEP I
(a) Ask preclear to be three feet back of chair. Ask him for things, people which are not giving him directions (orders). For things, persons he is not giving orders to. For things, persons which are not giving directions to other things. Ask preclear for goals he does not have. For goals others do not have for others. For goals another does not have for him. For goals he does not have for another. For persons he is not. For animals he is not. For places where he is not. Where bacteria are not. Where objects are not. For places where he is not thinking.
NOTE: All of the above are done in “brackets” for present, past, and future.
(b) (If exteriorized) Have him drill while exteriorized into holding on to and letting go of objects on his specific decision. Ask him to be in places which are safe, dangerous, pleasant, unpleasant, beautiful, ugly.

Step II: Bodies
AXIOM: In life experience energy becomes doingness.
AXIOM: Compulsive position precedes compulsive thinking.
AXIOM: That which changes the preclear in space can evaluate for him.
FORMULA II: Permit the preclear to discover that he handles bodies and allow him to handle bodies in mock-ups and actuality; and remedy his thirst for attention which he has received by contagion from bodies.
STEP II
(a) Have preclear mock up bodies and un-mock them. Have him get somethingnesses and nothingnesses of bodies until he feels better about them. Ask him to be three feet back of chair.
(b) (If exteriorized) Have him complete II(a) many times and then move body while he is outside.

Step III: Space
PRE-LOGIC: Theta creates space and time and objects to locate in them. DEFINITION: Space is a viewpoint of dimension.
AXIOM: Energy derives from imposition of space between terminals and a reduction and expansion of that space.

FORMULA III: Permit the preclear to regain his ability to create space and impose it upon terminals, to remove it from between terminals and to regain his security concerning the stability of MEST space.
Step III
(a) Have preclear hold two back comers of room and not think.
(b) (If exteriorized) Have preclear complete spacation.
NOTE: If not exteriorized return to Step I.

Step IV: Havingness
AXIOM: In life experience matter becomes havingness.
OBSERVATION: To a thetan, anything is better than nothing.
OBSERVATION: Any preclear is suffering from problems of too little havingness and any reduction of his existing energy, if not replaced, will cause him to drop in tone.
FORMULA IV:
(a) The remedy of problems of havingness is accomplished by creating an abundance of all things.
(b) As the preclear has rendered automatic his desires and ability to create and destroy, and has thus placed havingness beyond his control, the Auditor should place in the control of the preclear his automaticities of havingness and unhavingness and permit him, on his own self-determinism, to balance his havingness.
(c) How to make havingness: Have preclear put out eight anchor points of size, thus creating a space. Have him pull in these eight to the center and have him retain the resulting mass. Do this using large and various objects for anchor points. Do this until he is willing to release such old energy deposits as engrams and ridges but still continue to make havingness.
STEP IV
Have preclear remedy problems of havingness by mocking up and pulling together sets of eight anchor points. Do this many times. Do not have him make anchor points explode in this fashion. Have him save masses thus created. Have preclear adjust anchor points in body.

Step V: Terminals
AXIOM: Space exists by reason of anchor points.
DEFINITION: An anchor point is any particle or mass or terminal.
AXIOM: Energy is derived from mass by fixing two terminals in proximity in space.
AXIOM: Self-determinism is related to the ability to impose space between terminals. AXIOM: Cause is a potential source of flow.
AXIOM: Effect is a potential receipt of flow.
AXIOM: Communication is the duplication of the receipt point of that which emanated at a cause point.
AXIOM Wrongness in terms of flow is inflow.
FORMULA V: The thetan is rehabilitated as to energy and terminals by remedying his postulates about outflow and inflow and drills relating to the outflow and inflow of energy according to the above axioms.
STEP V
(a) Ask preclear for times he could do something. Times when he couldn’t do anything. For things he can do. For things he can’t do. For things other people can, can’t do. For things other people can do for others. For things another specific person can’t do for him. For things he cannot do for another or others.
(b) Ask preclear for objects, actions, persons, ideas he is not destroying. For objects, actions, persons, ideas he is not making survive (persist). For objects, actions, persons, ideas he is not creating. Present, past, and future in brackets. (NOTE: Ideas are the most important here, in brackets.)
(c) Ask preclear for objects, persons, energies, times which are not touching him. Which he is not touching. Which are not reaching for him. For which he is not reaching. For objects, persons, times from which he is not withdrawing. Which are not withdrawing from him. In brackets.

(d) Ask preclear for sights which will not blind him. For people he will not blind if they see him. For noises which will not deafen him. For people he will not deafen. For spoken words that will not hurt him. For spoken words which will not hurt others. In brackets.
(e) Ask preclear for ideas that will not destroy, cause to survive (persist), create, or upset others. In brackets.
(f) Ask preclear for ideas, sounds, sights that will not fix people or unfix them from specific places.
(g) Ask preclear for ideas he is not trying to fix in things. For ideas he is not trying to unfix from things. In brackets.
(h) Have him unmock and mock up terminals and move them together and apart until he can make them generate currents.

Step VI: Symbolization
DEFINITION: A symbol is an idea fixed in energy and mobile in space.
FORMULA VI: The thetan who has been moved about by symbols is strengthened by mocking up and moving about and fixing in space ideas which have formerly moved him.
STEP VI
Have preclear create symbols which mean nothing. Ask pc for ideas he is not trying to destroy. For ideas he is not trying to make survive (persist). For ideas he is not trying to create.
NOTE: The above are done in brackets. Have him mock up ideas and move them about.

Step VII: Barriers
AXIOM: The MEST universe is a game consisting of barriers.
DEFINITION: A barrier is space, energy, object obstacles, or time.
FORMULA VII: Problems of barriers or their lack are resolved by contacting and penetrating, creating and destroying, validating and neglecting barriers by changing them or substituting others for them, by fixing and unfixing attention upon their somethingness and nothingness.
STEP VII
(a) Have preclear reach and withdraw (physically; then as himself) from spaces, walls, objects, times.
(b) Have preclear do six ways to “nothing.”
(c) Have him create and destroy barriers.

Step VIII: Duplication
FUNDAMENTAL: The basic action of existence is duplication.
LOGIC: All operating principles of life may be derived from duplication. AXIOM: Communication is as exact as it approaches duplication.
AXIOM: Unwillingness to be cause is monitored by unwillingness to be duplicated. AXIOM: Unwillingness to be an effect is monitored by unwillingness to duplicate.
AXIOM: An inability to remain in a geographical position brings about an unwillingness to duplicate.
AXIOM: An enforced fixation in a geographical position brings about an unwillingness to duplicate.
AXIOM: Inability to duplicate on any dynamic is the primary degeneration of the thetan.
AXIOM: Perception depends upon duplication.
AXIOM: Communication depends upon duplication.
AXIOM: In the MEST universe, the single crime is duplication.
FORMULA VIII: The primary ability and willingness of the thetan to duplicate must be rehabilitated by handling desires, enforcements and inhibitions relating to it on all dynamics.

STEP VIII
(a) Ask preclear for actions, forms and ideas which do, do not duplicate specific other people. For actions, forms, ideas by which specific other people do, do not duplicate specific other people. For actions, forms, ideas of others which do, do not duplicate him.
(b) Have preclear duplicate physical objects and people and possess himself of duplicates.
(c) Have him make “no-duplicates” of objects and people.
(d) Have him duplicate somethings and “nothings.”


GROUP C

“Group C” is a process used on large numbers of people. It is composed of the following steps of SOP-8-C: Step I(a), Step II(a), Step III(a), Step V(a) to (h), Step VI, Step VII, Step VIII.


GLOSSARY

Pc stands for “preclear,” a person being processed.
Mock-up: A self-created image the preclear can see.
Bracket is done as follows: For preclear, for another, others for others, others for self, another for preclear, preclear for another. See Step I(a).

Special note: The first three steps of SOP-8-C could be classified as beingness steps. The remaining five steps of SOP-8-C could be classified as havingness steps. SOP, itself, in all eight steps constitutes doingness, thus approximating as described in Scientology 8-8008 the space-be, energy-do, time-have triangle.
Special note: In its entirety, SOP-8-C could be considered as various exercises in Formula H, which involves the most basic action of the thetan, which is reaching and withdrawing.
Special note: It will be noted that the negative orientation techniques are done in such a way as to make the preclear, without his being told to do so, create space. The auditor should pay specific attention when the preclear is discovering where things are not that the preclear be caused to note specifically each time the exact location and position where the thing does not exist. This calls the preclear’s attention to various positions which in themselves, thus located, create space. Thus, throughout SOP-8-C, the rehabilitation of space is also to be found, the definition of space being “space is a viewpoint of dimension.”
Special note: In his auditing, if the auditor does not get a communication change on the part of the preclear, whether better or worse, every five or ten minutes, either the auditor is using the wrong step at the time, in which case he should progress on into the steps; or the preclear, even if he says he is, is not complying with the auditor’s orders. The auditor, thus, should remain in continuous communication with the preclear so far as possible and should ascertain with great care what the preclear is doing after he indicates that he has complied with the direction and discover every five or ten minutes if there has been a change in certainties or communication. The commonest source of failure in any step in SOP-8-C is a failure on the part of the preclear to execute the order given as it was intended to be executed, or on the part of the auditor in failing to ascertain whether or not the preclear is executing properly or if there has been a communication change. A careful check of auditors and preclears utilizing SOP-8-C has demonstrated in each case where its use was becoming lengthy that the auditor was failing to ascertain from the preclear whether or not there had been communication changes, and it was also uniformly discovered that the preclear who was failing to get results while being audited with SOP-8-C was not doing the steps as directed but was either avoiding by not doing them at all, although he said he was

doing them, or was failing to understand the direction and so was executing the step in some other way.
The first goal which an auditor must achieve is willingness in the preclear to receive directions. The condition of the preclear is such, in nearly all cases, that he has chosen, as a main point of resistance in life, direction of himself other than his own. Because the physical universe is designed to resist and overcome that which resists it, a continuous resistance to other direction than one’s own results finally in a loss of ability to greater or lesser degree to direct oneself. In that it is the ability to direct himself which the auditor is seeking to return to the preclear, it must be demonstrated to the preclear solely by the process of good auditing that other direction is not necessarily harmful or in the worst interest of the preclear. Thus, to some degree, he ceases to resist incoming direction, and by ceasing to resist it, no longer validates it as a barrier, and so is not concentrating attention on resisting direction but is able to use it freely in his own self-direction. The self-determinism of a preclear is proportional to the amount of self-direction he is capable of executing and deteriorates markedly when a great deal of his attention is devoted to preventing other direction. Directing himself, the preclear becomes capable of execution; preventing direction of himself (resisting the direction of others) brings about a condition where he is mainly devoted to resisting his environment. The latter results in a diminishing of space of the preclear.
The first step in the rehabilitation of the preclear in self-direction is therefore a limiting of the amount of resistance he is concentrating on “other direction” and demonstrating to him that his following of the steps of SOP-8-C under the direction of an auditor is not harmful but, on the contrary, increases his command and control of himself and brings him at last to the point where he can neglect and ignore the continuous stimulus-response operation of the physical universe.
It can be seen clearly then that the auditor who sets himself up to be resisted will fail, for the preclear is mainly concentrating upon resisting the auditor. This is the primary factor in all auditing.
The preclear is brought to a point of cooperation in terms of direction without the use of hypnosis or drugs and without argument or “convincingness” on the part of the auditor, by which is meant overbearing demeanor. At the same time it should be the sole intention and operation of the auditor that his own directions be carried out explicitly by the preclear, and that these be performed with a minimum of communication break and with a maximum of affinity, communication and reality.
Using the formula that that which changes the individual’s position in space can evaluate for the individual, the auditor in using SOP-8-C should use, at the beginning of the first session and in any session where the preclear becomes unreasonably uncooperative in following simple directions, the following procedure. The auditor has the preclear walk to specific points in the room, touch, hold and let go of various specific objects. The auditor should be very exact in his directions. The auditor should do this even on an apparently cooperative case at least twenty minutes before going on to the next step in Opening Procedure.
When the preclear, drilled in this fashion, has at length realized without being told that the auditor’s directions are quiet, reliable, exact and to be performed, and not until then, the auditor uses this process:
Preclear is asked to send himself to various parts of the room and do specific things. The auditor is very specific and exact about this, in that he has the preclear decide, on his own determinism and before moving from the spot where he is standing, what part of the room he is going to send himself to. When the preclear has decided this, and only then (but not necessarily telling the auditor), the preclear then takes himself to that part of the room. The auditor must be very exact that the decision to go to a certain part of the room and to reach or withdraw from a certain thing is made before the preclear takes an actual action. And then the auditor should make sure that the preclear has done exactly what he decided he would do before he moved. In such a wise, coached by the auditor, the preclear is led to direct himself to various parts of the room until he is entirely sure that he is directing himself to certain parts of the room and that the orders are coming from nobody but himself. Of course, before each new

place is chosen, the auditor tells the preclear to choose a new place and tells him when to go there.
The third stage of this Opening Procedure is then as follows:
The auditor has the preclear be in one spot in the room and then has the preclear decide there to go to another spot in the room. The preclear leaves. The auditor has the preclear change his own mind, and go to yet another spot. This last is done to lessen the preclear’s fear of changing his mind, to strengthen his decision and to lessen his reaction to his own mistakes.
The last two steps of Opening Procedure are done at some length. It is profitable by the experience of many auditors to spend as much as an hour on Opening Procedure even in a case which is not in poor condition. When Opening Procedure is omitted or is not carried on far enough, the auditor may discover that it will take him from five to ten hours to “get the case working.” This time is saved by the expenditure of much less time in using Opening Procedure. Even when the preclear is complacent, even when the preclear is an obvious “Step I,” even when the preclear shows no outward sign of resistance to other direction than his own, the first communication lag lessening which the auditor will perceive on the case will probably occur during the use of Opening Procedure. Further, the certainty of the case is heightened. Further, Opening Procedure is, for any level of case, an excellent process.
The preclear who is familiar with SOP-8 may conceive that he is doing a step which is “reserved for psychotics.” The preclear should be disabused of such a concept, since the step is used today on all cases.
In the case of a preclear who is very resistive, Opening Procedure can be used with considerable profit for many hours. For such activity, however, an auditing room of the usual dimensions is usually too constrictive and the drill may be carried on as well out of doors even if only on a street.

P.A.B. No. 19
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR’S BULLETIN

From L. RON HUBBARD

Via Hubbard Communications Office
163 Holland Park Avenue, London W.11
_____________________________________________________________________

[1954, ca. early February]

THE CIRCUIT CASE


The auditor will encounter many cases which resolve very rapidly. These account for fully 50% of the people who come to him, but he will also encounter many people whose cases are resistive, and he will encounter a small handful who wouldn’t let anything happen if the auditor used a shotgun on them. These last are classified as “Circuit Cases.”

The characteristic of these cases is that they are occluded—which is to say that they are studying the significance of things, that they always think before they look, that they want to know before they go, that they are relatively motionless in space, and that they are holding motion in many ways.

The resolution of such cases as outlined in PAB No. 12 is not difficult, but there is a trick about these cases which the auditor should understand.

I would no more audit one of these people without an E-Meter than I would use psychiatry on them. For this case very often pretends to run one thing when it is running quite another, and only the response of a needle will tell the auditor whether or not the case is doing anything. The case merely might be lying there agreeing about it and thinking.

The Iroquois Indian had an illness which he called “the sickness of long thinking.” The auditor would do well to keep this illness firmly in mind when processing resistive cases. These cases are sick of thinking and they will go on thinking and go on computing until they are quite dead, for they cannot be brought to look without rather extraordinary means. Acceptance Level Processing is quite welcome to these cases. Formula H is extremely welcome to them and these, indeed, get the case up to a point where it can be run on such things as SOP 8.

The auditor knows he is looking at a circuit case when, during auditing, the case does not demonstrate a physical reaction as a result of the auditor’s processing; that is to say, the case does not move around. In old-time Dianetics the case which said it was running a prenatal and yet which had no tendency to curl up in a ball, no matter how slight, was actually thinking about running a prenatal.

I wish to state this very strongly about such cases: they are often very convincing and can be mistaken by the auditor for a wide-open case. On reviewing a number of cases in processing which have been reported to me as wide-open cases and on looking at these cases themselves, I find that the auditor was actually auditing a Resistive V, which yet had learned enough patter to go on and run things.

Some cases which actually did have sonic and visio were another type which falls into the same category. These are what we call the “wide-open case.” The wide-open case is actually a psychotic who duplicates continuously and psychotically.

Copyright (©) 1954 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.

Anyone has a time track and anyone duplicates. The wide-open case is thoroughly sure that it is duplicating, is actually under a compulsion to duplicate, but doesn’t duplicate. It doesn’t look at things enough to duplicate. It dubs in an entire track.

We have today very little concern with all this beyond a very important fact. The auditor is there to audit the preclear. The preclear is there to be audited. At that point where cases become difficult, this is what is happening: the auditor’s auditing the preclear, and then the preclear is auditing something else. The preclear isn’t being audited; the auditor is doing a second-hand audit of a circuit. This doesn’t get a case anywhere. The auditor in this wise is actually sitting there watching the manifestation of self-auditing.

In Six Steps for Self-Auditing we have more or less licked the problem. An individual can now with some success audit his own case. But this is still difficult on very low-toned cases, for these people will put the Six Steps for Self-Auditing to work so remotely from themselves that they will actually find the two upper corners of the room with a ridge; and, indeed, I have discovered a preclear doing this. I asked a preclear after nothing had happened for ten minutes what he really was doing and made him go into it in detail. (Any success I have in auditing is the result of communicating with the preclear, a procedure which is recommended.) The preclear finally permitted it to be beaten out of him verbally that he was taking a ridge which was across his chest and had put two corners of this ridge up to the two corners of the room and was making the ridge hold on to the two comers of the room. Astonishingly enough, this did not entirely defeat processing because this ridge consisted of overt acts and motivators and these were flowing off and the preclear was sitting there looking at them. But this was not auditing the preclear, this was auditing via the preclear a circuit in which I was not even vaguely interested. The preclear is so used to being employed by life as a servomechanism that he will very often simply relay the commands he is given to a something else; and this is the condition for which an auditor must be alert.

Back in 1947 I was using anything that worked and was employing hypnotism and psychoanalysis in addition to what I had learned about engrams and other factors in life. The psychoanalyst learned from Freud that there are some cases who simply stand back and look at themselves and who do not participate in the activities. The homosexual, according to Freud, is one of these. I do not know as to that, as the finding has not been borne out in my own work, but I do know that I had many preclears who did not actually participate in the process of being processed. I solved this in some of these cases rather drastically by misdirecting the preclear’s attention. One case I remember of a young man who never seemed to audit anything I asked him to audit and who was far too alert to his surroundings to be interested at all in remedying his attitude towards those surroundings. I put a vase of flowers on my desk and knocked them off with a crash and immediately said, “You’re perfectly safe; now let’s really run through this.” I know now that this Indian technique of getting immediate attention snaps the effort of the preclear which is being devoted to holding an engram at bay away fast enough for the engram to collapse. Good or bad, the young man got well. It is not a process I would particularly recommend. On a test case using this, about a year ago, I had a preclear have a ridge blow up with a considerable explosion which immediately thrust the preclear into apathy and it took me about three hours of heavy slogging with what I knew then to bring the preclear back up to normal. At least, however, the preclear was not in the same attitude.

If you have any reason to suspect that you are auditing somebody who is auditing somebody else, all you have to do is to get into very close contact with the preclear and guide him through very carefully the Six Steps to Better Beingness as contained in PAB No. 7. This can be varied with PAB No. 1 2’s cycles of explosions. Just be sure the preclear is actually doing what you want him to do and do it in such a way that the

preclear actually gets interested in doing it and you will find the case advancing rapidly.

If the condition still continues, use Step VII of SOP 8. You will find that it is very productive and should be used on such a case for a rather long time.

THE ENTIRE PURPOSE OF THINKING IS TO COUNTERACT THE LOSS OF THE ABILITY TO GENERATE FORCE. ONLY IN THE ABSENCE OF FORCE IS THINKING NECESSARY.

L. RON HUBBARD

P.A.B. No. 20
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR’S BULLETIN

From L. RON HUBBARD

Via Hubbard Communications Office
163 Holland Park Avenue, London W.11

_____________________________________________________________________

[1954, ca. mid-February]

TWO ANSWERS TO CORRESPONDENTS:
THE NON-PERSISTENCE CASE AND RIDGE RUNNING


Here are two answers to correspondents which are of interest to other auditors:

1. THE NON-PERSISTENCE CASE

“You write about a preclear that cannot persist for more than half a second. You say that it does not matter whether he is attempting to do a mock-up, a concept, a matched terminal or a feeling. I have not had this complaint from other auditors, but there is a general type of case known as the ‘non-persistence case.’ This is a gradient scale, of course, which starts in with the preclear who puts up a mock-up but, due to blackness, the thing disappears almost immediately. It disappears so fast he cannot see it. Of course, he himself will go on putting up mock-ups as long as you tell him to go on putting up mock-ups, and soon he will have one that he can perceive. The energy he puts up there is too slight when in contest with the tremendous saturation abilities of the blackness with which he is surrounded. Now your statement here is quite unique. I would say offhand that this person is in extremely bad condition and is actually a Step VII. I would start in training this person on reaching and withdrawing from MEST, and I would keep him on this until he had a wonderful sense of reality about being able to hold on to MEST. Just use Step VII as given in Issue 16-G.

“The basic trouble with this preclear is, of course, in the matter of location. If you recall the Prelogics, theta locates things in time and space and creates space and things to locate in space. Close order drill for a military squad on the part of the sergeant eventually places the sergeant in the position of being able to evaluate for every private there. This is probably the only reason privates can be made to attack machine gun nests. Now the trouble with your preclear is impersistence. He cannot locate anything anywhere, but actually he cannot stay anywhere. He is racing around in his mind at such a mad rate that he is unable to take a stand anywhere against anything. This sounds like a very severe dispersal case running on enough fear to defeat the Russians. His solution is to keep running. You are asking him to stand still and hold something. He knows he cannot hold anything. The obvious thing to do with this preclear is to give him some close order drill yourself until you are able to evaluate enough for him to make him start evaluating a little bit for himself.

“The way I would handle this case would be to have the preclear move to various parts of the room and stop still while I counted ten. Then I would move him to another part of the room and have him stop still while I counted ten again. In other words, I would move him around until he would listen to me. He would do this with his physical body well enough, and after that one could tell him with some effect upon him that he should do this or that. Now I would have him take his hands and reach towards the realest thing in the room to him and pick it up and examine it and then

Copyright (©) 1954 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.

put it down and withdraw from it. I would have him go and pick it up and move it to some other part of the room and withdraw from it again. I would have him do this with numerous objects until he was perfectly confident of being able to reach and withdraw from MEST. I would keep this up until this preclear was stable beyond stable. Only then would I go into processing with him. I would have him do mock-ups and then go straight into SOP 8. He could use, of course, ‘remembering something real’ and so forth with great effectiveness.

“This brings to mind the fact that the occluded case is too fixed, he is fixed in position and does not conceive himself able to move. He also could use a lot of reaching and withdrawing, but in the case of an occluded case who tended to persist too long and was very slow in his replies, who insisted on holding his mock-ups endlessly, I would ask this case to put himself in various parts of the room or the yard, and I would move him this way and that, until he suddenly realized he could control his own body. The occluded case really does not realize he can control his own body. A very funny and effective method of bringing him into this realization is to have him sit down and flap his hands vertically up and down with considerable violence, and simply to keep on flapping his hands until he realizes fully and completely that it is he who is flapping his hands. You would be surprised at the reaction on this even when used on a very sane individual.

“In closing let me assure you that when you hit on work in any form, run best with Expanded Gita in brackets, you are heading into the center of what’s wrong with a human being.”

2. RIDGE RUNNING

“An interesting variation of ridge processing is to consider the ridge, as preclears often do, as an entity or a being with a life of its own. This is generally used when the preclear says that he has a spirit or a guiding angel or is haunted by a dog at his throat or some such thing, which the auditor knows is only a ridge activated by the preclear himself.

“Instead of trying to disabuse him of the idea, the auditor makes the preclear process the ridge as an auditor, which is to say he makes the preclear into an auditor for the ridge. Circuit cases and occluded cases are always sitting way up above the case processing something else as though they were an auditor, and an auditor auditing them is actually an auditor auditing a person who is auditing a ridge. Hence the slow progress of such cases.

“In any event, in this method of handling ridges, the auditor has the preclear make the ridge find the two upper corners of the room, just as Step III in SOP 8, and make the ridge hang there from the two upper corners of the room and not think (that is to say, the ridge isn’t supposed to think). The astonishing part of this technique is that it will generally show up some sort of a double overt act mechanism. This will immediately come to view. The auditor should resist the temptation to audit the overt act but just continue with this process. The ridge may turn into some kind of a bird, or some horrible figure with a gruesome face, but after a while the preclear loses his fear of the thing. After all, he does have it hanging up there, black and ugly though it may be, on the two upper corners of the room. The preclear may have removed this thing from his own eyes or from his mouth or from his chest or from his stomach and hung it up.

“After the ridge has been suspended there for some time (for ridges of this character do not easily dissipate when grounded), the auditor then has the preclear move it all around the room, turn it upside down, put it behind him, put it under his feet, until the preclear is at length entirely contemptuous of the thing and bored with it, at which time he will throw it away.

“This does not resolve the case but it takes considerable pressure off the case and is one of the steps of upward progress. There are no instances on record yet of the ridge exploding when treated in this fashion, and no particular reason why there should be such instances.”

L. RON HUBBARD

4TH AMERICAN ADVANCED CLINICAL COURSE LECTURES
Phoenix, Arizona
15 February—29 March 1954

The fourth unit of the Advanced Clinical Course opened at Phoenix, Arizona, on February 15th of 1954. L. Ron Hubbard gave the student auditors several weeks of group processing before he had them audit each other. Included here are the tape packages (6 hours each) Group Processing A, Group Processing B, Group Processing C and Group Processing D, which were used extensively in the field in the following months.

* 5402C15 4ACC-1 Introduction to 4th American ACC
* 5402C16 4ACC-2 Group Processing: Ownership
* 5402C17 4ACC-3 Group Processing: Not Suppressing Time
* 5402C17 4ACC-4 Exteriorization Demonstration Process
* 5402C17 4ACC-5 Demonstration Process
* 5402C18 4ACC-6 Group Processing: Spotting Things
* 5402C18 4ACC-7 Demonstration
* 5402C19 4ACC-8 Group Processing: Demonstration
* 5402C19 4ACC-9 Group Processing: 2nd Dynamic
* 5402C19 4ACC-10 Group Processing: Imagination
* 5402C22 4ACC-11 Group Processing: Straightwire, Energy
* 5402C22 4ACC-12 Group Processing: Consideration
* 5402C23 4ACC-13 Group Processing: Certainty
* 5402C23 4ACC-14 Group Processing: Ownership
* 5402C24 4ACC-15 Group Processing: Time
* 5402C24 4ACC-16 Group Processing: Stabilization Process
* 5402C25 4ACC-17 Group Processing: Goals, Duplicating
* 5402C25 4ACC-18 Group Processing: Being and Giving
* 5402C26 4ACC-19 Group Processing: Havingness
* 5402C26 4ACC-20 Group Processing: Changing Ideas
* 5403C01 4ACC-21 Group Processing Series A: Be, Do, Have
* 5403C01 4ACC-22 Group Processing Series A: Time
* 5403C01 4ACC-23 Group Processing Series A: Certainties
* 5403C02 4ACC-24 Group Processing Series A: Exteriorization
* 5403C02 4ACC-25 Group Processing Series A: Courage
* 5403C02 4ACC-26 Group Processing Series A: Location
* 5403C03 4ACC-27 Group Processing Series B: Sound
* 5403C03 4ACC-28 Group Processing Series B: Light/Sound
5403C03 4ACC-29 Title unknown
* 5403C04 4ACC-30 Group Processing Series B: Spaces
* 5403C04 4ACC-31 Group Processing Series B: Attention
* 5403C04 4ACC-32 Group Processing Series B: Work
5403C05 4ACC-33 Group Processing Series C: Putting Things
5403C05 4ACC-34 Group Processing Series C: Putting Things (cont.)

5403C05 4ACC-35 Group Processing Series C: Putting Things (cont.)
5403C08 4ACC-36 Group Processing Series C: Beingness
5403C09 4ACC-37 Group Processing Series C: Basic Process
5403C11 4ACC-38 Group Processing Series C: Beingness
5403C11 4ACC-39 Title unknown
5403C12 4ACC-40 Group Processing Series C: SOP-8C
** 5403C12 4ACC-41 Group Processing Series C: Similarities and Definitions
5403C15 4ACC-42 Group Processing Series D: 1st Hour
5403C15 4ACC-43 Group Processing Series D: Talk/Beingness
5403C15 4ACC-44 Group Processing Series D: Talk/Beingness
5403C16 4ACC-45 Group Processing Series D: 2nd Hour
5403C16 4ACC-46 Group Processing Series D: Talk/Beingness
** 5403C16 4ACC-47 Group Processing Series D: Outline of Processes
5403C17 4ACC-48 Group Processing Series D: 3rd Hour
** 5403C17 4ACC-49 Group Processing Series D: Evaluation
** 5403C17 4ACC-50 Group Processing Series D: Invalidation
5403C18 4ACC-51 Group Processing Series D: 4th Hour
** 5403C18 4ACC-52 Group Processing Series D: Duplication
** 5403C18 4ACC-53 Group Processing Series D: Following Orders
5403C19 4ACC-54 Group Processing Series D: 5th Hour
5403C19 4ACC-55 Group Processing Series D: Senior Processes
5403C19 4ACC-56 Group Processing Series D: Processes Talk
5403C22 4ACC-57 Group Processing Series D: 6th Hour
5403C22 4ACC-58 Group ProcessingSeries D: Lecture/Pc
* 5403C22 4ACC-59 Group ProcessingSeries D: Lecture/Pc
* 5403C23 4ACC-60 Un iverseSeries: Al I Cases
* 5403C23 4ACC-61 Universe Series: Beingness
* 5403C23 4ACC-62 Universe Series: Beingness
* 5403C24 4ACC-63 Universe Series: Group Processing
5403C24 4ACC-64 Universe Series: Beingness and Protection
** 5403C24 4ACC-65 Universe Series: Prediction
5403C25 4ACC-66 Universe Series: Communication
5403C25 4ACC-67 Universe Series: Outline of Processes
5403C25 4ACC-68 Universe Series: More on Processes
5403C26 4ACC-69 UniverseSeries: Group Processing
5403C26 4ACC-70 Universe Series: Morals, Laws, Codes
** 5403C26 4ACC-71 Universe Series: How Not To Get Results
* 5403C29 4ACC-72 UniverseSeries: Self Analysis
54.. C.... 4ACC Axioms
54.. C ... 4ACC Smooth in Comm Bridge in Auditing

P.A.B. No. 21
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR’S BULLETIN

From L. RON HUBBARD

Via Hubbard Communications Office
163 Holland Park Avenue, London W.11

_____________________________________________________________________

[1954, ca. early March]


The following is a report as submitted giving some idea of what can occasionally happen in running Certainty Processing.

I am publishing this report mainly because it demonstrates the essential ingredient of a successful auditor—nerve. An auditor who doesn’t have nerve—the clean, cold courage necessary to plough through and blast a case to ribbons when it starts to run that way, and bring the preclear up all in one piece—has no business auditing.


REPORT ON CERTAINTY PROCESSING
July 11th, 12th and 13th, 1953

Preclear — Student, aged 24
Auditor — Eileen Hibberson HPA, of “Magic Casements”

Auditor’s postulate “to take a shortcut across the case” by deliberately finding the buttons and working on the fundamental certainties, and with the preclear’s agreement and co-operation the techniques to be intensified, i.e. to work preferably on double terminals instead of matched terminals.

Saturday, the 11th July. Tone scale first on auditor (on double terminals) then tone scale on himself—in each case changing colors of mockups—gradient scale from apathy up tone scale to clear theta clear.
Ran certainty on double terminals “I am in my body” (positive and negative in brackets). Maybe’s and breaking down of ridges indicated on E-Meter. Needle seemed to be making sudden rising jerky thrusts on the upper end on the tone scale. Session completed by anchor points, Spacation, Geographical and then ARC list, followed by tone scale as commencement of session.

Second session same day.Tone scale gradient scale on double terminals. Certainty “Mother is there” (positive and negative in brackets). At one time preclear got a swift facsimile of a distant past life. Ended with anchor points and tone scale gradient scale on auditor and preclear ARC list.

Sunday, the 12th July. Tone scale gradient scale to clear theta clear auditor and preclear—double terminals. Anchor points.

CERTAINTIES: Double terminals all way through.

“I can begin life anew” (positive and negative in brackets)—slight shivers, coldness, some yawning. Little somatic. Probably some prenatals suggested by restless side-to-side head movements. This also turned up earlier on “Mother is there” (positive and negative in brackets).

Copyright (©) 1954 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.


“I can make life persist” (positive and negative in brackets). This bounced preclear straight into violent electronic discharges all over the body and convulsions. Tone dropped, in all 5 dials, and later rose steadily. At one break preclear’s hands and arms were completely paralyzed and anaesthetic. “Shrinking” of flesh observed by auditor. This was run out on double terminals “Can’t let go” (positive and negative in brackets) and preclear holding hands opposite each other to aid discharge. It took 3/4 hour for complete recovery of movement and sense of touch. The “can’t let go” postulate came out with sudden violence as the auditor switched 9-V meter on after unsticking the jammed needle after the violent swinging; and after the meter was switched off again the cans still stuck to the hands which were open wide and rigid, and had to be pulled off by the auditor. A red patch was observed on the right side of the forehead; this came and went twice. During the paralyzed state, balance and co-ordination were gone also (probably the cerebellum knocked out) and hands showed athetoid movements (extrapyramidal system).

Visio: Black screen—preclear had the concepts perched on the corners of it. Sensation of terrific torrent of high frequency waves coming from behind screen striking the three FAC 1 points and spreading all over the body.

Auditor had impression once during this of sperm track incident.

This CERTAINTY was run for three consecutive sessions with breaks for rest and warm drinks between, and tablets of concentrated B1. At the finish of these three sessions, the preclear could hold the positive and negative certainties at high tone level, with no reactions.

During the running the emotional curves were “WILD” (LRH). The preclear’s eyes seemed to be focussed in centre of the forehead upturned and bloodshot—especially after the first session.

The 9-V switch—on during the run, sent the preclear nearly up to the ceiling, head jerking forward onto the knees.

Total running time of this CERTAINTY was 3 hours.

Same day—early evening: Certainty double terminals “I can stop life” (positive and negative in brackets) brought evidence
of electronic shocks in a much milder form, yawns and shivers and coldness of body.
After a fall on the E-Meter, there were constant steady rises.

Later same evening: Ran Certainties: “I can change life,” “I can start life” (positive and negative in brackets).
Preclear was completely bored all through and there were gradual rises indicated on the meter with occasional “flicks.” Auditor’s impressions to say the least were terrific when preclear got up from the settee. Preclear just “oozed” high-toned vitality from his body and eyes were shining from an inside source.

Conclusions: (a) The energies of (Electric shock
(Nerve [e.g. funny-bone]
are identical (Pins and needles
(Cramp
gradient scales (Sex
(Electronic implants

(b) The five Dynamic 2 Certainties will send preclear straight into electronics—connection of D2 and implants as above, provided preclear is at a sufficiently high enough level of the tone scale and can get a strong enough certainty.

(c) Once started these electronics should be run right out (therefore plenty of time is required).

(d) Be aware of the tone of the preclear. A preclear with high selfdeterminism will detach himself and plunge through (auditor’s free theta will help).

A low-toned preclear will either pull out analytically and won’t face it, or go unconscious—reactive escape (this latter might require hours of ARC work).

(e) Don’t switch on E-Meter when preclear is holding the cans when preclear is highly charged; he probably discharges through the meter rather than the reverse.

(f) Don’t run violent physical stuff (electronic convulsions) or any chance of it on a full stomach. This is a good principle broadly for all processing.

Monday, the 13th July, 1953. Tone scale on double terminals gradient scale, auditor and preclear up to clear theta clear. Head front somatic turned on.

Certainties: “I can survive” (positive and negative in brackets) double terminals, turned on the same effects, only mildly and was soon run out.

(Preclear recalled that during group processing “I’m their mock-up” [positive and negative in brackets] gave similar mild effects.)

The remaining three Dyn. 2 Certainties buttons, stop start and change life which were run again to see if all reaction was cleared, were boring and shewed only a few flicks on the meter.

The black patch which came up between the four terminals when running “I can make life persist” the previous day was put up again by the preclear running the Certainty “There is something there” (positive and negative in brackets). This was run for two consecutive sessions, with somatics, shudders and mild convulsions, when suddenly it burst into blazing white light. Immediately got preclear to mock up his head four times facing four squares of bright light with the same certainty (working on the previous week-end’s finding that when preclear was twelve years old had measles and each day suffered extreme discomfort when the sun poured in at a window slantwise. It was after this when it was found he had defective vision). This white patch persisted until the final bracket when it turned black.

It was at this point of processing the preclear reported that his terminals had changed from four to eight (i.e. three dimensions).

(Auditor’s question to LRH. “Is this to be the next step for faster and more intensive techniques?”)

CERTAINTY “Woman there” (positive and negative in brackets) and the meter indicated what appeared to be ridge explosions, sudden and violent with increasing rise in tone.

Over the three days, the sessions leading up to “Electronics” and making certain that nothing of a restimulative nature was left behind, the time spent in actual processing was approximately ten-and-a-half hours.

After a break of seven days before further sessions, it was decided to run some of the foregoing Certainties again together with other fundamental certainties, and it was found there was no tendency towards dramatization of the “Electronics,” with little power of restimulation left behind. Flows, although rapidly downward after first contacting the Certainty, made very quick uprises and the preclear during them had quick “shock” movements swiftly at one point of the body after another. Therapy there afterwards moved very swiftly.

Preclear reported an uprise of confidence maintained ever since as he had never had before. Also a sense of detachment from everything—no sense of exteriorization—but from the inside of his head.

Observations: Preclear found it of immense help to do the tone scale on double terminals especially in clarifying ideas and concepts of theta clear and clear theta clear. Had the feeling of easily getting to the upper theta levels.

Auditor’s conclusions on this were:

1. It helped to release any charges of emotion accumulated during the day by preclear, probably dissipating worries, etc., to a great extent.

2. It “attacks” emotional charges and aberrative material in connection with the eight dynamics.

3. There is the freeing of emotion at all levels thus making preclear more “fluid.”

4. It exercises “thetan” in higher level concepts of knowingness, beingness and “clears,” etc.

Although preclear may not at first get these higher level concepts, it has been noticed that after a few sessions with this gradient scale, preclear has had sudden awareness of higher attitudes, knowingness and goals to aim for.

5. It also helps to keep ARC between preclear and auditor at the very highest level and improves mutual co-operation.

This processing of Certainties reveals a whole field of speculation, research to be made, and since that week-end of processing masses of data have come tumbling in both from the minds of the preclear and the auditor, also from outside sources.

There was a rather interesting piece of confirmatory data regarding the advisability of running “electronics” completely out when contacted by “Certainty” processing. A fellow auditor was called in on an epileptic case, and during running contacted the “halver” with electronic convulsions. After a long session where the preclear came up tone scale and could exteriorize, use beams on fingers pulling them up etc., went back to her home in a very excellent condition. The same night took part in a home social evening, during which a friend of the family tried to force unwelcome attention on her, with the result that during the night she had three very violent fits. The point here I wish to make is that once the charge of electronic force is “started” and not thoroughly run out through lack of time and opportunity, there will be the risk of attracting the opposite poles of force and thereby leave the preclear “open” to undesirable experiences at the sexual level.

The electronic implant most definitely was meant to degrade the thetan and GE, e.g. people’s change of physical appearance during epilepsy.

End of Report.

I call to your attention the fact that even when people are not trained to expect electronics they are encountered. One noted incident of this character came about when a preclear being run by an auditor who “didn’t believe in electronics” had such a fac explode with sufficient violence to burn a hole through the preclear’s hand and through the cans of the E-Meter itself. In several other cases, E-Meters have been blown out.

Ridges, as differentiated from electronics, very often themselves explode and send the preclear rapidly from the top of the tone scale, where he might be, down to the very bottom depths of apathy. A little more auditing and handling of the ridges is all that is necessary to bring the tone on up again. I have seen a green auditor become so frightened at the explosion of a ridge that he left the preclear in apathy, and as auditor Hibberson reports, failure to run out an incident properly can result in an easier restimulation of it.

In a covering letter auditor Hibberson says of this report: “When we first touched this ‘thing’ and came up for a ‘breather,’ we both said that Ron is wrong, it is not sex that these certainties are the push buttons for. The second plunge into it, however, soon indicated what Ron had meant—crude primitive stuff with full impact, as even I felt it in the lower abdomen and base of spine, and then culminating in the chest of each of us like a psycho-physical hysteria. At that point I said to myself, ‘Get out of this, be apart from it,’ and after that I was able to observe in a quite detached way. Incidentally, quite by ‘accident,’ my little ginger cat jumped up on my knee during a session and I found him to be a perfect terminal. I can see now why witches had cats as their ‘familiars.’ The preclear at some point during this second jump found himself viewing everything in a very detached manner and was quite certain that it was from the centre of his head .... When things were going at their ‘hottest,’ a remark of Ron’s just dropped into my mind to the effect that ‘Ron did say that despite what you are seeing, we never did have a dead preclear on our hands,’ also ‘Never to leave a technique half-run.’ “

I am reproducing this report in this PAB not simply as an example of nerve, although that is a thing which I find most wanting in auditors before their cases are in good shape, but because it is just a plain, good, down-to-earth job of excellent auditing.

L. RON HUBBARD

HUBBARD ASSOCIATION OF SCIENTOLOGISTS
806 North Third Street
Phoenix, Arizona

March 10, 1954

Dear Associate,

I have not written you for some time because I was waiting to have something conclusive to say.

Now that the HAS has been re-established on its home ground and several test projects concluded we can give you some idea of whither we are rocketing.

The HAS had to come home because the Eastern communication blocks were found to be very great. For instance, it costs almost three times as much to publish a Journal in the East. When I came West for the Congress I found a very warm welcome here in Phoenix. The HAS, two years old, was known for paying its bills and delivering the goods. Rather than pioneer, it was thought best to continue our established reputation in this area. All major effects and stocks of the HAS are in Phoenix now. We have here at 806 North Third Street very comfortable and roomy offices—and the air is clean. We have training quarters, very nice ones, in another building a block or so away.

The big news in Scientology is our alliance with various fields of psycho-therapy and the use of Scientology in widely different fields. For instance, in California we are most acceptable as a religion. Under Dr. Farber, the CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY has been duly incorporated in California and will act as a coordinating unit for many congregations.

Dr. Farber contracted with the CHURCH OF AMERICAN SCIENCE (the mother church) on a tithe of twenty percent to the mother church from the CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY of California and is empowered to issue ordinations and other necessary papers by the State of California and by the CHURCH OF AMERICAN SCIENCE. All such ordinations are basically those of the mother church. In order to organize a CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY in your area it is only necessary to apply to the HAS for forwarding to the CHURCH OF AMERICAN SCIENCE and a full set of photostats of the various articles, by-laws, contracts and charters of filing will be forwarded to you.

Additional alliance has been made with a corporation, THE FREUDIAN FOUNDATION OF AMERICA to train and certify psycho-analysts and psychotherapists (the latter being the junior grade).

The predominant communication line of the society at this time is psychoanalysis. Freud’s books are very well known. By arrangements made in Europe and otherwise it is possible to issue certification as Freudian analysts. In that Freud, as a pioneer, introduced the basic idea that illness can stem from mental causes, and in that his work is well known, it is not unseemly to carry out his aims and goals. As he prescribed no exact process and as Scientology on its lowest rung solves Freudian problems never before solved, Scientology is of course desirable in this field. Further, Freud’s work holds out hope which does not materialize and so tends to dead end those seeking help in mental problems. To remove this road block by applying what is now known would seem to be a social contribution.

All auditors graduating from the Advanced Clinical Course, grading high enough to properly represent their subject, can be given any one of three or all the following certificates: DOCTOR OF SCIENTOLOGY, FREUDIAN PSYCHO-ANALYST, DOCTOR OF DIVINITY. Naturally, previous background and general fitness are consulted in this matter.

The next ADVANCED CLINICAL COURSE is March 29, 1954. This is Number 5. Unit Six will begin May 10, 1954. The fee remains $800. The courses will continue every six weeks. There will be a week gap at the end of June when no course is given in order to make a place for the next Congress. Immediately after the Congress week the courses will resume.

The THIRD INTERNATIONAL CONGRESS OF DIANETICISTS AND SCIENTOLOGISTS is scheduled for a week in late June in Phoenix. Phoenix is a cool summer city, being an almost entirely air-conditioned town. The dry climate makes airconditioning effective here and June in Phoenix is cooler than anywhere on the East Coast or Middle West.

The Journal is smoothing out on its schedule. We are getting great numbers of orders for issues 16-G and 24-G. We have many new book issues in planning or being set. The price is $5.00 for 24 issues. You can take subscriptions and remit 60% of the subscription price with the name and address of the subscriber. You can also take special $25 memberships or professional memberships in the HAS and forward 60% to us. You are overlooking a lot of revenue for yourself in these. You can also sell books and make 40% of their sales price.

Journal advertising rates are revised. They are $85 a page, $50 a half page, $1 a half page wide line. The Journal is read by 5,800 and new subscriptions come in daily.

You can buy the first 24 issues of the Journal for $5.00.

Now for a brief comment on the business of being an associate:

The HAS has now been in business for two years. Originally it was intended that the HAS associates would do the training and treating and the HAS would supply books and tapes. Very early it became apparent that the associate program would not begin to support the HAS. Lateness or non-existence of training percentages, inability to communicate even narrowly in their neighborhood and other matters finally forced the HAS back into the training business. And it caused the HAS to less and less regard the associate as a major portion of the organization. Several changes were offered. A rather continual apathy greeted these changes and so none of them actually went into force.

Now more recently, having had under my hands a great many people who had been “trained” by associates, I found why the associates themselves tended to fail in their areas. They didn’t make auditors. They didn’t teach the subject well. Thus the auditors got no results and the associate thereupon received very little business. The subjects of Dianetics and Scientology have been working in capable hands since 1949. But they have not been working for poorly trained auditors. All this squirrel crop with Bogwog Procedure arose from people who couldn’t tell an engram from a comma. With bad (not poor) training the associate released into his area auditors who couldn’t cure dirty fingernails much less psycho-somatic ills. So, the subject, known by what its practitioners did, stalled.

Sure, processes are now faster and better, but they’ve always worked. The associate program broke down on an inability on the part of the associate to get good representation on the part of his students in his own area.

So the HAS is back in the training business. We are making auditors. A lot of them have been widely and lengthily trained by associates. They come to me here with no knowledge of definitions, no certainty on the subject, without any great skill. They didn’t get what they paid for—training to be an auditor. They’re leaving here with their cases in fair or excellent condition but when they leave here they can AUDIT! The worst students I’ve had go around town pulling off miracles. So we HAVE to be in the training business in order to get Dianetics and Scientology done somewhere on the face of earth.

Now this may be received as an awful invalidation of what you’ve been doing, as a discounting of all your good work. However, it’s only bald finding. I’ve had, now, students from all of you. So I know why the associates haven’t left a rocket-tail across their areas. They didn’t train people to get results and the subject itself was injured.

Sure, I should have trained YOU better. But I’m doing that now. Almost every associate has been or is being represented in these clinical units.

So all this calls for an overhaul of the entire associate program. With well trained associates or staff members, it doesn’t seem likely you can do other than succeed in the various areas. BUT this will entail an awful lot better training of your students. And it will entail a lot more attention to communication in your area. Associates are very prone to get spread all over the map with their ambitions and never LOOK at their own town. They can look everywhere for business but the front yard. Typical of this, an HAS official last year was getting all his business from 12,000 miles away and none of it from the largest city in the world—LONDON. Associates commonly think of themselves as rival HASs. Well, the HAS has always covered its own area AND five continents. Right now it is plowing into Phoenix the way nobody here has ever plowed before. Business is better where you are, not three thousand miles away. So, applying and communicating locally (and as nationally as you want, but locally first), an associate can win.

You turn out good auditors and you’ll win your area. Collect the fee and skip the drudgery of training and you’ll reap disaster for yourself—and in many instances you have already done so.

Because of the legal situation in various places, the Church of Scientology is your best bet in such areas. Alliance with the Freudian Foundation is possible. Continuing as an HAS associate is possible. In any event, we have the proper papers and procedures outlined here for your application. But more important, the entire “associate program” is a jerry-rig affair at this time. We don’t know what you expect and we don’t know what you are doing. Before very long there will be a close-knit program throughout the US. We have better programs in some very far places with our associates than with US associates, so we’re looking to home with this newsletter. We can’t just help you. We can make you. But you’ll have to get more communicative, you’ll have to sell more books, you’ll have to have the proper tapes and you’ll have to be willing to work like hell.

Some among you are doing all right. The bulk of the program however needs to be pulled tightly into line. We’ve got a science, we have the basic organization. Now let’s get going and get the job done we started to do. ALL CONTRACTS WITH MYSELF OR THE HAS ARE NOW SUBJECT TO RENEWAL. So apply and tell us which way you want to go. Please let us know before April 1st, 1954. The HAS, a church, what course do you want to steer?

Sincerely,

LRH for the HAS

LRH :- jh
Copyright (©) 1954
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

T H E J O U R N A L O F
SCIENTOLOGY

Issue 26-G [1954, ca. late March]

Published by
The Hubbard Association of Scientologists, Inc.
Phoenix, Arizona


The Road Up

L. Ron Hubbard

Scientology today is doing exactly what it is supposed to do—work!
It is the only valid and fully tested mental process which Man has.
In view of those facts, both of them very easy to establish, why isn’t Scientology cutting a large swath through the world? It is attracting a great deal of attention as the growing ranks of the HAS show. But why isn’t it bowling through each and every doubt and opposition everywhere?
There are several answers. The first is the widespread advertising of that “nonadvertising” group, the medical profession. Magazine articles are counted upon by the A.M.A. to sufficiently advertise medicine without the A.M.A. having to buy space. The A.M.A. and its practitioners sell hope for a billion or two annually. They have established a monopoly on health (or, one should say, bad health). This monopoly and the constant parade of articles in all leading periodicals tend to lull the public into the false belief that Man’s major problems of mental and physical health have already been solved. The A.M.A. today depends, actually, upon the remedies prepared for biochemists to keep the medical doctor from being disgraced.
There will always be a role for the medical doctor. But his role is not as broad as A.M.A. advertising would like us to believe. The doctor is a handyman desperately valuable in the specific fields of emergency surgery and repair (as needed after accidents), in obstetrics, in orthopedics and as epidemic police. Further he ceases to be valuable. Almost any chemical engineer can administer antibiotics with better results than can a doctor. Any civil engineer knows more about sanitation. Almost all operations as in the field of surgery are needless. And in problems of psychosomatic medicine the doctor has been and is a rather miserable flop—and psychosomatic medicine comprises better than seventy percent of Man’s ills!
The medical profession has prepared its own retreat into the fields where it belongs for it has openly fought original research into the problems it itself could not solve. It has continued to accept money from the public to remedy ills it cannot help. It has therefore forfeited to a large extent the good will of all research people and, as any poll would show, the affection of the public as well.
Any organization unnaturally pretending to cure all when it cannot nurtures the seeds of its own destruction. Any organization which pretends to developments which it at first fought at length becomes laughable. That the medical profession is now advertising, as in the Ladies’ Home Journal, that it is now nicely accepting the prenatal theory of Dianetics without credit to Dianetics does not escape any ridicule or give us any real responsibility in helping the A.M.A. to continue.
The auditor does not belong in the accident emergency ward until the arteries are re-assembled. The auditor does not belong on the cause end of a drug needle. The auditor does not pretend he can set bones (despite Life’s article to the effect that auditors do).
But the medical doctor believes with a very touching faith that he belongs in a consultation room for the neurotic and insane. He believes he is a high authority on

Copyright (©) 1954 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.

shock and trauma and rushes quickly into his favorite advertising media (the magazine article) to air his views on mental states—when as a matter of fact the opinion of the local grocer is probably more reliable.
The medical doctor affirms his right to pass upon mental therapies, to advise his patients about them. Why doesn’t he give advice on radio receiving sets too? It’s a subject just as far from his forte as mental science is.
The public is daily sold on the idea that psychosomatic medicine is in the province of the medical doctor. Legislatures believe that only medical doctors should “treat the insane.” Everybody is standing around pretending the problem of mental health is solved. And that is one of the most dangerous assumptions any culture could make. The people of the culture believing that today are shocked and surgeried into permanent insanities by medicos who know no more about the mind than an auditor does about broken bones.
The complacence of the A.M.A. in the teeth of this very dangerous assumption should be very alarming, particularly to the A.M.A.
Routinely and regularly Scientologists are now solving all branches of psychosomatic ills and all problems of shock and insanity save in those cases where physical impediments to communication are impossible. Since 1947 every effort has been made to put this data into the hands of the medical profession. The Original Thesis was written for and distributed to the major organizations who control healing in the United States. Yet each shrugged off any responsibility in the matter. The direction to go, then, was not down simply because those “in charge of healing” could not find value in Dianetics. The direction to go was out and up. Dianetics was broadly released to the general public.
The great mouthpieces of medicine such as Morris Fishbein in Newsweek have devoted pages and pages to a desperate effort to stop Dianetics. The raving and frothing done upon the subjects of Dianetics and Scientology by otherwise responsible men in Life, Time, and Look, in Liberty and cheaper publications has no real precedent in this century. Every piece of scandal that could be scraped up was hurled by medicine to stop Dianetics in its tracks.
That was a heavy push for a young, struggling science to have to face. Well, Dianetics and Scientology have faced it. This counter-effort has slowed markedly the speed of advance. But that was not unexpected. And the counter-effort is now almost entirely spent.
It cost a lot of money to slow Dianetics and Scientology down. But it was worth a very great deal to these sciences to be slowed down. For it made it necessary for me to work much, much harder and make them much, much better and the time that took was the same time that it required for the attack to wear itself out. Today we are very rich in knowledge. We can do things quickly which, yesterday, were all but impossible.
The ridge of resistance is still there. But it is not a very solid ridge. For we didn’t fight back. Now that we are ready to march, it is rather like walking on the backs of an enemy which has slain itself.
Now what are we going to do to make OUR attack good? Well, we have to do several things.
The first of these is to discover in every one of us a level of performance and ability which in itself will set an excellent example. That one is “in” Dianetics and Scientology should be a synonym for being quick and able.
This one we had better remedy rapidly. And the answer to that is posed in the HAS program in Phoenix where for very, very little any auditor can have his case pushed right on up to the top.
The second of these several things has to do with ability in Scientology and with Scientology. This is being remedied by better training schedules in associate schools and in particular by our Advanced Clinical Course in Phoenix. (For they don’t get out of HERE without knowing how!)
The third of these is to compel into the public knowledge the fact that LOW COST therapy now exists. That answer is the group answer. We have tapes here now which, if played to a group of strangers, would produce clears.

A fourth answer to our problems is with you. All you have to do is stop asking for agreement from your area and start to ACT with what you know and Scientology will go across wherever you are like a startled rocket. Who cares who agrees with you? A medical doctor never explains the remedy. He just uses it. Well, why don’t you just USE Scientology and stop explaining it?
The main problem which faces us now is WHAT are we going to do to SAVE the medical doctor? He has all but ruined himself. We need bone and baby mechanics. We need somebody to sew up the maimed and mauled. We MUST be careful not to attack medicine. We MUST remember to be patient and gentle. Otherwise you and I in a few years will have to sew them up and deliver them and that’s too much to ask.
Scientology is advancing just exactly the way it was intended to advance. Now let’s all of us get able enough to make the able much more able and get this show on the road.

P.A.B. No. 23
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR’S BULLETIN

From L. RON HUBBARD

Via Hubbard Communications Office
163 Holland Park Avenue, London W.11

_____________________________________________________________________

2 April 1954

HAVINGNESS

(From the Researches and Notes of L. Ron Hubbard)


Starvation for energy is the keynote of any case which maintains facsimiles in restimulation.

The thetan who holds facsimiles to the body has chosen to have the energy in spite of the perceptions and significances in it. He is attempting to have the energy and not have the aberrative quality of it. Thus he is posed the problem of trying to reject the thought and accept the energy and thus he cannot do either.

In Dianetics we gave him the energy by processing out the significances (perception) in it.

When well exteriorized a thetan may have his energy so far reduced that he becomes unhappy. Having him create and snap in anchor points upon himself (not the body) will remedy this unhappiness.

Matched Terminaling, Admiration Processing and any other process which reduces energy, at length “starve” the thetan for energy.

All these conditions are remedied by remedying the “havingness” of the thetan.

As we saw in Acceptance Level Processing (PAB No. 15) only certain energy forms may be acceptable to the thetan. This is regulated by the screens he has erected against things. By setting up a resistance to certain energies, he creates an eventual appetite for them. He sets up screens to resist the form and the screen becomes plus for the form on the far side and negative for the form on the near side. As the screen caves in upon him (by being pounded by the unwanted form) it eventually causes an appetite (vacuum) for the form. Thus he actually starves for a form he once detested. This is the dwindling spiral of the MEST universe. The thetan believes he has to have the form to survive.

The remedy of havingness is necessary for all cases at and below Step IV of SOP 8.

An auditor remedies havingness by “starting an avalanche,” by making the preclear begin an automatic inflow of acceptable things, then graduates the preclear rapidly to avalanches of stars, planets, heavy masses and spaces.

It is density and mass which count, not specific items.

Degradation begins when the thetan is interiorized into unwanted mass. It is completed when, having developed an appetite for heavy mass, he is exteriorized from it.

Copyright (©) 1954 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.

In this lifetime the downfall of any thetan began with his loss of some heavy mass. The heaviness of the mass was the value of the mass. For instance, an auditor wishing to trace the feeling of degradation in a preclear would look for a time when the preclear lost or was removed from a massive object. The auditor then has the preclear mock up the object and change its quality better or worse until it “snaps in” automatically on the preclear. Then the auditor has the preclear mock up enough of the object to create an avalanche. The preclear must then add more and more to the inflow, then add planets, stars and black stars until the preclear can comfortably throw several dense objects away in mock-up. A reverse (outflowing) avalanche is then begun and


Outflowing and inflowing avalanches are run on the preclear until his “hunger” is satiated.

Numerous facsimiles may appear. The auditor continues with the dense masses in avalanches, not the facsimiles. The facsimile will “blow.”

This process, run for four or five hours, will create a Book 1 MEST Clear.

Perceptions are turned on by running “acceptable” smells, lights and sounds in avalanches. Masses are more important than perceptions.





[The above PAB is reissued as HCO B 3 May 1972, Havingness.]

5TH AMERICAN ADVANCED CLINICAL COURSE LECTURES
Phoenix, Arizona
30 March—7 May 1954


The 5th American Advanced Clinical Course convened in Phoenix, Arizona, on Monday, 29 March 1954, and ran through Friday, May 7th. L. Ron Hubbard delivered the following lectures and group processing sessions—including more on Universe Processing as well as SOP-8D.

During the 5th ACC, on Wednesday, 21 April 1954, L. Ron Hubbard gave a series of special group processing sessions. A listing of these is given on page 50. A further series of public lectures was given on 5 May 1954 near the end of the 5th ACC. These are listed on page 56.


5403C30 5ACC-1 Universes
5403C31 5ACC-2 Simple Processes
5404C01 5ACC-3 Basic Simple Procedures
** 5404C02 5ACC-4 Presence of an Auditor
5404C05 5ACC-5 Group Processing: Safe Place for Things
* 5404C06 5ACC-6 Lecture: Universes
* 5404C07 5ACC-7 Universe: Basic Definitions
** 5404C08 5ACC-8 Universe: Processes, Experience
* 5404C09 5ACC-9 Universe: Conditions of the Mind
* 5404C12 5ACC-10 Universe: Change and Rehabilitation
* 5404C13 5ACC-11 Universe: Manifestation
5404C14 5ACC-12 Universe: Manifestation
* 5404C15 5ACC-13 SOP-8D: Exteriorization and Stabilization
* 5404C16 5ACC-14 SOP-8D: Lecture
* 5404C19 5ACC-15 SOP-8D: Process, Universe Assessment
* 5404C20 5ACC-16 SOP-8D: Process, Remedying Havingness
* 5404C21 5ACC-17 SOP-8D: Elements of Auditing
* 5404C22 5ACC-18 SOP-8D
* 5404C23 5ACC-19 SOP-8D
* 5404C24 5ACC-20 SOP-8D: General Handling of Pc
* 5404C27 5ACC-2 1 SOP-8D: Anchor Points and Space
* 5404C28 5ACC-22 SOP-8D: Space and Havingness
* 5404C29 5ACC-23 SOP-8D: Space
* 5404C30 5ACC-24 SOP-8D
** 5405C03 5ACC-25 SOP-8D: Viewpoint Straightwire
How to Do a Viewpoint; also issued as PRO-22
* * 5405C04 5ACC-26 SOP-8D: Be, Do, Have Straightwire
* 5405C06 5ACC-27 Anatomy of Universes
* 5405C07 5ACC-28 Energy—Exteriorization

ADVANCED COURSE
Phoenix, Arizona



DATA SHEET

(For use as basic information by students of the
Advanced Clinical Course as of April 10, 1954.)


GOALS: Life has solutions for many things. It has never had a solution for aberration until now. The target of the auditor is not simply the eradication of aberration. It is the relegation of aberration to the status of a solved problem.

Primary in auditing procedures is getting the preclear to change his mind. When he can shift postulates easily and at will he will continue to be in good condition. When he cannot his is a problem of other universes in which he is “trapped.” In any universe one is subject to the postulates of the God of that universe. Therefore, when a preclear cannot be brought to change his postulates he must be having trouble with other universes.

A problem with universes is primarily a problem in spaces. Secondarily it is a problem in energy and matter. Any preclear having difficulty with other universes is having difficulty with space.

The definition of space is “a viewpoint of dimension.” Thus other universes are created by other viewpoints. When a pc has been changed in space a great deal by another viewpoint and when he has many impacts in common with it he may believe that he is in another universe and, mechanically, this is so. In such a way a preclear may be found in mother’s universe, in father’s, in a pet’s, in his body’s and is, of course, in the MEST universe where the postulates, he conceives, are those of God. The nuclear physicist studies God’s postulates.

Whenever a preclear cannot change his own postulates easily, we conceive that he is operating upon other postulates than his own and thus, that he is in another universe. We resolve space only insofar as we need to resolve other universes.

Where the preclear is in a universe which operates upon psychotic postulates he is immediately pressed to face aberration.

This is an E-Meter problem, that of other universes and is resolved by asking the pc while on the meter whose commands he would obey, whether father’s, mother’s, etc. The meter will experience its biggest drop on those universes where he is having the greatest conflict. However, the meter will not necessarily respond on universes in which he is entirely enclosed. Removing the “reacting” (biggest drop) universes, one at a time, will exteriorize the pc from all universes.

The key command in all Universe Processing is “Where (father, mother, wife, pet) would be safe.” The pc must then SPOT points in space where he is certain the person in question would be safe. Various regular phenomena then occur. The replies are not, of course, very rational. Getting the pc to spot spots in space is of the essence. He must be brought to spot spots in MEST space.

It will be found that spotting a spot in space is almost impossible for some pcs. They give conditions, not locations. Or, even in using Opening Procedure, they cannot easily spot a location in space without their attention flicking quickly to objects.

KNOW—SEX SCALE: There is a scale of behavior, patterned on the tone scale, which starts at the top with KNOW and goes as follows downscale. This is also a scale of tolerance of viewpoints or tolerance of space or interiorization in universes and furnishes a fast diagnosis. KNOW—can create space. LOOK—is creating space. EMOTE—is combining space and energy. EFFORT—is condensing space. THINK—is wandering in condensed spaces. SYMBOLS—has codified spaces into words and other significances. EATING—is content with spaces already condensed but belonging to others. SEX— finds no space tolerable for present beingness but looks to other and future beingnesses as the only chance for universes.

COMMUNICATION: The graph of communication is CAUSE ....to .... EFFECT.
Or CAUSE—DISTANCE—EFFECT. Or C distance E. A perfect communication occurs when whatever is at Cause point is duplicated exactly at Effect point. Thus a perfect communication contains duplication. A thetan seeking to communicate seeks to send impulses or particles from himself at C to the receipt point at E, WITHOUT FORM. Thus, a thetan has NO-FORM as a condition of a perfect communication. A body, on the other hand, when it communicates, places the condition of FORM into any communication it sends. Thus a thetan, working obsessively, would seek to make NO-FORM at all effect points while a body would attempt to create FORM at effect points. A body seeks to make something out of every communication, hence, significance and deeper meanings and prior causes. A thetan seeks to make NO-FORM out of all communications, hence a nothingness. These are the mechanics of communication. They are also the mechanics of human behavior. The perfect duplication of a communication is seldom possible, hence the dwindling spiral. BUT harm in communication only occurs when there is no KNOWING about communication. Impulsive or obsessive communication alone takes exception, on the part of a thetan, to something, on the part of the body, to nothingness.

NON-EXTERIORIZED CASES: When cases are difficult to exteriorize the auditor is involved, basically, with a tangle of universes. The thetan cannot LOOK because he is in all other universe where looking (the making of space) is forbidden. Occlusion of various kinds, facsimile looking, are present only when the thetan is in another universe than his own. In his own he can easily look even into other universes. Occlusion and non-exteriorization are then stemming from the same cause. THE MORE DIFFICULT THE CASE, THE LESS TOLERANCE OF SPACE. This is resolved by having the pc spot space, using the body perception or not. He can do this via Opening Procedure as well as by spotting distant MEST spaces. The SPOT in space is more important than the object in space. Thus one has him spot spots until he can with ease. One then begins the task of separating him from universes using Universe Processing.

CHANGE OF SPACE: This process has been standard for some time. It is not used on pcs until they are exteriorized. It can be approximated by non-exteriorized cases by having them spot spots in space. The goal of Change of Space is bringing the preclear up to present time in all MEST spaces. Rapid spotting or changing into various locations where the pc has been in difficulty keynotes this process.

INTERIORIZATION-EXTERIORIZATION: The preclear must be able to interiorize into and out of objects and spaces at will. Drills which interiorize and exteriorize him rapidly time after time from the interior to the exterior of rocks, planets, animals and people remedy his ability. It must be noted however that this decreases havingness and this decrease must be remedied.

HAVINGNESS: The preclear has so long had that he believes he must have. This lack of havingness is run by discovering what is acceptable to the pc in the way of mass and having him pull many such objects in upon him. Pulling in enough mass will run out the engram bank. Engrams are in restimulation only because they represent energy which the pc or the body pulls in. Universe Processing, run correctly, DOES NOT

UPSET HAVINGNESS and is the one process which escapes it. Avalanches of planets and stars can be started inward and outward by remedying havingness. This is beneficial rather than otherwise. Such avalanches should be put into the control of the preclear with starting, stopping and changing their inflow and outflow.

GRAND TOUR: This is the process of taking the newly exteriorized pc to various locations in this solar system and is Change of Space and Interiorization-Exteriorization combined. The pc is sent to places near the Earth, the Moon, the Sun, Mars, etc. This is done rapidly and many times. He is then exteriorized-interiorized out of and into these heavenly bodies. He is made to move down to planet surfaces and to centers as opposed to being in positions but he is also made to be in positions. In other words, he is rapidly changed in space and is also, during other intervals, made to move through space. A grand tour is completed, actually, by change of space through all the important spots (where he has had experience on the whole track) of the MEST universe.

SOP 8-C: This process, as developed, continues to be successful in general hands and is recommended for instruction of auditors in other than the Advanced Clinical Course and for use by Book Auditors. It is a powerful weapon and is chalking up many successes.

OTHER PROCESSES: There are many patch-up and emergency processes. They are of varying value. None of them have been abandoned. Where an auditor has these as part of his know-how, he should use them in relationship to their effectiveness in his experience. He should not, however, compulsively continue with a process which he is not finding very useful in his hands simply because it “makes nothing” or “makes something” of the preclear. A case in point is the obsessive use, by many auditors, of the early processes of Dianetics. These auditors have fixated on “making nothing of pictures.” In Scientology we have better processes and have had better processes for some time. In fact Scientology processes are so much better than this that we terminated the temporary use of the word “Dianetics.” Older processes and emergency processes in particular have not been invalidated. Auditors would, for instance, discover that engrams can be made to vanish by having the preclear remedy his havingness or by “finding places where pictures would be safe” for a few hours. Any phenomena can be remedied by 8-C or Universe Processing. The results of these have the great advantage of being stable when attained.


ADVANCED COURSE PROCEDURE


Continually working with students in the Advanced Course I have been able to codify procedures in such a way that they work very consistently for auditors.

First: Establish a two-way communication with the preclear, either by discussion or questioning in generalities. Get him to talk a little. Then run next to last list of Self Analysis to measure his communication lag for future reference and to avoid falling into “one of THOSE cases” unawares.

Second: Run from ten minutes to two hours of Opening Procedure (a) until the preclear is happy to take orders from an auditor and (b) UNTIL THE PC CAN LOCATE SPOTS IN SPACE WITHOUT HIS ATTENTION SNAPPING ON TO MEST OBJECTS.

Third: Run SOP 8-C Step I. If at this point pc exteriorizes with certainty, run the remainder of this procedure (Advanced Course Procedure). If PC DOES NOT EXTERIORIZE EASILY he is having a major problem with universes. This problem with universes must be resolved somewhat before he can be made to exteriorize. Resolve some of the universe problems, then go to the second step (ACP) above, then run this step (8-C Step I) again. If he still doesn’t exteriorize, resolve more universe problems. To

run Universe Processing, have pc, first, spot spots in space. Then have him find places where E-Meter reacting personnel (mother, father, etc.) “are safe.” This is actually all there is to the process. One stays with the person selected until the charge is greatly lessened or until the phenomena of “separating universes” takes place. The key command is “Where are viewpoints safe?” Have the pc actually spot spots in space and make sure that he IS certain that the viewpoint (or the person) is safe there. The clue to this “safe” is, of course, “Senior Survival.” The pc gets into the winning valence because that had senior survival. Thus he takes the viewpoints of MEST objects or people which have senior survival. Beingness Processing is another process similar to but less powerful than (but complementing) Universe Processing.

Fourth: Beingness Processing. By which the auditor has the preclear BE various things until he finds things the pc can be with certainty. The goal here is to get the pc able to be anything in any universe or to be any universe. Which is to say, to assume the viewpoint of anything. This clears up spots which the pc cannot tolerate, also forms of which he is afraid. When the pc is discovered being something compulsively, one finds where that “would be safe,” for it is a winning valence. This includes getting the pc to be his first piece of space, and his first piece of energy. The reason one does this last is to “undercut” his first period of “unknowingness.” The pc is asked to be the space, then himself, back and forth, many times. Then to be the energy, then himself, back and forth many times. A variation, when the pc is compulsively discovered being something, is to have him be that thing, then to find places where a thetan would be safe from the viewpoint of that thing he is being. Again the goal is to get the pc to a point where he can be any object or space in any universe.

Fifth: Universe Processing and Step I of 8-C on the EXTERIORIZED pc, alternating.

NOTE: When the pc goes into apathy on Universe or Beingness Processing, the auditor should take care that he himself, by communication breaks, has not brought on the condition. Running Opening Procedure on a case which has heavily bogged into apathy is a good repair measure. But apathy results in Beingness Processing when the thetan has been something compulsively and is just beginning to be himself in that situation. Asking him to be the object and then be himself will run out this apathy. The apathy is the halfway mark of coming out of a winning valence and is rather inevitable. Apathy is more alive than the object the pc was being.

Sixth: The Grand Tour (see earlier part of this data sheet). The Grand Tour now includes Change of Space to the entrance point of the MEST universe, etc., etc., etc. It also includes exteriorization-interiorization drills.

NOTE: If pc boils or gets dull, REMEDY HAVINGNESS. If this does not alter the condition, it is a problem in universes and Universe Processing should be used.

Seventh: Run SOP 8-C in its entirety on preclear including brief Opening Procedure.

Eighth: SOP-8-0 as released in April.


L. RON HUBBARD


LRH:-.rd
Copyright (©) 1954
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED



ADVANCED COURSE HAS
Phoenix, Arizona
April 15, 1954

S.O.P. 8 D


This procedure is for use by a trained Scientologist. It can be used in conjunction with ADVANCED COURSE PROCEDURE and its primary goal is the delivery of heavy cases; however, it can be extensively applied to all cases. It is better to run a Step I well on 8-C before using this process upon him.

OPENING PROCEDURE: Have pc move his body around the room locating SPOTS IN MEST SPACE. Have him locate many such spots and designate them with his finger. Have him do this until he can do it very well and until he obeys an auditor’s directions easily.

STEP I: Ask preclear to be three feet back of his chair. This is the total step. The auditor does not press the matter further even if the pc is.

STEP II: Have preclear look at his environment and whatever he sees have him duplicate it many times. Then have him duplicate a nothingness he makes or finds many times.

STEP III: Have preclear hold the two back corners of the room (2 minutes at least or two or more hours). Then have him locate spots in space where he is not.

STEP IV: AN E-METER STEP. Give pc a full assessment by putting him on an E-Meter at this point and asking him to name the people with whom he has been associated since birth. The auditor writes these down and indicates by a symbol after each name whether the action of the needle is stuck, small, medium or violent. On a consistently stuck needle, use next to last list SA until needle frees. Then choose that person who got the biggest reaction on the meter and using this person have preclear find spots or spaces where this person would be safe. The preclear must be certain of the fact. The auditing command is, “Find some places where would be safe.” One continues this until the needle shows no further reaction, on just this first person. Then one goes to OPENING PROCEDURE and starts all the way through the steps again. Now one takes the same person as the auditor first chose and runs this processing question only: “Spot some things which your does not own.” This is the total question. (One to two hour communication lag may not be unusual.) The auditor continues to ask this question and the preclear continues to spot things which this person does not own until the needle is relatively inactive. Then the auditor goes to OPENING PROCEDURE above and continues through the steps. But now he takes a new assessment and proceeds exactly as before. “Places where would be safe” is Universe Processing. “Things does not own” is Ownership Processing. No variations of command of any kind whatsoever should be used by the auditor as these are not dichotomies and variation can be very hard on the preclear, even making him ill. The auditor should add “The spirit of Man”, “The spirit of Woman”, God, and the body. STUDY THIS PROCESS WELL BEFORE USING IT. DO NOT DEPART FROM IT OR VARY IT UNTIL PRECLEAR IS STABLY EXTERIORIZED. THE ACTUAL GOAL OF THIS PROCESS IS TO BRING THE PRECLEAR TO TOLERATE ANY VIEWPOINT.


L. RON HUBBARD


LRH:- jh
Copyright (©) 1954
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

T H E J O U R N A L O F
SCIENTOLOGY

Issue 28-G [1954, ca. mid-April]

Published by
The Hubbard Association of Scientologists, Inc.
Phoenix, Arizona


Scientology: A New Science


L. Ron Hubbard

1954 INTRODUCTION

Scientology: A New Science was written by L. Ron Hubbard in 1947 fifteen years after he began his studies of the mind, and was the manuscript offered to such organizations as the American Medical Association and the American Psychiatric Association. Instead of being accepted by these organizations, this thesis was accepted broadly by the public at large. Tens of thousands of copies of it have been circulated all over the world, mostly by the public itself, duplicating it, mimeographing it, even typing it with many carbons.
The basic science was named “Scientology” in 1938. In 1947 L. Ron Hubbard changed its name to “Dianetics” in order to make a social test of publication and popularity. That test completed, in 1952 he changed the science back to its original name, SCIENTOLOGY. This was done to inhibit its being monopolized for private purposes.
This work in its first manuscript form was called Scientology: A New Science. This was changed soon by L. Ron Hubbard to Abnormal Dianetics for offerance to the medical profession.
The first article, “Dianetics: The Evolution of a Science,” appeared months afterward [May, 1950 in the United States; June, 1950 in England, in Astounding Science Fiction Magazine].
It was in May of 1950 that Dianetics: The Modern Science of Mental Health was published. Although the latter is widely known as “the first book,” A New Science actually holds that honor by three years.
Seven years after its first appearence, Scientology: A New Science is issued again for its historical importance, its simplicity and its usefulness to those studying the evolution of the science itself. It is very simple and workable even in the early form presented here.

_____________________________

[For the full text of Scientology: A New Science, read the book under its current title, Dianetics: The Original Thesis by L. Ron Hubbard. The only difference in the text is that the above article used the word “Scientology” in place of “Dianetics.”—Editor, 1975]





Copyright (©) 1951 ,1954 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.

P.A.B. No. 24
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR’S BULLETIN

From L. RON HUBBARD

Via Hubbard Communications Office
163 Holland Park Avenue, London W.11

_____________________________________________________________________

16 April 1954

CERTAINTY OF EXTERIORIZATION


Are they exteriorized?

Perhaps one never appreciates the benefits which result from exteriorization until he runs, with a case which has been exteriorized, a drill of exteriorization-interiorization with solid objects. This step, the principles and operation of which will be covered in an early PAB in greater detail, demonstrates the great difference which can be achieved in a preclear who is made able at last to exteriorize from and interiorize into any and all objects and spaces at will.

An individual has to have, as long as he believes objects can be forced upon him and pushed around him—whatever his own determinism on the matter may be.

After a thetan has been unable to separate himself from a group or object for a considerable length of time he begins to believe that whatever it is is something he must have. He will then figure-figure a reason why he has this object.

After a thetan has been a body for a long period of time, he believes he cannot separate himself from a body, and believes, therefore, that he has to have a body. He will then add many reasons why he has to have a body.

Reasons always follow the fact. The fact occurs, and then purposes are originated in order to account for the fact. Explanations ensue from incidents. Necessities in havingness ensue from possession.

If an individual has to have something, it is certain that he has once possessed the object or one similar to it, or he is in the valence of something which has to have the object.

Contrary to all the rationale connected therewith, all possession derives on the basis of “Now that I’ve got it, what can I do with it?” “Now that I am doing something with it, I have to have it.”

The basics of this are contained in the Theta-MEST theory. This was the original theory of somethingness-nothingness. A thetan, being nothing, attempts to achieve nothingnesses. A body, being something, attempts to achieve somethingnesses.

The effort of a body to achieve somethingnesses continues long and arduously even into the field of reason. The effort to achieve somethingnesses includes “having to have a reason for.”

A person who is firmly convinced he is a body and is therefore being a body always has to have a reason for or a significance. Hence we get figure-figure-figure.

Copyright (©) 1954 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.

Given a fact, there must always be a reason for the fact. Thus there must be other facts. And in this wise we get somethingness adding up to greater somethingnesses. In the case of the thetan we get a continuous effort to knock out the somethingnesses and achieve greater simplicities or nothingnesses. Basically this is a problem in communication. A perfect communication demands that that which is sent from the source point must be duplicated perfectly at the receipt point. The graph of communication is therefore C- - - E. Here we have cause, a distance, and effect. A perfect communication would be one which found at the E point a perfect duplication of that impulse or particle which emanated from the C point. It should be very plain, then, that communication is, in a purity, a complete duplication.

Any communication resulting from a cause point which has no form, if perfectly duplicated, would contain as an integral part of its message “no form.” Thus at the effect point of the communication line one would discover the message to be without form. Thus the impulse of the thetan in communicating is to make no form. In other words, being a nothingness so far as form is concerned, if balked in communicating one way and another, the thetan would eventually become obsessed with the idea of having no form at any effect point he was trying to reach.

Similarly, when there is a mass at the cause point of a communication line, the effect point would be expected by the cause point then to have mass. In other words, a body talking to a nothingness would tend, if it became obsessed upon the subject, to become upset because there was no mass at the effect point of its communication line. A thetan would tend to become upset if there continued to be a mass at the effect point of his communication line.

Completely rational behavior naturally permits a nothingness to communicate to a somethingness and a somethingness to communicate to a nothingness, a nothingness to communicate to a nothingness and a somethingness to communicate to a somethingness. These, being all possible combinations so far as mass and communication are concerned, are of course the requisites if anybody is to have a free feeling about communication itself.

Let us take, though, the case of a body obsessively communicating with a spirit. Here we have John Doe addressing a nothingness. John Doe believes he is a mass, therefore he seeks to give all of his communication mass. He continually seeks to communicate with a no-mass at the effect point. Inevitably he will begin to believe that there is something wrong with his communication since no mass appears at the effect point. Talking to God, John Doe would be most pleased if God were to step forward in a massive form, for this would be a more or less perfect communication. But John Doe, going on talking to God without God appearing, will eventually become obsessed and will believe, then, that he cannot communicate. Believing he cannot communicate, he believes that the line is now reversed and that the cause point is at the nothingness and the effect point is at himself. Therefore he will seek to become a nothingness. A nothingness will be communicating with John Doe. And this will make it necessary for John Doe to achieve a no-mass state if the communication is to be perfect. Thus John Doe could liberally interpret this communication system in various ways, and the least of his interpretations would be that he was unworthy or degraded, or that he should repent or abase himself—which is to say in all cases become nothing by the common interpretation of nothing.

But let us say that John Doe is totally aware of himself as a thetan. He begins to communicate to a mass such as an idol or a body or some other solid object. If he continued such a communication line without realizing the fundamentals of communication, he would soon begin to expect a nothingness to appear where the idol or the body or other mass was. The persistence of the mass at the E point would make Doe feel that he had never communicated. He would therefore believe that his power to

communicate was less, and he would believe that he therefore must become something. Thus he steps out of the role of being cause and becomes an effect on this communication line. This, at the very least, would tend to interiorize John Doe, the thetan, into the mass he was trying to communicate with, for he would not consider himself capable of reaching the distance necessary to communicate and would believe that this mass, now considered to be senior to himself, would have the power to reach him; therefore he would interiorize.

These, basically, are the mechanisms of communication. But they are also the mechanisms of interiorization-exteriorization. Duplication, you see here, is the effort. And duplication becomes the effort solely because communication is the effort. When a being loses grip on these principles he is then in for considerable trouble, for he will find himself unable in this universe to achieve a perfect duplication and so will be unable to achieve a perfect communication.

Now let us take this matter and apply it to auditors, and let us discover that an auditor who is not himself exteriorized and who still believes that he is a somethingness would actually feel thwarted and unsuccessful if he achieved an exteriorization on a preclear. His effort would be to continue to make something of the preclear, in other words a mass of the preclear. That the preclear was still interiorized would be gratifying to an auditor who is not exteriorized. You should see this very easily, then, that an auditor who is not exteriorized and who has no actual subjective proof of exteriorization would, whether he knew it or not, work towards more thoroughly interiorizing the preclear. In other words, he would continue to try to have something at the E point of the communication line between auditor and preclear. The auditor being something auditing from source point would attempt to gratify his desire for a perfect communication to have something always at the effect point.

Similarly, an auditor who was exteriorized would find it more or less intolerable, if he had forgotten these principles and had become obsessed about communication, that the preclear’s body continued to sit there in the auditing chair.

In either of these cases, a conflict may possibly arise and the theta clear and the auditor still interiorized might alike (forgetting these principles) dispute whether or not the preclear was exteriorized, since either one of them would find fault with the preclear’s condition. The basic fault that they would be finding, in the case of the theta clear auditing, would be that the preclear’s body continued to be there, and in the case of the person not yet exteriorized, that the preclear maintained that he was not any longer there and was not in his body. An auditor, then, whether a theta clear or one still thoroughly interiorized, is likely to raise a very large point over exteriorization itself. This point would rise to the same violence that the individual himself would feel toward communication itself. If an individual, whether exteriorized or interiorized, has any arduous or frantic feeling about communication, he is likely to manifest that arduousness or franticness on the exact point of “Are they exteriorized?”

If any damage is to result in auditing it will be on the lines of invalidation of the certainty of exteriorization. By invalidating this, particularly to a preclear who has just achieved it, one is complementing thoroughly a continuous communication problem of the preclear; which is to say, he is a nothingness continuously in communication with somethingness. In order to remain cause on this communication line, and in order to be an effect and relaxed about it, the preclear has to attain a considerable serenity on the subject of being a nothingness trying to communicate with somethingnesses. People who are still interiorized have lost that serenity and find the communication with a nothingness intolerable.

Only an auditor who is ignorant of these principles and is still obsessed on the subject of communication would make the effort of invalidating exteriorization on the preclear’s part a major activity.

How can you tell if they are exteriorized? The most recent and delicate E-Meters will register the fact. But much more than this, DOES THE PRECLEAR KNOW HE IS EXTERIORIZED? This last is the only true test. By questioning his certainty and by beating him into an uncertainty, one has undone a considerable amount of his knowingness.

L. RON HUBBARD

































SPECIAL GROUP PROCESSING SESSIONS
Phoenix, Arizona
21 April 1954


On Wednesday, 21 April 1954, L. Ron Hubbard gave the following special Group Processing Sessions in Phoenix, Arizona:


* 5404C21 GP Spec-1 Exteriorization and Stabilization
5404C21 GP Spec-2 Exteriorization and Stabilization (cont.)
* 5404C21 GP Spec-3 Remedy of Havingness
5404C21 GP Spec-4 Remedy of Havingness (cont.)
* 5404C21 GP Spec-5 Certainty Assessment on All Dynamics
* 5404C21 GP Spec-6 Processing on Certainty
* 5404C21 GP Spec-7 Universes: Assessment
5404C21 GP Spec-8 Universes: Assessment (cont.)

P.A.B. No. 25
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR’S BULLETIN

From L. RON HUBBARD

Via Hubbard Communications Office
163 Holland Park Avenue, London W.11

_____________________________________________________________________

30 April 1954

BASIC PROCEDURES


There are several processes in use by professional auditors at this time which reach into and resolve even those cases which we used to consider difficult. As I have developed these one after another, I have discovered that each one missed on a small percentage of cases. A combination of these processes which I organized while teaching the Advanced Clinical Courses is apparently achieving, in the hands of capable auditors, the uniform resolution.

The auditor should realize something about case percentages. About twenty-two percent of all cases, which is to say all people, resolve, at least partially, with the application of almost any process Man has ever had. A new drug, a new tom-tom, a new god, anything serves to right any wrongness in these cases. Witch doctoring, medicine, psychoanalysis, when they advance case histories, normally have selected from this twenty-two percent. But then this twenty-two percent would have resolved on any process.

The first major break-out from this percentage was evidently Dianetics. Here we advanced sweepingly up to fifty percent. The first treatise on Scientology written in 1947 and entitled Scientology: A New Science (Issue 28-G, Journal of Scientology [Dianetics: The Original Thesis] ) contains within it sufficient know-how to attain this fifty percent resolution. This percentage was bettered somewhat by Dianetics: The Modern Science of Mental Health, Science of Survival, Handbook for Preclears and Advanced Procedure and Axioms (all but Science of Survival available from the HAS).

On my discovery and use of the first exteriorization techniques it was found that the same fifty percent who would respond to Dianetics easily would exteriorize almost immediately. The effort of Standard Operating Procedures from 1952 forward was to better this percentage in the hands of a competent auditor.

In the hands of most auditors, SOP-8 still left more than ten percent of the cases unsolved.

By continuing to work while instructing the Advanced Clinical Units, and particularly through the discoveries of the basic principles of communication itself, I evolved SOP-8-C (Journal of Scientology, Issue 24-G, available from the HAS, 806 North Third Street, Phoenix, Arizona, 50¢). According to reports which continue to be received from auditors, any honest application of SOP-8-C resolves extremely difficult cases as well as very easy cases. The reason for this is that SOP-8-C reaches closer to truth, which is the reason for any efficacy in processes. SOP-8-C takes into account very fully the fact that the ability of a thetan to make postulates is senior to his concerns over space, energy and objects. In fact, so far as the thetan is concerned, all he has is an ability to make postulates. Certain postulates, agreed upon, have apparently become the various universes we know about. That certain of the postulates became “solid” is

Copyright (©)1954 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.

no reason that the thetan is incapable of making other postulates. The conclusions forced upon him by objects, energy and space are not the only conclusions there are, and these conclusions do not make the thetan junior to objects, energy and space. Thus we could study the behavior of space, energy and objects for a very long time indeed without freeing our preclear.

However, the percentage of cases who do not resolve easily have to have addressed in them the problem of havingness—which is to say, the problems of objects, energies and spaces. We also discover now that we are reaching a much higher state with those on whom the techniques originally worked. Our problem has been heightened by the fact that we are achieving states which are greatly superior to any states ever achieved by any therapy in the past. By reaching up toward higher states of beingness, we are actually exceeding our original proposition that we were trying to make men well. However, if these states are there to be reached then they should be reached, for unless we reach them our preclear cannot be guaranteed to be stable for the many decades to come. Thus our goals are now higher levels and greater stability.

In an effort to achieve these goals, I have been combining the most effective processes I know into an operating procedure called Unit IV Procedure.* This process, that is to say combination of processes, does not exceed the proposition that the thetan operates on postulates and does not exceed SOP-8-C. It simply reaches deeper into the strata of preclears available to an auditor’s skill.

The keynote of any process is the skill of its application. Processes applied with variation are usually applied without knowledge of the background of the process. The safest way to apply a process is exactly as set forth. Of course, persons who are not yet exteriorized and who are not relaxed about communication will inevitably take a simple process and try to make it more complicated. In this effort it is quite commonly made ineffective. Processes are as good as they are simple. The direction toward simplicity is the direction toward nothingness. It happens, in life, to be the direction of workability because the individual himself is a static without mass or place in time. Thus, truly a very basic simplicity. Auditors who try to multiply and complicate processes are auditors who have not themselves been properly processed and who are not free from communication compulsions. The existence of these auditors and their twisted use of processes is responsible in large measure for their inability to obtain results with the processes.

Should auditors who have been having difficulty with cases simply take Issue 24-G of the Journal of Scientology and use exactly it as set forth, they would discover that their preclears whom they considered difficult would become extremely easy to work and would become theta clears.

In view of the fact that 8-C will achieve this result in competent hands and in view of the fact that it is very easily applied, one would seem to need no further advance in Scientology. But there are two problems into which a preclear can fall which are not immediately resolved by 8-C. These are the problems of BEINGNESS and UNIVERSES.

The preclear who is difficult to process is not in contact any more with his own universe. And the auditor processing him is actually processing the universe of somebody else for the preclear.

There is a rule involved in universes to which an auditor must pay attention, and that is that the universe is subject to the postulates of the god of that universe. In other


[*Refers to the 4th American Advanced Clinical Course, held February 15—March 26, 1954, in Phoenix, Arizona, see page 25.]

words, in the case of mother’s universe, mother’s postulates are effective and the preclear’s postulates are not. When a preclear has closed terminals with and is existing in mother’s universe (even though mother has been dead for fifty years) he is not operating on his own postulates. Therefore a technique which immediately and intimately approaches postulates, where it encounters somebody deeply enmeshed in somebody else’s universe, of course has limited workability.

In the case of Beingness Processing we find that preclears are very often being things. A preclear who is being a bedpost may act perfectly rational but at the same time will think much as a bedpost thinks—which is not at all—and will have some flaw connected with trying to act with and use the characteristics of somethingness which he is compulsively being. A preclear who is in good condition can be anything at will. A preclear who is in poor condition waits for the environment to give him consent to be something or actually succumbs to the fact that the environment wants him to be something. Here again we have a failure of postulates, since a bedpost does not make very good postulates.

Unit IV Procedure handles such problems and includes within it as well many of the drills which swiftly heighten the awareness and ability of the preclear. Unit IV Procedure includes SOP-8-C in its entirety, but is an extension of other workable processes which I have used to free individuals.

As the first requisite of auditing is a communication line and as the worst thing wrong with a preclear is his communication system, it will be discovered that the earliest processes to be used are those of getting a preclear into communication. In view of the fact that his communication probably reverses on the principle of duplication (see last PAB), the auditor will often discover that the preclear is changing or altering or reversing directions given to him. This is an immediate failure on the part of communication, not on the part of the process being used. There is an additional process which remedies this fairly well, and that is the handling of machines which reverse communications. One simply tells the preclear to do one thing, and has the preclear consciously do something else until the machine is keyed out. As an example, one tells the preclear to lift his right hand and the preclear consciously having heard the command, walks across and lays his left hand on the table. This done for a considerable length of time will throw out of existence the command reversal machinery of the preclear. This is actually an integral part of Opening Procedure as contained in SOP-8-C, but is not covered in 24-G.

Auditor competence is the keynote in handling any process. But auditor competence depends upon the auditor being able to receive and give forth a process as it has been found to work. Thus we are apt to find difficulty with certain auditors simply in that they do not deliver the processes which are placed in their view. They take these processes, complicate them, and obeying some communication obsession or compulsion seek to make more of the preclear instead of exteriorizing him, or seek to make nothing of the preclear where the preclear is perfectly entitled to have something.

There is no question about the workability of Scientology in the hands of those trained in the Advanced Clinical Course. Nor is there any question of its workability in the hands of those who audit straightforwardly from the material presented. But there is a question of the workability of Scientology when a case which cannot receive a communication complicates or deranges some process and then delivers it in such a way as to complicate the case of a preclear.

Auditors have many explanations when they do this, and amongst these explanations is the fact that they do not like “to be a follower.” These people are under the delusion that I have “invented” Scientology and that “Hubbard’s theories and ideas” are Hubbard’s. Scientology happens to be a description born out of twenty-five years

of investigation of how life and universes are put together. It is a description of a great deal of observation. There have been discoveries, yes, on the order of somebody suddenly seeing a mountain and telling somebody else about it. In addition to this description, a communication system has been originated in order to bring home to the preclear the truth of a situation so that by recognizing it he may alter it. One can only be lost in puzzles. A puzzle fully described ceases to be a puzzle.

It can be said now that a hundred percent of the cases are solvable given competent and interested address to the problem. Some cases take longer than others, depending upon how thoroughly mired down a case may be. Because of the time factor—wherein an auditor refuses to audit a case for fifty or eighty hours in order to remedy a psychosis—a percentage of non-solution will continue to result. But in eighty percent of the cases today we are auditing on an auditing span of twelve to fifteen hours where a competent auditor is involved. And there is a finite end to any case, a fact which I have been consistently demonstrating, and which Advanced Clinical Course people have been consistently demonstrating, for many months. However, in that one cannot force people (and there is no reason whatever to force people) to stay with cases as long as they remain unsolved, it can be expected that cases which go above twenty or thirty hours of auditing time will tend to remain unfinished. This does not, however, mean that such cases will not have received all those benefits which were ever expected from psychotherapy. For a competent auditor can achieve these with any case now in a dozen or two hours whether he finishes the case off to operating thetan or not.

We have arrived at the goal of operating thetan where we consistently strove forward to that goal. But more important, we have reached and passed any goal psychotherapy ever entertained as much as a year ago. Those goals on which we are now working with preclears so far exceed any goal set by Man that it is not fair to call Scientology any more a developing science, for we are well above the level of science and we are working with the factors which create sciences.

In subsequent PABs I will set forward the various steps of Unit IV Procedure, some of which can be self-audited. Seeing that Scientology can embrace a science, a religion, a psychotherapy, one of the wittier DScns recently invented Scientocracy, which is “Government of the people, by the thetans.”

L. RON HUBBARD

VIEWPOINT STRAIGHT WIRE

May 3, 1954


These questions, with small variation, are put to the preclear without regard to his anxiety or concern and without directing his attention to specific types of activity. Just these questions are used.

The goal of this process is to bring the preclear to tolerance of any and all viewpoints in any universe.


What question wouldn’t you mind asking?
What question wouldn’t you mind another (others) asking?

What wouldn’t you mind knowing?
What wouldn’t you mind another (others) knowing?

What wouldn’t you mind looking at?
What wouldn’t you mind another (others) looking at?

What emotion wouldn’t you mind observing?
What emotion wouldn’t you mind another (others) observing?

What emotion wouldn’t you mind experiencing?
What emotion wouldn’t you mind another (others) experiencing?

What effort wouldn’t you mind observing?
What effort wouldn’t you mind another (others) observing?

What effort wouldn’t you mind experiencing?
What effort wouldn’t you mind another (others) experiencing?

What wouldn’t you mind thinking about?
What wouldn’t you mind another (others) thinking about?

What symbol wouldn’t you mind observing?
What symbol wouldn’t you mind another (others) observing?

What eatingness wouldn’t you mind viewing?
What eatingness wouldn’t you mind another (others) viewing?

What wouldn’t you mind eating?
What wouldn’t you mind another (others) eating?

What sexual activity wouldn’t you mind observing?
What sexual activity wouldn’t you mind another (others) observing?

What sexual activity wouldn’t you mind experiencing?
What sexual activity wouldn’t you mind another (others) experiencing?

What sound wouldn’t you mind hearing?
What sound wouldn’t you mind another (others) hearing?

What motion wouldn’t you mind observing?
What motion wouldn’t you mind another (others) observing?

What (who) would it be all right to like?
What (who) would it be all right for another (others) to like?

What (who) would it be all right for you to dislike?
What (who) would it be all right for another (others) to dislike?

What (who) would it be all right for you to agree with?
What (who) would it be all right for another (others) to agree with?

What (who) would it be all right for you to disagree with?
What (who) would it be all right for another (others) to disagree with?

What (who) would it be all right for you to communicate with?
What (who) would it be all right for another (others) to communicate with?

What (who) would it be all right for you to refuse to communicate with?
What (who) would it be all right for another (others) to refuse to communicate with?

What would it be all right for you to remain ignorant of?
What would it be all right for another (others) to remain ignorant of?


Use each question many times.

Observe Auditor’s Code.

Preserve Two Way Communication with preclears.

Observe Communication lag.

If Communication lag unchanged, go to next set of questions.

Don’t make this process more complicated.

Don’t change to SOPs until case completely able on Viewpoint Straight Wire, has full recalls and is exteriorized with excellent perception and sense of location.


L. RON HUBBARD
LRH :-.rd Copyright (©) 1954
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED









PUBLIC LECTURE SERIES
Phoenix, Arizona
5 May—5 June 1954


L. Ron Hubbard gave the following Public Lectures in Phoenix, Arizona, in 1954:


* * 5405C05A PLS-1 Efficacy of Processes
* 5405C05B PLS-1 Remedying ReasonsWhy
* 5405C05C PLS-2 Rundown of Processes
* * 5406C05D PLS-3 Human Evaluation



6TH AMERICAN ADVANCED CLINICAL COURSE LECTURES
Phoenix, Arizona
10May—18June 1954


The 6th American Advanced Clinical Course began in Phoenix on Monday, May 10th, and ended on June 18, 1954, with time out June 5-8 for the Universe Process Congress (see page 59). L. Ron Hubbard gave the following lectures and group processes, including the Procedure 30 Series, to the 6th ACC:


* 5405C10 6ACC-1 Introduction, Materials and Publications
** 5405C11 6ACC-2 Affinity, Reality, Communication
* 5405C11 6ACC-3 Significance, Symbols, Orientation
5405C11 6ACC Goals of Scientology in Processing
* 5405C12 6ACC-4 Goal of the Auditor
* 5405C12 6ACC-5 Basic Definitions
** 5405C13 6ACC-6 Definition: Cycle of Action and Time
5405C13 6ACC-7 SOP-8C by Definitions
* 5405C14 6ACC-8 Randomity, Beingness
* 5405C 14 6ACC-9 Remedy of Havingness
* 5405C17 6ACC-10 Simple Processes, Specifics
** 5405C17 6ACC-11 Simple Processes Summary
* 5405C18 6ACC-12 Barriers
** 5405C18 6ACC-13 Barriers, Processing of; PTP, Help
* 5405C19 6ACC-14 Third Dynamics
** 5405C19 6ACC-14A Communication and the Dynamics
5405C19 6ACC-15 Imagination, Viewpoint Processes
5405C20 6ACC-16 How to Put Procedure Together
** 5405C20 6ACC-17 Definitions A-R-C
* 5405C20 6ACC-17A First Dynamic
* 5405C21 6ACC-18 Consideration and Intention
** 5405C21 6ACC-19 Seminar
** 5405C24 6ACC-20 Conduct of the Auditor, Communication Lag
** 5405C25 6ACC-21 Conduct of the Auditor, Older Therapies
** 5405C25 6ACC-21A Connecting Point Between Older Therapies and Auditing
* 5405C25 6ACC-22A Valences
* 5405C25 6ACC-22B Beingness Processing
* 5405C26 6ACC-23A Third Dynamic ARC
* 5405C26 6ACC-23B Command Process
5405C26 6ACC-24 Practical Aspects of Auditing
5405C27 6ACC-25 How to Do Viewpoint Straightwire
* 5405C27 6ACC-26 Demo Session
* 5405C28 6ACC-27 Demo Session
* 5405C28 6ACC-28 SOP-8D With Wheel, Know to Sex Scale

** 5405C28 6ACC-28A Know to Sex Scale
5405C31 6ACC-29 Processing of Problems: Theta-MEST Theory
5405C31 6ACC-29A Processing Attention, Beingness
* 5405C31 6ACC-30 Procedure 30 Series: Granting Beingness
* 5405C31 6ACC-30A Procedure 30 Series: Issue I
* 5406C01 6ACC-31 Procedure 30 Series: Op Pro by Dup
** 5406C01 6ACC-31A Problems
* 5406C01 6ACC-32 Procedure 30 Series: Granting Beingness;
also issued as PRO-21—Granting Beingness
* 5406C02 6ACC-33 When to Use Procedure 30
* 5406C02 6ACC-33A Procedure 30 Series: How to Process a Case
5406C02 6ACC-34 Procedure 30 Series: Granting Beingness
5406C03 6ACC-35 Study of Man: Demo of Procedure 30
5406C03 6ACC-36 Consideration: Time, Beginning and End
** 5406C04 6ACC-37 Know to Sex Scale: The Mind and the Tone Scale
5406C04 6ACC-38 Imagination and Abilities
5406C09 6ACC-39 Energy: Distractions of
5406C10 6ACC-40 Basic Elements of Scientology
** 5406C11 6ACC-41 Procedure 30: Handling of Cases
5406C11 6ACC-41A Processing Solutions: Procedure 30, Issue lll
5406C11 6ACC-42 Basic Impulses
5406C11 6ACC-42A Basic Impulses (cont.)
5406C12 LECTURE Ron’s Life
5406C14 6ACC-43 General Lecture: Anchor Points, Viewpoints
5406C14 6ACC-44 Energy Machines, Survival
5406C15 6ACC-45 Functional Processes
** 5406C15 6ACC-45A Types and Forms of Commands
5406C15 6ACC-46 Dependency
5406C16 6ACC-47 Capabilities of Thetan
** 5406C16 6ACC-48 Contact with the Public
5406C17 6ACC-49 Betrayal, Ridicule, the Game Cycle
** 5406C17 6ACC-50A Assists—Part 1
* 5406C17 6ACC-50B Assists—Part 2
5406C18 6ACC-51 Summary: Training Processing
5406C18 6ACC-52 Certificates and Degrees

UNIVERSE PROCESSES CONGRESS LECTURES
Phoenix, Arizona
5—8 June 1954


The Universe Processes Congress (also called the Fourth International Congress of Dianeticists and Scientologists) was held in Phoenix, Arizona, June 5 through 8, 1954. The delegates received fourteen hours of lectures and group processing from L. Ron Hubbard.

Seminar leaders group processed attendees from the Group Auditor’s Handbook (first volume) which was introduced at the Congress. Condensing all the successful processes developed by L. Ron Hubbard in the previous Advanced Clinical Courses and tested extensively before its final codification, it contained ten action-packed group sessions in its 59 informative pages, as well as instructions for use.


* 5406C05 UPC-1 Opening Lecture—History of Dianetics and Scientology
* 5406C05 UPC-2 Procedure 30—Duplication
* 5406C05 UPC-3 Theta-MEST Theory—Tone Scale, Freedom, Space, etc.
* 5406C06 UPC-4 Group Processes: Procedure 30, Step 1
Opening Procedure by Duplication; also issued as PRO-19
* 5406C06 UPC-5 Lecture and Processing
** 5406C06 UPC-6 Group Processing (Look at that Object)
* 5406C07 UPC-7 Scientology Workbook—Journal of Scientology 31-G
* 5406C07 UPC-8 Processing Procedure 30, Step 3 (Granting of
Beingness) Session I
* 5406C07 UPC-9 Processing (Granting of Beingness) Session ll
** 5406C07 UPC-10 Group Processing (What Do—Didn’t Have)
* 5406C07 UPC-11 Theta-MEST Theory—Being a Problem Aspect
** 5406C08 UPC-12 Group Processing (Solution to Something)
* 5406C08 UPC-13 Processes of Exteriorization
** 5406C08 UPC-14 Group Processing (Straight Exteriorization Process)

GROUP AUDITOR’S HANDBOOK
by L. Ron Hubbard

Published June 1954

The Group Auditor’s Handbook, Volume One, was released in June, 1954, at the Universe Processes Congress given in Phoenix, Arizona, where it was made available to delegates and used by Seminar Leaders.

Condensing all the successful processes developed by L. Ron Hubbard in the Advanced Clinical Courses and tested extensively before its final codification, the Group Auditor’s Handbook, Volume One, contains ten action-packed sessions in its fifty-nine informative pages

Complete with instructions for use, the Handbook contains everything from Group Opening Procedure to the remedy of boredom.

The Group Auditor’s Handbook, Volume One, was also designed to be used individually by co-auditors, but was not intended for use on children.

Because of the tremendous popularity and success of the first Group Auditor’s Handbook, a second volume was published in early September, 1954. It contained eleven more complete sessions, including group techniques tested and developed after the publication of Volume One.

Group Auditor’s Handbook, Volume Two, contained more Opening Procedures and basic case opening processes than Volume One, and used before Volume One, made it possible to take full advantage of Volume One processes to get best results.

Although out of print and generally unavailable today, the original Group Processing Session tapes, from which these books were compiled, can be obtained directly from Scientology Publications Organization, Jernbanegade 6,1608 Copenhagen V, Denmark.

P.A.B. No. 28
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR’S BULLETIN

From L. RON HUBBARD
Via Hubbard Communications Office
163 Holland Park Avenue, London W.11

_____________________________________________________________________

11 June 1954


Mr. D. M. Clouston, President
The John Howard Society
St. John’s, Newfoundland

My dear Mr. Clouston:

I wish to thank you for your forceful letter on the subject of your testimony as it may be given before a Royal Commission of Canada on the subjects of “Insanity as a Defense” and “Criminal Sexual Psychopaths.”

You state that the Royal Commission of Canada has been set up for the purpose of inquiring into and reporting upon two questions:

1. Whether there should be any amendment to the Criminal Law of Canada relating to “Insanity as a Defense.”

2. Whether there should be any amendment to the existing Laws of Canada relating to “Criminal Sexual Psychopaths.”

As I understand it, you intend to advance the fact that only a trained therapist with those detectors which may be at his disposal is competent to make a fair analysis of a person’s degree of sanity and in the second case that you intend that, for arbitrary punishment now being imposed, periods of detention should be set during which the prisoner should receive therapeutic treatment (preferably Scientological) and discharged only when found free from the criminal tendencies for which he was detained.

It is very encouraging that a Royal Commission should see fit to inquire into these ranges of justice, and it is quite heartening to find that it would invite a man of your caliber to express his views. It may be that something definite may emerge from this and it would appear to be a very hopeful view.

You asked me whether or not I think your approach is sound and invited appropriate suggestions as I may care to make. And I wish to thank you for this opportunity and your courtesy.

On page 401 of Dianetics: The Modern Science of Mental Health there begins a three-page essay on “Judiciary Dianetics” with which, I believe from your letter, you seem to have some acquaintance.

For whatever they may be worth to you, may I give you my general comments on this matter.

The whole subject of “insanity” in law is adrift since it is a chip launched into the already existing definition of criminality. Any confusion as to where to place insanity

Copyright (©)1954 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.

in law comes about through the basic definition in law itself of insanity and criminality.

Law defines criminality more or less as “action despite knowledge of right and wrong” and “insanity” as an inability to differentiate between right and wrong. If law is based upon the idea that all people are selfish and self-centered, then we can differentiate between criminality and insanity. But if law were to consider Man a social animal, basically it would have to consider that any act which was intentionally harmful would stem from a frame of mind which omitted differentiation of right from wrong. No man, in other words, who was sane in the fullest sense of the word would be motivated by actions which victimized his group or community since he would realize that he, with the others, would suffer for these activities. And even in a practical sense it is apparent that the thief in committing criminal acts strengthens the necessary force of law in the area and so further inhibits his own freedom.

This is a problem, mainly, of the degree of enlightenment of law itself. It is a matter of what standard the law or the society, the will of which is represented by the law, is willing to recognize—a higher standard of conduct than that enforced by law these many years past. Society is more and more inclined toward the understanding of criminality as “antisocial.”

Jurisprudence may content itself to remain with its definition that insanity is the inability to differentiate right from wrong. But this view may be broadened through such inquiries as that of the Royal Commission and by the public’s own pressure, which actually such a Commission represents, to account insanity as, simply, the inability to differentiate.

In the United States certain patterns of thought of recent years have obstructed the growth of justice. Chief amongst these has been a dwelling upon the “criminal mind” as a mind which is strangely distinct and different from the minds of others who are not criminal. But a slightly clearer view should demonstrate that even the “criminal mind” falls within law’s own definition for insanity: the inability to differentiate right from wrong. It is obviously wrong for a being to harm his own species, his own group, his own society. Therefore, a being who would commit harmful acts is not differentiating between right and wrong and must at least savor of insanity.

Here we have a problem of “where to draw the line.” At what point does an individual cease to be sane and become criminal? At what point, then, does he cease to be criminal and become insane? Custom from which law itself was born has long proposed the solution to this problem in its own definition for insanity.

In order to classify criminals, we would have to classify crime. We would discover that crime was subdivided into accidental and intentional crime. Society punishes crime only when it considers the crime to be intentional. If the crime is intentional, then the intent also included the intention of harming the society. Thus a criminal action, by a broad sweep, could be said to be an insane action—and all within the definition of law itself. It could be defined that when a man descends to intentionally harmful action against his fellow he has descended at least into the upper band of insanity. Law could cleave open a path for itself by applying the classification of “insane” to criminals. In view of the fact that past systems of punishment have not reformed criminality or abated it, law seems more inclined to take this view and would take it could it be demonstrated to them that this inability to differentiate right from wrong could be altered to the betterment of society. As prison systems have been found to produce even more hardened criminality than they have remedied, it is entirely possible that law might comfortably entertain a change of view on the subject and treat criminals for what they are: mentally deranged persons.


With this other choice law finds itself often betrayed. That choice is the permitting of criminals to escape law by reason of “insanity.” If a criminal is proven insane he is permitted, at least to some degree, to escape the penalty which would ordinarily be incurred by his act. Law, by retaining this segregation, defeats its own ends and deprives itself of its prey. Only in the face of an almost complete misunderstanding of insanity could the people engaged in government be persuaded that the label “insane” should permit criminals to escape punishment. Thus, to that degree, insanity itself seems to be feared and is tolerated.

The blunt and terrible truth is that so long as insanity can continue to be used as a defense it will invite criminals into that state of being. Further, such laws as provide an escape from punishment thus unharness the energies of many against their fellow men who would otherwise be curbed. For example, a slightly insane person by reason of his “mental state” might feel it unnecessary to obey law which actually was within his full understanding. It is far from right that law should provide an escape for the guilty on such grounds.

By concentrating its attention upon the fact that insanity, if proven, will permit a person to escape justice, law is overlooking the fact that crime apparently stems uniformly from an inability to differentiate to a degree which a sane man would ordinarily consider sane. Law is faced with the enigma of insanity as a means of thwarting justice. And thus insanity must continually be disproven in the field of criminality. Whereas, it is time that criminality be proven to be insanity. I have worked with many criminals and have been, in order to observe criminality, a police officer for a short time. And it is my very close observation that anyone subject to criminal tendencies is, in a much broader sense, insane, and that his insanity reaches much wider than the field of crime, but invades hallucination, persecution and mental disabilities which are in themselves symptoms of insanity.

The insanity of the criminal has its incidence in a conviction that the first group, the family, has no function or need for him and develops upon the recognition that the society does not want him. This is apparently the genus of that antisocialness we call criminality. The insanity is further developed by continuous association with others who are of the same conviction and who form groups, which groups are motivated by a need for revenge against the society. Current methods of punishment and police handling only deepen this conviction, and it can be said so far as jail sentences are concerned that the more punishment a criminal receives, the more insane he becomes on the very subject of his criminality. Thus the society victimizes itself by bringing from the realm of delusion into the starkness of reality the fact that the individual is not wanted by any of his fellows save a few of his most intimate associates. By joining hands in their thirst for revenge against the society which rejects them, these criminals then form societies of their own. And the final result of this dwindling spiral is the deterioration of the society as a whole under duress of laws which, seeking to repress the few, suppress the many. Without such criminal gangs people such as Hitler, who depended utterly upon them for his ascent to power, would themselves be powerless. Thus the subject of criminality moves intimately into the field of government.

We might find then that insanity should be prohibited as a defense, but that at the same time all criminality defined as intentional harm against the society should be classified as a greater or lesser extent of insanity and that the criminal should be, as you suggest, uniformly detained for treatment. And we find also, as we examine this problem and see the disastrous effects of early and unqualified releases from prison upon the society, that a criminal should be detained until it could be ascertained with great certainty that he would not further victimize the society. This last strikes directly at the parole system which is an unhappy one at best, and would make it the complete responsibility of parole boards to insure the society against further criminal acts on the part of the released prisoner.

In the absence of a remedying treatment and practical means to effect it, such a course as this would be considered inhuman in the extreme. Even a hardened judge might recoil from the idea that insanity should never be used as a defense, and the intention to incarcerate criminals for their lifetime, if necessary to insure society against their depredations. These are very strong measures.

Today, however, several experiments have demonstrated that treatment for criminality can be administered at very little cost to the state. This cost is as small as a few cents per prisoner. By means of group processing a great deal has been done in this field. The treatment itself is administered by magnetic tape recordings. The problem could not have been solved as long as individual application of therapy remained a necessity by reason of technology. But with the advance of group processing, the majority of criminals could be rehabilitated and freed by parole boards using sanity as their criteria without injury to the society. Even though this processing would not be effective upon all criminals to which it was administered, according to present standards and practices, it would at least be effective upon the majority.

With regard to the second part of the purposes of the Royal Commission of Canada, it is my own opinion that laws relating to “Criminal Sexual Psychopaths” should be no different from laws relating to other criminalities. For the sexual psychopath, as Sigmund Freud long ago recognized, is a mentally ill person.

In both these matters, we find the law capable of advancing to the degree that it is willing to accept its responsibility to the society at large. It is the purpose and function of law to safeguard the citizens of the society against the depredations or criminal practices of the few. If the law is totally responsible it would act to totally insure the citizenry against crime. This cannot be done by suppression of the citizenry at large, for this is the regulation of the many to monitor the few.

Even without Scientology, without adopting its practices, law could be far more effective in safeguarding the society as a whole simply by reclassifying what it means by “criminal” and firmly observing its own definition for “insane.” With Scientology, once it has segregated out the criminals and the insane, once it has made its purpose distinct and clear, its detention of criminals until they were once more social could be resolved by the administration of tested processes to the criminals and the release of those who had responded on a group level. This, however, is a very long view and is far too firm a stand to expect from the judiciary, as these cannot but go by the customs of the people whom they serve. A long mile could be commenced upon this road, however, by demonstrating that groups of prisoners detained in prisons could undergo individual change by a rearrangement of their ideas and by releasing those so benefitted into the society and by tracing their course until it was firmly established whether or not they had become social. With this step and with the evidence thus brought into being it might very well follow that a broad evolution in law would ensue.

I wish to thank you very much for writing me. I hope you will let me hear more about this as I am intensely interested.

My very best,

L. RON HUBBARD


7 TH AMERICAN ADVANCED CLINICAL COURSE LECTURES
Phoenix, Arizona
21 June—30 July 1954


The 7th American Advanced Clinical Course convened in Phoenix, Arizona, on June 21, 1954. This was the last, and perhaps the most memorable, in a series of seven ACCs taught by L. Ron Hubbard, one after another, with no pause between them. Tapes from this ACC, together with some from the 6th ACC, were used for the 1st London Advanced Clinical Course (Mr. Hubbard was not present for the 1st, 2nd or 3rd London ACC) held September 6—October 15, 1954.

Most of the “Professional Course, July, 1954” tapes come from this ACC and are given an additional “PRO” number, together with the PRO title if it was different. This 26 half-hour tape series was made into the book The Phoenix Lectures (see Volume Vl, page 240).

In addition, Scientology: Auditor’s Handbook including Intensive Procedure (see page 71), which appeared at the end of the 7th ACC, was designed for use by graduates of this ACC unit.

* 5406C23 7ACC-1A Opening Procedure 8C
* 5406C23 7ACC-1 B Further Uses of Opening Procedure 8C
** 5406C24 7ACC-2 Summary of Plan of Course
5406C25 7ACC-3 Review of Procedure: PTP, ARC Straightwire, Two-way
Comm
* 5406C25 7ACC-4A Opening Procedure of 8D: Demonstration
* 5406C25 7ACC-4B Opening Procedure of 8D: Demonstration (cont.)
** 5406C28 7ACC-5A Exteriorization
* 5406C28 7ACC-5B Exteriorization (cont)
* 5406C29 7ACC-6A&B General Lecture: Straightwire, Communication
** 5406C30 7ACC-7 Rundown of Essentials
5406C30 7ACC-8 Group Processing and Lecture, Something, Nothing
* 5407C01 7ACC-9 Group Processing: Communication, Duplication,
Spotting Spots
** 5407C01 7ACC-9A Communication, Duplication and Spotting Spots
5407C01 7ACC-10 Exteriorization by Distance, Cause
5407C01 7ACC-10A Exteriorization, Distance and Time
** 5407C05 7ACC-11 Things in Time and Space
5407C05 7ACC-11A A Bright Resistive Case
** 5407C05 7ACC-12 Laughter in Processing
* 5407C06 7ACC-13 Remedy of Havingness and Spotting Spots;
also issued as PRO-23
** 5407C06 7ACC-14 ARC, Time, Life and Universe
** 5407C07 7ACC-15 Intensive Procedure: Lecture 1
** 5407C07 7ACC- 1 5A Intensive Procedu re: Lectu re 2
** 5407C07 7ACC-16 Intensive Procedure: Lecture 3
5407C07 7ACC-16A Intensive Procedure: Lecture 4, Basic Processes,
Patter
** 5407C09 7ACC-17 The Nature and Effect of Communication in Games

** 5407C09 7ACC-17A Communication and Barriers in Society and the Pc
5407C12 7ACC-18 Two Types of Cases
** 5407C12 7ACC-18A Time: Havingness
5407C12 7ACC-19 Intensive Procedure: Nothing-Something
** 5407C13 7ACC- 19A Auditor’s Code in Practice
5407C14 7ACC-20 Power of Life and Death
** 5407C15 7ACC-21 The Difference Between a Good and a Bad Auditor, Part I
5407C15 7ACC-22 The Difference Between a Good and a Bad Auditor, Part ll
5407C15 7ACC-22A Training of Auditors
5407C16 7ACC-23 Teaching Formula: Duplication
** 5407C19 7ACC-24 Duplication: Religious Aspects of Scientology; also
titled—Scientology: Its General Background (Part ll
as PRO-2)
** 5407C19 7ACC-25 Scientology and Civilization; also titled—
Scientology: Its General Background (Part I and Part
111 as PRO-1 and PRO-3)
** 5407C20 7ACC-26 Bridge Between Scientology and Civilization
** 5407C20 7ACC-27A What a Student Should Know; also issued as PRO-4—
Consideration, Mechanics and the Theory Behind
Instruction
** 5407C20 7ACC-27B What a Student Should Know (cont.); also issued as
PRO-5—Consideration and Is-ness
** 5407C23 7ACC-28A The Four Conditions of Existence; also issued as
PRO-6—Isness
** 5407C23 7ACC-28B The Four Conditions of Existence (cont.); also
issued as PRO-7
** 5407C23 7ACC-29A The Four Conditions of Existence (cont.); also
issued as PRO-8
** 5407C23 7ACC-29B The Four Conditions of Existence (cont.); also
issued as PRO-9
** 5407C23 7ACC-30 The Four Conditions of Existence (cont ); also
issued as PRO-10 and PRO-11
** 5407C27 7ACC-31 Two-way Comm and the Present Time Problem; also
issued as PRO-17; and Opening Procedure of 8C; also
issued as PRO-18
* 5407C .. 7ACC-32 Afternoon Lecture remarks especially on Telepathy
and ESP
5407C ... 7ACC-33 Title unknown
5407C ... 7ACC-34 Title unknown
** 5407C28 7ACC-35A Descriptive Processing; also issued as PRO-24
** 5407C28 7ACC-35B Group Processing; also issued as PRO-25
5407C ... 7ACC-36 Title unknown
** 5407C ... 7ACC-37 Time; also issued as PRO-12
5407C ... 7ACC-37B Types of Processes
5407C ... 7ACC-38 Title unknown
* 5407C ... 7ACC-39 Scientology and Living; also issued as PRO-26
* 5407C30 CONF Certificates of Dianetics and Scientology


HUBBARD ASSOCIATION OF SCIENTOLOGISTS, INTERNATIONAL
806 North Third Street
Phoenix, Arizona
July 15, 1954


To: All HASI Schools and British Associates

Subject: TRAINING

The training program of the HASI was stabilized during the seven Clinical Course units. This has been developed into the HASI training schedule, and it is expected that this schedule will be fitted into the training programs under use with no further modification than is absolutely necessary to fit the peculiar needs of the school.

This training course embraces the grade of Hubbard Certified Auditor, Hubbard Professional Auditor, Bachelor of Scientology and Doctor of Scientology. There is no difference amongst these degrees as to the procedures employed or methods of instruction. The difference of course level amongst these ratings consists of the amount of theory and expansion given to the subject of Intensive Procedure. In all cases, for all courses, we wish at the end of a course to have an auditor in good personal condition who understands thoroughly that the processes enumerated in Intensive Procedure are workable and that they will resolve the problems he faces in preclears and groups and the conviction on the auditor’s part that at least some of these processes can be used expertly by himself. The auditor’s examination for certification in any grade is based upon the definitions and theories underlying those processes contained in Scientology: Auditor’s Handbook Including Intensive Procedure. The examination should include history, general theory, and conversance with the various publications of Scientology as well as Dianetics. The primary goal of an HCA or HPA school is outlined in the first sentence above. When this has been accomplished, that level of school can consider that it has accomplished its mission.

The primary text of any school of any level is now Scientology: Auditor’s Handbook. A secondary text, but almost equal in importance, is Scientology: Group Auditor’s Handbook. Concentration on these two publications should be extreme. Only those tapes which will actually supplement these manuals should be employed. Particularly in the HCA-HPA course, the instructor should be severely reluctant to impart any further data of any kind than that contained in these manuals and the tapes supporting them. A forthcoming popular text book on Scientology is designed to embrace little more in theory and practice than that found crowded into the two handbooks; thus when a person who has read the popular text turns to a school or auditor for training he will discover himself studying in a far more intense form that material on which he has already agreed.

The basic theory in which the student is to be instructed is as follows: Considerations take rank over the mechanics of space, energy and time and that these mechanics are the product of agreed upon considerations which life mutually holds. That the mechanics have taken such precedence in man that they have become more important than the considerations and overpower his ability to act freely in the framework of mechanics, which is to say that the picture man presents is an inverted one. That the goal of processing is to bring an individual into such thorough communication with the physical universe that he can regain the power and ability of his own postulates. That Scientology is the science of knowing how to know answers and that a Scientologist is expected to be able to resolve problems in a great many specialized fields of which auditing is the first field he addresses so as to be conversant with and capable in the phenomena of life. That in a world every day more violently impressed with mechanics, chaos may be expected to ensue on a national and community level by many reasons which incidentally include atomic fission. That the role of a Scientologist is to impede this disintegration if possible, but if it occurs to be ready to pick up the pieces. That the Scientologist has no specialized political or religious convictions

beyond those dictated by wisdom and his own early training. That the total empire to which a Scientologist aspires is the empire of wisdom. That an auditor is expected to follow the Auditor’s Code 1954 and the Code of Scientologists, and that he is expected to know these Codes by heart. That the only scarcity of preclears which will occur is through his own indigence, and his procurement of preclears or groups does not depend upon the industry of other auditors but of himself. That L. Ron Hubbard is a human being. He should be instructed as well in the organization and functions of the HASI in various certifications and their meaning and in his legal status.

His instruction should begin with the lecture on Scientology and what it is and with an immediate assignment to auditing. This assignment should consist of the most elementary possible technique in order to accustom the auditor into achieving a two-way communication with the preclear. He should be maintained on such an assignment until such time as the instructor is satisfied that he can deliver the auditing commands and maintain his two-way communication with the preclear without falling into any deeper significances and until he has a complete and positive understanding of a communication lag and how to flatten one out. The auditing commands to be used in this first step are, “Something you wouldn’t mind remembering” “Something you wouldn’t mind forgetting”. It is COMPLETELY VITAL that the student understand the mechanism of communication lag and its definition, that it is the length of time between the moment the auditor poses the question and the moment when that exact question posed is answered positively by the preclear no matter whether silence or talk or incorrect answers occurred in the interim.

Only when the student has become at ease with the above and perfectly comprehensent is he permitted to go further in his training. The next step consists of Opening Procedure of 8-C. The three parts of this are given him one at a time to audit on his fellow students until he has become expert and assured in performing each part. At this same time he must become assured as well of the workability of this process and that it is the only process he must ever employ on psychotics and neurotics. The student must also be made to understand physical communication lag as just another kind of communication lag. And he must become convinced that he must flatten physical communication lags by continuing to use the command which produced them. He must develop precision in his rendition and all sloppiness or carelessness in the running of this process must be ironed out by the instructor. The lecture material at this time should strenuously and repetitively take up the Auditor’s Code with examples until the student understands it thoroughly.

The next process in which the student is to be indoctrinated is Opening Procedure by Duplication. He is expected to do this for many hours. He is expected to have this run on him for many hours. After this the Auditor’s Code is taken up again. And only at this point should general theory or other data subjects be undertaken by the instructor, either in his own lectures or by tapes.

Once the student is entirely comfortable and familiar and precise with Opening Procedure by Duplication he is instructed in Remedying Havingness and Spotting Spots in Space. Remedying Havingness is emphasized and is senior to Spotting Spots in Space and is taken up in lecture in its various forms before the auditor is permitted to run Spotting Spots in Space. When the auditor has mastered Acceptance Level, Rejection Level and “Things that you wouldn’t mind occupying your space” he is then turned loose to audit Spotting Spots in Space and the Remedy of Havingness using this to clean up various areas or old auditing in his preclears. He is to run this process until he is convinced of its workability and his ability to use it and until he can honestly classify it as his chief emergency assist tool.

Now that the student can remedy havingness on preclears, he is permitted to run Consideration in the form of Significances, having preclears put significances into things. Only when the student has learned to audit significances and has had all the processes he is being taught as above run upon him is it particularly safe to engage upon much theory or upon more complex processes, for the student turned loose to consider at will may otherwise begin to make nothing out of preclears and mountainous somethings out of processes.

At this point, Granting of Beingness in the form given in the Appendix of Issue One of the Auditor’s Handbook* should be run thoroughly by the student and on the student and he should hear the LRH lecture on that subject from the Seventh Clinical Course. For until this is remedied, our student will have difficulty, most likely, with his fellow students by being himself “the only one” who can grant life. He will also, to some slight degree perhaps, be at war with the subject and his instructors until this is remedied.

Only when all of the above has been accomplished, and with certainty, should the student be embarked upon the use of Intensive Procedure as given, be initiated into the mysteries of exteriorization and the general data of earlier Scientology. We must be very definite at this point that it would be far, far better to turn out a student who had learned the steps prior to studying the Handbook itself, as given above, and graduate with those steps firmly in his grasp than to cover a multitude of subjects and processes in Scientology on which he had a poor reality by the end of the course.

Our course goal is to push the student of the HCA-HPA level as far forward as possible in his period of training into the Auditor’s Handbook and the Group Auditor’s Handbook, but to progress him in such a way as to teach him nothing further than he has been taught until we are sure that he has excellent data workability and use reality on what he has been taught at that point. This we learned in the Advanced Clinical Courses was an absolute necessity in order to turn out auditors. It is better for us to have auditors able to use well Opening Procedure of 8-C than auditors who can use every technique we have poorly and ineffectually.

The training materials for the HCA-HPA course should include the “Professional Course Lectures” by LRH made in July, 1954. [See page 65.]

The student should clearly understand that training which has been done is not necessarily the training which is being and will be done. He should understand that the exigencies of Scientology were such as to turn out as good auditors as we could with what we had to hand and that we are just now stabilized in training and that we expect far more from him than we have ever expected from any auditor in the past.

Sincerely,

L. RON HUBBARD


LRH :rd
Copyright (©) 1954
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED





[* Auditor’s Handbook, Issue One, Appendix regarding Granting of Beingness:

“R2—21: A basic difficulty in auditing and in the case of any preclear lies in the preclear’s unwillingness to permit anyone else to grant beingness, particularly the auditor.

“Where a preclear is making no progress he is proving that ‘they could grant only death.’ This is far below even, ‘I grant death.’ This condition can be remedied in R2—21 by improving the preclear’s considerations of the giving of life and death as follows: ‘Name some beings you would permit to grant life.’ ‘Name some beings you would permit to grant death.’ ‘Name some things to which you could grant life.’ ‘Name some things to which you could grant death.’ This should be run until all comm lag is flattened. Then the preclear will improve further.”]

GROUP AUDITING SESSIONS

July 23, 1954

Group Auditing Sessions to audiences which contain new people must always begin with a talk about Scientology, giving its definition, purpose, goals and background. This talk must occupy at least ten minutes of the first hour. The descriptive material of 31-G of the Journal of Scientology is acceptable. The auditor should not encourage floor discussion but should then promptly begin his processing.

Floor discussion is avoided by informing the audience member who wants to talk, “I would be happy to discuss that but these others wish to get down to the serious business of processing,” and so begin.

The group auditor before he begins his talk must get everyone’s individual name on a card. If husband and wife are present, each writes his name. The cards are always collected promptly on being filled out and a piece of literature must go out to people attending within 24 hours.


L. RON HUBBARD

LRH:-jh
Copyright( ©)
1954 by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

SCIENTOLOGY: AUDITOR’S HANDBOOK
including Intensive Procedure
by L. Ron Hubbard
Published August 1954



The Auditor’s Handbook was designed for use by graduates of the Advanced Clinical Course, and when first released its popularity was a surprise, selling out its first and second printings in three weeks. It was intended as a concise navigational aid for the advanced auditor, but was eagerly acquired by the less experienced auditors.

In his introduction to the book, L. Ron Hubbard said:

“Dear Auditor,

“ l have written this book for you to help you with your processing.

“ It combines all the procedures of major workability developed and tested during seven Advanced Clinical Course units. As processes were developed and tested, I discovered that more and more workability was to be found in communication alone. Thus Intensive Procedure was not developed straight from theory, but was evolved out of theory where it agreed with workability. The stress is upon certainty of communication on the part of the preclear with objects in the physical universe. The formula of communication itself, in all of its parts, must be entirely rehabilitated with the preclear in the physical universe before the preclear can then begin with his own universe. The goal of Intensive Procedure is to bring about a complete tolerance and comfort on the part of the preclear for the physical universe, his exteriorization, and general rehabilitation.

“ You will assist me if you will, from time to time, let me know your successes and failures with these processes, by their proper number, so that I can add to my catalogue their relative effectiveness in the hands of auditors.

“Best regards,
L. Ron Hubbard
July 15, 1954”


Although out of print, and generally unavailable today in its original form, the data it contained will be found in The Creation of Human Ability. In addition to the various Codes of Scientology, it contained Intensive Procedure through Route 2—29, most of the “L’Envoi” chapter, SOP-8D, and the Outline of Lectures 1-3 of the July 1954 Professional Course, as now published in The Creation of Human Ability.

P.A.B. No. 32
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR’S BULLETIN

From L. RON HUBBARD

Via Hubbard Communications Office
163 Holland Park Avenue, London W.11

_____________________________________________________________________

7 August 1954

WHY DOCTOR OF DIVINITY?


There has been some stir amongst auditors concerning the fact that Scientology has allied itself with the Church of American Science, why a Church of Scientology has come into existence and why auditors qualified by training and personal attainments are applying for and have received ordination as ministers in these churches.

To some this seems mere opportunism, to some it would seem that Scientology is simply making itself bulletproof in the eyes of the law, and to some it might appear that any association with religion is a reduction of the ethics and purposes of Scientology itself. The broad majority of those interested have accepted this step, but not all have entirely understood it.

First, let me briefly take up with you the history of knowledge on this, our planet Earth, in the last three and one half millenia. At the beginning of our written history there was only one trace of workable knowledge which had been handed down from prehistoric times. This was contained in the Vedic hymns. The Vedic peoples are directly responsible for that principle known to us in Scientology as the Cycle of Action. The invaluable observation that birth proceeded into growth, that growth proceeded into an unchanging state and that this unchanging state then proceeded into decay and finally concluded with death, gives to us in Scientology our create-survive-destroy curve. Although it was not originally apparent that our dynamic principle of survive was an inherent part of this cycle of action, the usability of survive was discovered some time ago to be materially expanded by the recognition of the beginning and end of the cycle-of-action curve. Here we find a principle extended to us from a religion. The Vedic hymns are religious hymns. Yet the material in them contains all that is to be found in the works of Charles Darwin and even in the works used today by nuclear physicists. A survey of these hymns as they are now written and available in your local library would astonish you. It demonstrates clearly that our earliest indebtedness was to a religion.

The next single most important philosophic advance within our written history was accomplished by Gautama Sakyamuni. This work was part of a religion known as the Dharma. The Dharma, existing some time before the advent of Gautama, is a religion preached by individuals known as Buddhas. The Western world knows this as Buddhism and variously believes it to be a superstition or idolatrous practice or believes that it was founded by a man named Buddha, none of which are true. A Buddha is simply one who has attained Bodhi. A Bodhi is “one who has attained an ideal state of intellectual and ethical perfection by purely physical means.” There have been many Buddhas and there are expected to be many more.

A very cursory glance at the Dharma discovers that it embraces these facts. “All that we are is the result of what we have thought; it is founded on our thoughts, it is

Copyright (©) 1954 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.

made up of our thoughts.” “By oneself evil is done; by oneself one suffers; by oneself evil is left undone; by oneself one is purified. Purity and impurity belong to oneself; no one can purify another.” “You yourself must make an effort; the Buddhas are only preachers. The thoughtful who enter the way are freed from the bondage of sin.” “He who does not rouse himself when it is time to rise, who, though young and strong, is full of sloth, whose will and thoughts are weak, that lazy and idle man will never find the way to enlightenment.” “Strenuousness is the path of immortality, sloth the path of death. Those who are strenuous do not die; those who are slothful are as if dead already.”

In the “Surangama Sutra” giving a discourse to one Ananda, Gautama said, “If you simply do not follow after these twelve notions of conditioning phenomena, namely: motion and stillness, separation and contact, variability and constancy, appearing and disappearing, passing or impenetrability, brightness and darkness, or should ignore any pair of them you will be freed from bondage to all mental contaminations. “

Although the Dharma does not give and does not contain, as it is handed down to us, any real or workable methodology to accomplish the state of Bodhi, it cleaves very strongly to a scientific rationale which, coming to us from two and one half millenia ago, is startling in view of the fact that it is more delineative, more exact, more comprehensive and more comprehensible than any and all psychological doctrine as known to us in this Twentieth Century.

Here is an amazing body of scientific-philosophical-religious truth. These texts written about 600 B.C. outline a scientific religion of compassion and magnitude.

What has been the fate of the Dharma in these past centuries? What mark has it left upon Earth? The Dharma rose in an Asia enslaved by animism, superstition, idolatry, cannibalism and slavery. It was a barbaric world in 600 B.C. Gautama Buddha and his handful of followers, pretending nothing to the supernatural, using only wisdom, teachings and the technologies of civilization, spread through India the doctrines of the Dharma and brought to these hundreds of millions a much greater civilization than they had known. Penetrating into China, the Buddhist priests spread civilization before them. Penetrating into Japan, they taught the Japanese to read and write, to weave and sew, until two-thirds of the Earth’s population had attained higher levels of wisdom. Spreading westward, the Dharma came into the Middle East and there presented its message of “love thy neighbor” and general compassion for life. And the parables of Gautama Buddha were re-expressed with some differences and additions to spread westward again as Christianity. And today, the entire Western Civilization lies under the spell, if at a lower intellectual level, of the teachings of the Dharma.

You are left to conclude what you will concerning the actual foundation of religion on this planet and of the factual structure underlying Christian churches. Our only concern here is with the fact that religion is basically a philosophic teaching designed to better the civilization into which it is taught. Backed fully by the precedent of all the ages concerning teachings, a Scientologist has a better right to call himself a priest, a minister, a missionary, a doctor of divinity, a faith healer or a preacher than any other man who bears the insignia of religion of the Western world. And remember that it is precedent which masters the opinion of multitudes and nations.

Why should Scientology ally itself with religion or use the word religion in connection with its philosophy?

There are many, many reasons. Amongst them is that a society accords to men of the church an access not given to others. Prisons, hospitals, and institutions, and those

who manage them, cannot do otherwise than welcome men of the church. We are talking now about more than simply expediency or protection under law. We are talking about urgency indeed. For to my hand is a document written to me by one of our auditors concerning a woman who had remained senseless for three months following an accident. Her husband was desperate and desired a Scientologist to do what he could to return this woman to consciousness. The Scientologist did so and made excellent progress simply by putting the woman into communication by hand pressures. Although she could not speak, she could yet express herself and respond and even do mock-ups. The terrible condition of her body bettered and when she was returning to the world of speech and action, the medical doctor in charge of the hospital who heretofore had granted grudgingly, on the husband’s persuasion, interviews between the Scientologist and the patient, seeing the improvement, turned on the Scientologist and forbade him to touch the patient or see the patient or have anything more to do with the patient even though he could find nothing in the case but improvement and although no incident of any kind other than improvement had occurred. The Scientologist was turned out of the hospital and a few weeks afterwards the woman, relapsing into the apathy of unconsciousness, died. We will not charge this medical doctor with murder. We can only charge him with ignorance and barbarism. For we live today in what is at best, so far as social usages are concerned, a barbaric society. Those who profess to heal more often than not exist to collect. Those in charge of the insane are little better themselves than their patients. We live in a society where dreadful and terrible weapons and controls are commonplace, yet which is without many of the benefits of compassion, mercy and charity.

If we in Scientology had to hand only the weapon of better knowledge, if we had no technologies, if we could not—other than give him wisdom and hope—make any man well, we could still take what we know about life and with that as our message effect a wide and compelling influence upon the civilization of our times. For any message carried forward to a people which gives them hope cannot but reflect to the betterment of their culture.

But we have more than a message. We have more than a handful of axioms or explanations of behavior. We have in this year of 1954 processes which, even when worked upon groups, produce en masse a state of beingness which 2500 years ago was being groped for by the select few. We have more command over the phenomena of life than any have ever had before.

Were we to accept our rightful role, were we to accomplish our teachings and deliver to our culture this bettered state of beingness, we would have changed at least the entire pattern of the Western world.

If we can accomplish psychotherapy, this does not mean that we are psychotherapists. If we can accomplish better communications in business, this does not mean we are business specialists. It may be that we could conceive ourselves as emissaries to a barbarism grown lawless in the possession of weapons too powerful for the understanding of their wielders.

In another time, in another place, those men (the Buddhas) responsible for what Western culture calls their religion, called themselves priests. I do not see, then, any inconsistency of any kind in the issuance to those well-schooled and well-skilled in Scientology the degree of Doctor of Divinity as a passport into those areas where they are needed. Only a barbaric minister is a “Man of God.” In all enlightened religions such men are called “Men of Wisdom.”

_______________________

I do not mean to tell you that Scientology is an extension of the Dharma, or that the forecasts of the Tibetans concerning the Western world are now coming true, or


that you should embrace Asiatic philosophy, or even that the efforts of the Buddhas and the Scientologists are comparable. I am telling you this mainly because Western civilization is extremely ignorant of its sources and because these facts, no matter how true, are probably very little known in America and Europe. And I am telling you this to dispel some of your shyness and to increase your boldness and overtness where the society itself is concerned. No door need be closed to you, nor need you apologize should you accept through the Church of American Science or the Church of Scientology any degree or title for which you are qualified. Western civilization is engaged in a worship of superstition, the supernatural and the miraculous even as other nations long ago. Its only other worship is that of the machine. Where else could men and women of compassion and skill serve better, and what else should they call themselves but Teachers of Wisdom?

L. RON HUBBARD





























AXIOMS LECTURES
Phoenix, Arizona
20 August 1954


On Friday, 20 August 1954, L. Ron Hubbard gave the following half-hour lectures in Phoenix, Arizona. They were included in the “Professional Course, July, 1954” lecture series (as PRO-13 through PRO-16), and thus are part of the book The Phoenix Lectures.


** 5408C20 AX-1 Axioms, Part l; also issued as PRO-13

** 5408C20 AX-2 Axioms, Part ll; also issued as PRO-14

** 5408C20 AX-3 Axioms, Part lll; also issued as PRO-15

** 5408C20 AX-4 Axioms, Part IV; also issued as PRO-16


P.A.B. No. 34
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR’S BULLETIN

From L. RON HUBBARD

Via Hubbard Communications Office
163 Holland Park Avenue, London W.11

_____________________________________________________________________

4 September 1954

With this issue of the Professional Auditor’s Bulletin begins a new series by L. Ron Hubbard entitled A BASIC COURSE IN SCIENTOLOGY. The bulletins in this series are planned to cover the period of at least one year. This Basic Course consists of numerous articles by Ron on the theory and techniques of present day Scientology. The experienced professional auditor will find this an excellent source of review; the newcomer will have available a wealth of new data in easily used and highly understandable form.


OPENING PROCEDURE, SOP-8-C

A Basic Course in Scientology—Part 1


Because many people write to me requesting information on how to run a particular technique, and because the greater portion of such inquiries are on how to get a case running, this process is here outlined for your use as the first part of the Basic Course. Having once run this Opening Procedure, SOP-8-C on a so-called “tough case,” you will not require any further reassurance or sales talk about it. And having it run thoroughly on yourself by an auditor skilled in its use will adequately demonstrate its workability.

IMPORTANT: IN PROCESSING PSYCHOTICS AND NEUROTICS OF WHATEVER DEGREE OR THOSE HAVING PSYCHOSOMATIC AILMENTS OF ANY TYPE, USE ONLY OPENING PROCEDURE, 8-C, EACH PART, UNTIL THE PERSON IS SURE WHO IS DOING IT. USE ONLY OPENING PROCEDURE, SOP-8-C UNTIL THE CASE IS FULLY SANE. USE NO OTHER PROCESS OF ANY KIND.

The entire modus operandi of Opening Procedure 8-C consists in having the preclear move his body around the room under the auditor’s direction until (a) he finds he is in actual communication with many spots on the surface of things in the room, (b) until he can select spots in the room and know that he is selecting them and can communicate with them, and (c) select spots and move to them, decide when to touch them and when to let go. Each one of these steps is done until the auditor is well assured that the preclear has no communication lag.

The auditing commands for part (a) are as follows: “Do you see that chair?” “Go over to it and put your hand on it.” “Now look at that lamp.” “Now walk over to it and put your hand on it.” This is done with various objects, without specifically designating spots of a more precise nature than an object, until the preclear is very certain that he is in good communication with these objects and walls and other parts of the room.

The above is run until the following manifestations of communication lag (and any others you may encounter) are well erased: the preclear just brushing the object he

Copyright (©)1954 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.

is told to touch, looking away from it very quickly, not looking at it at all, looking at the auditor instead of the object he was told to touch, carrying out the command before it is given such as going over to touch the lamp when all the auditor has said is “Do you see that lamp?”, complaining about the process in any way, objecting to being ordered to do the actions, unwillingness to touch the items designated, putting all his attention on creating an effect on the auditor, and apathy, grief, anger, fear and boredom turned on by this process.

When the above has been accomplished the auditor can say anything he pleases, or seemingly introduce any significance he wishes to so long as he hews very closely to the actual thing in this method which makes it work—which is to say perceiving the physical universe and making contact with it. At this time the auditor can become very specific about the selection of spots for the preclear to touch. “Do you see that black mark on the left arm of that chair?” “Go over and touch it with your right index finger.” “Now take your finger off it.” “Do you see the lower bolt on the light switch plate?” “Now go over to it and touch it with your left ring finger.” “Now take your finger off it,” and so forth until the preclear has a uniform perception of any and all objects in the room including the walls, the floor and the ceiling. This step can be kept up for a long time. It has an infinity of variations. But it is not the variations which work, it is the making and breaking of communication with the actual designated spots. You can do the following at this point: make certain the preclear is doing the process by asking questions such as, “Are you touching the door knob?” “Where is the door knob?” “What is its shape?” “What is its color?” “What sort of texture does it have?” “Are you sure you are touching it?” “Can you feel it?” “Look at it.” “Who is touching it?” “Whose hand is on that door knob?” “Who is holding your hand there?” “Where is that door knob?” “When is it there?” You can badger the preclear in the above fashion until his actions show that he is in communication with the object and until he is not angered by your questioning and direction.

IF AT ANY TIME THERE IS ANY DOUBT ABOUT THE PRECLEAR’S CASE DO THIS STEP [PART (a)] UNTIL SATISFIED THAT COMMUNICATION IS GOOD. A CASE WHICH WILL NOT OBEY 8-C (a) ORDERS WILL ALWAYS PERVERT OR ALTER COMMANDS TO BE PERFORMED WITH LESS SUPERVISION THAN PERCEPTION OF HIS BODY.

Part (b) has these auditing commands: “Find a spot in this room.” No further designation is necessary for this spot. Spotting procedure gives the preclear determinism of selection. When the preclear has done this the auditor says, “Go over to it and put your finger on it.” When the preclear has done this the auditor says, “Now let go of it.” It must be emphasized that the preclear is not to act upon a command until the command is given and must not let go until told to let go. The preclear is permitted to select spots until such time as all communication lag is flat and until he is freely selecting spots on the walls, objects, chairs, etc., with no specialization whatsoever— which means that his perception of the room has become uniform. Many things turn up in running this procedure such as the fact that the preclear cannot look at walls, etc.

Part (c) of this procedure is run with these auditing commands: “Find a spot in the room.” “Make up your mind when you are going to touch it and then touch it.” “Make up your mind when you are going to let go of it, and let go.” A variation of this process is to have the preclear make up his mind about a spot and then have him change his mind and select another spot.

The trouble with most cases, and the trouble with any case which is hung up and is not progressing, is that an insufficient quantity of Opening Procedure 8-C has been used by the auditor. This has been found to be an invariable rule. Preclears will pretend to run commands of a subjective nature but not run them at all. In other words, the auditor is saying do one thing and the preclear is doing quite another. Thus the process

is not actually being used on the preclear. The difficulty in this case is a specific difficulty in communication where the preclear cannot duplicate. But more important than that, any preclear whose case is hanging up is out of touch with reality and the environment to such an extent that he has begun to do processes on mock-ups rather than on the actual physical universe. It will be discovered that doing processes on mock-ups such as finding spots in them, finding distances to them, and so forth is productive of no gain, and even negative gain. Only processes which directly address the physical universe are found to raise the tone of the preclear. He has to come to full tolerance of it before he can get out of it. Thus any case bogging down somewhere in more intricate procedures can be relieved and brought into present time by Opening Procedure 8-C. The only caution on the part of the auditor is that he must be very precise about giving his orders and must insist on the preclear being very certain that he is actually seeing spots and touching them and inhibiting the preclear from executing the commands before they are given.

L. RON HUBBARD







































LRH TAPE LECTURE
Phoenix, Arizona
14 September 1954


** 5409C14 LECT Dianetic Group Processing


P.A.B. No. 35
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR’S BULLETIN

From L. RON HUBBARD

Via Hubbard Communications Office
163 Holland Park Avenue, London W.11

_____________________________________________________________________

18 September 1954

“WHAT I LEARNED IN TRAINING”

A Basic Course in Scientology—Part 2


For the last ten months, ever since the Philadelphia Congress in 1953, I have been engaged in a research as thoroughly fundamental as the actual subject of Scientology. This research was directed toward the training of auditors. The immediate question asked in this research was one which has remained relatively unanswered for four years: “How do we train an auditor so that he will apply the processes known to be workable in such a way as to make the subject work for him?”

A major difficulty lay in the subject itself, for it was in a state of change. Certain processes would be found quite workable, better each time, and these would be published, but this continuing parade of processes had a tendency to invalidate auditors who had been trained earlier. Thus it began to appear, I am well aware, that an auditor was expected to be in a constant state of training, and that unless he had the “latest dope,” he was not to be considered top-notch. At almost any time from Book One on I could have levelled off in research and investigation, as each Foundation Board pleaded with me to do, out of their financial desires, and could have trained intensively on the processes which existed so that auditors would do them as they were given. There is no doubt, however, that this would have been a losing program, for life kept unfolding new data before me, and a greater and broader understanding of the entire picture was progressively easier to view, and the actual goal of processing kept advancing. Processes, when issued, if done by an auditor as issued, each time would have raised the majority of individuals to whom they were addressed up to the goal which was at that moment envisioned for Man. But the goal kept advancing, higher and higher levels of beingness continued to come into view, and so there was no choice for it. One could not agree with people who, out of financial need, sought to stop research; and although one was very conscious that a hardship was being worked upon trained auditors by releasing continually new processes for them to learn, there was no choice for it but to continue in the research and investigation of the subject of Man and of Life.

We passed out of the field of homo sapiens in late 1950, for it was obvious that we could make people saner than people had ever been. After I had completed, through 1951, my examinations of the whole track, it was obvious that the individual, the “I,” the personality, was not the body, and in early 1952 I was able to make the first announcements concerning exteriorization. By September of 1952 processes had been developed which made exteriorization much better and more stable, and using these processes I had no great difficulty in exteriorizing cases. After training the first group of auditors in Great Britain (September, 1952, the time of issue of SOP-l) I began to realize that there was a considerable nervousness on the part of auditors to face the fact of exteriorization. Indeed, exteriorization as an accomplishment or an existing state has never been very acceptable simply because the average public,

Copyright (©)1954 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.

indoctrinated to believe that one stepped out of the body at death and went to Hell or some such thing, found it too incredible. Man had been trying to do this thing for at least 2500 years, and although he had some cognizance of it he had never achieved any uniform success in making it come about at will. The experience of training these British auditors demonstrated that whenever an individual is low on havingness the effort to get him to face the no-mass character of a thetan becomes impossible unless one brings up the havingness of such people to a point where they can bear to view “nothing.” Such people, those low on havingness, actually get sick at their stomachs physically, and very uncomfortable, at the thought of exteriorization, or the exteriorization of others.

Then proceeded the various Standard Operating Procedures from 1 up through 8, and more recently, including 8-C and 8-D. All of these were routine, aimed in the direction of bringing up a person’s ability to handle space and nothingness to a point where he could bear the thought of exteriorization, and so exteriorize. But having many auditors, and being unable to process each one individually, there was a considerable scramble of ideas and technique applications. As an example of this, for a while in Great Britain all of the thoroughly “stuck in” cases had a general agreement amongst them that there was such a thing as a “white five.” This strange beast was actually a psychotic who merely had the idea that he could exteriorize, but actually wasn’t exteriorized, but anybody who did exteriorize was crazy. This stemmed immediately from the discomfort entailed for a no-havingness case in viewing “nothing.” Any time they were asked to view nothing, they became sick and so they invented an explanation to keep them from looking at nothing, which is to say, to keep them from exteriorizing people.

In view of the fact that exteriorization alone brings about a rapid recovery of a case, and in view of the fact that the thetan stuck in a body is not unlike a thetan stuck in a theta trap to a degree where he has inverted and become the trap, one had to carry forward with exteriorization if one were going to deal with illness on any broad scale at


In training over a hundred auditors in America in the Advanced Clinical Courses, I was learning every day, every week, every unit, better means of bringing an auditor up to exteriorization as a case, and bringing up his willingness to audit people into an exteriorized state. By the time we had reached Unit VII [7th ACC], and well before it was completed, I discovered that we actually had achieved, not a process designed to immediately exteriorize people, not even a process to run out engrams, but a process which could be handled by an auditor after relatively little training. So here we had a slight disparity of goals. Here we had my goals, which consisted of an achievement of an understanding of Life sufficient to bring about a higher level of beingness and livingness, here we had exteriorization, here we had all the SOPs, and here we possessed techniques innumerable with which to achieve these goals, and on the other hand, an abrupt dichotomy, I discovered I had invented a process some months previously which could actually be communicated with sufficient ease to auditors so that they would use it as given, and with which they could produce some astonishing results. But this process actually was not aimed at exteriorization. This process would be recognizable to anyone thoroughly conversant with Dianetics. This process could have come into existence in June of 1950 except that then one would not have had the least idea of keeping this process up long enough so that it would actually work.

Now let me tell you something about this process. I have known since 1947 that getting an individual into present time was the most convincing and abrupt therapy which could be performed. I have been in institutions and have told inmates simply, “Come up to present time” with a resultant regaining of a stable sanity on the part of these inmates. Anyone in the field of Dianetics was familiar with “Come up to present time.” One always ended sessions that way. But after a considerable study, I had found

by 1949 that the anatomy of present time consisted of the ground, sky, walls, objects, and people of the immediate environment. In other words, the anatomy of present time is the anatomy of the room or area in which you are at the moment when you view it, and this is present time. Putting a person thoroughly into communication with this environment, which was present time, was, of course, indicated. But processes of that time were mainly subjective, addressed to the mind, on the mistaken idea that the mind was a brain, and that the body had something to do with thinking processes and personality, and so, beyond bringing people to present time by telling them to be aware of their surroundings, as I was doing in early 1950, this principle was not used.

Actually, not until I developed SOP-8-C did I begin to understand what it might take to put a person into communication with their immediate environment, simply by looking at it, touching it and becoming aware of it. All manner of liabilities ensued in the way of somatics and various other phenomena, and it was not until I had made many exhaustive tests that I was willing to accept the fact that somebody could be brought into present time by making him contact the walls, floor, ground, ceiling, sky, trees, people, of the exact moment in which he was, for many, many hours, with stable therapeutic results.

Applying this broad awareness and communication with the environment for tens or scores of hours as a total process, Scientology came into possession of Opening Procedure of 8-C.

In Issue 24-G of the Journal of Scientology, we find SOP-8-C complete, but we find, heading it, the following:

OPENING PROCEDURE: (Ten minutes to two hours, with MEST body).
Part (a): Send preclear to exact places in room, one place at a time.
Part (b): Have preclear select places in the room and move to them one at a time, still under the auditor’s direction.
Part (c): Have preclear drill in physically holding on to and letting go of objects and spaces on his own decision to hold on, decision to let go.

In the Auditor’s Handbook as published by the HASI, printed edition, $5.00 [incorporated in The Creation of Human Ability; see page 44], we find “R2—16: RUN PRECLEAR THROUGH OPENING PROCEDURE OF 8-C, Parts (a), (b), (c), EACH ONE UNTIL THE PHYSICAL COMMUNICATION LAG STABILIZES.” Now go over to the end of Intensive Procedure in the Auditor’s Handbook [The Creation of Human Ability, page 166] and find that we are not now running Opening Procedure of 8-C from “ten minutes to two hours,” but we find: “As a summary comment on these processes, it cannot be indicated too strongly that a preclear who is psychotic, neurotic, or who is having any psychosomatic difficulty must be run on Opening Procedure of 8-C (R2—16) for many, many, many, many hours.”

Thus we have considerable importance being placed today, as a direct result of my experience with the Advanced Clinical Units, on Opening Procedure of 8-C. If it were not effective I would not put any stress upon it. But continuous test has demonstrated that the final remark at the end of Intensive Procedure in the Auditor’s Handbook means exactly what it says. Anyone who is psychotic, neurotic, or who is having any psychosomatic difficulty can best be run, and should only be run, on Opening Procedure of 8-C, with the commands as given in the Auditor’s Handbook and in the PAB prior to this one. But, the most cheering and wonderful thing about this process is that for the first time in all these years we came into possession of something which could be taught, and which auditors, as represented by those in the Advanced Clinical Units, could use, would use, which they understood, which they did not vary, which they would keep up with, and with that process we entered into training.

Immediately after this discovery, I found that “Duplication: Difficulties of” was the bugbear back of training. Thus, Opening Procedure by Duplication, completely aside from its terrific therapeutic values, brings a person upscale to a point where he is actually able to follow and duplicate processes.

Thus, with these two Opening Procedures we discover that we are indeed into the strata of training, and today we can guarantee that processes released are effective and, more important, that they will be done as released. And now, and only now, is Scientology capable of going forward as Scientology, and only now can we consider that an auditor, when he has been trained, will not have to shift and vary that training.

As a result I am devoting the next many PABs to the subject of training, and making out of them what amounts to a course to be used by auditors who themselves are doing training, and for the use of auditors who wish to come up to date, in such a way as to be from there on “in date.”

Thus I feel that we have accomplished something.

L. RON HUBBARD

































LRH TAPE LECTURE
Phoenix, Arizona
28 September 1954


* 5409C28 LECT Church of Scientology Training Program and Lecture on Group Processing


T H E J O U R N A L O F
SCIENTOLOGY

Issue 36-G [1954, ca. late September]

Published by
The Hubbard Association of Scientologists, International
Phoenix, Arizona



Dianetics and Scientology
Organizations United Again


Some months after the closing of the Wichita Foundation, Don G. Purcell returned to L. Ron Hubbard and the Hubbard Association of Scientologists, International, the corporations and Foundations of Dianetics, the various books (including Science of Survival) and copyrights, and the various rosters and correspondence files of the organizations. This meant that the entire and complete control without contest of Dianetics, as well as Scientology, was henceforth in Phoenix, Arizona.
When asked about this action by Don G. Purcell, Ron said, “Most men act because they have reason to act. At one time, Don honestly thought, or had been pursuaded to think, that Dianetics could be more rapidly advanced in this society under an entirely business control. As time went on the difficulties of conducting the Foundation bore heavily upon his time and the progress he expected was not being made. But I don’t believe that there were either business or other expedient reasons behind this. I believe that Don extended this gift of the Foundations and all their publications and material—a rather considerable amount—because he felt that the public in general, and Dianeticists and Scientologists in particular, would benefit greatly from a renewed unity, and that he did it because he thought it was the right thing to do. I appreciate it a good deal because it clears the communication lines and makes it possible for us to utilize, to the fullest, the considerable public which was generated by my first book and because it permits us to integrate on two levels—one of them on a mental therapy level and the other on an entirely religious level.
“Dianetics is very far from dead. The first book published in 1950 still sells as well as most current ‘best sellers.’ Even the contract and plates for that book are being held for me now by Hermitage House, and it will shortly be republished and issued on an even wider front. I admire Don very much for this gift. I think he has done the right thing, and I think it took a real man to do such a thing. There has been no animosity of any kind on my part since Don and I went into communication again while I was in Spain last year.”
Questioned further concerning the future of Dianetics, Ron said, “All the time I have been working on Scientology I have also been working on Dianetics and laying it back on the shelf. Actually, the subject has advanced enormously since 1951, when the last publications on it were released by me. The various difficulties encountered in the early days when we were trying to erase engrams have been examined by me and various modifications made in theory and practice. There is a practice now called ‘perfect duplication’ which erases engrams in a few seconds when you have educated the preclear to do it. This sounds far fetched, but so did Dianetics: The Modern Science of Mental Health sound far fetched in 1950, and it is now so widely accepted that prenatals have become the subject of many a popular magazine article such as one in the Ladies Home Companion, another in Reader’s Digest and many others in professional publications.


Copyright (©)1954 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.

“Quite in addition to prenatals, there is wide medical acceptance now of the dynamic principle of existence: Survive. It takes a certain length of time to get acceptance of the data, and the basics of Dianetics have not changed.
“Those preclears who in the past suffered from Dianetic processing were only those who could not handle heavy material and who considered force too great for them to touch. There exists now means by which this factor can be eliminated.
“Although some of this material has been released to Scientologists, there was no communication line extant for its general publication to the public. Thus, the removal of this communications diversion will mean a considerable amount of new material released in the very near future.”
According to Ron, “Don Purcell has offered us an opportunity for unity of all groups, all Dianeticists and Scientologists. We must now show our appreciation of his gift and use it as he intended.”

BULLETIN
[ca. September 1954]


FIGHTING PROCESS


ROUTING:

All HASI instructors: Horner and Richards, London; Al Kozak, Camden; L. Ron Hubbard, Jr., Phoenix; and all Doctors of Scientology, and no others.


SUBJECT:

Techniques, Dianetics.

No doubt you have all heard of the sudden change by reason of the reacquisition of the Hubbard Dianetic Foundation, or have read of it in Issue 36-G.

We will continue the campaign and program of Dianetics as originally designed, and will continue as designed all the programs of Scientology.

The solution to Dianetics as a Science is contained in the following, which has been withheld pending the disposition and contest of the subject itself:

Waste Fighting, in brackets, until communication lag is gone.

Inhibit Fighting, in brackets, until communication lag is gone.

Enforce Fighting, in brackets, until communication lag is gone.

Desire Fighting, in brackets, until communication lag is gone.

What would it be safe to fight?

What would others find it safe to fight?

What thoughts, emotions, efforts, would it be safe to fight? (Until communication lag is gone.)

Indicate some things (in the environment) which are fighting themselves.

Indicate some things which are fighting. (Until all communication lag has gone. but a minimum of one hour.)

Spot all the spots where you had to stop fighting them.

Spot all the spots where you won.


L. RON HUBBARD


LRH:mb.bh



P.A.B. No. 36
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR’S BULLETIN

From L. RON HUBBARD

Via Hubbard Communications Office
163 Holland Park Avenue, London W.11

_____________________________________________________________________

1 October 1954


THE USE OF SCIENTOLOGY MATERIALS


A Basic Course in Scientology—Part 3


The first thing a Scientologist should know about Scientology is the use of its materials.

The materials of Scientology are not its tools. Its tools are processes—its materials are books, tapes, Professional Auditor’s Bulletins, Journals, letters and experience.

Now that we are operating from the standpoint of a known subject and known processes, we can handle material much better than before. Now that we know that auditors can be trained rather easily to use Standard Operating Procedure 8-C, Opening Procedure, and that they are happy to learn it, and that it will produce results for them, we would be very foolish, as schools, as auditors, as individuals, to abandon this gain.

The materials of Scientology are designed to communicate. That is all very well, but TO WHOM—AND WHEN? Certain of the materials of Scientology can be communicated with ease to people that never before heard of the subject. Certain others can be communicated to people who have been in association with Scientologists but who are not auditors. The higher level of material and data can be communicated to people who are in training to be auditors. Certain other material can be communicated to people who have been trained as auditors. And if we do not recognize this fact, and if we do not follow it, then we are going to produce a confusion with Scientology, and we are going to turn people away from Scientology, and we are going to defeat Scientology in doing what it is trying to do.

For a long time Scientology was in a state of change sufficiently rapid to be bewildering unless viewed as an orderly whole, taken with cognizance from the Original Thesis through Book One, up through Advanced Procedure and Axioms, through 16-G, 24-G, and Professional Course Tapes. But now there is no further excuse for using this material in a muddled fashion. To give you some example of this, I recently received a bulletin from an area in the United States which has a history of being confused and introverted on the subject of Scientology. This bulletin was from two auditors who should know better. It was an announcement. It had been mailed to a hundred and fifty people who were more or less interested in Scientology, including some auditors in that area. And this bulletin proclaimed that the Professional Course Tapes, July, 1954, intended for the training of HCAs, would be played as public lectures for these people over a few evenings. A telegram was sent to these two auditors, telling them that if they committed this crime against themselves and Scientology, their training privileges would be suspended for five years.

copyright (©) 1954 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.

What would happen if they did this thing? Here are the Professional Course Tapes, designed to be played to a student after he has been thoroughly taught Opening Procedure 8-C, Opening Procedure by Duplication, Remedying Havingness, and Spotting Spots in Space, as well as Significances. After the many weeks which would be spent in teaching the student these named items, it would then be possible to communicate to him with the Professional Course of July, 1954, and only after a student has been so trained would he be further trained by playing these tapes to him.

Why is this? It is because one is talking as an instructor when he is talking to any public audience. He is talking as a teacher. Is his purpose, then, simply to confuse his audience and make them turn their backs on something which is confusing, or is his purpose to degenerate what he knows into the same level with all other confusions, or is it his purpose to inform his audience? If we in the HASI have learned over ten arduous months of communicating Scientology directly, face to face, with people who are there solely for the purpose of learning, and in communicating Scientology less directly to the American public (as in Operation Phoenix*); if we know now, and assert that we must either communicate data as data and skill through the stages of Opening Procedure, Opening Procedure by Duplication, and the rest, to bring a student into any understanding of what Scientology is all about; and if we assert that we have not been able to communicate to the general public intelligently except by using the mildest and most permissive data—then this, representing the combined efforts of myself and some of the most trained and skilled auditors in Dianetics and Scientology, should be taken with some weight.

Bluntly, you cannot avalanche data onto the heads of partially trained, poorly comprehending people, or people who have no real conversance with auditing at all. And if you try to do so, you will fail, and Scientology will fail, and the people in the area will not have the least idea what you are trying to do. And they will walk away from your meetings, and they will walk away from your group sessions completely confused and vowing to themselves to have nothing further to do with Scientology. And they will not tell their friends about it, and people who should be brought in to be helped will not be brought in to be helped. And so a great many people, by this misunderstanding of the uses of the materials of Scientology, are being denied the benefits of Scientology simply because these materials have not been handled with intelligence.

Yes, I know that we have just learned this, but that we have just learned it makes it no less emphatic. However, one supposes that somebody who has been trained should have better sense than to use something with as much dynamite in it as the Professional Course of 1954 as fit diet for cursorily interested people.

Another shocking incident occurred in another area where a person who had finished an Advanced Clinical Course Unit actually permitted a mailing piece to go out to a great number of auditors from old Dianetic days, which had scrawled all over the back of it in large letters, “The meat of an $800.00 course for $38.50,” and this refresher course pretended that it would, in five evenings, bring these auditors up to date on Scientology, and pour into them material which it had taken this graduate of the course four hundred and thirty-two hours of hard study to begin to assimilate. The course graduate did not do this, but permitted it to be done. Of course there were considerable repercussions because of this. A Professional Course graduate was an HCA or BScn before he began the Advanced Professional Course. Most of the people in these

[* Operation Phoenix was started by the HASI in July 1954 to establish such things as the most acceptable mailing pieces, the best means of dissemination, the most worthwhile activities to which Scientology could be devoted and the best means of enrolling and group processing very large numbers of people. Group processing sessions on Sunday at the Church of Scientology were part of this program as were visitations by ministers of the Church of Scientology to hospitals, private homes, jails, etc. ]

units extended their training from the six weeks minimum up to twelve and fifteen weeks, since this could be done without further charge. Nobody is going to relay the material these people received in any five casual evenings.

In the first instance, where the Professional Course was going to be played in four or five nights as social entertainment, only chaos would have resulted. The two auditors doing this have often wondered what was the matter with their area, why more auditing was not done in their area, why, when they brought groups together the groups did not stay together. The reason is very plain. Instead of actually teaching these people something, these two auditors had been falling back on material taken from courses designed for people who were there to be trained and who had already spent considerable time in training. These auditors had done, previously, with other material, the same thing they were trying to do with the Professional Course. As a net result, the people in their area who came to them for a night, or two nights, would find only a steady avalanche of data far too technical for their assimilation. And out of those recordings would come sufficient restimulation to send them away, never to return.

On the other hand, think what would happen to an auditor, interested in the quality of auditing and the reputation of Scientology in an area if, after leaving such a thing as the Professional Course or finishing his training with a Doctor of Scientology, he should reach out for all the people who had ever been interested in auditing in the area, bring them in, and teach them how to run Opening Procedure of 8-C. In other words, to teach them, step by step, painfully and painstakingly, until they had it as a complete purity, until they had it drilled and ingrained into them so that they could not avoid doing it right, think what would happen to the auditing skills, and think what would happen to the reputation of Scientology as an immediate result.

Where public lectures are concerned, the HASI has a series of eight hours of tapes which describe Scientology, its various efforts and benefits. These are designed for the public at large. They do not so deluge individuals that they create a confusion, but simply spark their interest and curiosity sufficiently to bring them to a level where they will at least wish to experience some of the benefits of Scientology or desire to pursue it further.

There seem to be certain rules forming here about the use of such material, and these would be more or less as follows:
1. Express to the general public only as much concerning the benefits, organization and practice of Scientology as would give it hope, without confusing it or embattling it with its prejudices.
2. When giving Scientology to people to use, give them only the simplest tools, render them completely practiced and conversant with those tools, and only when they are expert in them give them data.
3. Instead of talking about Scientology, apply it.
4. The simplest processes are the best processes.

One could say that Man was a complicated animal simply because he is a simple animal and will not face it. When you have seen what we have seen here at the International Headquarters of the HASI, result from a continuous application to a psychosomatic illness, to psychosis and neurosis, of Opening Procedure 8-C, you will only then begin to understand what an essentially simple mechanism Man is, and how hard he works to be a complex one.

But only when you have been trained to use such a thing as Opening Procedure of 8-C, arduously enough to demonstrate that it is done just exactly the way it is done and no other way for hours and hours and hours and hours, will you understand what we mean by training, and will you discover that people can be trained.


The Director of Training in London who is, at this writing, completing the first course of this new type of training writes: “The present course is going well. The students have had days of Opening Procedure, both of 8-C and by Duplication. It has been exceedingly interesting to watch. We have spent about a month now getting across the simplicities in actual practice, spending, for example, a whole day on ‘Something you wouldn’t mind remembering’ and ‘Something you wouldn’t mind forgetting’ and two whole days on Spotting Spots in Space and Remedying Havingness. The spirit is very high and I think we will turn out the best bunch of HPAs ever. We have hammered home auditing by observation of communication lag. It certainly is a wonderful system, because auditors surely cannot miss with it. I know the students going through now will not.”

The grades of Scientology are: General Member, HASI; Scientology Group Leader; HCA (HPA); BScn and DScn. These are grades of knowingness of the subject. They demonstrate levels of skill in the subject and they very adequately demonstrate the results which can be expected, for these skills show up in terms of preclears.

Group auditing sessions, when done by the simplest of commands, reducing every communication lag for every member of the group, are the most effective group sessions. Here again we have simplicity at work. Here we have processes being used right.

If we expect Scientology to communicate itself throughout the populace of the world, it had certainly better be communicated as it can communicate. If this is not done we will be standing here talking to ourselves.

L. RON HUBBARD

8TH AMERICAN ADVANCED CLINICAL COURSE LECTURES
Phoenix, Arizona
4 October—12 November 1954


L. Ron Hubbard conducted the 8th American Advanced Clinical Course in Phoenix, Arizona, from October 4th through November 12th, 1954. During the time period of the 8th ACC he also gave on October 8th and 10th the Route One Lectures (see next page) and during October, November and December did a series of Public Lectures and Group Processing Sessions (see page 95).

** 5410C04 8ACC-1 Introduction: Organization of Scientology
** 5410C05 8ACC-2 Two-way Comm, Straightwire, 8-C
** 5410C05 8ACC-3 Basic Elements of Processing
** 5410C06 8ACC-4 Two-way Communication
** 5410C07 8ACC-5A Elementary Straightwire
* 5410C07 8ACC-5B Intensive Processing
** 5410C08 8ACC-6 Opening Procedure of 8-C
** 5410C11 8ACC-7 Opening Procedure by Duplication
** 5410C12 8ACC-8 Remedy of Havingness
* 5410C13A 8ACC-8 Step ll SOP-8
** 5410C13B 8ACC-9 Spotting Spots
* 5410C13C 8ACC-9 Demo of SOP Step ll
* 5410C14A 8ACC-10 Creation of Human Ability, Route ll
* 5410C14B 8ACC-10A Group Processing
5410C15 8ACC-11 Creation of Human Ability, Route I
5410C18 8ACC-12 Creation of Human Ability, Route I
** 5410C19 8ACC-13 Axioms of Dianetics
** 5410C20A 8ACC-14 The Parts of Man
5410C21 8ACC-15 Route 2: Overt-Motivator Sequence
** 5410C21 8ACC-16 Route 2-61, Good and Evil—Spotting Spots; Route 2-62,
Overt-Motivator—Remedy of Havingness
** 5410C22 8ACC-17 Two-way Communication
** 5410C25 8ACC-18 Communication and Straightwire
* 5410C26 8ACC-19 Survive
** 5410C27A 8ACC-20 Hypnotism
* 5410C28 8ACC-21 Process: What Would You Do If . . . ?
** 5410C29 8ACC-22 The Factors
** 5411C01 8ACC-23 Two-way Communication
** 5411C02 8ACC-24 Homo Sapiens
* 5411C03 8ACC-25 Shame, Blame and Regret
5411C04 8ACC-26 Title unknown
** 5411C05 8ACC-27 Factors Present in Good and Bad Auditing
** 5411C08 8ACC-28 Non-verbal Communication
* 5411C09 8ACC-29 Application of Axioms to Auditing
** 5411C10 8ACC-30 Definitions: Axioms


* 5411C11 8ACC-31 Scope of Dianetics and Scientology
* 5411C12 8ACC-32 Question-and-Answer Period, Dissemination









ROUTE ONE LECTURES

Phoenix, Arizona
8—10 October 1954


The Route One Lectures are twelve fifteen-minute lectures given by L. Ron Hubbard on October 8th and 10th, 1954 at Phoenix, Arizona, on Steps Four through Fifteen of Route One, Intensive Procedure (Ref. The Creation of Human Ability).

* 5410C08 PIP-1 Route 1, Step 4
* 5410C08 P I P-2 Route 1, Step 5
* 5410C10 PIP-3 Route 1, Step 6
* 5410C10 PIP-4 Route 1, Step 7
* 5410C10 PIP-5 Route 1, Step 8
* 5410C10 PIP-6 Route 1, Step 9
* 5410C10 PIP-7 Route 1, Step 10
* 5410C10 PIP-8 Route 1, Step 11
* 5410C10 PIP-9 Route 1, Step 12
* 5410C10 PIP-10 Route 1, Step 13
* 5410C10 PIP-11 Route 1, Step 14
* 5410C10 PIP-12 Route 1, Step 15

P.A.B. No. 37
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR’S BULLETIN

From L. RON HUBBARD

Via Hubbard Communications Office
163 Holland Park Avenue, London W.11

_____________________________________________________________________

15 October 1954

THE COMMUNICATION LINES OF SCIENTOLOGY

A Basic Course in Scientology—Part 4


There are several levels of communication in Scientology, and these should be known and observed by an auditor in his selection and use of materials.

The first of these which we should consider is the communication from the general public to the general public. Here we have word of mouth. This is the most important communication channel where promulgation and dissemination are concerned simply because it is the broadest and is the one which ultimately will reach the most people. Thus it is that we must be intensely interested in what Scientologists release, and what Scientologists do, and what the press says about Scientology. It would be thought by many with no great background in public relations that the proper method of obtaining word of mouth is through the public presses. This is not the case. Newspapers and magazines do not furnish the material which the public is discussing. The newspaper would love to think that it furnishes all the material which people talk about, but this is not the case, and actually on a check-up you will discover that you have today spent only a moment or two mentioning current events to your neighbors. It is of considerable interest to Scientology and Scientologists that no news stories be released. In the first place newspapers and magazines are incapable of duplication and cannot put forth a straightforward story, and have no cognizance whatsoever of ethics. The level of journalism today, if you care to look it up on the Chart of Human Evaluation, is found to be 1.5 and below, and I invite your attention to the accompanying columns of that level. This is a highly untrustworthy form of communication. It is not a particularly broad form.

What the public says to the public, if it were to be duplicated, and if it were to be regulated in any way by Scientologists and the organizations of Scientology, would have to be brief indeed, and would have to be uncomplicated. Otherwise it would not be duplicated by word of mouth. A central message, properly formulated, would be distributed by word of mouth if it could be embroidered into sufficient material to permit discussion. Without discussion being possible no word of mouth would ensue, since people use word of mouth material simply to be interesting themselves, and their method of being interesting is by taking some simple principle which is being talked about, which is yet controversial and embroidering it. Thus, by adding their opinions to it, they themselves become interesting. Thus, if you have something to which no opinions can be added you have something which will not be talked about.

For example, we have one piece of information, which, variously stated and in various forms, seems to communicate and which is communicated, and that is to the effect that for two thousand years Man has not had health, happiness, or immortality, yet these were promised to him two thousand years ago, and Scientology is delivering them today. Well stated, poorly stated, summed up, rephrased, this is still something

Copyright (©) 1954 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.


that people will talk about. They may only use part of it, to the effect that Man has not had health, happiness, or immortality for two thousand years. Another piece of information which people will talk about, when it gets into circulation, is that a nuclear physicist, in trying to research matters of physics, found the human soul and discovered how to free it. One rather astonishing piece of information which was handed out was found to travel fairly well, and that was to the effect that God did not like unhealthy people. He made Man to be healthy, and Man got unhealthy. This, without any Scientology connected to it, was found to travel. Thus, the information which is put on the communication line from the public to the public has to be simple enough at its core to bring about discussion, so that by being embroidered it yet does not lose its core.

The Scientologist subscribing to the Code of Scientology is also subscribing to some control over this communication line from the public to the public. By staying out of the press, by refusing to engage in unseemly conversations over the subject, he is aiding and abetting the flow of word of mouth.

As any science which betters people gathers unto itself considerable numbers of people who can dramatize only how bad it is over there, we get a great deal of crank, squirrel, neurotic, and psychotic communication flow. We have an incidental communication line, then, which does not at all help the public’s word-of-mouth communication from this entheta line. We call this an entheta line simply because people use Scientology to explain to others how bad it all is over there, how bad auditors are, how bad courses are, how bad Hubbard is, how bad rain is, how bad cats are, how bad the other person is, etc., etc. We even have publications which pretend to be part of Dianetics and Scientology which couldn’t possibly print anything but bad news. That there is not one word of truth in all this news so far detected by the most searching inspection here, that these rumors and perjuries and falsehoods haven’t even the dignity of a background in fact, does not stay their passage.

For instance, a character in that city of characters, Los Angeles, recently wrote to a publication which had no better sense than to print it, that the Supreme Court had many times decided that ministers who charged a fee for whatever they did were practicing medicine without a license. The writer of that letter refuses processing and happens to be connected with persons of a religious faith which is not Christian, and to be himself no Christian, and has a definite stake in religion which he does not mention in his letter. This is overtly slanderous, stated with malice and intention to squirrel up the field. However, many people, simply by driveling along about how bad it all is, put out unconscious dramatizations about how bad it all is, put out unconscious dramatizations about Scientology.

But the HASI, having been free to a large degree of the burden of investigation, has come alertly forward to police these lines, for there is a great deal of difference between free speech and slander. The first notable example the HASI made has come off very successfully. A piece of uncalled-for publicity which, like all the rest, was nothing but a lie, was published; its author was promptly and immediately threatened with suit if he did not instantly apologize, and seeing for the first time the difference between slander and free speech, this person hastily apologized and cut his communication line.

But unless all Scientologists fall into the habit of ascertaining the source of their information, and policing this entheta line, then the word-of-mouth advertising from the public to the public is seriously threatened, and there will be no great advance of Scientology in the public itself. For the very best communication line there can be for Scientology is being continually destroyed by irresponsible, if not insane, people who may not know anything else, but they certainly know how bad it is over there.

L. RON HUBBARD

HUBBARD PROFESSIONAL COLLEGE ANNOUNCEMENT
1954 [ca. October]

Official Publication of
The Hubbard Dianetic Research Foundation
Phoenix, Arizona


Dianetics and Scientology
. . . a Crusade


L. Ron Hubbard

Dianetics and Scientology are more a crusade for sanity than they are a business.

The Foundations and other organizations in Dianetics have suffered only when the insistence that they be run as “business” overpowered their will to help humanity.

If all we wanted to do with Dianetics and Scientology was make money, we would all be rich, for it is an easy thing to sell those hitherto unpurchasable things health, long life, and happiness.

But there is the extreme of charity which neglects the first dynamic. An optimum solution would be that one which brought the greatest good to the greatest number of dynamics. Thus the auditor must not neglect the first dynamic—himself. Too many have. And their work has been impeded by lack of funds.

The Foundation is not a business, the auditor is not a businessman. But both the Foundation and the auditor must live and work in a commercial and economic conscious world.

It is no disgrace for an auditor to earn several thousand dollars in a few weeks. It would only be a disgrace if he worked only to earn it. With money made from those who can afford auditing, an auditor can himself afford to undertake the assistance of those in hospitals and asylums or who have lost in life.

It is a luxury to be so generous. It is not a luxury to earn, only—who was it said that he who is without charity is as empty as sounding brass and the tinkling of the temple bell.

But remember, there is a happy mean between an overburden of wealth and an overburden of charity. Either way loses.

And so, when we speak of an auditor’s income, we speak of his potential charity. And when we speak of an auditor’s charity, we hope he can have enough paying preclears to afford it.

An auditor is wasted on a routine job—his time is lost. He is also wasted processing nothing but movie stars and millionaires—if he forgets that these can only buy him the luxury of charity in the backwaters of the world.

PUBLIC LECTURE AND GROUP PROCESSING SERIES
Phoenix, Arizona
20 October—15 December 1954


L. Ron Hubbard gave the following public lectures (PLS) and group processing sessions (PPS) in Phoenix, Arizona, in October, November and December 1954:


5410C20 PLS On Comprehending the Incomprehensible
* 5410C20B PPS-1 “Rising Scale” on the Tone Scale and “Find
Something Incomprehensible”
* 5410C20C PPS-1 A Group Processing
* 5410C27B PLS Principal Difference Between Scientology and Dianetics
* 5410C27 PPS-2 “Electing Cause”—”Something You Can’t Control”
* 5411C03B PLS Organizationof Scientology
* 5411C17 PPS-3 “Accept” and “Reject”
* 5411C17 PLS The Wrong Thing to Do Is Nothing
* 5411 C24 PLS Creation of Human Ability
5411C24 LECT Accent on Ability (could be same tape as above)
* 5411C24 PPS-4 “Find Shortest Comm Line”—”Create a Memory”
* 5412C01 PLS Awareness of Awareness
* 5412C01 PPS-5 “Decide to Be Silent”—”Find Some Secrets”
5412C03 PLS Title unknown
* 5412C08 PPS-6 “Waiting”, “Something You Can Associate With”
* 5412C08 PPS Group Processing
5412C15 PLS Acceptance Level

P.A.B. No. 38
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR’S BULLETIN

From L. RON HUBBARD

Via Hubbard Communications Office
163 Holland Park Avenue, London W.11

_____________________________________________________________________

29 October 1954


THE AUDITOR’S CODE 1954

A Basic Course in Scientology—Part 5



1. DO NOT EVALUATE FOR THE PRECLEAR.

The main difficulty of the preclear is other-knowingness. An auditor auditing a preclear has before him someone whose last stronghold of owned knowingness is his engram bank and various mental phenomena. As much as possible, the preclear should be permitted to discover the answers to this phenomena through the process of auditing. What the auditor is doing is steering. If he tells consistently what is to be found or what will happen, the preclear will not get well. The steering, of course, is a covert but highly acceptable method of inviting the preclear to find out. Giving a process’s commands is an invitation to this discovery. The auditor is working from a body of knowledge as to how all minds and spirits function. The preclear could even be trained in this high generality without harm, and certainly can be audited in such a high generality, but its particularities and peculiarities, the phenomena which occur, must not be “telegraphed” to the preclear before they occur, and when something has occurred to the preclear the auditor should not then come up with its explanation. This was the entire failure of psychoanalysis. The preclear would say something, and the analyst would then tell the preclear what it meant.

The auditor should confine himself to giving the proper auditing commands and engaging in enough “dunnage” (extra and relatively meaningless talk) to maintain a two-way communication line.

2. DO NOT INVALIDATE OR CORRECT THE PRECLEAR’S DATA.

After a preclear has informed the auditor of an incident in his life it would be a fatal error, so far as the preclear’s case is concerned, for the auditor, using other data, to inform the preclear that he did not have a proper recall on the incident. This is the main trouble with husband and wife auditing teams, and why they normally do not work. Both have been present under various circumstances, and the husband or the wife doing the auditing on the other may find it impossible to repress his or her own version after the other one has delivered up an incident. Today’s type of auditing enters incidents minimally; therefore opportunities of this kind are not as frequent as in earlier days. Verbal invalidation is, of course, the symbolic manifestation of force. Invalidation, when expressed in emotion and effort, is force. When the preclear is invalidated he feels as though he has been struck by some force. One of the lowest levels on this line of invalidation is criticism. Lacking the effort or energy to hit somebody, a covert person criticizes or otherwise invalidates.


Copyright (©) 1954 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.

3. USE THE PROCESSES WHICH IMPROVE THE PRECLEAR’S CASE.

In a series of tests conducted to discover why certain co-auditing teams had failed to effect an improvement, it was found that the auditor in each of these failed teams had been auditing out of the preclear what should have been audited out of the auditor. Top-flight Scientology processes minimize this difficulty, for they audit the common denominator, as nearly as it can be approached, of the difficulties in any and all minds. Nevertheless, auditors have a tendency to do to the preclear what should be done to the auditor in the way of processing. Furthermore, there are processes which effect improvement only after a great deal of auditing, and although this might be considered remunerative, it is actually not efficient since an auditor tying himself to one case is not benefiting the society as a whole, and is so defying his own third dynamic.

4. KEEP ALL APPOINTMENTS ONCE MADE.

Many a case has failed, not because of processing, but because the auditor was so irregular in keeping appointments that he introduced into the case an anxiety about waiting or unpunctuality. By failing to keep an appointment the auditor is actually telling the case that the case is not important, therefore not interesting, and the case will not run for an auditor who will not keep appointments. If an auditor has, himself, difficulty in keeping appointments, then he should not make specific appointments.

5. DO NOT PROCESS A PRECLEAR AFTER TEN P.M.

Utilizing all the experience of four years, it has been discovered that items 5, 6 and 7 of the Auditor’s Code were the only actual causative agents in spinning preclears. Whenever a preclear markedly worsened under processing, the process itself was found to be guiltless, and it was discovered that items 5, 6 and 7 of this Code had one or all been present. In every case where a psychosis or neurosis was restimulated by bad auditing, all these factors, 5, 6 and 7, were present. Because the body is built of cells which contain in their experience line, evidently, the pattern of plankton, energy level actually drops after sundown, but for a while there is a certain franticness which can be mistaken for energy. In other words, when the sun went down the source of energy was no longer present, therefore auditing during any of the dark hours is not as effective as auditing during daylight. However, a person can be audited safely up to 10 p.m. regardless of the state of his case. After 10 p.m. the curve of ability to handle energy drops quickly and hits its low at 2:00 a.m. But any auditing after 10 p.m. has been found to be at least ineffective, and might as well not have been done.

6. DO NOT PROCESS A PRECLEAR WHO IS IMPROPERLY FED.

It is an unhappy thing that occasional hidden factors such as lack of sleep, lack of food, or an urgent present time problem may defeat the efforts of an excellent auditor. The best process will not benefit a preclear who, still interiorized, is being drained down as a thetan by a body which is badly in need of food. Every bit of energy which the thetan puts out is being absorbed by the body, which is improperly fed. A body suffering from malnutrition, or even lack of a proper breakfast, will thus inhibit auditing.

Sometimes a preclear who has come from a distant area to be audited is sufficiently short of cash that he will attempt to subsist during the week of an intensive upon sandwiches and coffee. He might as well have stayed home, for his body, being hungry, will pull in engrams, which are after all edible energy, will drain down every beam which a thetan throws out, and will in general defeat processing.

An improperly fed preclear demonstrates on a basal metabolism test, even when sane, the same oxygen burning rate as a psychotic. You can take any preclear, have him

omit eating breakfast, and a psychotic, and test the two of them, and you will discover their metabolism and breathing behavior to be similar.

It is not prescribing a diet to demand that your preclear eats as a normal human being should during an auditing intensive or before any auditing. Preclears who are not adequately fed can be spun if bad auditing and some other factors are added into the session. This does not mean that a body can get so starved that it cannot benefit from auditing, but it does mean that a proper diet, as is normal with the preclear, should be observed during an intensive. Diet, by the way, is nowhere near as large a factor in the recovery of cases as nutrition “ads” would have you believe, and today no HASI auditor is allowed to prescribe diets if he is to continue in the protection of the organization. However, number six must be observed during auditing.

7. DO NOT PERMIT A FREQUENT CHANGE OF AUDITORS.

Although it is almost impossible for a case to escape having two or three auditors, when the number gets up to six or eight over a relatively short space of time, such as a few months, the case is seen to suffer by reason of the change. As much as possible a case should be run by one auditor. The basic reason for this is that one auditor running a case has a better chance of completing what he starts. A frequent change of auditors nearly always means a frequent change of estimates of a case, and a frequent change of processes none of which get finished.

8. DO NOT SYMPATHIZE WITH THE PRECLEAR.

There are three ways of handling those who need help. The first and most senior of them is to be effective and remedy the condition once and for all. The second method would be to make the person comfortable. If you cannot be effective, and you cannot make the person comfortable, only then would you be justified in giving the person sympathy. At the same time cases can be retarded by the auditor’s being far too domineering, but if one has to err, err in the direction of being too domineering, not in the direction of being sympathetic. Sympathetic auditing invites the preclear to dredge up more data about which the auditor can be sympathetic, and finally becomes a mutual sympathetic society.

9. NEVER PERMIT THE PRECLEAR TO END THE SESSION ON HIS OWN INDEPENDENT DECISION.

With such processes in existence as Opening Procedure by Duplication, it becomes important that the auditor carry through what he starts. You will discover that a preclear very often will get up to a point where he desires to fight the auditor, and then will walk off from a session. It is the auditor’s responsibility to bring the preclear back and to finish the session. Sessions end when the auditor says they are over, not when the preclear says they are over. However, in order to continue the session it is not legitimate to abuse the preclear or disobey any other sections of the Code.

L. RON HUBBARD

P.A.B. No. 39
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR’S BULLETIN

From L. RON HUBBARD

Via Hubbard Communications Office
163 Holland Park Avenue, London W.11

_____________________________________________________________________

12 November 1954

THE AUDITOR’S CODE 1954 (Concluded)

A Basic Course in Scientology—Part 5 (Concluded)


10. NEVER WALK OFF FROM A PRECLEAR DURING A SESSION.

Although no auditor of any decency or attainment would believe that a person applying Scientology processes would need number ten, it has happened often enough that auditors have walked off from preclears who were in the midst of long communication lags to make it necessary that this be included in the Auditor’s Code. The auditor’s effort to punish the preclear for not obeying his command is responsible for this. One notable case, a poorly trained person practicing Scientology—you would hardly call him an auditor—became incensed with a psychotic girl he was auditing, got her into the middle of a long communication lag, raged at her, and then walked off from her. It took fifteen hours of extremely good and clever processing on the part of a top-flight auditor to regain the ground lost.

11. NEVER GET ANGRY WITH A PRECLEAR.

What must be the level of self-confidence of an auditor who feels that the introduction of misemotion into a session is necessary to express his inability to cope with his preclear?

12. ALWAYS REDUCE EVERY COMMUNICATION LAG ENCOUNTERED BY CONTINUED USE OF THE SAME QUESTION OR PROCESS.

Numbers 12 and 13 of the Auditor’s Code 1954 are the essential difference between a good auditor and a bad one. If you want to know who is a bad auditor, then discover the auditor who fails to reduce communication lags encountered in the preclear by a repetition of the same question or process. This auditor is expressing his own inability to persist, and is expressing as well his own inability to duplicate, and he is more under the control of the preclear than the preclear is under his control. An auditor not only has to understand communication lag, he must reduce every communication lag brought into being by a question or a process before going on to a new question or a new process.

13. ALWAYS CONTINUE A PROCESS AS LONG AS IT PRODUCES CHANGE, AND NO LONGER.

Here is the other way you tell a bad auditor. A person whose case is in poor condition will express his state by changing every time the preclear changes. Here is the auditor being the effect of the preclear. The preclear changes his condition, changes his communication lag, changes his ideas, and if, between auditor and preclear, he is


Copyright (©) 1954 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.

actually cause, the auditor will then change the question or change the process. You watch some auditor auditing who is ordinarily not reputed to get results, and you will find out that in the course of an hour he is likely to use ten or twelve different processes. Each time some change occurs in the preclear, instead of pursuing it and reducing the communication lag on the process the auditor promptly changes. He excuses this to himself by saying some other process is needed or necessary.

It so happens that the process which brings about a change will probably bring about further change. There is an auditing maxim concerning this: “The process which turns on a condition will turn it off.” This is true within limits, but it is true enough to drive home the fact that a person should use a process as long as it produces change. This can also be true of an auditing question. An auditing question should be used as long as it continues to produce change. But if one has used a question or process for some little time—in the case of a straight wire question five or eight minutes, in the case of Opening Procedures two or three hours—with no real change in the preclear, it is time to change the process. If the auditor does not change a good process, the process will then produce a change in the preclear.

A bad auditor will use a process until it turns on a somatic, will then change to another process, will run it until it turns on another somatic, and then change it, and so on until he has thoroughly bogged a case. In spotting spots to get rid of old auditing in preclears who have been audited between 1950 and 1954, the plaint is often heard from the preclear, “Oh, if only just one engram had been run a second time, or if one secondary had been run again, or if any auditor had said ‘go through that again’ how wonderful it would have been.”

It was the inability of the auditor to repeat the process of erasure which prevented Dianetics from being all we would ever have needed. The inability of the auditor to duplicate is mirrored in the fact that he cannot duplicate over and over the same question or the same process. This also comes into view in another way. An auditor who is unable to duplicate must always give the given and standard process with his own slight twist. He is given an auditing phrase, but he finds that he cannot use it unless he gives it a small curve. This auditor is worried about his own thinkingness and is using other thinkingness as his randomity. You can always tell a good auditor. He uses and abides by 12 and 13 of this Code.

14. BE WILLING TO GRANT BEINGNESS TO THE PRECLEAR.

An auditor who is unwilling to grant beingness to those around him will find himself unable to run a process which is effectively producing a change for the better in the preclear. This auditor will try to discover all manner of processes which reduce the status of the preclear. Whatever rationale he uses to explain this, he will not use an effective process if he is himself unwilling to grant beingness or life to the preclear. Thus we get two sharp divisions amongst auditors: those who are using the preclear as an opponent in a game, and those who are using the preclear as though the preclear was something being created by the auditor. The latter state of mind will produce remarkable results, the earlier will produce chaos. An auditor who needs preclears in order to have a fight would probably also beat children or small dogs—not big dogs, small dogs.

15. NEVER MIX THE PROCESSES OF SCIENTOLOGY WITH THOSE OF OTHER PRACTICES.

Auditors in general have considerable contempt for those who mix Scientology with some other practice or who use Scientology, change it around, and out of position or cowardice call it something else. Auditors do not like this because they almost invariably, one or another of them, will inherit at least some of the preclears of people who disobey this line of the Code. There follows then an auditor’s effort to unscramble

a case which has had its spine adjusted while running engrams or which has discovered an incident only to have discovered immediately after that it has tremendous mystic significance or psychoanalytic bearing. An auditor who mixes Scientology or miscalls it has never learned Scientology. If he knew Scientology he would not feel it necessary to do something else, for Scientology is nothing if not extremely effective—certainly more effective than any other existing practice today.

Sometimes auditors encounter people who “really use Scientology, but because of the acceptance level of the public” mix it with something else. The public has no difficulty and has never had any real difficulty in accepting or using Scientology under that name practiced according to its own procedures. In a particular instance, an auditor who prescribes diets or who does other things of a material nature additive to the practices of Scientology immediately divorces himself from the protection of the HASI and is subject to action by the CECS.* An auditor who has to mix Scientology to make it work didn’t know Scientology in the first place and so wasn’t really an auditor anyway.



This is the Auditor’s Code of 1954. It supersedes any earlier Codes. It has been developed by the CECS as its standard of practice, and latterly was adopted by the Hubbard Dianetic Research Foundation for use in the field of Dianetics. It is the official Auditor’s Code.

It is required of students under training that they know this Code by heart, know what it means, and as they process, practice it. It is one thing to know it—another thing to practice it. A good auditor does both. It is not something to be read, agreed with and forgotten. Following it means success in cases. Neglecting any part of it means failures. It combines the arduously won experiences collected during four years from the practices of three thousand auditors.

We want successes.


L. RON HUBBARD



















[* Committee of Examinations, Certifications and Services.]

T H E J O U R N A L O F
SCIENTOLOGY

Issue 40-G [1954, ca. late November]

Published by
The Hubbard Association of Scientologists, International
Phoenix, Arizona


Validation of Scientology

L. Ron Hubbard

The validation of Scientology and Dianetics has engrossed the time and attention of many auditors and myself. The aggregate validation programs engaged upon in the last four years have cost in excess of $200,000. It is not for nothing that we can say that today we practice the most validated science in the field of the mind and spirit that Earth has ever known.
The first validation pamphlet was accumulated by practicing psychologists and psychometrists in Los Angeles in mid-1950 and was published in the fall of that year. It was no more than an effort to make a formal study of validation itself. It brought forward many astonishing factors and was very broadly and pleasantly received.
Another validation program was engaged upon publicly on the founding of the HAS when people were invited to send their results in to the HAS so that these could be collected and published. These case histories were never published due to lack of funds which could be appropriated to that specific purpose.
Clinical course graduates report results to the HASI on exact report forms. This multitude of cases represents an enormous amount of study by individual auditors operating in various stages of training and in various areas on a wide cross section of the populace. These demonstrate a uniform and continued success on the part of auditors at this time to obtain results upon preclears.
However, the most arduous and carefully carried out program of validation has never been offered to the public and probably never will be. This is the program undertaken by myself and a few auditors to test and validate or invalidate new processes before their general release. Countless tests have been made of the processes which are today Scientology, and from this has come an understanding of the human mind of a magnitude and certainty to permit the Hubbard Association of Scientologists, International, to guarantee today to a preclear that Scientology, administered by a trained auditor, will result in a far better life. And this research program is mirrored in the results we get, for it has included the knowledge of how to train auditors so that they can continue to obtain these results. Today there is no question about the workability of Scientology and the results it obtains. It is, indeed, the most validated science of mind Earth has ever known. The results which come in every day adequately prove this.





Copyright (©) 1954 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.

PHOENIX CERTIFICATION COURSE LECTURES
Phoenix, Arizona
15 November—4 December 1954


L. Ron Hubbard began lecturing to the Phoenix Certification Course (leading to HCA or HDA), which enrolled every Monday, on Monday, November 15, 1954. He gave the following lectures, which deal with the fundamental data of Scientology and the exact and precise use of techniques and processes:


5411C15 HCAP-1 Title unknown
** 5411C17 HCAP-2 Background of Six Basic Steps
* 5411C .... HCAP-3 Elementary Straightwire
* 5411C .... HCAP-4 Remedy of Havingness
* 5411C22 HCAP-5 Levels of Case Ability
** 5411C23 HCAP-6 Addressing Groups and Starting Sessions
* 5411C24 HCAP-7 Following Orders
** 5411C24 HCAP-8 Two-way Communication
* 5411C30 HCAP-9 Solving Cases
** 5412C01 HCAP-10 Opening Procedure of 8-C
** 5412C03 HCAP-11 Op Pro by Dup with Two-way Comm; also issued as
P R O-20
* 5412C04 HCAP-12 Last Lecture


During this same period L. Ron Hubbard was also giving public lectures and group processing sessions (see page 95).

P.A.B. No. 40
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR’S BULLETIN

From L. RON HUBBARD

Via Hubbard Communications Office
163 Holland Park Avenue, London W.11

__________________________________________________________________________________

26 November 1954

THE CODE OF HONOUR

A Basic Course in Scientology—Part 6


1. Never desert a comrade in need, in danger or in trouble.

2. Never withdraw allegiance once granted.

3. Never desert a group to which you owe your support.

4. Never disparage yourself or minimize your strength or power.

5. Never need praise, approval or sympathy.

6. Never compromise with your own reality.

7. Never permit your affinity to be alloyed.

8. Do not give or receive communication unless you yourself desire it.

9. Your self-determinism and your honour are more important than your immediate life.

10. Your integrity to yourself is more important than your body.

11. Never regret yesterday. Life is in you today, and you make your tomorrow.

12. Never fear to hurt another in a just cause.

13. Don’t desire to be liked or admired.

14. Be your own adviser, keep your own counsel and select your own decisions.

15. Be true to your own goals.

Scientology is itself the microcosm of a civilization. It contains two moral codes: one is the moral code of practice which is the Auditor’s Code of 1954, the other is the Code of a Scientologist, which will be given at greater length in the next PAB. It also contains an ethical code, and that is its Code of Honour.

The difference between ethics and morals is very clearly known in Scientology, if not in a modem dictionary. This mergence of morals and ethics has occurred in recent times, and is symptomatic of a general decline. An ethic is practiced on an entirely

Copyright (©) 1954 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.

self-determined basis. An ethical code is not enforceable, is not to be enforced, but is a luxury of conduct. A person conducts himself according to an ethical code because he wants to or because he feels he is proud enough or decent enough, or civilized enough to so conduct himself. An ethical code, of course, is a code of certain restrictions indulged in to better the manner of conduct of life. If one Scientologist started to punish or berate some other Scientologist and called for an enforcement on the grounds that the Code of Honour had been disregarded, the punitive act itself would involve and violate the Code of Honour. The Code of Honour is a Code of Honour as long as it is not enforced. If a person is big enough, or strong enough or sane enough, then he can indulge himself in the luxury of holding upon himself freely and of his own decision the Code of Honour. When such an ethical code begins to be enforced it becomes then a moral code.

A moral code is enforceable. Mores are those things which make a society possible. They are the heavily agreed-upon, policed codes of conduct of the society. If an auditor were to flagrantly and continually violate the Auditor’s Code or the Code of a Scientologist, then other auditors would have a perfect right to demand, and through the HASI effect, the suspension or revocation of certificates or memberships, or both. However, no such action is possible with the Code of Honour. A person could continually and flagrantly flaunt the Code of Honour and experience no more than perhaps the slight contempt or pity of his fellows.

The Code of Honour clearly states conditions of acceptable comradeship amongst those fighting on one side against something which they conceive should be remedied. While anyone practicing “the only one” believes that it is possible to have a fight or contest only so long as one remains “the only one” and confronts as that single identity all of existence, it is not very workable to live without friends or comrades in arms. Amongst those friends and comrades in arms one’s acceptability and measure is established fairly well by his adherence to such a thing as the Code of Honour. Anyone practicing the Code of Honour would maintain a good opinion of his fellows, a much more important thing than having one’s fellows maintain a good opinion of one.

If you believed Man was worthy enough to be granted by you sufficient stature so as to permit you to exercise gladly the Code of Honour, I can guarantee that you would be a happy person. And if you found an occasional miscreant falling away from the best standards you have developed, you yet did not turn away from the rest of Man, and if you discovered yourself betrayed by those you were seeking to defend and yet did not then experience a complete reversal of opinion about all your fellow men, there would be no dwindling spiral for you.

Indicative of this is a process which is rather easy to work and which has some workability. Sit down in a public place where many people are passing by and simply postulate into them, above them, around them, Perfection—no matter what you see. Do this person after person as they walk by you or around you, doing it quietly and to yourself. It may or may not occur that you would bring changes in their lives, but it would certainly occur that you would bring about a change in yourself. This is not an advised process—it is simply a demonstration of a fact that he who lives believing wrong of all his fellow men lives, himself, in Hell. The only difference between Paradise on earth and Hell on earth is whether or not you believe your fellow man worthy of receiving from you the friendship and devotion called for in this Code of Honour.

L. RON HUBBARD

F O U N D A T I O N B U L L E T I N S
Volume 1, No. 3 [December, 1954]

Official Publication of
The Hubbard Dianetic Research Foundation
Phoenix, Arizona



Accent on Ability

NEW TREND TAKES FORM

L. Ron Hubbard

Many things have been learned in the past several years of Dianetic research and investigation, as will be brought out in the book Dianetics: 1955!. But chief amongst these items is the fact that we have misplaced, to some degree, our accent mark.
Formerly we were intent upon surveys of many lines of human activity. We have covered such things as psychosomatic illness and aberration, and indeed the stress on these two is paramount as represented in the title itself of Book One, Dianetics: The Modern Science of Mental Health. Today’s accent is much more sharply aligned, and arrowed into human activity.
Today we know that man is so hungry for a game that he cannot but cling to, or even invent, psychosomatic ills and aberrations so as to satiate his apparently unappeasable thirst for problems.
All of us have had the experience of processing preclears who did not want to get well. Of course, today, we could give them a sufficient abundance of problems and illnesses in mock-up form, or in some other manner, so as to bring them into a state of realization that they could create more problems than they had and so convince them that it would be possible to release at least some of the ills to which they are dedicated. This does not mean, of course, that we could not bring preclears into a state of being well, or that we cannot bring them into such a desirable condition. All I wish to call to your attention here is that we have misplaced our accent. If man is so thoroughly engrossed in self-inspection so as to generate and multiply barriers such as psychosomatic ills and aberrations, then it must mean that his interest is centered on himself. And if his interest is centered upon himself, and we yet find it undesirable for our fellow men to be so out of communication, then there must be other spheres to which this interest can be directed.
We know that if his interest is so thoroughly involved with the first dynamic, then he must have abandoned many other dynamics. We see in this first dynamic fixation a lessening of force and ability throughout the whole of mankind or any group of men. When interest introverts, the subject which seems most compelling to man is psychosomatic ills and aberration, for he generates these only when his interest is so introverted.
It has been my good fortune to discover in the researches of the past few years that there were many roads out of this puzzle of self. Indeed, the entire span of the dynamics could be considered themselves a roadway. If an individual is to depart from a fixation on the first dynamic, then it is necessary for him to project himself and discover interests upon the remaining dynamics. This is, indeed, a very clear roadway, and one which anyone would take—unless, of course, he were confronted by a barrier sufficiently gigantic to him to debar his interests from forming on these additional dynamics.
Let us examine this situation further by inspecting the dynamics. According to the fundamental axioms of Dianetics, which have not changed, the dynamic principle


Copyright (©) 1954 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.

of existence is “Survive.” Survival considered as the single and sole purpose subdivides into at least four dynamics. Dynamic One is the urge of the individual toward survival for himself. Dynamic Two is the urge of the individual toward survival through procreation and includes both the sex act and the raising of progeny. Dynamic Three is the urge of the individual toward survival through a group. Dynamic Four is the urge of the individual toward survival as Mankind. These, as stated in the First Book, are the legitimate sphere of interest of Dianetics.
If we are considering these dynamics as a roadway, and if we are seeking to draw man’s interest away from the First Dynamic where it can center only upon psychosomatic illness and aberration in order to have problems, then we see at once that the Second Dynamic is barriered. This is highly frowned upon in this society at this time, and yet the Second Dynamic is the only dynamic which will permit future generations to come into the world. Even the Archbishop who frowns and sneers on the subject of sex is, as a body, the product of a sexual act between his father and his mother. No matter how much he might rant and rave to his congregation, actually even for the persistence of the church and the survival of congregations, to say nothing of the revenue provided from baptisms, the church is entirely dependent upon the sexual act. When people interest themselves in juvenile delinquency they should interest themselves in that part of the sexual act which is the raising and caring for children. Unless we release, at least to some degree, the stigma attached to sex we have immediately blocked our road out to just that extent that the sexual act is forbidden or denied.
But consider that our individual has managed to bridge the sexual act, and has at least thought about adventuring on the road to the Third Dynamic. Here do we find any barriers? Indeed we do. We discover that before an individual can possibly be admitted into any group, whether small or large as that nebulous thing called “society,” he must be possessed of many abilities. Otherwise he will be improperly mannered and possessed of too few skills to make his presence in the group desirable, and here we have the foremost bar upon the line: the individual’s lack of social, artistic, technical, artisan, or labor ability.
Now, while we can understand ability upon the Third Dynamic, it becomes a little difficult to understand upon the Fourth Dynamic unless one conceives it in terms of absence of ability. Let us inspect this situation today wherein nationalism was launched upon the world to give into our possession at this time, in this atomic age, an anarchy of nations. These nations depend for their further continuance and sustenance upon the production and even worship of their citizens. A few years ago this system was not entirely unworkable. Distances were sufficiently great to permit an isolation to occur, but now we are in possession, according to the officials of at least three major governments, of weapons of such magnitude that these could very well destroy all life extant upon a continent of earth. This doubtlessly laudable ability on the part of our weapon-makers discovers a certain inadequacy in this arrangement of nations, for these nations live in an anarchy, and an attempt to reconcile them one to another has already met with defeat, where the biggest of these nations, in San Francisco, withheld to themselves the right to veto any action of the General Assembly.
Somewhere (you and I do not know where), some individual (you and I do not know who), has at this moment in his possession weapons of sufficient magnitude to lay flat continents of earth. If one is so naive as to suppose that one can wipe off a continent without endangering or even obliterating life on other continents, then one has not flown recently across an ocean and discovered what near neighbors these continents are, and that they breathe the same air recirculated by the prevailing Westerlies—for atomic fission is noted for nothing if not its ability to remain suspended in the air. We do not properly know who would give this man his orders, providing this man would stay there and wait for orders, nor do we know in what area of the world such a man might be located. Perhaps there are two such men. Perhaps there are two dozen. Perhaps three or four nations have such men standing by with such weapons. In this age of guided missiles it is highly doubtful if the services of a pilot and plane would have to be commandeered in order to accomplish the destruction of a continent. Do not think that I speak idly, for I am merely quoting Secretary of the Air Force, Harold

Talbott, to the effect that he is in possession—or somebody is in possession, he does not let us in on what or where—”of weapons that can lay waste an entire continent men, women, children, even the beasts and the vegetation. They can abolish in a single night not only an army, not only a nation, but a whole civilization.” He also states, “Some of them are of such awful power that even the men who build them cannot fully visualize the carnage that would follow their use.” He also tells us this is neither the time nor the place to dwell upon these weapons, just as though there were some time and some place where one could consider this problem. For none of us, on this Fourth Dynamic problem, which is what it is, has, evidently, any right whatsoever to think in such terms as the survival of Mankind.
If only by atomic power, and without regard to the anarchistic state of nations one to another, we are definitely barriered from a Fourth Dynamic survival. For instance, what would you do right this moment in order to resolve this problem on the Fourth Dynamic? What ability could you possibly assume to yourself, practice and perfect, which would remove from Mankind this threat of wanton and widespread destruction at the hands of irresponsible politicians and rather seedy nuclear physicists who have never been noted for their sanity—who, indeed, today, by National Proclamation (at least in the United States) are debarred even from a cursory examination of their sanity? For if they are given an examination on the subject of their sanity they have broken their “top secret classification’’ and thus must never more handle weapons or papers of that nature. They are not only debarred from the casual society of their fellows by these awful secrets which they possess, but they are debarred as well from any resolution of any mental problem which they might have. And, as we look at this situation where one man, with or without orders, can destroy an entire continent, we cannot but be amazed to discover that no-one is ever to be permitted to investigate his sanity or to give him any counsel along human lines. This individual is not being barred merely from the Fourth Dynamic, he is being compressed thoroughly back to the First Dynamic, and the result of this? Well, what would you do tonight if you had to solve this problem? Thus, you see, thee and me are lacking to some degree an ability in this, or ability on the Fourth Dynamic.
Now, looking this roadway over again, we see that each of the last two dynamics are rather thoroughly barriered by lack of ability. Let us investigate further. Most often we discover sexual aberration continuing from a complete lack of sexual ability. This was most marked in the very early years of Christianity, wherein we discovered a eunuch, Saint Paul, advising everyone to have nothing to do whatsoever with sex-a course which the church, without further inquisition, has happily helmed itself along. And we discover that if we can sufficiently suppress the ability of an individual sexually, or if we can suppress his ability to have children, we get those various manifestations which we call nymphomania, which we call perversion, and so forth. Anyone who has audited people has discovered that where we had lack of sexual ability we had various disabilities which are classified by law as sexual irregularities. And thus we find this problem of ability is very present on the Second Dynamic. Further, if one cannot have children we discover that one is prone to be rather diffident, to say the least, about raising children no matter whose, and thus any ability as a father or a nurse is suppressed.
On the First Dynamic we are continually struck by the fact that individuals in the society insist upon other individuals negating the First Dynamic. It is not merely common, it is socially polite to pretend to be unable. A man who can do courageous things is expected to discount his ability. A man who can work well in the field of the arts is expected to make nothing of it. This is simple politeness, but it is not good processing. For an individual who has to make a postulate nine times a day that he is incapable is liable, at long last, to become just that.
We long ago discovered in Dianetics that what we validate comes true. Thus, if we continue to process or connect with or continue to harbor entheta, we discover that entheta becomes quite live. But if we decide to process on the theta line, validating such things as affinity, reality and good communication, we make short work out of the case. Here we have the difference between making a preclear well and making him

sick. We can actually process a preclear in the direction of difficulty to such an extent that these difficulties, imagined or actual, become real. The validation of difficulty will always result in the accomplishment of difficulty. Similarly, the validation of ability will always accomplish ability.
Thus we see that there were two sides to these dynamics. The lower side in each case, whether we had to do with the First, Second, Third, or Fourth Dynamic was aberration and psychosomatic illness. The individual, self-centered, is liable to dwell sufficiently upon his ills and injuries and negate himself sufficiently to become an “only one” and to suppress any ability which he has. On the Second Dynamic he broods about his inabilities to have or raise children until he has confirmed these inabilities. On the Third Dynamic he is made to feel a stranger to the group by his lack of skill or his lack of social presence, or by the group’s own aberration or psychosomatic ill, to a point where he is occasioned to abandon the group. On the Fourth Dynamic this has become so marked that one does not even think of the Fourth Dynamic as having ills, much less how to remedy them. But we discover in this anarchy of nations where any politician of any country can make capital of hatred for any other country, a psychosomatic illness and an aberration.
Confronted with this situation we see that the wrong thing to do would be to validate any dynamic’s ills, but rather, we should process along the lines of the wellness in the dynamic.
Now the upper range of all this would be ability. Ability on the First Dynamic would be the ability to handle and train and accomplish goals as one’s self. Ability on the Second Dynamic would be to have and raise and train children. Ability on the Third Dynamic would be to have the ability necessary to develop social, industrial or agrarian skills so as to be an asset to the Third Dynamic. And unfortunately, unless we have built up ability across these first three dynamics we will never attain an ability of any kind on the Fourth Dynamic. Man, indeed, today, is so antipathetic toward any ability on the Fourth Dynamic that he, as represented by one group, almost actively murdered an individual who dared to write a book called One World. That the individual, Wendell Wilkie, was murdered by heartbreak does not make it any the less a murder. When we approach a point of no ability, we approach a desperate state of psychosomatic illness and aberration. Abandonment of any dynamic is not an escape from that dynamic, but an enslavement to it. This is how this universe works.
The accomplishment of ability on any of these first four dynamics will be absolutely necessary if man is to survive, and indeed if individuals are to go forward and make any civilization in which it would be fit to live.
Our accent, from the first, should have been upon ability.
Thus, Dianetics was not really the modem science of mental health, but was (and I think all of us understood this basically) the Modem Science of Ability, for I have never had a preclear who did not hope, through processing, for other than to gain new ability or to regain his old. He was not there to be processed out of his psychosomatic ills and aberration.
On the definition of “sane” or “ill,” if we examine any page of world history we will discover that “sanity” had very little to do with ability. We find some of the men who have given the greatest service to mankind so completely “insane” that they could not have passed the first part of any modem test. “Sanity” is only “agreed upon behavior.” When one departs from this “agreed upon behavior” one is of course susceptible to the label “insane.” Any behavior which is visionary, compelling, or out of the ordinary is apt to be labelled insane. By “insane” we mean only that the conduct, or the vision, or the goal has not generally been agreed upon. Strangely enough, we also find “sane” men benefiting Mankind. And so we have here no definition at all. Conduct out of the ordinary has numberless times benefited Mankind. Thus we have no grounds on which to work at all if we use “sanity” as a basis. We are, however, on solid ground when we address the subject of ABILITY, and when we say that we are going forward to increase ability on the First, Second, Third and Fourth Dynamics, we would then be on solid processing ground, for ability is a common denominator just as survival is a common measure and urge in all man.

The modern processes of Dianetics increase ability. Each and every one of these processes which is successful in the hands of an auditor does nothing but increase ability. Ability is something which is created. If we are searching forever for the native kernel which is man we will only succeed in depressing him from communication on the Second, Third and Fourth Dynamics, and if we accomplish this then we have accomplished the “only one,” the aberrated, the sick individual.
Dianetics today is a Science of Ability. It has no traffic with psychosomatic illness or aberration. It does not care a whit about these two things. Dianetics today can be prepared to expect out of an asylum, or off a Mount, alike some benefit to mankind. It is prepared to discover in the sickest body possible, assets to man, and caring nothing for the sickness of the mind or the sickness of the body, it seeks only to increase the native ability of the individual and to create new abilities in the individual and for the individual so as to resolve the problems of the First, Second, Third and Fourth Dynamics.

T H E J O U R N A L O F
SCIENTOLOGY

Issue 41-G [ 1954, ca. early December]

Published by
The Hubbard Association of Scientologists, International
Phoenix, Arizona


Is It Possible to Be Happy?


L. Ron Hubbard

It would appear that our main problem in life is happiness; yet there appears to be a confusion about the ingredients that go to make up this evidently desirable condition. To many the main ingredients seem to be money and leisure. How can one be happy without a new coat, a better pair of shoes, a new car, a better house and the leisure in which to enjoy them? How is it possible to be happy when it is manifestly impossible to have the things one wants and desires? And yet, an individual can have a million dollars and buy everything that he desires and still not achieve happiness. Another, who has worked hard all his life and raised a large family, has looked forward to retiring when he would have the time to do all the things he had always wanted to do. But, after he has retired, is he happy? No, he is sitting there thinking about the good old days when he was working hard.
So this question of happiness needs to be examined. What is it? How does one attain it?
The truth of the matter is (and philosophers have said this many times) that the only happiness you will ever find lies within you.
Actually a little child derives all of his pleasure in life from the grace he puts upon life. He goes out in the morning and looks at the day. And it is a very, very beautiful day. He looks at the flowers and they are very beautiful. He waves a magic hand and brings all manner of interesting things into being in the environment. Do you see the magic of the morning and the beauty of the flowers? Too often when we have become adult the flowers are wilted, if we even see them, and the beauty of the morning is obscured by a cloud.
Our attitude toward life makes every possible difference to our living. It is not necessary to study a thousand ancient books to discover this fact; but sometimes it needs to be pointed out again. Life does not change so much as our attitude towards it.
It is easy enough to lose sight of this when our problems are overwhelming us and we no longer seem able to handle them. When the marriage which we dreamed would be so happy turns out to be a dog fight, the project from which we had hoped so much suddenly falls flat, or the friend whom we had trusted betrays our trust.
Is there anything that we can do for conditions like these? There are many things we can do—the least of them is to take a look at the environment. Just look around and ask yourself, “Where am I?” “What am I doing here?” Once you have found out where you are, then find out what you can do to make it more habitable. The day you stop building your own environment, when you stop creating your own surroundings, when you stop waving a magic hand and gracing everything around you with magic and beauty, things cease to be magical and beautiful.
People seek happiness in various ways, hectically, seriously, desperately; but the odd part of it is that they find only what they themselves put there. People become unhappy about life because they have ceased to make life. This is the single difference between human beings. On the one hand there is the human being who is unhappy,

Copyright (©)1954 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.

miserable, sick, who is not getting along in life and who does not see its brightness. Life is handling him, running, changing, making him. On the other hand, we find somebody who is happy, cheerful, strong and who finds everything in life worth doing. What is the secret about this person? It is very simple. He is busy making life. This is the single difference. The first person has stopped making life because he, himself, has decided that life cannot be made. Some small failure, maybe not graduating with the same class, not marrying the first man or woman who came along and seemed desirable, losing a car, or just some other minor thing in life started this attitude, and the person looks around one day and says, “Well, I’ve lost.” After that life makes him; he does not make life any more.
This has been the main problem which man has faced and failed to solve and it would be a very dreadful situation if nothing could be done about it. The fact of the matter is that this is the easiest problem of all the problems man faces. Simply stated, it is changing his own and the attitudes of those around him. Everyone seems totally dependent upon the attitude of other people; the attitude of somebody else towards you may make or break your life. There are two problems: changing one’s own attitude towards someone else and theirs towards oneself. For many centuries man has desired to know how to change the mind and condition of himself and his fellows but, up to a relatively few years ago, had not accumulated enough information to do so. Man now understands a great many things which he never understood before, and among these can now be placed an understanding of the human mind. Man can conquer himself, and as a result interesting miracles are taking place across this country and the other continents of earth. These miracles consist of people becoming well when they were incurably ill, of people who were unhappy becoming happy, of abolishing the danger inherent in many illnesses and many of the conditions of man. Yet the answer has been with man all the time.
The science of Scientology came about because of the increase of man’s knowledge of the physical universe and of energy. Never before in all of his history has man possessed so much information about energy, and, in accepting this, he has entered into his inheritance of knowledge and understanding of his own mind. Scientology has made it possible for man to reach the goal towards which he has been striving for thousands of years: to know himself and, in knowing himself, to know and understand other people and the rest of the physical universe.

(Written from a transcription of a recent broadcast lecture by L. Ron Hubbard )

9TH & 10TH AMERICAN ADVANCED CLINICAL COURSE LECTURES
Phoenix, Arizona
6 December 1954—21 January 1955


L. Ron Hubbard began the 9th American Advanced Clinical Course in Phoenix, Arizona, December 6th. At this time it was announced that HCAs could enroll in the ACC every three weeks; thus the 9th ACC lectures overlap those of the 10th ACC which began January 3rd. There was also time out during this ACC for the Unification Congress, December 28-31, 1954 (see page 125).

The Wednesday evening public lectures and group processing were also recommenced on January 5th, during the time period of these ACCs (see page 126).

* 5412C06 9ACC-1 Introduction to 9th ACC—Havingness
* 5412C07 9ACC-2 Essence of Auditing, Know to Mystery Scale
** 5412C08 9ACC-3 Rundown on Six Basics
** 5412C09 9ACC-4 Communication Formula
* 5412C10 9ACC-5 Practice of Dianetics and Scientology
** 5412C13 9ACC-6 Conduct of the Auditor
** 5412C14 9ACC-7 Mechanics of Communication
* 5412C15 9ACC-8 Havingness
* 5412C16 9ACC-9 Pan-Determinism and One-way Flows
** 5412C17 9ACC-9A History and Development of Processes—Games and the
Limitations in Games
* 5412C17 PLS History of Processes
** 5412C20 9ACC-10 Games (Fighting)
** 5412C21 9ACC-11 Anatomy of Games, Part A
** 5412C22 9ACC-11A Anatomy of Games, Part B
* 5412C22 9ACC-12 One-way Flows ( In Processing)
** 5412C22 9ACC-12A Q & A Period
* 5412C23 9ACC-13 Havingness and Communication Formulas
** 5412C23 9ACC-13A After-Lecture Comments
** 5412C24 9ACC-14 Pan-Determinism
* 5412C27 9ACC-15 Training New People
* 5501C03 9ACC-16 Auditing Requirements, Differences
* 5501C03 10ACC-1 Pan-Determinism of Auditors
* 5501C04 10ACC-2 Pan-Determinism of Auditors
* 5501C04 9ACC-16A Time
* 5501C05 10ACC-3 Exteriorization by Gradient Scale, Remedy of
Havingness—Adjusting Anchor Points
5501C05 10ACC-4 Title unknown
* 5501C05 9ACC-17 Auditing at Optimum
* 5501C06 9ACC-18 Exteriorization
* 5501C06 10ACC-5 Route 1—Exteriorization
* 5501C06 10ACC-6 Condensation of Know to Mystery Scale
* 5501C07 9ACC-19 Elementary Material: Know to Mystery Scale
** 5501C13 9ACC-23 Definitions: Glossary of Terms


** 5501 C14 9ACC-24 Perfect Duplication, Life Continuum
** 5501C17A 9ACC-25 Auditing Demo: Six Basics in Action
* 5501C17B 9ACC-25A Auditors’ Conference
* 5501C18A 9ACC-26 Auditing Demo: Spotting Spots
* 5501C18B 9ACC-26A Auditors’ Conference
* 5501C19 9ACC-27 Auditing Demo: Exteriorization
* 5501 C20 9ACC-28 Background Music to Living
** 5501C21 9ACC-29 Axioms: Laws of Consideration, What an Axiom Is








LRH TAPE LECTURES
1954 (specific date unknown)

54 .. C .. LECTURE Lecture 2, Valences
54 .. C .. LECTURE Lecture 6, Facsimiles—Sol ids
54 .. C .. LECTURE Lecture 18, Chronic Somatics
54 or 55 LECTURE The Dynamics—OT/ARC—As-isness
54 .. C .. GR/PROC Group Session—Reaching and Withdrawing
54 .. C .. LECTURE Illusion Processing
54.. C .. LECTURE Reach and Withdraw
54.. C.. LECTURE Resistive Level 5’s
54 .. C .. LECTURE Space and the Pc and Self-Determinism
54 ........ Special Radio Broadcast: Introductory Talk for the
Scientology Road Show


P.A.B. No. 41
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR’S BULLETIN


From L. RON HUBBARD

Via Hubbard Communications Office
163 Holland Park Avenue, London W.11

__________________________________________________________________________________

10 December 1954

THE CODE OF A SCIENTOLOGIST

A Basic Course in Scientology—Part 7


All Scientologists who have been granted the right to train by the Board of Directors of the HASI have pledged themselves to adherence to the Code of a Scientologist. It is also the official code of the CECS* and a similar code has been adopted by the Dianetic Foundation for Dianeticists.

In that Man, until he has gotten above 20.0, lives to fight, it is an extremely simple thing for an individual, finding opponents very scarce, to choose out his own organization as an opponent. This is the basic and actually the only reason why there has been enturbulence in the organizations and groups of this science: some individual lacking sufficient sight to see that the organization was facing a potent and powerful abundance of opponents, himself able only to fight with thought itself, to turn upon his fellow auditors, upon a group, upon an organization, and fight it, to fight the subject matter of his science, to fight the correspondences of his organization, to fight the commas and semicolons of Bulletins, and in short to conduct himself as a one-man thinking machine at war with all of thought. Actually this is not very exciting. Such a person is attacking people very like himself who do not fight back, for others than this person can conceive that the actual opponent and enemy being attacked by this science lies totally outside the perimeter of this science. Find someone attacking his job rather than using his job to help attack existence, find someone using his degrees and awards to attack his own organization, find someone using his rank as an officer to attack his own army and one finds immediately a sick man. If he were not a sick man he would have sufficient power and influence to bring about the changes he conceives desirable without recourse to combat.

In that there has to be a fight for there to be a game, it is not strange to find people who have lost elsewhere attacking their own organizations. When such a person gets extremely decayed, he can only attack himself, and so splits himself up into various entities, or identities, or valences, and quarrels with these. The trick of this universe is to reduce down the eight dynamics by making a person fight each one in turn. The willingness of the thetan to fight aids and abets this. Thus this dwindling spiral consists entirely of what one is willing to fight. There is no peace for anyone below twenty, and that is fairly high on the tone scale. But it is a good game to advance science, civilization, knowledge and understanding into a semi-barbaric world made affluent by its machines. It is a good fight simply to make the world effective enough TO fight, but he who loses in a wider fight will engage in a more intimate quarrel until at last he is only fighting himself. About the saddest thing you would ever care to encounter is a thetan obsessively and continually putting out beams which go an inch or two from him and then come back and hit him. He is not even possessed of

[* Committee of Examinations, Certifications and Services. ]

Copyright (©) 1954 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.


a body, he is simply an isolated identity at war with himself, for he feels and has been led to feel, that there are no other opponents.

The Code of a Scientologist is a stopgap to serve in the interim time when all Scientologists are not yet up to a level where they are content to receive for their opponents the logical targets of the science itself, and for their randomity must pick out the organization and other Scientologists in order to engage in a game.

With all Scientologists subscribing to this code, Scientology will, itself, become a potent forward motion in our world and this universe.

A student is expected to know, in its entirety, and to know it well enough to practice it, this Code.


THE CODE OF A SCIENTOLOGIST

The Code of a Scientologist was evolved to safeguard Scientologists in general, and is subscribed to by leading Scientologists. The Committee of Examinations, Certifications and Services of the HASI has accepted it as an enforceable code.

As a Scientologist, I pledge myself to the Code of Scientology for the good of all.

1. To hear or speak no word of disparagement to the press, public, or preclears concerning any of my fellow Scientologists, our professional organization or those whose names are closely connected to this science.

2. To use the best I know of Scientology to the best of my ability to better my preclears, groups and the world.

3. To refuse to accept for processing and to refuse to accept money from any preclear or group I feel I cannot honestly help.

4. To deter to the fullest extent of my power anyone misusing or degrading Scientology to harmful ends.

5. To prevent the use of Scientology in advertisements of other products.

6. To discourage the abuse of Scientology in the press.

7. To employ Scientology to the greatest good of the greatest number of dynamics.

8. To render good processing, sound training and good discipline to those students or peoples entrusted to my care.

9. To refuse to impart the personal secrets of my preclears.

10. To engage in no unseemly disputes with the uninformed on the subject of my profession.

L. RON HUBBARD










P.A.B. No. 42
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR’S BULLETIN

From L. RON HUBBARD

Via Hubbard Communications Office
163 Holland Park Avenue, London W.11

_____________________________________________________________________

24 December 1954

SIX BASIC PROCESSES


There are six basic processes today in Dianetics and Scientology. Before we consider these processes, let us first consider the essential difference between Dianetics and Scientology. What we are doing could be called, more succinctly, “an understanding of life.” Under this heading, we could call anything a science or an art and we could bring in many subdivisions.

Other subdivisions which enter into this represent the difference between a study of life in general and a study of man in particular. Scientology could be called a study of life; Dianetics could be called a study of man. The first four dynamics are devoted to Dianetics. If you read again Dianetics: The Modern Science of Mental Health, you will discover that it treats of the first four dynamics. If you examine the first shadows of what we now call Scientology, it treats all of the eight dynamics. In view of the fact that both Dianetics and Scientology operate in the field of man, it should be readily seen that the basic processes of Dianetics or Scientology as they apply to man would be the same. Just because we have used two different words is no reason man has changed. Thus we have our six basic processes and thus we discover that Dianetics and Scientology, up to the point of stable exteriorization, operate in exactly the same field with exactly the same tools. It is only after man is sufficiently exteriorized to become a spirit that we depart from the field of Dianetics; for here, considering man as a spirit, we must enter the field of religion. Thus we have our additional subdivision. Dianetics is a science which applies to man, a living organism; and Scientology is a religion.

The six basic processes are as follows:

1. Two-way Communication

2. Elementary Straightwire

3. Opening Procedure of 8-C

4. Opening Procedure by Duplication

5. Remedying Havingness

6. Spotting Spots in Space.

An additional breakdown of these sections demonstrates that these processes subdivide into some highly important techniques. An additional process is as follows:

1. Two-way Communication includes communication lag, scarcity of problems, the Code of a Scientologist, the Axioms of Dianetics.

2. Elementary Straightwire includes the Auditor’s Code, Self Analysis, Memory and Mass and their relationship, under which we get past life loss of memory and what we generally call “next-to-the-last list of Self Analysis.”

3. Opening Procedure of 8-C includes pan-determinism, orders, defenses and the theory and material pertinent to present time.

4. Opening Procedure by Duplication includes the communication formula, general theory of ARC and “it must-mustn’t happen again.”

5. The Remedy of Havingness includes the scale of substitutes, the hide-to-curiosity scale, Expanded Gita, mock-ups and engrams, overt acts and motivators, flows and terminals, the fact that two things can’t occupy the same space if one is to have a universe, significances and problems and, in particular, the scarcity of problems.

6. Spotting Spots includes “space, the theory of,” disinterest, importance, as-isness and the conditions of existence and separateness.

Appended to these subjects is one of equal importance in that it is the prediction of human beings. This is included, and could be called part seven of these basics. Science of Survival, with its dissertations on the Theta-MEST theory, ARC, and the Chart of Human Evaluation, is, indeed, a study of the prediction of homo sapiens.

It has been discovered in the field of training that an auditor has to be thoroughly versed in these seven items. He must be able to be expert in processing people using the six processes, and his understanding must be increased to the seventh item as included in the book Science of Survival.

How thoroughly does one have to cover any one of these subjects in order to render an auditor conversant with it? It has been found in the Phoenix Certification Course that even auditors who have studied this material before coming to the course had to be rehearsed on it a minimum of eight times and had to be carefully supervised through each one of these at least eight times, had to audit at least ten or fifteen hours on each process under supervision, and had to have each one of these processes run on him expertly for many hours before he finally was able to practice them with such skill that he produced uniform results. This is in spite of the fact that these particular processes are simple. Indeed, they are so simple that an auditor has a tendency to look at them and use them as though they were also pliable. Their simplicity is residual in the fact that they are the exact processes necessary to produce the exact results of Dianetics and Scientology.

It has been found that the simplicity of these processes was the stumbling block in their use. One instance in one HCA unit: a class went through for five weeks without entirely grasping the theory and practice of communication lag. Amongst this class was an auditor-student who was so expert at giving indirect, yet seemingly direct, answers that he had actually evaded the understanding of his fellow students. This person had yet to give a precisely direct reply to a question asked him. An instructor sat down with this student and for forty-five minutes asked him the same simple question. At the end of that time the student gave at last a direct reply, and this reply was the first time in the course when he had answered a question straight. A precision definition of communication lag is “the length of time, whether verbal or silent, intervening between the auditor’s asking of a specific question and the specific and precise answer of that question by the preclear.” It would not matter then whether the preclear continued to talk about something else than the question, or simply remained silent, this would still be communication lag. The class had not entirely grasped this fact in that they assumed that an indirect or an almost answer was sufficient. Rapidly in the next two auditing periods the case of the student broke, simply because his auditor now understood exactly what this person was doing with auditing questions and now demanded precise answers to questions, at the same time retaining ARC with his preclear.

The processes of Dianetics, as one can see, stress bringing a preclear into present time. In the old days we did this by running engrams, running locks and unsticking the preclear in general from various incidents in the past. Now we approach the problem far more directly. The Opening Procedure of 8-C is putting the preclear into contact with what is present time. The Remedy of Havingness will actually give the preclear enough energy masses to permit his starved condition to let go of the energy masses he is holding to him. The energy masses he is holding to him are commonly engrams with significance and content which make him very unhappy, but not as unhappy as he thinks he would be if he no longer had this energy. The motto of an individual seems to be “Any energy, even with content as vicious as an engram, is better than little or no energy.”

Here, with this list of processes, we have before us the basic training for the Dianeticist and Scientologist. These processes have now remained stable for some eight months. In spite of all the attention and tests they have received, little or no improvement has occurred in the actual form of the processes, and the processes and the commands have remained steady and stable.

In view of the fact that the thetan exterior is described fully in the second chapter of Dianetics: The Modern Science of Mental Health, and in view of the fact that we have now with the command “Be three feet back of your head” the “one-shot clear,” and in view of the fact that the instructor in London with his Advanced Clinical Course [1st London ACC] only three weeks deep had exteriorized successfully all of his students, we see we do not have any real problems in terms of processing or processes today. We can do it. An auditor who is well trained can achieve results with these basic processes which in any other age would be called miracles.

There are people around who desperately need it as a process who believe and who would have you believe that the Opening Procedure by Duplication techniques are the most vicious things ever invented. Compare this with the fact that these people also feel bounden to go out and crusade amongst their fellow men to teach them how bad Dianetics and Scientology are. These two facts combined should tell you something concerning duplication. The very thought of duplication is so hideous to some people that they are utterly unwilling to face the slightest chance that they might be brought in to a willingness to duplicate. These people have had things happen to them which are bad enough to make these people postulate that certain things mustn’t happen again. Duplication means that things must happen again and the process of duplication itself balances out and makes a person easy about his past.

In the process of running Opening Procedure by Duplication hypnotism very often comes off of the bank. Here we have an example of unhypnotizing. The process of hypnotism is a monotony and a central fixation on some one object. Opening Procedure by Duplication, using two objects and using an alert and aware procedure, contacting and examining these two objects alternately, tends to unfix a person from points in the past. Naturally, this begins to run out hypnotism. A person run for only 15 or 20 minutes on Opening Procedure by Duplication might very well feel himself getting more and more hypnotized; by the time he has been run 45 minutes or an hour, this sensation has worn away and the person is far more alert than he was at the beginning of the session. It is quite common to run Opening Procedure by Duplication for several hours, and Intensive Procedure as given at headquarters of the HASI is run precisely as given and taught upon preclears for a minimum of five hours before the HASI is content to release a preclear as in good condition. If the preclear cannot duplicate, his arrival at a state of good condition will simply be a signal for him to have a “no duplicate” fixation on feeling good. Thus the auditor would have brought him up to a level of feeling well and immediately afterwards the individual, being able to have things happen only once, would then have to feel bad. Here again is the problem of exteriorization which results soon afterwards in re-interiorization: the person has

exteriorized, he has the fixation that something must happen only once, and thus he will go back into the body and will not come out again. This is all under the heading of duplication. Opening Procedure by Duplication wakes up the preclear, puts his body back into balance and gives him a brighter outlook in general and makes him fear the past much less than before it has been run on him. He is far better able to control his body and his environment than previously and remarks that incidents have far less effect upon him than before. This does not look very much like hypnotism, now, does it?

With these processes a trained auditor—and we emphasize trained—is able to get the results which are called for and described in all the earlier books on Dianetics and Scientology. The reason one did not see these results more often was that the auditor himself could not duplicate the auditing commands, and thus anything and everything was being run but a minimum of result was taking place. I was running one preclear one day who was a very old-timer and who had been run many, many hours on the techniques contained in Dianetics: The Modern Science of Mental Health. I was running him on processes which ran out all of his earlier auditing. He broke down under this processing and began to curse, saying, “If only once—if only just once—I had been permitted to run a second time through an engram by my auditor; if only just once I had been able to run the secondary once more! But no! I was never given the chance to go through the engram a second time.” Now those of you who know the techniques of Book One know definitely they call for a continuous running through, over and over, of the same incident so as to de-intensify it. This is the sort of complicated duplication which the preclear was asked to do which resolved at once his ability to duplicate and the fact that it mustn’t happen again. Thus when auditors failed to return people through engrams and secondaries, for a second, fourth, fifth, or even tenth time if necessary, it then became impossible for these early techniques to work.

In training it is very difficult to relay the theory and processes to people who are not very alert and who cannot duplicate. One can say straight to a class that such-and-so is observably true, and the class will immediately agree that something is observably true, but immediately after leaving the classroom, will believe in themselves that an entirely different statement had been made than the one they agreed with. They will then agree with this different statement and all sorts of oddities in the form of theory and techniques become circulated.

In the next Professional Auditor’s Bulletin I am going to give you a rather thorough rundown on two-way communication and on the bulletins subsequent to that I am going to give you, for the first time, in written form, a considerable dissertation on these processes and the exact auditing commands and the results to be looked for.

But there is one thing I am probably not going to cover again, and this is an odd fact which has shown up in our training experience here and in my handling of a great many auditors. This has to do with the case of the auditor in particular. I could write an entire series of PABs on this subject, but I am sure this statement will be enough. The case of an auditor, one who is skilled in the processes of Dianetics and Scientology, and the case of a preclear, one who has just walked in off the street without further knowledge, are entirely different cases, as both Dianeticists and Scientologists know. At one time the cases of Scientologists and Dianeticists were considered so much with horror on the part of other Scientologists and Dianeticists that one audited a fellow practitioner with considerable reluctance. Dianeticists and Scientologists were renowned to be tough cases.

I have found now what made them tough cases. The preclear has an entirely different goal from the auditor. The preclear is there to get well: the auditor is there to make the preclear well.

When we consider this further, we see that the ability of the auditor to control minds and mental reactions is dependent upon his getting results in preclears. The preclear’s results simply stem from the preclear’s gained ability to control his own mind and its reactions. Thus, of course, we have entirely different values.

An auditor who does not consistently get good results is going to have his own case cave in on him. The only way an auditor can keep his case up is to get continuous and predictably excellent results upon preclears. Thus an auditor, to have his case in good order, would have to be in good order as an auditor; he would have to be able to get results upon those he processed. In view of the fact that he could get results upon other human beings, he could then, of course, know continuously that he could control human reactions and mental reactions; and so, with this confidence and this control, be completely unworried about his own case and be able to do actually anything he wished with his own mental machinery.

The case of the auditor actually depends upon his successes in auditing. Thus in the Certification Course in Phoenix we stress today only the skill of an individual to audit, and we discover consequently that, as the auditor gets results upon his fellow student and as he gets results on outside preclears, his own belief in his ability to handle the human mind soars to such an extent that as a case he ceases to be in the concern category. He of course is audited and without being audited he would not know the results which would happen in a preclear, but his actual case gains depend on his gains on preclears.

Now with today’s techniques we can guarantee those results on preclears. We can demonstrate to any auditor that he can make anybody well, if the person is even vaguely breathing, simply by using with skill and understanding, as trained, the above six processes and the seventh, which is actually an understanding. Here is the problem of the auditor’s case resolved. The way to have one’s case in excellent condition is to have continuing confidence in one’s ability to get results on preclears. In the Certification Courses in Phoenix and London we work solely in the direction of giving an auditor confidence in his ability to handle the aberrations of others and we discover that with this gained confidence the fear of his own behavior vanishes; and thus an auditor becomes a very, very capable clear.

L. RON HUBBARD























[The above PAB is reissued as HCO B 4 May 1972, Six Basic Processes.]

DIANETICS 55!
by
L. Ron Hubbard


Published
December 1954—April 1955



Dianetics ‘55! was published in April, 1955, though a limited manuscript edition was available at the Unification Congress at the end of 1954.

Following the return of the Foundations and properties of Dianetics to the management of L. Ron Hubbard, the Hubbard Dianetic Research Foundation, the Hubbard Dianetic Foundation, the Dianetic Foundation and the Dianetic Research Foundation were consolidated under the original Dianetic organization, the Hubbard Dianetic Research Foundation. The ownership and control of all Dianetic publications, books, certificates, without contest, were vested by the laws of the United States, its several states and the State of Arizona, in the Organization which began in 1950.

Signalizing this new unity, L. Ron Hubbard completed the manuscript of Dianetics ‘55! and released it in the form of a facsimile of the original to the Dianetic public. A Congress was held in celebration of the unification.

Dianetics ‘55! takes the main premises of Dianetics: The Modern Science of Mental Health and brings them up to date, showing
how they developed. In it, L. Ron Hubbard shows where the Six Basic Processes, which lead to Route 1, are on the tone scale and how through them we find communication everywhere.

“Thus, in Dianetics ‘55! we actually have the second book of Dianetics. Everyone has assigned the title ‘First Book’ to Dianetics: The Modern Science of Mental Health. But nobody has referred to Science of Survival, published in 1951, as the second book. They haven’t because it obviously wasn’t. Science of Survival adventured into causation, not into the problems outlined in the First Book.”

L. Ron Hubbard—Dianetics ‘55!


192 pages, 1 illustration, 1 chart, glossary, hardcover with dust jacket. Available from your nearest Scientology Organization or Mission, or direct from the publishers: Scientology Publications Organization, Jernbanegade 6, 1608 Copenhagen V, Denmark; or Church of Scientology Publications Organization U.S., 2723 West Temple Street, Los Angeles, California, 90026, U.S.A.

UNIFICATION CONGRESS OF
DIANETICISTS AND SCIENTOLOGISTS LECTURES
Phoenix, Arizona
28—31 December 1954


The Unification Congress of Dianeticists and Scientologists, given under the joint sponsorship of the HDRF and the HASI in honor of the return of Dianetics to L. Ron Hubbard, its founder and originator, opened at the Little Theater in Phoenix, Arizona, on 28 December 1954. It had as its theme the new book, the “second book of Dianetics,” Dianetics 1955!, of which a limited manuscript edition was introduced. The Congress data amplified and broadened the data in this book; the Congress group processing (communication processing) demonstrated the workability of this material.

So successful was this Phoenix Congress that popular demand at once brought into action its scheduled reproduction in four important places: in New York City, in London at the Royal Festival Hall, in Australia and in New Zealand.


5412C28 UC-1 Title unknown
5412C28 UC-2 Group Processing (incomplete)
5412C28 UC-3 History of Dianetics
5412C28 UC-4 Dianetics ’55
** 5412C28 UC-5 Communication and ARC
** 5412C29 UC-6 Games
5412C29 UC-7 Title unknown
5412C29 UC-8 Title unknown
** 5412C29 UC-9 Terminals and Communication
** 5412C29 UC-10 Errors in Communication
** 5412C30 UC-11 Communication and Problems
5412C30 UC-12 Title unknown
5412C30 UC-13 Title unknown
5412C30 UC-14 Problems and Games
5412C30 UC-15 Title unknown
** 5412C30 UC-16 Pan-Determinism
5412C31 UC-17 Title unknown
5412C31 UC-18 Title unknown
5412C31 UC-19 Title unknown
5412C31 UC-20 Title unknown
54 ... C ... UC Unification Congress: Communication—Dianetics ‘55
54... C ... UC Unification Congress: Goals

PUBLIC LECTURES AND GROUP PROCESSING SERIES
Phoenix, Arizona
1 January—11 May 1955


In early 1955 L. Ron Hubbard continued his Wednesday evening public lectures and group processing at the Monroe School Auditorium in Phoenix, Arizona.

* 5501C01 Public Processing
** 5501C05 PLS- 1 The Society at Large
* 5501C05 PPS Group Processing
** 5501C12B PLS-2 Games
* 5501C12C PLS ARC Triangle
** 5501C19 PLS-3 Communication and ARC Triangle
* 5501C19 PPS Group Processing
* 5501C26 P LS Goals of HDA and Scientology
** 5501C26 PLS-4 Scientology and Auditing
* 5501C26 PPS Alcoholism (Group Processing)
** 5502C02 PLS-5 Alcoholism
** 5502C02 PPS Group Processing, Variation on Six Basic Processes
** 5502C09 PLS-6 Miracles
* 5502C09 PPS Session: Control of Body, Think a Thought
** 5502C23 PLPS-1 Scientology and Ability
* 5502C23 PPS Group Processing
* 5502C23 PLPS-2 Session: “Find a Mystery”
** 5503C02 PLPS-3 Efficiency, Thought, Emotion and Effort
** 5503C09 PLPS-4 Health and Certainty
5503C09 PLPS-5 Session: Only One, Things Real and Unreal
* 5503C09 PPS Group Processing
* 5503C16 PLPS-6 Knowingness
** 5503C16 PLPS What We Are Doing
** 5503C23 PLPS-7&8 Scientology: A Technical Subject—Communication Lag,
Principal Kinds Found in a Pc
** 5503C30 PLPS-9 Conquered Territory (a summary of the achievements
and directions of Scientology)
* 5503C30 PPS Group Processing
* 5503C30 PLPS-10 Session: “Making Things Real and Unreal”
** 5504C02 PLPS The Second Dynamic
* 5504C06 PLPS-11 On the Second Dynamic
* 5504C06 PLPS-12 Session: “What Could You Say To ......?”
** 5504C13 PLPS-14 The Eight Dynamics
* 5504C13 PLPS-15 Session: Find Present Time
** 5504C20 PLPS-16 Para-Scientology—or Things That Go Boomp in the Night
* 5504C20 PLPS-17 Session: Change and No-Change
** 5504C27 PLPS-18 The Direction of Modern Scientology
** 5504C27A PLPS-19 Grey Dianetics

* 5504C27B PLPS-20 Session: “Something you could say to..........”
and “Ownership”
** 5505C04 PLPS-21 Cause and Effect and Its Use in Processing
* 5505C04 PLPS-22 Session: Cause and Effect
* 5505C11 PLPS-23 Operation Manual for the Mind
* 5505C11 PLPS-24 Session: “Enchantment” Processing
** 5505C11 PLPS-25 Lookingness and Cause






LRH TAPE LECTURES

Phoenix, Arizona
1—7 January 1955

* 5501C01 Public Processing
* 5501C03 9ACC-16 Auditing Requirements, Differences
* 5501C03 10ACC-1 Pan-Determinism of Auditors
* 5501C04 10ACC-2 Pan-Determinism of Auditors
* 5501C04 9ACC-16A Time
* 5501C05 10ACC-3 Exteriorization by Gradient Scale, Remedy of
Havingness—Adjusting Anchor Points
5501C05 10ACC-4 Title unknown
** 5501C05 PLS-1 The Society at Large
* 5501C05 PPS Group Processing
* 5501C05 9ACC-17 Auditing at Optimum
* 5501C06 9ACC-18 Exteriorization
* 5501C06 10ACC-5 Route 1—Exteriorization
* 5501C06 10ACC-6 Condensation of Know to Mystery Scale
* 5501C07 9ACC-19 Elementary Material: Know to Mystery Scale


P.A.B. No. 43
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR’S BULLETIN


From L. RON HUBBARD

Via Hubbard Communications Office
163 Holland Park Avenue, London W.11

_____________________________________________________________________

7 January 1955

PLOTTING THE PRECLEAR ON THE TONE SCALE


The most important point in entering a case from the viewpoint of the auditor is establishing the position of the preclear on the Chart of Human Evaluation as given and fully described in the publication Science of Survival.

Today this is a relatively simple task providing the auditor knows the simple processes which are the basic processes of both Dianetics and Scientology. As given in the last PAB, these processes are: Two-Way Communication, Elementary Straightwire, Opening Procedure 8-C, Opening Procedure by Duplication, Remedying Havingness and Spotting Spots in Space.

The establishing characteristic of the preclear’s position on the tone scale is all contained under the heading of communication lag. Today we do not use E-Meters; today we do not use old-time dianometry; today we have a positive and precise method of positioning the preclear.

Communication lag is the length of time intervening between the asking of the question by the auditor and the reply to that specific question by the preclear. The question must be precise; the reply must be precisely to that question. It does not matter what intervenes in the time between the asking of the question and the receipt of the answer. Incidentally, from my experience in training in Phoenix, this is a very hard point for an auditor to grasp. Thus I am stressing it for you in these PABs. It does not matter what intervenes: the preclear may outflow, jabber, discuss, pause, hedge, disperse, dither or be silent; no matter what he does or how he does it, between the asking of the question and the giving of the answer, the time is the communication lag. The near answer, a guessing answer, an undecided answer, are alike imprecise answers and are not adequate responses to the question. On receipt of such questionable answers, the auditor must ask the question again. That he asks the question again does not reduce the communication lag; he is still operating from the moment he asked the question the first time. And if he has to ask the question twenty or thirty times more in the next hour in order to get a precise and adequate answer from the preclear, the length of time of the lag would be from the asking of the first question to the final receipt of the answer. Near answers to the question are inadequate and are, themselves, simply part of the communication lag.

Example:
Auditor: How many chairs are there in this room?
Preclear: Now, let me see. I don’t know—we’re sitting down, anyway.

This is not an answer to the question. The answer to the question is the exact number of chairs in the room.



Copyright (©) 1955 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.

There are, of course, certain questions which are “fade-away” questions, to which, because of the characteristics of the mind, there is no possible answer. One of these is “Give me an unknown time.” As soon as the preclear starts to answer such a question, he of course has as-ised a certain amount of unknownness and will know the time. The answer to a fade-away question is also measurable, however; it could be said arbitrarily to be answered when the preclear has as-ised enough unknownness to give a known time. There are relatively few of these questions.

The length of time necessary for an individual to ask and answer questions is actually a complete two-way communication lag, but here, in testing a lag, we are interested simply in the question the auditor asks and the length of time it takes a preclear to answer it.

Now here comes a specialized knowledge on communication lag. A preclear may have a very short lag on social questions. He may be able to answer immediately and expertly what his name is, how old he is and many other things. These questions are actually being answered by “social machinery” or habitual practice. He has actually no lag, apparently; but remember, the auditor in this case is not asking the preclear: he is asking a social response machine for the socially acceptable answer. As an example of this as mentioned in Dianetics: Evolution of a Science, I once had a preclear who would answer on any query as to health that she was fine, even though she was lying in the agony of a migraine headache. She had a machine set up to respond. One was not in communication with the preclear; and, indeed, one seldom ever was, for she was psychotic.

Thus, in establishing communication lag, it is necessary for the auditor to ask nonsocial questions. The question “What is your name?” may be replied to very readily. However, this is a social question, and thus one would have to ask the question such as “How many doors in this room?” or “How many feet do women ordinarily have?” in order to pose a question which requires intelligent differentiation on the part of the preclear. The length of time it takes for him to resolve this question as a problem and reply to it is the lag time.

This is an actual measure of the distance and the number of vias on the communication lag line of the preclear.

The phenomenon of communication lag is intensely useful; it tells you immediately how far the individual is out of present time; it tells us also the ability of the preclear to give up a problem. He may be so hungry for problems, and every question is a problem which requires an “answer,” that he simply swallows the problem and refuses to solve it by giving an answer to the question. It also tells us how protective, defensive the preclear is in regard to life and the environment.

An old-time auditor could very probably tell by his tone of voice as he spoke where he was on the emotional tone scale as given in Science of Survival. An auditor not so schooled need only glance at the person’s communication lag in order to know where he stood on the tone scale.

There is an additional phenomenon, a “brother to communication lag,” known as “process lag.” This is the length of time it requires for the preclear to obtain a result from a process. “How many chairs are there in this room?” process, and then let us ask the preclear this question “How many chairs are there in this room?” and discover how many times he has to be asked the question and has to be made to answer the question precisely in order to do so without protest and with instant response. The length of time it would take him to reduce first his lack of knowledge as to the number of chairs in the room and then his unwillingness to be asked the question many, many times over and over (which is his unwillingness to duplicate) would, on an overall count, be

his process lag. The process lag is the length of time it takes to reduce all communication lag from a type of question or action in auditing; and a process lag, then, is peculiar to auditing, unless, of course, you wish to examine the whole subject of communication lags, at which moment you would discover all manner of interesting phenomena not particularly necessary to the auditor.

He would discover, for instance, that the length of time it takes for an individual to learn and adequately use arithmetic could be classed as a process lag. He could discover also that there is a communication lag going on in nearly all conversations. One asks the social question, “How are you?” and the person responds from his machinery, “Fine”; and then, as though totally disrelated, one-half-hour later suddenly says to his companion who asked the first question, “You know, I feel terrible today.” There is, for instance, the physiological communication lag. How long does it take for a man’s body to change the consideration that he is tired to the consideration that he is refreshed? How long does it take a certain drug to work? But it is not our purpose to go into the broad study of communication lags, as interesting as that field may be, for we do not need to know any more than communication lag and process lag in order to do a good job of auditing and to position the preclear accurately on the tone scale.

Actually it is the process lag which situates the preclear on the tone scale for the auditor. Let us say that a very long process lag could be classified as “unable to do until processed.” Then we would discover that Two-Way Communication as the basic process would be an inability if not done with ease by the preclear; if it is done very arduously by the preclear, it would take the preclear on the lower part of the tone scale. Similarly, if the preclear has enormous lag on Straightwire questions, it would peg him as on another, slightly higher, part of the tone scale; and so forth.

This is extremely useful information for an auditor, for it tells him that anybody below 2.0 on the tone scale is there to be audited into death. He is not there to be made to survive, and thus a case poses a considerable amount of trouble for an auditor when it is below 2.0 on the tone scale. When, in other words, it does not discover in Two-Way Communication and in Elementary Straightwire easy processing.

Just to make sure that no preclear fools an auditor with social responses and just to make sure that every preclear gets well, we process today in this fashion. First we discover and execute Two-Way Communication with the preclear, even though we have to do it in the field of mimicry. Then, when Two-Way Communication is very adequately established between the auditor and the preclear, we continue with Elementary Straightwire, the commands of which are “Something you wouldn’t mind remembering,” “Something you wouldn’t mind forgetting.” Only then would we go into Opening Procedure of 8-C. It would seem very hard to believe to some people, unless they have considerable experience in auditing, that many people find in Opening Procedure of 8-C a process so arduous that they become sick, fall on the floor and do all manner of weird convulsions. Yet it is true that an individual who has not already been put upscale to Two-Way Communication and Elementary Straightwire will discover considerable difficulty in Opening Procedure of 8-C.

When one has done Two-Way Communication and Elementary Straightwire on a preclear and has recovered the preclear’s ability to get well, he can see for the purposes of auditing that the individual has come to a level above 2.0 on the tone scale and he then is ready to embark on Opening Procedure of 8-C, remembering at all times that he must still be able to maintain his two-way communication—that is, not one-way communication, but two-way communication with the preclear, whatever process he does on the preclear, whenever he does it, no matter what actual condition the preclear is in. Many an auditor fails simply because he fails to listen to the preclear when the preclear has something to say and thus the preclear goes into apathy, for he was about to discover to the auditor that the auditor’s process had done something fantastically

interesting to him, and being unable to communicate this to the auditor, the preclear goes into apathy.


CHART OF PROCESSES

WHERE THEY ARE ON THE ARC TONE SCALE

Exteriorized

4.0
Spotting Spots in Space
3.6

3.5
Remedy of Havingness
3.1

3.0
Op. Pro. by Duplication
2.6

2.5
Opening Procedure 8-C
1.8

1.8
Elementary Straightwire
1.1

1.0
Two-Way Communication
-8.0






LRH TAPE LECTURES
10—20 January 1955

** 5501C10 9ACC-20 Education: Goals in Society—Adult Education
* 5501C10 CONF Auditors’ Conference
* 5501C11 9ACC-21 Fundamentals of Auditing
* 5501C11 9ACC-21A Auditors’ Conference
** 5501C12A 9ACC-22 Definition: Aberration, Vias, G.E.
** 5501C12B PLS-2 Games
* 5501C12C PLS ARC Triangle
** 5501C13 9ACC-23 Definitions: Glossary of Terms
** 5501C14 9ACC-24 Perfect Duplication, Life Continuum
* 5501C16 31CGB-1 Address to Congress Delegates by L. Ron Hubbard
** 5501C17A 9ACC-25 Auditing Demo: Six Basics in Action
* 5501C17B 9ACC-25A Auditors’ Conference
* 5501C18A 9ACC-26 Auditing Demo: Spotting Spots
* 5501C18B 9ACC-26A Auditors’ Conference
* 5501C19 9ACC-27 Auditing Demo: Exteriorization
** 5501C19 PLS-3 Communication and ARC Triangle
* 5501C19 PPS Group Processing
* 5501C20 9ACC-28 Background Music to Living






THIRD INTERNATIONAL CONGRESS OF SCIENTOLOGISTS LECTURES
London, England
16—19 January 1955


During the 9th American ACC given in Phoenix, Arizona, L. Ron Hubbard made a tape especially for congress delegates to the Third International Congress of Scientologists held at the Royal Festival Hall, South Bank, London, January 16-19, 1955. Using the latest Phoenix Congress tapes, the theme of the London Congress was two-way communication—its importance for human well-being and how to initiate and maintain it.

* 5501C16 31CGB-1 Address to Congress Delegates by L. Ron Hubbard

T H E J O U R N A L O F
SCIENTOLOGY

Issue 43-G [1955, ca. mid-January]

Published by
The Hubbard Association of Scientologists, International
Phoenix, Arizona



Phoenix Clinic

The first actual HASI-HDRF clinic is now in full swing at 806 North Third Street, Phoenix, Arizona. Unlike earlier Foundation and Association processing activities, the present processing center is personally run by LRH from his own office.
The establishment of the center was not entirely intentional, but, like Topsy*, just grew—and unlike Topsy and earlier centers, is functioning with startling smoothness. The demand for HDRF-HASI processing had been growing steadily. During and after the Congress recently concluded, it boomed well out of the control of the old processing office at 616 and, as generally happens in such emergencies, LRH was pushed into harness. Ken Barrett, D.Scn., already Ron’s own administrative officer at 806 was shoved into the post—as another duty—of Director of Processing. He began to line up the best auditors he could call back to or find in Phoenix in order to get a staff which could do the job on the preclears. For their assistance he began to hold a five o’clock daily conference on the cases being processed.
When Ron exteriorized from the Congress he found his office overrun with data, auditors and preclears. This looked interesting and so he decided to hold the five o’clock conferences himself. He sent some of the auditors back to school, added some new ones and began to coach and build into existence the most able staff of auditors so far assembled.
Coached on every case at five o’clock every afternoon, the dozen auditors who compose the staff have begun to concentrate on just one goal—to clear every preclear they get their hands on. Already faced with three of the roughest cases ever discovered, the staff has begun to call clearing a Black Five a routine activity. This staff is out to run up a record of clears.
The center has at its disposal a sanitarium, abundant applications for processing and Ron’s quick assistance and advice. The processing requests are made to Ken Barrett at 806 North Third Street, Phoenix, Arizona, Phone Alpine 24416. The auditor is assigned by Ron after case assessment and psychometry and is checked daily thereafter by LRH. Processing results are secured by guarantee where desired and, should the results be not as good as expected in the preclear’s opinion, refund is made. The goal of this staff is to clear as many people as possible. At this center we may be beginning the biggest forward push to date for Dianetics and Scientology.


N E W Y O R K C O N G R E S S !

Be at the New York Congress if you missed Phoenix! On February 4, 1955 at Steinway Concert Hall, 113 West 57th St., New York City, at 10:00 A.M. you can register and on the same day at 1:00 P.M. the Congress starts with an address of welcome from L. Ron Hubbard as recorded. And on the 5th, 6th and 7th of February

[* Topsy: In Harriet Beecher Stowe’s Uncle Tom’s Cabin, a young negro slave girl whose ignorance and unconscious humor provide comic relief. Her replies to questioning, “Never was born” and “I spect I grow’d,” have made her the symbol of that which originates spontaneously and develops aimlessly.]

Copyright (©)1955 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.

the program continues. All the lectures Ron gave at December end in Phoenix, specially recorded with high speed high fidelity, will be given on these days from the 4th to the 7th. All the group processing he gave. All the data on Communication. This was the Unification Congress of Dianetics and Scientology given under the joint sponsorship of the HDRF and the HASI and you can have it in full in New York at Steinway Hall for the same price that was paid in Phoenix. Also present will be specially autographed copies of Dianetics 1955! the SECOND BOOK of Dianetics on which these great lectures are based.
Richard Steves, D.D., D.Scn., will be the manager. Write him now in Phoenix at the HDRF or HASI for your reservation.
If you want to understand communication processing, if you want to meet the stellar names in Northeastern U.S. Dianetics and Scientology, if you want to come closer to clear with Ron’s group processing, be there for sure.
The December Congress was the most important thing that ever happened in Dianetic and Scientology events. It is being repeated in the four comers of Earth by the HDRF and HASI—in New Zealand on Easter given by Tooley of the HASI—in London in January at the great Royal Festival Hall by Horner of the HASI—in New York on Feb. 4 at Steinway Hall by Steves of the HASI. This is topflight, bigline, engraved stuff. (And if you come to the N.Y. Congress, which you will if you are near, Steves says, he promises, he certifies, that he will not thereafter revoke any certificate you might ever hold.) So let’s go NEW YORK!

_____________________________

HOW COME THIS JOURNAL IS TYPEWRITTEN can best be explained by the downright busyness of Phoenix what with the Congress here and the cussed laziness of some people. You got it at all because Ken Barrett he up and pasted and Ron after his Wednesday night public lecture that happens every Wednesday here came back and tuck his typewriter and some multi plates in hand and writ it and because Maxine she up and grinded and the staff stapled and right after this paper was addressed and put to print they all hung the former editor, for being late too often, to the nearest Cottonwood Tree, Western style (no anvil in his pants) and this is all to announce the auction of his boots come February 8th by Tom Esterbrook who has come down from Dry Gulch at last to write once more for the Journal.

_____________________________

DIANETICS, 1955! by LRH is breaking all former sales records with its limited edition. We are sending a hundred to the New York Congress but we are so close to out at $5.00 a throw autographed that you’ll be lucky if you’re fast with your order. This is no sales talk. This is a hint to our friends to act fast. Why is it important? Because it completes the cycle of Dianetics: The Modern Science of Mental Health.

A SPECIAL TAPE PACKAGE OF SIX ADVANCED CLINICAL COURSE LECTURES WHICH SUPPLEMENT DIANETICS, 1955!, the book, are ready to be airmailed to you for $60 the set. These tapes give a lot of background for the book and several processes which weren’t even talked about outside the Clinical Course.

SIXTEEN HOURS OF CONGRESS TAPES, all of them, at 33/4 inches per second are ready to send at once for $160 a set. In Phoenix they were live. In New York they’ll be close to live at 15 inches per second high fidelity plus seminars and talks by prominent auditors. If you went either place you’ll still want this set of tapes. They cover COMMUNICATION as it has never been covered before in the history of Man. Here’s a milestone!

YOUR BACHELOR OF SCIENTOLOGY CERTIFICATE is yours if you complete the HUBBARD PROFESSIONAL COLLEGE CERTIFICATION COURSE. You

have to have an HDA or HCA certificate to qualify for a half cost whole time of eight weeks course. You’ll be a successful auditor if you complete it. That’s $500 for the course of which you HDAs and HCAs pay half only.

YOUR HUBBARD CERTIFIED AUDITOR CERTIFICATE IS YOURS when you complete the eight weeks certification course here in Phoenix. That’s $500 for the whole course, certification examination, certificate and texts. And it’s lovely in Phoenix this time of year. Good instruction, up-to-the-minute data, training completely guaranteed. Of course if you think you are buying for that $500 only eight weeks of training, you better look. You’re buying a career and fellowship with the highest toned people on Earth. You won’t ever know Scientology like a pro knows it unless you take a course. And many take this course just to know Scientology and get their cases up. There’s 24 crackerjack students in the Certification Course right now. They’ll welcome you.

THE ADVANCED CLINICAL COURSE UNITS are the top goal of the auditor in training. You have to be an HCA or an HDA and appointed to the course for this is the course which Ron teaches himself. It is the only way to get a Doctor of Scientology degree, the only way to get a right to train to HCA level. The Dianeticist gets his Ph.D. on graduation if he wants it. All the topflight auditors get to it eventually. We’re just graduating Wing and Smokey Angel even hotter than they were. $800 for the course of six weeks, payable in advance.

By the way we’re trying to build a college out here. We’re growing. We’re expanding, we’re bursting. Every time the squirrels chatter, we grow another notch. Every time you begin to hear wilder rumors about Ron or the HDRF or the HASI you know we must be putting on a burst of speed. If there were space enough here we’d be able to write all the real good things that are happening. We’ve got a new kid school run by Marcia and HCA Estrada to care for the loose children we find lying around and for the kids of the staff and students. We’ve been working a miracle case on sclerosis. We’ve got stacks of news, news, news from auditors all over the world—and believe us, EVERYBODY lately has been getting fascinated with auditing and its modern results— even auditors!

The June 1954 Congress was promised a book. It is THE CREATION OF HUMAN ABILITY—formerly, and an expanded (by triple) version of, THE AUDITOR ‘S HANDBOOK. It’s coming up in beautiful hard covers in a very few weeks. And those of you who will receive it or have placed orders for it will be very happy to know that we held it to get it up to date and make it stay in present time. If you haven’t ordered it, better. Almost the entire first printing is already bought. It’s $5.00 a volume. It has the AXIOMS of SCIENTOLOGY and 76 terrific processes including the important exteriorization steps. You’ll need this and Dianetics, 1955! both. They’re very different, each is getting raves—for a few have had a peek at the galleys of The Creation of Human Ability.

_____________________________

We have just read this through and find there is too much enthusiasm in it as a paper and we realize that this will offend a lot of people who can’t take enthusiasm. But we can’t much help the enthusiasm because all the dreams and goals we have been working toward since 1950 are starting to take form and come true and we look at the old HDRF here and feel mighty good and we look at the projected college building and we feel good and we talk to some of the people these staff auditors have been processing and we feel good and by golly we’re sorry we just can’t get down to tone for the public good. Even Alphia could make us laugh tonight.

P.A.B. No. 44
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR’S BULLETIN

From L. RON HUBBARD

Via Hubbard Communications Office
163 Holland Park Avenue, London W.11

_____________________________________________________________________

21 January 1955

TWO-WAY COMMUNICATION IN ACTION


The first thing one should know about communication is its formula. The formula of one-way communication is Cause, Distance, Effect, with Intention and Attention, where that which occurs at Effect Duplicates what emanated from Cause. The elements of communication, then, are Intention, Attention, Cause, Effect, Distance and Duplication. Meaning, Significance, are secondary phenomena.

Communication is part of the triangle of Affinity, Reality and Communication. Reality is composed of the degree of duplication possible, and this is also describable under the heading of Agreement. Reality is a quality which depends upon duplication, and in the action of duplication expertly or poorly done we find agreement and disagreement. The basic definition of Affinity is “co-existence” and as we drift away from actual co-existence, we drift into the ARC triangle and the communication formula. Co-existence is superior to the ARC triangle and the mechanics of living. Here we would find two things occupying the same space. This would be at the top of the scale. Two things with no space, no mass, and no energy. At the bottom of the scale we would find two things compulsively or obsessively almost occupying the same space. As Affinity enters into the state of not-quite co-existence, we get the manifestations of particles and significances, symbols, and, of course, much more intimately, Affinity embraces the distance part of the communication formula. It begins with the no distance of co-existence and then, as Affinity drops, the distance factor is more and more important (regardless of whether the distance is far or close) until we have at last a complete and positive objection to proximity, or a complete and positive objection to any distance, and in this “state of mind” we find material objects or the particles which compose them. Under Affinity, of course, we have the emotional scale: Effort, as found in Science of Survival, and the Know down to Mystery Scale as discussed in the Advanced Clinical Course Tapes.

The entirety of ARC is the subject of understanding. Knowingness is highest on the scale, and this exceeds ARC and is in the realm of considerations and ideas. The moment we enter into understanding we get into the communication formula and the ARC triangle. Understanding is a highly superior commodity, but still lower than knowing. Understanding itself produces a column of the Chart of Human Evaluation which could be added to it. At the top we would have a complete understanding of all things, and it would be complete knowingness, but this would require no communication to effect. From this knowingness we would drop downscale into understanding, and then into varying but dwindling degrees of understanding until we arrived at 2.0 on the scale, where we would find that understanding had become commixed with incomprehensibilities to such a degree that the entire vectors of life are reversed and become the vectors of physical objects. From 2.0 down we specialize in greater and greater degrees of incomprehensibility.



Copyright (©) 1955 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.

The subject of incomprehensibility is difficult to comprehend. If we examine the communication formula we discover that a duplication at effect must take place if a communication is to be received from the cause point of the line. Similarly, the cause point of the line has to take into account the fact that effect must be able to duplicate. Thus, the cause point of the line, if it wishes to communicate, must communicate in a fashion or in a guise which can be duplicated at the effect point of the line. This is not a question of being so stupid or incomprehensible as to cause an effect on any incomprehensibility, but it is a willingness to self-determinedly emanate in such a manner as to allow a duplication to take place at effect.

The basic stuff of the physical universe, to a thetan, is an incomprehensibility, but he is entirely devoted to trying to understand it. A thetan himself, the awareness of awareness unit, is understanding. Thus, we have this unit attempting to understand the incomprehensible. A thetan can, with perfect ease, understand incomprehensibility, but sometimes until it is called to his attention, he is continually on the track of trying to find some comprehensibility in the incomprehensible. The very fact that a thing is in a mass form is a puzzle to a thetan, since he, himself, has no mass, no wave length, and no actual position in space other than his own declaration of it. He can easily understand a form, since he is generally “experienced” in forms, but he can’t understand the stuff of which the form is made because that stuff is incomprehensibility. Thus we find the thetan very easily “as-ising” forms and altering them, and we find him considering that he is incapable of altering in its actual substance, creating or destroying the stuff of which the physical universe is made.

A thetan looking at the incomprehensibility of the physical universe is, of course, doing a no-duplicate. He is mocking himself up in the role of having to understand the incomprehensible. Thus we get him fixated on the idea of the physical sciences and eventually degenerating down to a point where he behaves like MEST, and here we have the luckless nuclear physicist who can cause MEST to vanish only by blowing it up, physically—a game which will never win. Here we find science in general, and here we find scientists, and their utter incapability of understanding any slightest particle of human behavior or conduct, and without any beliefs to speak of in humanity, and with a perfect and gruesome willingness to destroy it. These, as awareness of awareness units, have agreed so thoroughly with the physical universe that they have no agreement with actual understanding. They write their books with many communication lags, hemming and hawing, and without any decisions, and thoroughly object to anybody’s writing as though he knows what he is doing. The one thing that the scientist knows is that nobody knows, and this does not happen to be true. Thus, his science is based on a false datum. He originates a theory that man rises from mud because he, himself, is so close to it. When he does go into the field of the human spirit, the spirit itself, and indeed his own beingness, is an other-determinism to him. He sees no virtue in human fellowship or decency and advises in his books the necessity to turn to higher force. Once a scientist has broken through, in a revulsion against himself, his feelings of non-understandingness about people, it is generally on the downward side and it is in the realm where he must obsessively turn to God.

I give you this as an idea of what happens to preclears as they go down the tone scale. When they get close to the bottom they become scientific and pretend they know nothing and fight anything else which might know. When they get a little further down they become more violently neurotic and a little more south they become psychotic and forget even their science. And this is of considerable interest to the auditor, for the auditor is interested in human reactions and actions, and all he has to do is understand that he is looking at an incomprehensibility when he looks at anyone who is that neurotic or psychotic. There is no other causation in psychotic behavior than that everything is incomprehensible. There is no private, secret button which can be hit in a case, magically turning the individual into sanity, unless, of course, we utilize successfully “Be three feet back of your head” with some basic preparatory

work. But this, of course, returns the person upscale toward understanding since it takes him from such close proximity to mass.

The auditor, then, who is looking at a psychotic, is trying to understand an incomprehensible, and if we were to cease using the word “psychotic” and began to use the word “incomprehensetic,” we would have a word which would serve us extremely well.

Thus, an auditor processes the psychotic with considerable difficulty in the absence of this understanding of incomprehensibility. For the auditor, to get any communication across, has to mock himself up, at least to some degree, as psychotic before he can communicate. The auditor’s fight to keep from being psychotic, or even seeming psychotic, is such that this conflict within himself (not because of any emanation from the psychotic, since these people do not emanate) restimulates him. The best way to handle a psychotic is with physical form, making the psychotic mimic the physical form by mimicking, with the physical form, the psychotic. Thus we have our basic level of mimicry, and thus we have the entering wedge of communication.

One-way communication is a first-dynamic operation. Two-way communication is a third-dynamic operation. An auditor who is playing “the only one” does not engage in third-dynamic activities, much less communication, and so he withdraws into one-way communication, and thus never lets the preclear emanate any communications, and will not listen to anything the preclear has to say. To this one fact alone we attribute the breakdown and lack of forward progress of many cases. The auditor did not pay any attention when the preclear had some vital information he desired to impart.

The process involved with running a two-way communication is best entered in the field of mimicry, and the best two-way process is then, of course, mimicry. Such a process will be given in the next PAB.

On the subject of communication itself, the auditor must realize that two-way communication is part and parcel of every process known in Dianetics and Scientology, and if it is not established, and if it is not continued, and if no attention is paid to two-way communication, only a small amount of benefit will occur. If two-way communication is understood as a process, many cases which previously seemed utterly unsolvable can be resolved with considerable ease.


CHART OF PROCESSES

WHERE THEY ARE ON THE ARC TONE SCALE

Exteriorized

4.0
Spotting Spots in Space
3.6
3.5
Remedy of Havingness
3.1
3.0
Op. Pro. by Duplication
2.6
2.5
Opening Procedure 8-C
1.8
1.8
Elementary Straightwire
1.1
1.0
Two-Way Communication
-8.0





LRH TAPE LECTURES
Phoenix, Arizona
21 January—2 February 1955


** 5501C21 9ACC-29 Axioms: Laws of Consideration, What an Axiom Is
* 5501C26 PLS Goals of HDA and Scientology
** 5501C26 PLS-4 Scientology and Auditing
* 5501C26 PPS Alcoholism (Group Processing)
** 5502C02 PLS-5 Alcoholism
** 5502C02 PPS Group Processing, Variation on Six Basic Processes


P.A.B. No. 45
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR’S BULLETIN

From L. RON HUBBARD

Via Hubbard Communications Office
163 Holland Park Avenue, London W.11

_____________________________________________________________________

4 February 1955

MIMICRY


The following process was developed by DScn Jan Halpern. Throughout the process the auditor doesn’t say a word. He doesn’t answer possible questions, he doesn’t explain in words what he wants. Under all circumstances he makes like the Tar Baby and “don’t say nothin’.” He uses any gestures necessary.

Step I-a: The auditor stands in front of the preclear, holding out a small object to him, until the preclear takes it from his hand. As soon as the preclear takes the object, the auditor holds out his hand, palm up, until the preclear places the object in his palm. The auditor immediately then offers it to the preclear again. This is continued until without comm lag. The object should be offered to the preclear from a variety of positions once he has gotten the idea: from down near the floor, far off to either side, over the preclear’s head. Likewise, the palm should be held in a variety of positions for the return of the object. Both hands may be used. Get the preclear doing it really fast.

Step I-b: When Step I-a is going swiftly and easily, the auditor introduces a switch. After the preclear has just accepted the article, the auditor, instead of extending his palm for its return, places his hands behind his back briefly, then conveys by gestures that the preclear is to offer the object to him. When the preclear does so, the auditor takes the object from his hand, but does not return it until the preclear holds out his own hand, palm up, to receive it. This exchange is continued until the preclear is offering and accepting the object from as wide a variety of positions as the auditor used, and all other comm lags are flat.

Step II: The auditor, just having accepted the object, makes a gesture that this part is over, then deliberately puts the object down where the preclear can see it, stands back and indicates that the preclear is to pick it up. When the preclear picks it up, the auditor gestures that he is to put it down again anywhere he likes in the room. The instant the preclear does so, the auditor snatches it up and puts it someplace else. You keep this up, till auditor and preclear are racing around the room, seizing the object as soon as the other’s fingers have let go of it. The object isn’t necessarily placed in a different spot each time. It may be picked up and put down again in the same place, but it must be handled each time. All sorts of tacit rules and understandings will probably develop while this is being run.

This process rehabilitates the sense of play; validates non-verbal ARC; short-circuits verbal circuitry; lets the preclear position matter and energy in space and time; gets the preclear up to speed; murders “there must be a reason” for doingness; processes the auditor and the preclear equally and besides, it’s fun.




Copyright (©) 1955 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.




LRH TAPE LECTURES
Phoenix, Arizona
9—12 February 1955


* * 5502C09 PLS-6 Miracles
* 5502C09 PPS Session: Control of Body, Think a Thought
* 5502C12 Auditors’ Conference

P.A.B. No. 46
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR’S BULLETIN

From L. RON HUBBARD

Via Hubbard Communications Office
163 Holland Park Avenue, London W.11

_____________________________________________________________________

18 February 1955

STRAIGHT WIRE


The oldest form of psychotherapy involved the questioning of the patient about his dreams. This is currently dramatized by psychology. A more modern type of psychotherapy consists of asking a preclear about his past.

Both of these, and many other activities in Dianetics and Scientology could be included under the heading of Straight Wire.

Effective particularly from 1.1 on the tone scale to 1.8, the processes embraced under the heading “Straight Wire” have all one purpose in common: this is the purpose of making the preclear stretch a “straight wire” between Cause and Effect across the intervening distance, whether this “distance” could be a distance in terms of location or a distance in terms of time.

Any process in Dianetics or Scientology is a Third Dynamic process. Thus, any process in Dianetics or Scientology requires communication. In Straight Wire and any other process, this fact must be observed by the auditor: that a two-way communication must be maintained. Thus, when administering any process which could be called “Straight Wire,” the auditor should be careful at the same time to maintain two-way communication. When he originally started the session the auditor captured some ground. He established two-way communication, whether by mimicry, conversation, or discussion. He must never lose this captured ground. Thus, when running Straight Wire, when running Opening Procedure of 8-C, Opening Procedure by Duplication, Remedy of Havingness, Spotting Spots in Space or any other process, it is necessary that this gained ground be maintained.

The term “straight wire” itself is meant to describe the imaginary straight line between Cause and Effect. The trouble with a preclear is that he is doing too many things VIA. He is doing anything and everything in life VIA. He is obtaining via food. He is looking via glasses. He is feeling and expressing emotion via glands. He is utilizing or experiencing effort via muscles. He is thinking via (he thinks) a brain. He is obtaining sensation, sustenance, and even revenge, via food. He is experiencing sensation and making the future via his genitals, and he is even trying to experience the origin of life, in most cases, via a church.

His dependency upon objects and services is such that his own creativeness becomes suppressed, submerged, for this working law is always present: that upon which one becomes dependent becomes, at length, one’s enslaver. When anyone sets up anything automatically, that thing becomes his randomity at some future date. We can observe this in many ways, but the entire summation of this can be grouped under the heading “VIA.”



Copyright (©) 1955 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.

Should the auditor bring the preclear to a point where a certain cause and a certain effect can be joined together without the intervention of a VIA, then the auditor has materially gained. Such a process is the Opening Procedure of 8-C, for here the preclear is being asked to connect, at least as a body, directly with a wall. As he reaches out to touch a spot on that wall, he is, in effect, stringing a straight line. It is notable that the Opening Procedure of 8-C was first designed for use upon an exteriorized person, and when one has a preclear exteriorized, running through the steps of the Opening Procedure of 8-C and the remainder of 8-C as given in Issue 24-G of the Journal of Scientology produces very marked effects.

If your preclear cannot have an effect he certainly cannot change. If he cannot cause an effect to occur, he certainly cannot change himself. All time is change—change is time. While, basically, time is simply a consideration, the considerations of time itself are mechanically tracked by the alteration of the position of the particles in space. Your preclear is stuck wherever there was no motion of particles, whether the moment is a pleasure moment, a triumph, a failure, or even death. In the absence of particle motion, as far as he is concerned, if he has lost his power to change his considerations, no time has existed. Thus, those things which you find in the engram bank which are most readily available to the preclear are things which contain no change in them, or things which have a change immediately before them and after them, but have no change between. In the absence of this change, we get a condition of timelessness in an engram or facsimile which permits that incident to “float” on the track and thus rise up to present time.

As the preclear becomes more and more embedded in motionless incidents he becomes harder and harder to change himself. Or, as he dramatizes to a marked degree his own bank, in the most ordinary living, then, he dramatizes the changeless moments, and he, himself, does not change.

The basic confusion of a preclear lies in the fact that an awareness of awareness unit basically has no mass, meaning or mobility. It has qualities and potentials, but it does not have position in space, nor, in its highest form, any movement in space. It can be at will in various positions in space, but it is not, itself, in space. As this is the case you can see that a preclear is dramatizing the truth when he is holding himself and motionless incidents motionless. In other words, if change to him is totally a particle shift in space, then he is apt to consider himself moving as the particles move. If he is moving he is actually to some degree disobeying the most basic quality of theta. Motion, then, to him, becomes antipathetic. On the lowest toned catatonic one finds this dramatization in full progress. A motionless person is then dramatizing the truth. But in all aberration we discover that it is the ingredient of truth which maintains the aberration in force. He is dramatizing motionlessness, and is motionless, but the truth of the matter is that, as a thetan, he should be able to make things move at will and appear in various positions in space. Thus, in clinging to the truth he loses his ability to move particles, and thus loses his ability to have time. This is best manifested as his communication, but as his communication drops, so drop his reality and his affinity. In other words, although he clings to the motionlessness of being a thetan, he loses the basic qualities of being a thetan, which are those of Knowingness and Understanding.

The basic confusion of any preclear, then, is to move or not to move. Shakespeare has said “to be or not to be” is the question. When it comes to getting a preclear upscale, the question is “to move or not to move.”

The basics of Straight Wire are designed to bring the preclear into the realization that he, himself, can be at either the cause or effect point of a communication line, and that he, himself, does not have to be the particle moving on that line. Being the particle and insisting upon the truth that he isn’t moving simply stops his communication entirely. Particles move on the straight line between Cause and Effect. Cause and

Effect themselves are not in motion. The task is to get the individual to assume the responsibility of moving particles. With this comes the realization on his part that he, himself, does not have to move in order to move particles, and thus he will come upscale. Getting him to move his body around the room is an excellent method of accomplishing this, but to many preclears the movement of a body is a near-impossibility. And these can contemplate only the moving of a memory or an idea. Thus, from 1.1 to 1.8 on the tone scale we find the best therapy to be that which directs itself toward the thinkingness below effort—the moving of ideas.

There is no particular reason to concentrate solely upon a preclear’s past. Actually, a preclear is not the product of the past, he is the product of himself. All the past can do for him is to accumulate and hold for him the information that it is bad for him to move, or act, or do. So, let us take a preclear whom we have gotten into communication and work with his more elementary ideas and thus get him to string straight lines between Cause and Effect.

Elementary Straight Wire has two commands. The auditor takes the first of these and uses it as long as is necessary to entirely flatten the preclear’s hesitancy as represented by his communication lag. His communication lag is merely the expression of VIAs on the line, which amounts to the preclear’s unwillingness to string a straight line. The questions are: “Give me something you wouldn’t mind remembering,” “Give me something you wouldn’t mind forgetting.”

A more elementary form of this would be: “Remember something,” “Forget something,” but this is far too direct for our preclear. If you will notice, a very direct and forthright person, if surrounded by people who are more covert, gets a very bad going-over for it. Thus it is in processing when you try to string a very straight line with a preclear he will sometimes resist.

Slightly less elementary than Elementary Straight Wire as above is the next-to-the-last list in Self Analysis: “Can you recall something that is really real to you,” “Can you recall a time when you were in good communication with someone,” “Can you recall a time when someone was in good communication with you,” “Can you recall a time when you felt some affinity for someone,” “Can you recall a time when someone felt some affinity for you.”

The entire text of Self Analysis, in its original edition now available from the Foundation in Phoenix, is devoted to rehashing the preclear’s past to show him that it is not quite as dangerous as it is made out to be, and that it won’t bite him if he remembers some things about it.

From this form of Straight Wire we go into a more complicated form as given in Self Analysis in Scientology, a converted edition of the original Self Analysis. The edition is converted, by the way, simply by substituting everywhere in its text for the word “recall” the word “mock up.” Simply by substituting “mock up” in the directions at the beginning of each list, one has a modern Self Analysis.

Now it is very remarkable that the less specific and sequitur the auditor’s questions are, the better the results with the preclear.

Another form of Straight Wire is quite superior to those above, but is a very vicious and violent process. It is contained in The Creation of Human Ability, which is the printed edition, much expanded, of the earlier Auditor’s Handbook. The basic command of this process is: “Start Lying,” “Keep on Lying.” This can be particularized with: “Tell me some lies about your past,” “Tell me some lies about me present,” “Tell me some lies about the future,” the auditor each time making sure that the preclear is using non-actual places and times.

Remember that while running Straight Wire one must maintain a two-way communication. Many a case has been lost simply because the preclear wanted to say something and the auditor was so intent upon the process that he paid no attention whatsoever to the preclear’s urge to communicate. Remember that one-way communication is a First Dynamic operation; that two-way communication is necessary for a Third Dynamic operation; that under one-way communication a preclear will not get well; that under two-way communication a preclear will get well. Thus, in running Straight Wire do not begrudge the preclear a few moments’ discussion of the incident he has just recalled, or discussion of phenomena he has suddenly noticed. Do not crush him simply because he wishes to express himself.

This is essentially a subjective process, and the auditor should make sure that the preclear speaks aloud the things he is remembering. The preclear’s nod or “yes” to signify that he has recalled something or has invented something is insufficient, and should always be suspect, for preclears who are very bad off pervert or invert every communication line they use and so they will not be doing the process if given any slightest opportunity.

Elementary Straight Wire and other forms of Straight Wire are intensely beneficial from 1.1 to 1.8 on the Tone Scale, but after you have your preclear up to 1.8 or above, remember that there are better processes.




** 5502C23 PLPS-1 Scientology and Ability
* 5502C23 PPS Group Processing
* 5502C23 PLPS-2 Session: “Find a Mystery”
* 5502C28A Staff Auditors’ Conference
* 5502C28B LECTURE Basic Reason
** 5503C02 PLPS-3 Efficiency, Thought, Emotion and Effort
* 5503C03 LECTURE History of Research and Investigation

P.A.B. No. 47
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR’S BULLETIN

From L. RON HUBBARD

Via Hubbard Communications Office
163 Holland Park Avenue, London W.11

_____________________________________________________________________

4 March 1955

OPENING PROCEDURE 8-C


Report after report from various auditors comes to me stating that they now realize why their auditing of many of their preclears failed. And they uniformly declare that the reason for former failure on preclears was not the case level of the preclear, nor yet the complicated state of processes, but ( I ) failure on the part of the auditor to get the preclear into two-way communication before proceeding with other processes, and a continuing failure to keep two-way communication established, and (2) not doing enough Opening Procedure of 8-C on the preclear.

An evaluation of a technique does not depend upon the intricacy or brilliance of its theory, but upon its ease of communication to auditors during training, and the ease of their application of it upon preclears. In 8-C we have a process which answers these various conditions. It is very easy to train an auditor to do 8-C. It is very easy for a preclear to do Opening Procedure of 8-C in one form or another.

The entirety of a technique known as Standard Operating Procedure 8-C was intended for exteriorized preclears. Its opening procedure was originally designed to be done by an exteriorized preclear, but it was found to be far less workable for the exteriorized preclear than when done (so far as the opening part of the procedure was concerned) with the preclear moving his body around and making it touch spots.

There are three parts to Opening Procedure of 8-C, and it is necessary for the comm lag as dramatized physically by the preclear to be completely flattened by the auditor on each part before the next is undertaken. Eventually these parts are the gradient scale of decision. In the first part we have the auditor picking out the spots, telling the preclear to walk over to them, telling the preclear to touch them. In the next step, part (b) of Opening Procedure of 8-C, we have the preclear picking out the spots on the auditor’s order, and then, on the auditor’s order, walking over to them and touching them. And in the third part, part (c), we have the preclear picking out the spots on the auditor’s order, walking over to them, and deciding on his own decision, but under the auditor’s command, when to touch and let go.

This is not one of those processes one gets “novel” about as an auditor. The process has been found to be workable exactly as it is put forth. Variation, or the introduction of extraneous material beyond that necessary to continue a two-way communication with the preclear is found to be destructive of the process. This process is as workable as it is simple. It is also as workable as the auditor is able to do a process as given.

The first thing that Opening Procedure of 8-C does is to get the preclear used to the idea of following somebody else’s directions, and leading him to discover that by following somebody else’s directions he does not collapse or become ill or die. In other

Copyright (©) 1955 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.

words, the preclear discovers that he can follow orders without becoming entirely ruined. This is an interesting discovery, since the physical universe is continually ordering him around, and if he is resisting orders he is resisting the physical universe. Resistance is the one step necessary to entrapment.

There is another point in the Opening Procedure of 8-C which cannot be too thoroughly stressed. Nearly every failure in the past where the preclear has been audited and audited, and audited, the auditor was unaware of the fact that the preclear was not following the directions given him. A survey was taken of preclears who had had a great deal of trouble in being processed in Scientology, and each one of them, either by means of a meter or by their own statement, was discovered to have uniformly avoided running any of the auditing commands given them, even though they were giving the auditor every assurance and appearance of running the auditing commands. Now it could only be possible for a preclear to avoid auditing commands if the auditor was unable to observe directly the workings going on in the preclear. In the Opening Procedure of 8-C it is impossible for the preclear to avoid the auditing command. The auditor can stand or sit and watch the preclear go through the exact orders and observe directly whether or not the preclear is doing what he is told to do. This is a major benefit.

The basic theory of Opening Procedure of 8-C is to make and break communication with the physical universe. Once an individual discovers that he can make and break communication with walls and objects, it will be discovered that he can let go of various pieces of his engram bank. Actually, all the time he is doing 8-C he is letting go of enormous quantities of useless material with which he has cluttered his thinking and life. It is a very direct process and gets the preclear to stretch a very straight line between Cause and Effect.

An auditor while running this should occasionally ask the preclear, “Who is doing this?” Preclears who are psychotic will tell the auditor that their finger is doing it, or that the wall is doing it, and then advance on up to where the hand is doing it, the arm is doing it, and finally that the body is doing it, and at last that the preclear himself is doing it. This is the acceptance of responsibility for an action.

A very good description of the Opening Procedure of 8-C exists in the printed edition or the mimeo edition of Intensive Procedure as R2—16, which is the proper technical number of this process. A thorough description of the process is given in PAB No.34 at the beginning of this series. The process is being repeated here in order to give it proper stress. It has, and do not doubt it for a moment, tremendous value.

I have yet to see a preclear who is having physical difficulty of a major sort or mental difficulty, fail to improve under a long and careful and meticulous administration of the Opening Procedure of 8-C.

There are two errors which can be made in the running of the Opening Procedure of 8-C. The first is not to know and do the process, and the second is not to run it long enough. How long is long enough? In many cases, twenty-five hours is not long enough.

In the Opening Procedure of 8-C (R2—16) the auditor has a very powerful tool and is invited to use it thoroughly.




LRH TAPE LECTURES
Phoenix, Arizona
8—18 March 1955

* 5503C08 DEMO Auditing Demo
** 5503C09 PLPS-4 Health and Certainty
5503C09 PLPS-5 Session: Only One, Things Real and Unreal
* 5503C09 PPS Group Processing
* 5503C14 DEMO LRH Auditing Demo
* 5503C14 DEMO LRH Auditing Demo
** 5503C14 HPC-1 The Only One (the mechanics and solution of the
occluded case)
* 5503C14 Auditors’ Conference
* 5503C15 DEMO Auditing Demo
* 5503C15 DEMO Auditing Demo
* 5503C16 PLPS-6 Knowingness
* 5503C16 DEMO Demonstration—LRH
* 5503C16 DEMO LRH Auditing Demo
** 5503C16 PLPS What We Are Doing
* 5503C17 DEMO LRH Auditing
* 5503C17 DEMO LRH Auditing
* 5503C18 DEMO LRH Auditing

LRH AUDITING DEMONSTRATIONS
Phoenix, Arizona
8 March—29 April 1955


The first issue of Ability, Number One, issued early 1955 from Phoenix, Arizona, carried news of a very special offer of personal processing by Ron in demonstration sessions to the Advanced Clinical Course Units.

Presented live on television to ACC students, the sessions were also recorded on tape for future use.

These demonstration auditing sessions are all grouped together here for convenience. They are also shown in their correct date sequence with the written materials in the following pages.


* 5503C08 DEMO Auditing Demo
* 5503C14 DEMO LRH Auditing Demo
* 5503C14 DEMO LRH Auditing Demo
* 5503C15 DEMO Auditing Demo
* 5503C15 DEMO Auditing Demo
* 5503C16 DEMO Demonstration—LRH
* 5503C16 DEMO LRH Auditing Demo
* 5503C17 DEMO LRH Auditing
* 5503C17 DEMO LRH Auditing
* 5503C18 DEMO LRH Auditing
* 5503C18 DEMO LRH Auditing Demo
* 5503C21 DEMO Auditing Demo—LRH
* 5503C21 DEMO Auditing Demo—LRH
* 5503C22 DEMO Auditing Demo—LRH
* 5503C22 DEMO Auditing Demo—LRH
* 5503C23 DEMO Auditing Demo—LRH
* 5503C23 DEMO Auditing Demo—LRH
* 5503C24 DEMO Auditing Demo—LRH
* 5503C24 DEMO Auditing Demo—LRH
* 5503C25 DEMO Auditing Demo—LRH
* 5503C25 DEMO Auditing Demo—LRH
* 5503C28 DEMO LRH Auditing Demo
* 5503C28 DEMO LRH Auditing Demo
* 5503C29 DEMO Afternoon Auditing Demo
* 5503C29 DEMO Afternoon Auditing Demo
* 5504C01 DEMO LRH Auditing Demo
* 5504C01 DEMO LRH Auditing Demo
* 5504C04 DEMO LRH Auditing Demo
* 5504C19 DEMO LRH Auditing Demo
* 5504C20 DEMO LRH Auditing Demo
* 5504C21 DEMO Auditing Session

** 5504C27C DAS Education on Problems—Who Doesn’t Think You’re
Insane
* 5504C27D DEMO LRH Auditing and Discussion
* 5504C28 DAS Demonstration Auditing—More Education on Ownership
Process
* 5504C28 DAS Demo Auditing—Ownership Part IV
* 5504C29 DAS LRH Discussion and Auditing of Ownership and Control
* 5504C29 DAS LRH Discussion and Auditing of Ownership and Control
Part Vl



HUBBARD PROFESSIONAL COLLEGE LECTURES
Phoenix, Arizona
14 March—14 May 1955


In March and May 1955, L. Ron Hubbard gave ten one-hour lectures to the students attending Hubbard Professional College in Phoenix, Arizona.

Ability Minor 4 reported: “Ron’s lectures to Hubbard Professional College are given every Saturday to all the students and to the staff of HASI. In these lectures Ron has been talking directly to the trained auditor about auditing. They are not introductory lectures. They are the most advanced material on auditing available, and this does not mean that every Saturday Ron has been chucking out everything that has gone before and announcing new theory. He has been talking about things which he has been testing for a long time, and reporting the most valuable of what in his experience is found to be practical and sound practice for the auditor. The Six Basic Processes are still the Six Basic Processes and what Ron has been doing is to make the auditor more knowing and more familiar with these as his base.”


** 5503C14 HPC-1 The Only One (the mechanics and solution of the
occluded case)

** 5503C26 HPC-2 Axiom 51

** 5504C02 HPC-3 Axiom 51 in Action (The creation and uncreation of
energy and masses by postulate; Knowingness; and
Communication)

** 5504C09 HPC-4 Consequences and a New Understanding of the Six
Basic Processes (how to discover with precision and
raise the reality level of the preclear)

** 5504C16 HPC-5 Service Facsimiles (its handling by modern auditing)

** 5504C23 HPC-6 Thinkingness

* 5504C30 HPC-7 Ownership Processing

** 5505C07 HPC-8 Meaningness (the basic formula for happiness—a new
process), Part I

** 5505C07 HCP-9 Meaningness, Part ll, Auditing Tips

** 5505C14 HPC-10 The Tone Scale (an important new understanding of
the tone scale)



Major 1 [1955, ca. mid-March]

The Magazine of
DIANETICS and SCIENTOLOGY
from
Phoenix, Arizona



THE SCIENTOLOGIST

A Manual on
THE DISSEMINATION OF MATERIAL

L. Ron Hubbard



INTRODUCTION

The basic purpose of this book is to inform members and auditors of the Hubbard Association of Scientologists, International about the fundamentals of Scientology and its organization.
It is expected that a member of the HASI will know the contents of this book, and the substance of this book should become the source material of a basic course in Scientology.
The hope of this book is to bring order into any confusion concerning Scientology, its purposes, its organizations, and the various grades of auditors. The emphasis of this book is upon purposes of organization. It is quite one thing to have an orderly science of life, and quite another thing to have an orderly organization to keep that science of life in such a form as to be utilized by life.
Whereas it is all very well to envision the ideal—that everyone in possession of the materials of Scientology would utilize them with good heart and in an orderly manner to the improvement and betterment of mankind, it is quite another to have had years of experience with this science in action. It has been discovered that unless an auditor or a person interested in Scientology is part of a group which expresses this ideal, that the individual will be lost in the turbulent mass of the society and will thus become ineffective.
Scientologists everywhere, when an organization of force and purpose was, to a large extent, lacking, were victimized and brought into disrepute by persons who could express vast opinions about Scientology, yet who knew nothing about Scientology; by vested interests in the society which were bent upon the suppression of anything which might be seen to have the potential of supplanting their peculiarity. And, in particular, the auditor was victimized in his practice by the existence of persons who, untrained in Scientology and uninformed, yet practiced upon others with it, producing few, poor, or harmful effects.
However, once this organization existed and began to function, another thing came into view: the failure of the auditor and member to understand the purposes and actual operation of the organization of the Hubbard Association of Scientologists, International, and a failure to understand how Scientology should be communicated. The fact that one was an auditor of the HASI or a member of that organization did not immediately presuppose an understanding of the formation of the organization, its purposes or activities.

Copyright (©) 1955 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.

This publication, The Scientologist: A Manual, is designed for use by members and auditors to inform them of the formation and function of the HASI, and the dissemination of Scientology itself—these two subjects being more or less synonymous.
This book is the product of experience and agreement. The HASI is organized as it is because those auditors working with it have agreed that it should work this way, and the various provisions and divisions of the HASI exist by reason of the first years of experience of the HASI or other disrelated organizations which existed before it.
We know that Scientology cannot progress in the society unless it is done by a group effort. We know that it can best progress as individuals banded into groups, and these groups banded together into a larger group. In other words, the HASI is built like a life organism is built. If everyone knows his subject and does his job we will have here a smoothly running and progressive organization which can by its existence and activities bring a better civilization to man.
Although this is the avowed purpose of many organizations, those in Scientology have come to discover over and over that Scientology contains answers which man has lacked in his progress until now. Parts of these answers have been represented in many places under many names, but the organized whole has not been in his possession. As this is, at this time, in his possession, an organization to carry it forward is vitally necessary, and the subject itself and its gains would perish or be altered to such a degree as to be unrecognizable in the absence of a strong, firm organization.
When a member or auditor supports the HASI, he is supporting himself. If the HASI fails, he will fail. There are two things which could occur in the life of any individual. By Scientology he could be processed into the state of a complete static, and in that state he might find life, as represented by that state, pleasant. The other existence would be that of a well balanced individual operating with the forms and spaces of life itself, still in communication with existence, still carrying forward to make that existence better. As, so far, those who have attained the state of complete static have again returned by their own choice to the business of life itself, we can assume that even the processes of Scientology in making a totally cleared individual are not enough. Life, its spaces and forms, must be added to existence in order to make it interesting. Thus, Scientology and life itself as represented by the forms and spaces make a workable combination. The forms and spaces by themselves are too complex and confused at this stage and in this civilization to make a usable panorama with the absence of Scientology. Scientology AND life, which is to say life broadly understood and changeable at will, can create an existence close to an ideal. Scientology and its organization, the HASI and its affiliated organizations, represent a living of life with an understanding of its goals and purposes and the ability to change it.



A DESCRIPTION OF SCIENTOLOGY

Scientology is the science of knowing how to know answers. It is an organized system of Axioms and Processes which resolve the problems of existence.

A Scientologist is a specialist in spiritual and human affairs.
Scientology is organized from the viewpoint of the spirit and contains a precise and usable definition of the spirit, and charts and studies and is capable of changing the behavior of the spirit.
This science is formed in the tradition of ten thousand years of religious philosophy and considers itself a culmination of the searches which began with the Veda, the Tao, Buddhism, Christianity, and other religions. Scientology is a Gnostic faith in that it knows it knows. This is its distinguishing characteristic from most of its predecessors. Scientology can demonstrate that it can attain the goals set for man by Christ, which are: Wisdom, Good Health, and Immortality.
By spiritual means, but means which are as precise as mathematics, a host of bad conditions of life may be remedied in Scientology. Illness and malfunction can be

divided into two general classes. First, those resulting from the operation of the spirit directly upon the communication networks of life or the body, and those occasioned by the disruption of structure through purely physical causes. Unhappiness, inability to heal, and psychosomatic illness (which include some seventy percent of the illnesses of man), are best healed by immediate address of the human spirit. Illness caused by recognizable bacteria and injury in accident are best treated by physical means, and these fall distinctly into the field of medicine, and are not the province of Scientology, except that accidents and illness and bacterial infection are predetermined in almost all cases by spiritual malfunction and unrest. And, conditions in accidents are definitely prolonged by any spiritual malfunction. Thus we have the field of medicine addressing the immediate injury, such surgical matters as birth and acute infection, and such things as contusions and abrasions resulting from accidents, as well as the administration of drugs and antibiotics to prevent the demise of the patient in a crisis. This is the role of medicine.
Where predisposition to disease or injury exists, or where disease or injury is being prolonged, or where unhappiness and worry causes mental or physical upset, or where we desire to better and improve communications or social relationships, we are dealing, if we are efficient, in the realm of Scientology. For such things are best healed, or best prevented, or best remedied by immediate and direct recourse to the spirit and its action and determinism of the course of the body.
The only truly therapeutic agent in this universe is the spirit. In Scientology this has been demonstrated with more thoroughness and exists with more certainty than the physical sciences or mathematics. A Scientologist CAN make an individual well, happy, and grant him personal immortality, simply by addressing the human spirit.
For more than ten thousand years man has been accumulating material toward this goal, but it required a wide understanding of the philosophies and processes of Asia and a thorough indoctrination in the Western physical sciences and mathematics to bring about the precision existing in Scientology when practiced properly by a trained Scientologist. It could be said that with Scientology we have entered The Second Age of Miracles.
It is a discovery of Scientology, a discovery susceptible to the most arduous scientific proofs, that people are not bodies, but that people are living units operating bodies. The living unit we call, in Scientology, a thetan, that being taken from the Greek letter theta [ Ø ], the mathematical symbol used in Scientology to indicate the Source of Life and Life itself. The individual, the person, the actual identity, is this living unit. It is modified by the addition of a body, and by the addition of a body it is brought into a certain unknowingness about its own condition. The mission of Scientology is to raise the knowingness of this spirit to such a degree that it again knows what it is and what it is doing, and in this state the thetan can apply directly to his own body, or to his environment, or to the bodies of others, the healing skill of which he is capable. It is the thetan which builds and constructs, it is the thetan which forms actual forms and organisms.
Amongst the capabilities and potentials of the thetan is immortality in full knowingness of his own identity. The amount of time which he has spent on earth, and the number of deaths through which he has gone, have brought him into a state of forgetfulness about who and where he has been. This material is recovered in Scientology, if the Scientologist specifically processes toward it.




DISSEMINATION OF MATERIAL


The dissemination of materials of Scientology is a problem of comparable stature to the use of techniques on a preclear in an auditing session. Just as you would not process a preclear with heavy processes when all he could take might be ARC Straight

Wire, thus you would not issue Scientology materials of considerable weight to people incapable of assimilating them.
The immediate result of the issuance of materials not intended for that audience is to produce a state of confusion in the minds of that audience regarding Scientology. Here we have no question of talking down to people. Here we have no question of “watering” our material, but we do have a question of disseminating Scientology. If we do it properly, then Scientology will be very broadly known. If we do it improperly it will stop in its tracks, and be known, if at all, as a confusion.
When materials are issued above the acceptance level of an audience, a confusion results. A confusion is the antithesis of a flow. Any communication resulting in a confusion then brings about an eddy or tumbling of particles rather than their spread. And a confusion at length becomes a mystery.
Part ten of the Code of a Scientologist says: “I pledge myself to engage in no unseemly disputes with the uninformed on the subject of my profession.” This is an immediate injunction not to start an eddy of confusion. The employment of Scientology to the greatest good of the greatest number of Dynamics does not include using it knowingly or unknowingly to confuse hearers.
An outline of the communication lines of Scientology follows:
1. General public to the general public.
2. Scientologists to the general public.
3. Member HASI to member HASI.
4. Trained Scientologist to a member of the HASI.
5. Member of the HASI to a preclear.
6. Trained Scientologist to a preclear.
7. Trained Scientologist to a trained Scientologist.
8. HASI to membership.
9. HASI to trained Scientologist.
10. HASI to the general public.



1. GENERAL PUBLIC TO THE GENERAL PUBLIC

There are several things we would like the general public to say to the general public about Scientology. The first of these is that we would like the general public, when it sees an individual or group problem, to be quite certain that the proper thing to do is for that individual or group to consult a Scientologist. For instance, if somebody is having headaches, we would like his friends to come to the obvious solution that this person should see a Scientologist or should join a group undergoing processing.
The next on this communication line is that Scientology does not pose any threat, that Scientologists are good citizens, and that they can be trusted with problems of a private and confidential nature, or with problems dangerous to other people, such as the problem of criminality. Another frame of mind we would like to see the public have and register is that people attacking Scientologists have something wrong with them (and if you could meet any such people personally you would see that this is no more than truth). As a subdivision of this, the actual substance of communication about what Scientology is, from the general public to the general public, should be that Scientology says that good health and immortality are attainable. That it is something compounded out of all man knows of the subject of man, and that people are living units operating bodies, rather than bodies, and that this living unit is the human soul. Given this much communication line, the general public can embroider enormously, and unless a person in the general public can express his opinions, and unless the subject gives him a chance to express his own opinions, and so let HIM be interesting, he will not talk about the subject. Thus the data in the general public should give individuals a chance to be interesting, by knowing no more and no less than the above. We are not interested in sensationalism, personalities, or the complexity of Scientological methodology being discussed by the general public. As a subdivision of this, we do not want Scientology to be reported in the press, anywhere else than on the religious page of newspapers. It is destructive of word of mouth to permit the public presses to express their biased and badly reported sensationalism. Therefore we should be very alert to sue for slander at the slightest chance so as to discourage the public presses from mentioning Scientology. What the newspapers say is not word of mouth. As an example of this, how many minutes today have you spent in discussing current events? NEWSPAPER REPORTERS WRITING ARTICLES ON SCIENTOLOGY DO NOT EXPRESS SCIENTOLOGY. Scientologists should never let themselves be interviewed by the press. That’s experience talking!
As a subdivision of general public to general public we have the problem of the professions which might consider Scientology to be antipathetic to them, amongst these would be psychologists and medical doctors as well as psychiatrists. These persons are entirely in error when they express the opinion that Scientologists are against them. Scientology does not consider them sufficiently important to be against. Flour-pills or any incantation or system will produce in 22% of the public, benefit. Therefore, any practice or art can always achieve 22% recovery in their patients. It is when we better this 22% that we are being efficient. We have no more quarrel with a psychologist than we would have with an Australian witch doctor. We have no quarrel with a psychiatrist any more than we should quarrel with a barbarian because he had never heard of nuclear physics. And as for the medical doctor, we know very well that modern medical practice, having lately outgrown phlebotomy, has come of age to a point where it can regulate structure in a most remarkable and admirable way. In Scientology we believe a medical doctor definitely has his role in a society just as an engineer has his role in civil government. We believe that a medical doctor should perform emergency operations such as those made necessary by accidents; that he should perform orthopaedics; that he should deliver babies; that he should have charge of the administration of drugs; that his use of antibiotics is beneficial; and that wherever he immediately and curatively addresses structure he is of use in a community. The only place we would limit a medical doctor is in the field of treatment of psychosomatic medicine, where he has admittedly and continuously failed, and the

only thing we would ask a medical doctor to change about his practice is to stop taking money for things he knows he cannot cure, i.e., spiritual, mental, psychosomatic, and social ills.
With regard to psychologists, medical doctors, and psychiatrists, then, what would one say in talking with them? But again we have section 10 of the Code of a Scientologist. You wouldn’t expect this psychologist, or psychiatrist, or medical doctor to get into an argument with you on how to get rats to find their way through mazes, how you would set a tibia, or what voltage you would put on an electric shock machine. Therefore, and equally, do not permit yourself to be put in the situation where you are discussing privately or in public the methodologies of your wisdom. The attitude of a Scientologist toward people in these professions should be: “I have my techniques. It took me a long time to learn them just as it took you a long time to learn yours, and I am not going to try to make a minister out of you, and you are not going to try to make a medical doctor (psychiatrist, psychologist) out of me. I am an expert instructor only where it is intimately involved with the human spirit. I can produce my effects. You can produce yours. In view of the fact that you do not pretend to operate in the field of the human spirit, and I do not pretend to operate in the field of structure, I do not see how there can be any discussion. But things that I can’t handle in structure when called upon I will be very happy to refer to you, and I shall expect that when matters of the spirit come into question you will have enough understanding of life, where we are all specialists, to refer them to me.” A quiet explanation of this character will do a great deal to place you as a professional man in their realm of understanding of professional men.
Should anyone challenge you for having suddenly secured a relief in a hospital or an institution from some dire malady which balked the efforts of the professional men in charge of it, and should you ever be “called upon the carpet” for having “interfered” with the progress of a case, you should be extremely dismayed, and act it, to find yourself in the presence of barbarians who do not believe in the power of prayer, in the will of God, or the promises of Jesus Christ. And you should point out that, whereas the body was in their keeping, they did not at any time care to take purview of the human soul. And if anything has occurred because the soul, in your province, then reacted upon the body, you believe that they are unwilling to admit the will of God in their treatment of human beings, and if this is the case, you now, while you are being addressed by such people, discover yourself to be in a strange place where men pretending to be Christians doubt God, the Son of God, and the power of prayer. Your entire address to such people, in such a situation, publicly or privately, should be entirely overt, accusative, and not at any time apologetic. And you should immediately make it your business to place this matter before the proper authorities, that people are in charge of an institution here, are not Christians, and do not believe in God, and you should inform your accusers that you are going to do so.
Should you ever be arrested for practicing Scientology, treating people, make very sure, long before the time comes, that you have never used drugs or surgery, and that you have never prescribed a diet, or vitamins, and when that time might come, make very sure that you immediately and instantly, within two or three hours after your receipt of the warrant, have served upon the signer of that warrant, a personal civil suit for $100,000.00 damages for having caused the arrest of a Man of God going about his business in his proper profession, and for having brought about embarrassing publicity and molestation. Place the suit and WIRE THE HASI IMMEDIATELY. Make the whole interest during the entire time of such an unfortunate occurrence the fact that the signer of such a warrant, who would ordinarily be a medical doctor in charge of the medical department of some city, had dared fly in the teeth of religion. And use what is necessary of the earlier passage above to drive the point home. DO NOT simply fall back out of communication if you are attacked, but attack, much more forcefully, and artfully and arduously. And if you are foolish enough to have an attorney who tells you not to sue, immediately dismiss him and get an attorney who will sue. Or, if no attorney will sue, simply have an HASI suit form filled out and present it yourself to the county clerk in the court of the area in which your case has come up.

IN ALL SUCH CASES OF ARREST FOR THE PRACTICE OF SCIENTOLOGY, THE HASI WILL SEND A REPRESENTATIVE AT ONCE, BUT DO NOT WAIT FOR HIS ARRIVAL TO PLACE THIS SUIT. THE SUIT MUST ALREADY HAVE BEEN FILED WHEN THE HASI ATTORNEY ARRIVES.
In other words, do not, at any moment leave this act unpunished, for, if you do you are harming all other Scientologists in the area. When you are attacked it is your responsibility then to secure from further attack not only yourself but all those who work with you. Cause blue flame to dance on the courthouse roof until everybody has apologized profusely for having dared to become so adventurous as to arrest a Scientologist who, as a minister of the church, was going about his regular duties. As far as the advices of attorneys go that you should not sue, that you should not attack, be aware of the fact that I, myself, in Wichita, Kansas, had the rather interesting experience of discovering that my attorney, employed by me and paid by me, had been for some three months in the employ of the people who were attacking me, and that this attorney had collected some insignificant sum of money after I hired him, by going over to the enemy and acting upon their advices. This actually occurred, so beware of attorneys who tell you not to sue. And I call to your attention the situation of any besieged fortress. If that fortress does not make sallies, does not send forth patrols to attack and harass, and does not utilize itself to make the besieging of it a highly dangerous occupation, that fortress may, and most often does, fall.
The DEFENSE of anything is UNTENABLE. The only way to defend anything is to ATTACK, and if you ever forget that, then you will lose every battle you are ever engaged in, whether it is in terms of personal conversation, public debate, or a court of law. NEVER BE INTERESTED IN CHARGES. DO, yourself, much MORE CHARGING, and you will WIN. And the public, seeing that you won, will then have a communication line to the effect that Scientologists WIN. Don’t ever let them have any other thought than that Scientology takes all of its objectives.
Another point directly in the interest of keeping the general public to the general public communication line in good odor: it is vitally important that a Scientologist put into action and overtly keep in action Article 4 of the Code: “I pledge myself to punish to the fullest extent of my power anyone misusing or degrading Scientology to harmful ends.” The only way you can guarantee that Scientology will not be degraded or misused is to make sure that only those who are trained in it practice it. If you find somebody practicing Scientology who is not qualified, you should give them an opportunity to be formally trained, at their expense, so that they will not abuse and degrade the subject. And you would not take as any substitute for formal training any amount of study.

You would therefore delegate to members of the HASI who are not otherwise certified only those processes mentioned below, and would discourage them from using any other processes. More particularly, if you discovered that some group calling itself “precept processing” had set up and established a series of meetings in your area, you would do all you could to make things interesting for them. In view of the fact that the HASI holds the copyrights for all such material, and that a scientific organization of material can be copyrighted and is therefore owned, the least that could be done to such an area is the placement of a suit against them for using materials of Scientology without authority. Only a member of the HASI or a member of one of the churches affiliated with the HASI has the authority to use this information. The purpose of the suit is to harass and discourage rather than to win.
The law can be used very easily to harass, and enough harassment on somebody who is simply on the thin edge anyway, well knowing that he is not authorized, will generally be sufficient to cause his professional decease. If possible, of course, ruin him utterly.
A D.Scn. has the power to revoke a certificate below the level of D.Scn. but not a D.Scn. However, he can even recommend to the CECS of the HASI that D.Scns. be revoked, and so any sincere Scientologist is capable of policing Scientology. This is again all in the interest of keeping the public with a good opinion of Scientology, since

bad group processing and bad auditing are worse than bad publicity and are the worst thing that can happen to the general public to general public communication line.
The best thing that can happen to it is good auditing, good public presentation, and a sincere approach on the subject of Scientology itself. Remember, we are interested in ALL treatment being beneficial, whether it is Scientology or not. For bad treatment in any line lowers the public opinion of all treatment.
In addressing persons professionally interested in the ministry, we have another interesting problem in public presentation. We should not engage in religious discussions. In the first place, as Scientologists, we are Gnostics, which is to say that we know that we know. People in the ministry ordinarily suppose that knowingness and knowledge are elsewhere resident than in themselves. They believe in belief and substitute belief for wisdom. This makes Scientology no less a religion, but makes it a religion with an older tradition and puts it on an intellectual plane.
Religious philosophy, then, as represented by Scientology, would be opposed in such a discussion to religious practice. We are all-denominational rather than nondenominational, and so we should be perfectly willing to include in our ranks a Moslem, or a Taoist, as well as any Protestant or Catholic, while people of the ministry in Western civilization, unless they are evangelists, are usually dedicated severely to some faction which in itself is in violent argument with many other similar factions. Thus these people are ready to argue and are practiced in argument, and there are more interpretations of one line of scripture than there are sunbeams in a day. Beyond explaining one’s all-denominational character, explaining that one holds the Bible as a holy work, one should recognize that the clergy of Western Protestant churches defines a minister or the standing of a church by these salient facts: Jesus Christ was the Savior of Mankind, Jesus Christ was the Son of God.
We in Scientology find no argument with this, and so in discussing Scientology with other ministry one should advance these two points somewhere in the conversation. Additionally, one should advance to the ministry exactly those things mentioned earlier as what we would like the general public to believe. Christ, if you care to study the New Testament, instructed his disciples to bring wisdom and good health to man, and promised mankind immortality, and said the Kingdom of Heaven was at hand, and the translators have not added that “at hand” possibly meant three feet back of your head. We could bring up these points but there is no reason to. You are not trying to educate other ministry. A friendly attitude toward other ministry in general, and fellow ministers in particular, is necessary.
The way to handle an individual minister of some other church is as follows: get him to tell you exactly what HE believes, get him to agree that religious freedom is desirable, then tell him to make sure that if that’s the way he believes, he should keep on believing that, and that you would do anything to defend his right to believe that.
None of these people as individuals are antipathetic. They know a great deal about public presence, and can be respected for such knowledge. However, engaging in long discourses, or trying to educate a minister of some Protestant church or a priest of the Catholic faith into the tenets of Scientology is not desirable and is directly contrary to Article 10 of the Code of a Scientologist.
You will find you have many problems and people in common with other ministers. They’re alive too. Also you will see a campaign to place only ministers in charge of the mind and mental healing. Talk about these things.
The Christian Church has been hurt by factionalism. We stand for peace and happiness. Therefore, let us carry it forward by example, not by unseemly discussions.

2. SCIENTOLOGISTS TO THE GENERAL PUBLIC

In the assemblage of congregations, and in addressing the general public at large, a Scientologist has a responsibility to give to the public, in the form of such congregations or meetings, information acceptable to them, which can be understood by them, and which will send them away with the impression that the Scientologist who addressed them knew definitely what he was talking about and that Scientology is an unconfused, clear-cut subject.

Anyone using Scientology must state that he is using Scientology. He cannot, must not, leave it unnamed or call it by another name. Use of it without naming it is a breach of law.
A Scientologist, when addressing public groups, would never under any circumstances confuse his communication line by engaging in a debate from the floor or closing terminals with any persons who would care to heckle him. By simply ignoring such people, one continues to talk to the bulk of the people who are themselves very interested. When anyone causes an unseemly upset, it is rarely difficult to have the person removed from the group. In other words, either ignore him or remove him. Don’t engage in a debate with him.
Similarly, no Scientologist would ever consent to take a position on a panel or on a stage engaging in a debate of Scientology versus some other subject. This is an entirely unclear communication line. People are not interested in a debate. They are interested, if they are there at all, in Scientology. Why, therefore, give some other subjects an audience before which it could air its views? In the last five years I have turned down innumerable offers of debates, for I have found out that Dianetics or Scientology was the attraction and that medicine or psychology was using the public interest in this new subject in order to further their own aims, and that any such debate engaged upon demeaned and degraded Scientology by permitting it to be talked about contemptuously before a group—a thing which SHOULD NEVER BE PERMITTED.
The first and foremost thing which a Scientologist should do in the way of information is to relay the data contained in the earlier section. He should punch this hard, regardless of what kind of a group he is talking to. He should tell them overtly that when they see somebody who is sick or unhappy, that if their illness does not require the immediate attention of a medical doctor, then the thing for them to tell that person or that person’s family is to SEE A SCIENTOLOGIST.
He should also punch home the fact that Scientology believes in the three things Christ intended for man: wisdom, good health, and immortality. In other words, he should make it his business to use such an opportunity of addressing a group to pound home what we think the general public should say to the general public about Scientology. He should start this simply by saying it to such groups insistently and many times. He could add a great deal of descriptive material to this, but he should not go further into the field of data. In other words, he should talk in generalities. He should describe a Scientologist as one with a mission to bring wisdom, good health, and immortality to the public. He should describe the aims and goals of the organizations; which are to assist in wiping out criminality, insanity and war.
He should pound home to such groups the fact that the human spirit is the only therapeutic agent of any lasting value. He should tell such groups what Scientology can do for them in bringing them wisdom, happiness, good health, and immortality. He should describe to them how long it takes in individual processes. Above all, HE SHOULD BE HONEST. He should tell exactly what he himself feels to be true, but he should not give them involved data.
It very often happens that a Scientologist who has recently come from the HASI will be asked about the state of cases of people who have passed through that area. He should give his honest and forthright opinion, not any dressed up or hopeful conclusion. He should tell what he himself observes. When asked about the training given in that area he should state exactly what his opinion is of that training in the area, and this sincerity itself will communicate.
He will find that people like to do little scandal-mongering and that people who ask the most questions do not represent the general attitude of the group. This is one of the foremost lessons a Scientologist learns in addressing congregations, that the people who “close terminals” with him at the break or at the end of the lecture do not represent the opinion of the group. The general opinion of the group is a fairly high one. The people who close terminals with him have opinions and data which are fairly low, since these people close terminals because they are low on the tone scale. Therefore he should be able to lift his eyes over the whole group and see what kind of

a reaction the group itself has, not merely those who speak. The people who speak from a group are not the spokesmen of a group. The spokesman of the group is the Scientologist himself as he stands there addressing the group, and he can regulate their tone and reception at will. He does this best by not closing terminals with the most upsetting elements of the group.
The group occasionally wants to know something about other Scientologists. They have heard things. Those inquiries about myself are best answered in this wise: that in all Ron’s experience with rumors and stories about himself, he has yet to hear one single story come back to him in a form which even vaguely approached the truth or the circumstances about which it was told, and he has heard many, many things which did not happen at all.
Thus, it is the case with Scientologists at large. Many things are said about them, but they have this experience every now and then that one of these stories comes back to them and when it comes back to them they will not recognize the incident.
It happens that it is the tone level of the general public that scandal and untruth take precedence. I ask you to consult the Chart of Human Evaluation and you will discover in that chart that truth does not exist below the level of 2.0. Therefore, why should you be surprised that so many twisted stories are circulated? They are circulated about you as a Scientologist as well as about me as the Founder of Scientology. Standing together we can best this vagary of human communication lines. The example is set for the public by its newspapers, which themselves offer little but untruths.
And I call to your attention that courts do not admit hearsay evidence. They have learned after long experience that they can only accept what the witness himself has observed, and that they can never accept what the witness has heard that somebody else observed. Hearsay evidence, that evidence which simply recounts what somebody else has said he observed, is not admissible in courts of law anywhere in the civilized world and has not been since Roman times. Compare this, then, to the communication line of hearsay’s in terms of rumors, and find that there is little to be gained in either clarifying or forwarding such rumors. In discussing rumors with groups, discuss only the tone scale and theory of rumors. Use rumors as a chance to teach, for a Scientologist is a teacher.
On the subject of myself, a Scientologist addressing any group of people, when the subject is brought up and not otherwise, should make it clear that Ron is just a human being who has been working hard to solve some of the problems of life; that he has behind him now, on this subject, in the public eye, many years of sincere application to the subject, and that many results beneficial to people have resulted. That he has a definite idea of where he is going and what he is doing, and that, like anyone introducing new things into the society, a great deal of rumor and upset and backbiting can be expected. In other words, on such a thing, pass it all off.
As for himself, when addressing congregations a Scientologist should be very careful to express his own personality and to express himself as himself, not in just any role which will suit the particular congregation he is addressing. People may believe him to be indifferently trained as a Scientologist, but then, they believe that I am indifferently trained, too, whereas Who Knows and What, the companion book to Who’s Who in America, which gives the professional experts of the country, and which you can find in any good library, lists me as an expert in psychology, and any certified Scientologist has actually invested more hours of study and practice in his subject than a medical doctor or psychologist has invested in the study of the mind.
If you do not believe this, simply add up the number of hours psychologists and medical doctors are actually in classes which teach theory and practice on the mind, and you will discover something interesting. Add up the number of hours you have spent in study in Scientology and Dianetics schools and your own hours of study and practice, and you will see some truth in the fact that nearly all Doctors of Scientology have invested somewhere in the neighborhood of five thousand hours in training, which is an overpowering amount of training.
In other words, do not let the matter of skill fall into question, and overtly represent that both the Founder of this Science and those who are truly practicing this

science are the best trained people in the field of the spirit and the mind in the world today. This could not have been said four years ago, but do not let the impression of four years ago continue to exist. Today they are really trained, but an auditor has a tendency to forget how well trained he is because he does not know how poorly trained other professions are in their subjects.

3. MEMBER HASI TO MEMBER HASI

Members of the HASI are theoretically bound by the Code of a Scientologist, and they should be reminded of this by Scientologists who are certified. They have the right, theoretically, to use and to study any and all of the materials of Scientology. This right is exemplified by the fact that the professional course tapes are made available to individuals and groups who are not possessed of the right to teach. The reason for this is that a communication line to the membership must not be cut.
This does not mean that a member is going to use these materials responsibly, but he has a complete right to have them and to discuss them with members. A member of the HASI is included as a Scientologist and should be cognizant of Sections 1 and 2 above.

4. TRAINED SCIENTOLOGIST TO A MEMBER OF THE HASI

It is the duty of certified auditors to place their information at the disposal of members, at the same time enjoining them that there is no substitute for formal training.
A member of the HASI, as far as information is concerned, may have a great deal of material available, but the certified auditor should extend to him only the book Self-Analysis in Scientology, The Group Auditor’s Handbook, and Issue 31-G of the Journal to use upon preclears. These can be used with some success by people who are not trained.

5. MEMBER OF THE HASI TO A PRECLEAR

Only members of the HASI, or of specifically delineated affiliated organizations have the right to use the materials of Scientology—a fact which the HASI is prepared to enforce as it can do legally at any financial cost. (Membership, however, does not give the right to publish or excerpt or reorganize Scientology, nor the right to teach it formally.)
Members of the HASI as well as auditors have the right to possess, study, and know, all the materials of Scientology. In practice, however, a member of the HASI who is not otherwise a certified auditor has no rights of professional practice and may not process for personal gain, and will not be supported by the HASI or its auditors should he err or get into difficulties through having used processes on preclears, with only one exception. A member of the HASI may apply to a preclear, informally, and not as professional practice, and not for gain, and exactly as composed, Self-Analysis in Scientology, Issue 31-G, and used as an individual process or group process, but again exactly as given to individuals or groups, The Group Auditor’s Handbook.
A member of the HASI is expected to follow the Auditor’s Code and the Code of a Scientologist, and even if he does not know them well or know about them, he may have his membership revoked by the CECS for failure to follow them, since wide agreement and practice have demonstrated that processing is ineffective or even harmful when executed without observance of the Auditor’s Code, 1954, and that the subject of Scientology itself undeservedly suffers through failure to follow the Code of a Scientologist.
Where preclears in general are concerned, a member of the HASI would do well when not trained as an auditor to refer such preclears to a trained auditor.

6. TRAINED SCIENTOLOGIST TO PRECLEAR

The dissemination of information to a preclear is completely forbidden by the Auditor’s Code, 1954. This is evaluation.

While it is not true that a person trained in Scientology is immediately and for that reason harder to process than one who is not trained, it is true that forwarding information about the preclear’s own case, or giving him materials of Scientology while he is undergoing processing reduces the effectiveness of processing.

7. TRAINED SCIENTOLOGIST TO TRAINED SCIENTOLOGIST

It might be a surprise that any injunction about the dissemination of information would have to be outlined where communication is between a trained Scientologist and a trained Scientologist. However, experience has demonstrated that these two, particularly when auditing each other, get into many involvements over what the exact point of the process is.
We discovered a short time ago with some amazement that this was a major block on co-auditing teams composed of trained Scientologists only. It seems that it is not unusual for two trained Scientologists, one processing the other, to get into violent discussions regarding the exact running of processes, with the session suspended while they consult texts and tapes. In this regard, an auditor being processed by another auditor should, in the first place, have made sure that he had a Scientologist of comparable skill. In the second place, an auditor being audited should be content to be a preclear for the term of the session. It could be said that an auditor who has not been audited badly once in a while doesn’t know how grim it can get and won’t regulate his own processing of preclears accordingly, because any trained Scientologist has a great many ways of getting preclears out of trouble, and no permanent damage can result.
Although the Code of a Scientologist specifically forbids a Scientologist to talk out loud to the public about other Scientologists, and to run them down, it definitely does not forbid this practice among auditors. However, it does forbid defamation by an auditor of anyone in Scientology in any published form.
A great many newsletters exist in Scientology which are more or less intended to be for circulation amongst Dianeticists and Scientologists and which take wide liberties with the reputations of all concerned. Any member or trained Scientologist expressing himself in such a way as to defame Scientology or the people connected with it may find himself in considerable legal difficulty. Although during the formative years of Dianetics and Scientology no-one had enough time or patience to find out what was being written in such magazines or newsletters, the situation has now changed, and enough time and money is now available to free all of us from this great deterrent to our common purpose of making this world a better place in which to live.
The trained Scientologist does and should make his experience known to other trained Scientologists. In accordance with the Code of a Scientologist he is expected to repress the names of actual preclears as per Article Nine: “I pledge myself to refuse to impart personal secrets of my preclears.” However, discussing cases with a trained auditor discovers often a necessity to be highly specific, for such cases are quite usually experienced in common.
This discussion of peculiarities of a case has nothing to do with revealing the secrets of a preclear, since processing today is not even vaguely interested in obtaining secrets from a preclear.
Discussing cases amongst auditors is not the same as discussing cases with HASI members, groups, or the public. An auditor must never discuss a case with people who are not auditors beyond mentioning difficulties, exactly pertinent to the arrangements of processing, to those upon whom a case might be dependent. And, if an auditor should have occasion to mention a case to a congregation or a group, he should so disguise the identity and particulars of the case so as not to embarrass anyone, for it is quite often part of training and part of description of Scientology to interested groups to mention that such and such a type of case has recovered.
A highly specialized part of this communication line from trained Scientologist to trained Scientologist is the certified auditor to the student. While no certified auditor should invade and attempt to instruct the students of some other auditor, a great deal of liberty is possible between the trained auditor and the student, except in such

instances as when the status of a student is questionable. By student here one means not someone who is studying Scientology, but one who is regularly and specifically enrolled toward a certain degree.
Students should not be given misinformation, and very definitely and specifically, as will be covered shortly, they should not be given experimental data of any kind whatsoever. It is disastrous to take a student who is not yet capable of the most elementary processes of Scientology, no matter how capable he himself thinks he is, and turn him loose with some experimental data. The immediate result of this is distraction of the student from his course of study, and entering him upon a line of investigation. Giving a student experimental data—and I should know—is like turning him loose on a dark night in a sea filled with rocks. The result is that he will go aground and his preclear will go aground. Where students are co-auditing, any time you find any case in a unit bogging, look for the person who audited him with experimental techniques. You will occasionally find that the person who audited him on the experimental technique was not a member of that unit, or was some wildcat with no more purpose than “observe the effect.”
A certified auditor should be courteous to the student. The student will, in all probability, become a certified auditor.
One of the hidden but more vicious crimes which can be committed in communicating information to students is to give them the data and deny them affinity, and cut the affinity lines connected to the data. One Scientologist who was very widely known in the early days trained many auditors, but it was found later that every auditor he had trained had been estranged from the subject by being estranged by this Scientologist from any Scientologist who was following closely the course of investigation I was undertaking. He gave them data, but somehow he gave them to understand that I and auditors around me had something vague and unstated wrong in the personality or behavior sector. He never gave any specific example to these students, since he never could have done so with any truth, but he conveyed to them that the subject was one thing, and I, and other auditors, quite another. That the subject was good, the people who originated and practiced it were bad.
As a result every single one of his students who has come through later training units was found to be entirely deficient in a basic understanding of Scientology. Alloying the affinity of the subject itself, the subject would then not communicate to them, and the students did not know whether they had studied gastronomy or monotony, and as a result each and every one of them had long and arduous lines of failures as auditors.
The Scientologist of whom I speak in course of time obtained no more students, not from any overt act against him by the HAS or the HASI, but because this continual failure eventually accumulated to himself and he failed in his entire establishment. I do not believe this person knows to this day what actually happened to him and his business. The alloying of the affinity line, no matter how vaguely, alloys the actual communication of data. Simply adhering to the Code of a Scientologist, regardless of one’s personal opinions, however right or wrong these may be, will actually bring good training to students.
If it is in the obsessive nature of man always to have something bad to point out, and if this obsession cannot be avoided, then point out the horribly pockmarked state of the moon, not the people who are making a sincere try in Scientology.
For a long time a condition existed which confused the communication line between trained auditors and trained auditors. In view of the fact that the subject was advancing, and its advance was not being interrupted simply because people had not been trained each time to the new level, auditors who had just graduated from a school were prone to feel very superior and derogatory toward auditors who had been trained a year or so previously. There might or might not have been good reason for this, but with the Seventh Clinical Unit I found that we could stabilize processes and that we did have processes now that weren’t changing simply because of new data, and so this information level could be stabilized.
It is the responsibility of any trained Scientologist to make sure that anyone with a certificate in his area is, by whatever means, brought up to the training level which

exists today. It is the particular responsibility of the Doctors of Scientology who themselves have a right to examine for or to revoke certificates.
This retraining of older Scientologists by those with later training presents a peculiar problem, since Scientology has worked for the well-trained auditor for two years.
However, for some time to come it will be necessary for auditors trained to the prescribed level to exactly follow the training letter of July, 1954 in their retraining of certified auditors in their area. The HASI intends to pick up and stabilize every certificate ever issued at one time or another, and to that end currently offers a one-month retraining course at half the cost charged regular students so that certified auditors can be stabilized in training. For this is a matter of people who do not know basic techniques or how to work them. It is training, not Scientology, which is at fault in such a case.

8. HASI TO THE MEMBERSHIP

The Hubbard Association of Scientologists, International is by law a fellowship of persons actively interested in and to a greater or lesser extent trained in Scientology. It is not a public organization, but a professional organization. The casual public member of Scientology who is interested in its results and what it represents to civilization is expected to be a member of an affiliated organization such as the Church of Scientology and the Church of American Science. Those who conduct, process and handle congregations and the churches are members of the HASI. The congregations themselves are members of the Church of Scientology or the Church of American Science. In the role of being a professional organization, the HASI, then, conducts the schools and seminaries or regulates the training done by professionals in Scientology.
The HASI is also a publications organization which furnishes the materials for training done by professionals in Scientology. The HASI is additionally a research and investigation unit. Publications, research and investigation, professional services, and the regulation of those actively practicing Scientology so as to secure good public acceptance, are the functions of the HASI.
The churches accumulate congregations, conduct public programs, and generally unify, disseminate and practice Scientology. In other words, here we have a group of professionals, their publications, and their data coordination center, who are banded together for the uniform good practice of their subject and conduct of their activities. And here we have these professionals operating congregations and units of various kinds which actively practice Scientology in the public. If you can see this picture clearly, then you can understand all the organizations of Scientology, and you will understand the function and services of those organizations.
Under the HASI is the Committee for Examination, Certification and Services. (This organization was, for a short time in its early days, the Professional Auditors Guild, International [PAGI] and then the International Guild of Scientologists [IG of S] but, when the public confused it to be an additional organization, became the Committee for Examination, Certification and Services of the HASI, which is what it had been in function all the time.)
This is the body of principal authority and court of appeals of Scientology. As the State of Arizona has made the HASI the issuing authority of certificates in Dianetics and Scientology, and as LRH’s signature previously was all which gave authority to certificates, the CECS, then, by the laws of the State of Arizona and LRH’s own delegation of certification power, controls all the certificates of Dianetics and Scientology ever issued.
No other organization or unit of any kind whatsoever has authority to issue certificates in Dianetics and Scientology outside the scope and authority of the CECS. The CECS is a committee composed of five Doctors of Scientology, who also hold Doctors of Divinity in affiliated organizations. When a Doctor of Scientology in the field has trained someone up to the level of HCA, and when that person has been examined by another Doctor of Scientology, the recommendation for certification is forwarded to and passed by the CECS.

The CECS has representatives on every continent in the world. It is their purpose to guarantee the good practice of Scientology by all its practitioners everywhere. This Committee for the HASI also extends various services to those professionally interested in the practice of Scientology. These are actually the services of the HASI itself, but it is the CECS which regulates what they are and polices the communication lines.
In matters of dissemination of materials of Scientology or in the improvement of practice in the field, or the revocation of or reduction of certificate levels, it would be the HASI which would be acting, and it would be acting through the CECS.
The HASI has what might seem at first a peculiar idea of what constitutes a communications or processing crime. It believes that the crimes of communication are not comparable to the crimes of non-communication, and it holds far more detrimental to Scientology a FAILURE to circulate and communicate than it does TO communicate. If you will look over the MEST universe you will discover that one is only punished for two things by the MEST universe. The first of these is for communicating. The second of these is for being there. Nearly any organization of professionals which Man has had has specialized almost entirely in punishing only those who communicated or acted.
We see this reflected in the government, in an army or a navy. In such places an officer or enlisted man may go through an entire life of service, piling up crime after crime of omission, and yet arrive with the highest rank and honors. Such services know, in theory, that there are two crimes: one is the crime of commission, the other is the crime of omission. Yet they punish only the crimes of commission. In other words such services punish only those people who act, who communicate, who try to get something done. It is very true that you will never get a black mark on your record in such services if you simply do nothing. In World War II, for instance, it was common experience for units or men to simply refuse to act even though their friends or fellows were in danger.
Refusing to communicate, refusing to act, are alike crimes of omission, of non communication. And when an organization begins to specialize in punishing those people who communicate, who act, who circulate, that organization is cutting its own communication lines, its own efficiency, and spelling out its own eventual defeat.
On this theory, then, the HASI does not specialize in punishing those who communicate, except, of course, in cases where the communication is obvious slander intended to injure Scientology or the HASI, done by people who are not part of the HASI, as the people who conduct campaigns against Scientology are Scientologists or have been trained in Scientology.
Although Scientology communication lines are sometimes muddled up by the writings or letters of people condemning Scientology and Scientologists, a check-up will discover these people to be medical doctors or psychologists who are utilizing the freedom of speech existing in Scientology to deter that science from wiping out, as it might possibly do, medicine and psychiatry and psychology. While it is not the intention of the HASI to flatten or wipe out any science or field of endeavor, such a thing is an inevitable consequence of introducing efficiency where ignorance existed before.
Thus, people from medicine and psychology in particular sometimes use the communication lines of Scientology, as though they were Scientologists, in order to condemn Scientology, the HASI, well-known auditors in Scientology, or L. Ron Hubbard. By cutting the communication lines of such people one is not cutting any SCIENTOLOGY communication lines. He is cutting only the communication lines of medicine and psychology, which, very wrongly, consider themselves to be rivals in the field of Scientology. Scientology cares nothing about either medicine or psychiatry.
The HASI, by the way, after much sad experience in trying to train them, now has a rule which forbids the training of medical doctors, psychiatrists, psychologists, chiropractors and like professionals. A Doctor of Scientology is permitted to train them only in very special cases.
The HASI exists to assist communication of Scientologists just as these data in this book exist. These data are proposed simply because they are more efficient, not because they are all mandatory. On the other hand, the CECS for the HASI views very

dimly a Scientologist who has been trained at considerable trouble to the organization, who has been provided with materials, information, tapes, with the goodwill of the organization, and who has had the HASI vouch for him to his practice or his public, then does nothing.
Such a person trained and equipped who is sitting still, who is not active, or who goes off to other fields and ignores what has been done for him, and ignores what he was supposed to do with the information, is the chief target of the HASI’s CECS. The HASI will do all in its power to help such an individual bring his own case level up to an overt point, and to assist him in his communication and action in the society. But when it is at last convinced that the person does not mean to communicate, does not mean to act, then it has no choice but to put him out of action by the various legal means available to the CECS. In other words, we want no professional “cases.” We want professional auditors.
The CECS also exists to keep Scientology organizations solvent by proposing to them campaigns and activities which will bring them revenue. The CECS, however, can be counted upon to act when it becomes convinced that someone is using Scientology in such a way as to accumulate funds by whatever means or by becoming a thoroughly bad credit risk so as to endanger the financial standing of all Scientologists in an area, as happened in 1954 in Los Angeles.
In case of arrest or severe oppression of a trained Scientologist, the HASI’s CECS is prepared to send into that person’s area an attorney to clarify the situation.
The policy of the HASI to its membership in terms of data is that any member of the HASI, whether sustaining, special, or professional, is entitled to possess any of the information available on the subject of Dianetics or Scientology, and to use that information so as to secure a wider understanding of Scientology. By such data as is contained in this booklet the dissemination of such data is made more efficient, but the dissemination of information advised in this booklet is only recommended—it is not enforced.
Naturally, the HASI expects someone of the stature of a Doctor of Scientology to use with great understanding and great effectiveness this information; it does not enjoin the same efficiency upon a sustaining member.
This table of information, then, is not a catalog of crimes, but a catalog of recommended communications. Any member can possess this information and use the information of Scientology in any way he cares to use it. The only time use of that information becomes a crime in the eyes of the HASI is: (a) when he knowingly disseminates information to groups, or attempts to ape or copy the activities of the HASI under another name than Scientology; (b) when he causes to be copyrighted any of the materials of Scientology under his own or an organizational name, or the names of others whom he controls; (c) when a member who is not certified or who does not have his certificate in force, or whose membership has lapsed, practices Scientology professionally for the purpose of professional or financial gain; (d) when a member or an auditor whose certificate is or is not in force recommends, advises, or prescribes along with Scientology, medicine, vitamins, food supplements, or food, or who uses in connection with his practice any electronic devices, such as diathermy or E-Meters; (e) any member or certified auditor who combines the practice of Scientology with chiropractic, psychiatry, osteopathy, naturopathy, psychology, or any other pseudo-medical or medical activity; (f) any member or certified auditor who practices Scientology and calls it Dianetics, or who if certified only to practice Dianetics, does not practice Dianetics but practices Scientology; (g) who fails to follow the Code of a Scientologist; (h) any member or auditor who flagrantly and repeatedly violates in his practice the Auditor’s Code, 1954.
The reason there is any punitive activity at all on the part of the HASI’s CECS lies with the member or auditor himself. A professional auditor has a right to personal good public repute, and he has a right to be respected for the reason that that which he represents is respected. He has a right to practice Scientology without harassment from those in his immediate area and he has a right to be free from wildcat and unauthorized activities in his area destructive to the general repute of Scientology. Further, he has a

right to benefit from the general accumulation of people in the society who have got well because of Scientology. It is in the personal interest of every auditor that any auditor who processes anybody secure excellent results upon that person, for that person will then tell others and so good practices can be built and held.
He has a right, as well, to standardized fees, not cut to pieces by somebody, not authorized, processing poorly and for very little. Furthermore, he has a right to have in any preclear he receives from any other Scientologist a person whose case is already well advanced. Here is an auditor who has been trained, who has studied his subject, who has accumulated experience, and who is prepared to deliver good results. He goes into an area where somebody has been using Dianetics or Scientology without any attention to what they actually are, has been using it unethically, and who has been getting very poor results. This trained auditor is immediately victimized by the repute of the subject in that area. A member or an auditor has rights to be respected for what they are. People who would cut those rights to pieces or render them less must, of course, be policed.
The ease of policing, if we must call it that, in Scientology rests on the fact that the materials of Scientology are a scientific organization of data adequately and amply copyrighted and owned, and a member or an auditor of the HASI has a right to use them; but a person who is not a member or an auditor does not have any right either to use them or to possess them, and can be sued for doing so.
Furthermore, such a person practicing Scientology illegally, or using the materials of Scientology illegally, can be sued by an individual auditor in an area by an authority sent to that individual auditor by the CECS.
As far as public attacks upon individual auditors, the HASI or LRH are concerned, it has been discovered that all those who have attacked along these lines in the past, by some strange coincidence, are criminally liable for other things on quite other counts for the most part. This is not a hopeful statement, nor an effort to propagandize any doubter into thinking that these attacks are untrue. They are untrue, they were untrue at the time.
Further, such attacks do relatively little damage, and in all truth, we don’t spend much time worrying over being attacked. We like others to have to worry about that. But, behind every one of these attacks, every time they have occurred in the past, has rested a criminal record of one kind or another. These were the kind of people one would employ if one were some hostile organization. The chief person responsible for attacks upon LRH’s character in recent years was, for instance, expelled from college during his second year for grand larceny and is guilty of at least one count of perjury before Federal Courts. Another person, who made the biggest splash in the newspapers (in California, where else?) was found, upon investigation, to have come from a criminal family, to have been a member of an organization pledged to overthrow the United States Government by force, and who committed, in making attacks, perjury on several counts, and who, when finally confronted with this fact, signed full confessions of perjury. Not all the people, of course, who make attacks upon Scientology, its organizations, its auditors or LRH, do so from any other motive than confusion. They don’t know what any of these things are about and are afraid.
But when these attacks assume a public crescendo, it has been discovered in the past that the attacker was a criminal by record; thus you can see the ease with which such people can be handled. Oddly enough, there are only about twenty people in all these five years who have made such attacks, and who have caused difficulties for this work. Not all of these are known to be criminals, and not all of them have committed actual crimes while making these attacks so far as we know, but the most serious of these attacks WERE made by criminals. Therefore, an individual auditor finding himself confronted in an area by scurrilous and vicious attacks has only to trace these to their actual author and then trace the actual author, through police or “private eyes,” to find that he has far more upon which to base charges than merely a dislike of Scientology. Normally such attacks are motivated by a frantic need for secrecy and the fear that any subject which could if it wished penetrate to the inmost secrets of a being would disclose things which such people feel would disgrace them forever.

Now this matter of punishment is not a very happy subject, but neither is it a very happy subject for individual auditors or an organization to be engaged upon a provenly sincere course of intent in civilization, and yet be balked by people who have no understanding or who represent the baser elements of a society. If we find all this uproar and entheta stemming, over a period of five years, from only twenty people, we can see that twenty people meaning no good can create a considerable communication block to us. Thus it is the responsibility of the individual auditor in his area, if he wishes to guarantee himself a quiet, pleasant, beneficial and remunerative practice, to be very alert, and quite punitive where unauthorized persons and uninformed persons go on an all-out attack against him, against Scientology, against its organizations, or who illegally use or misuse Scientology.
And all of Scientology holds such a member or auditor as their hope in smoothing out our communication lines. It is an entirely moral duty to be punitive against strangers and outsiders who would stop the progress of this civilization.
It might be felt at times that by becoming possessed of a greater wisdom, a greater freedom, an individual has to some degree separated himself from the human race. True enough, he has separated himself from the more stupid elements of the human race, but it is not true that he has divorced himself from the foremost and fundamental drive of man. He has, quite the contrary, come much closer to it and the truth of living by being in Scientology. When one has the feeling that he has become an outsider by becoming a Scientologist, he has the tendency not to use the civilization or its processes themselves in carrying forward his course of existence.
A member, or certified auditor, being himself a saner and more civilized person, and being closer to the actual goals of government and society, which are, of course, in any actually civilized land the betterment of that society, has more right to use the government and activity lines of a people than those who would do less by their fellows. In other words, a member of the HASI or a trained Scientologist has full and complete rights to utilize whatever governmental facilities, licensing agencies, institutions, courts, police, legislation’s, and communication lines there are in that society. A member or trained auditor confronted by disagreement from specialized interest finds himself confronted by people who would like a member or trained auditor to believe that they, not he, represent the legal side of the society. This is not true.
The person with the purer intent represents the civilized side of the society, not the person who exists solely for vested interest or personal gain. Remember that courts of law, officers of the law, institutions, regulations, legislatures, congresses, are more yours than they belong to your opponent. A Scientologist is no outlaw in a society, but is the catalyst of that society, and as such he may and should use every facility that society possesses to pull itself up to higher levels of beingness. In other words, if a Scientologist finds somebody doing wrong in the field of healing, he has the full and complete right to use any and all police courts, legislation, to right that wrong.
The HASI exists to back up any such move made. Remember, the HASI does not exist to punish communication and action, but to further it. When it cuts communication lines it is not cutting any SCIENTOLOGY communication lines.
America was civilized by a militant ministry, and when that ministry ceased to be militant we saw on every hand the decay and decline of civil government. We saw a rise of crime and a lowering of public morals. Most churches in Western civilization hold that civil government has been convened and authorized by a Divine Source, and that civil government only exists by reason of that source, and that civil government is only valid because of Divine Source, and that the members of these congregations follow civil government only so long as it does not controvert any part of the words of Jesus Christ as declared in the New Testament. In other words, these churches conceive themselves to be a higher entity than civil government. We do not declare this for Scientology, only insofar as it is the custom of religious organizations, but we do declare that the Scientologist, having a purer intent, has a better right to the use of civil government processes than those who exist for more base purposes.
Scientology exists to further and better the government of people, and believes in the principles of democracy, the Magna Carta, the Constitution of the United States,

and also the Bill of Rights. And it believes that civil government should be dedicated to the government of the people, that it should not exist for graft, that it should not be used by individuals for personal enrichment, that its courts must be just and that its law must be for the greater good of the greater number of people.
Scientology was selflessly created and composed. It would have been easy to have made millions or even billions from its creation. It would be easy for an auditor, by narrowing his processing to the rich, to maintain himself in affluence and luxury. Scientology could only have been conceived if one had no desire for personal gain or aggrandizement. The authorship of Scientology is publicly known solely because that was the only way Scientology could be protected in its formative years. It would best have been conceived from a complete obscurity, but the controls necessary for its proper practice and dissemination would not then have been possible. For every time it has been “turned loose” it has become enturbulated.
The endless ages and a higher authority have continuously operated in the formulation and the purposes of Scientology.
It is necessary for the HASI to release to its membership and its auditors all the information which is known. The reason for this lies in the fact that Western Civilization is becoming more and more enturbulated and its communication lines are being cut. A disastrous result could occur in an atomic war if the materials of Scientology were not broadly held. Furthermore, it would be dangerous for the materials of Scientology to be monopolized in one area. A Doctor of Scientology, holding the materials of Scientology for the training of persons up to certified level, may occasionally find it embarrassing to discover that one student or another has already examined all the materials. But it will not be embarrassing to that Doctor of Scientology the moment he starts to actually train such a person into the uses of Scientology. For people have to be trained into Scientology. We have yet to find one person who was not so trained who was expert in it, and we have found only those persons who were long and arduously trained could obtain the results contained in it.


9. HASI TO TRAINED SCIENTOLOGIST

The professional auditor is given specific information of a highly technical nature through the Professional Auditor’s Bulletins, through the circulation of tapes, and on occasion by personal letter from the HASI. Additionally, auditors who have not been trained up to a level where they can achieve uniformly good results are given specialized training courses at reduced fees by Doctors of Scientology and by the HASI.
Many data of organizational nature are circulated to trained Scientologists which are not circulated to the general membership.


10. HASI TO THE GENERAL PUBLIC

It would be the rare occasion, no matter what the substance, for the HASI to release to the general public through the public presses and magazines of the country any information of any kind whatsoever about anything.
The HASI is not a secret organization, and the materials it has to hand are not secret materials, but it has been discovered in five years that the general level of the public press is such that it interviews with a pre-formed conclusion, and might as well have written the story before it did the interview. Several such interviews granted in the recent months have resulted in no story being written, for that was the way the reporter was handled. He had come to write anything sensational or bad as ordered by his editor, and he found himself confronting programs and activities which he became afraid to slander. In such cases interviews were granted in order to stop stories, not to give them out. In all the thousands of articles published on Dianetics and Scientology, only three or four published in minor publications gave anything like the rendition of the subjects or their activities. The stories were preconceived before interview. Therefore, all the interview could do was to convince the person he couldn’t write the story he had planned to write, and so that prevented him from writing any story at all.

In other words, the moment a reporter discovered that he could not write a bad story, he did not want to write any story. And this applies to reporters who are “friendly,” who promise faithfully all good intent and good press, and who have even been processed successfully. They wrote knowingly inaccurate libel, whatever they said.
If this is the general intent of the public press, then it is our experience that interviews are better forgotten, and that press releases should not be engaged upon, and that reporters should not be granted interviews, whatever they promise. Dianetics and Scientology would have made far more progress had there been no single word about them in the public presses.
Newspapers, magazines, do not represent public opinion, and are not the formative agencies of the public. The only time they become formative agencies in public opinion is when they express something bad badly enough to completely blacken a person or an action. Then the public will become alert and cease to have anything to do with that person or action. It could be said about the modem press that if they were to know for certain that there existed newly discovered an immediate cure for every case of polio in the world, they would mention it somewhere inside the paper, in small print. But that if one doctor in examining one polio case made an error in its handling, then the incident would receive headlines.
The motto of the press is “it is all bad over there.” Although several commentators of international repute have, from time to time, given Dianetics and Scientology and LRH a resounding pat on the back, these comments have been completely lost in an avalanche of misinformed and inaccurate material appearing in the press.
Any auditor will find it so. The mere fact that somebody is trying to do something for the good of the society is sufficient to bring the modem press down upon him, according to our experience. For example, the other day an auditor performed a miracle the Pope himself would have been proud to own. A child had died, was dead, had been pronounced dead by a doctor, and the auditor, by calling the thetan back and ordering him to take over the body again, brought the child to life. The child had died because it felt it was not wanted by its parents.
The public presses knew about this—they did not care to remark upon it. In another place, not too long ago, a Scientologist who had been a Justice of the Peace, used, when he opened up a practice, J.P. after his name, and there were four columns of critical and blasting print about that auditor and about Scientology.
The public at large does not think this way. That is one of the reasons why newspapers today aren’t being read to the degree that they were. Probably only the funny papers keep them being sold at all.
The HASI is very alert to the fact that word of mouth, and actual Scientology publications, are the only accurate or decent dissemination Scientology or its organizations will receive within the general public.
Scientology programs, then, are based solidly and entirely upon the production of results with Scientology upon people in the general public. If this policy is understood, then the actions of the HASI in handling situations or organizations can be much better understood.
At this writing an HASI clinic in City “A” has been closed while an HASI representative conducts there refresher courses. It was not that the clinic was entirely insolvent. It was barely breaking even. But it was noticed that the number of people coming to it was reducing week to week. Originally the clinic had been opened to demonstrate to the public by a series of solved cases that Scientology worked. Therefore an examination of cases was quietly undertaken by the HASI and it was discovered that the auditing being done in the City “A” clinic was not as good as it should have been. The immediate result of this, of course, was for the clinic to have fewer and fewer people calling. Therefore this was not acting as a public dissemination line and that was all it was there for.
An able auditor of the HASI was immediately dispatched to improve the training in general in City “A” and to conduct specifically an arduous and exacting course of training on a few select auditors there. When these have been trained, graduated, and

have had some experience, some of their number will be used in a reopened City “A” clinic. And these practicing in that clinic will send out into the public people who know that Scientology has gotten results upon them.
The entire dependence of the HASI is upon good results in the public. Through an affiliated organization a test city operation was recently begun in the United States. Only one mailing, if a large one, was released to the public. Free processing was to be given every weekend by this organization. These free processing groups began immediately and systematically to grow, and the people who came to them stayed on and have remained week after week, more and more progressively in favor of Scientology, and more and more talking about it to their friends. Now this is true gain and this can be done in any city in the United States.
The HASI, through its affiliated organizations in this test city, has begun a program of visitation whereby every institution of whatever kind in the city is being made into a “regular beat” for the ministers of this organization. These persons are equipped with a small amount of literature and a very large amount of willingness to help. As they visit people in these institutions, these hospitals, these homes, the public at large will become more and more aware of Scientology.
The policy on which the HASI operates is that it trains and equips members and auditors, and provides them with the example of results and then assists them in going forth to produce results upon the public. The communication line of the HASI to the general public is one of result, and that is the only way we feel that Scientology will make progress. No other way produces any lasting result.
Our policy then is to produce and assist auditors and to hold them secure in their professions, and to aid them in every possible way to go out into the society and produce results.
Beyond the general message contained under sections one and two of this article, we do not expect ministers to preach about Scientology, we expect them to use Scientology. We expect them to secure with what they can do, congregations, and groups which are part of the affiliated organizations of the HASI, to support their endeavors by such groups and individual processing, and to process and give programs of public betterment to these groups, and to bring the more able members of these groups into higher technical understanding of Scientology, and so make out of them members or auditors of the HASI. And by thus creating more able people to give Scientology an excellent word-of-mouth communication line to the public at large.
Visiting institutions, hospitals, schools, attending and becoming part of civic functions, by direct mailings, we assist our people to accumulate groups and congregations and, by thus accumulating such groups and congregations and by processing, to give them a higher understanding, better health, to so reach wider and wider into civilization. In announcing its policies to the general public through direct mailings and through its auditors, the HASI makes available such materials as those contained in this manual, except for this general communication plan, in the hope that a better civilization will result.
Until Man has a clear, bold understanding of what Man is and has a Science of Humanity, we will continue to fight and punish and misgovern, and it will get worse than it is unless somebody takes some responsibility. Scientologists are taking that responsibility. We know this can be a better, saner world.
It is not the purpose of the HASI or its affiliated organizations to overthrow or destroy by violence any group or government in the world. It is hoped by the HASI that a higher understanding will result in a higher and better civilization which will not have to have recourse to violence and war for the settlement of its disputes. A civilization in which disease and insanity are viewed as sub optimum rather than normal, and a civilization which holds that a civilized man is one that is his soul and that a man who holds himself to be a body and to have no soul is an animal.
In keeping with this program, the HASI issues books intended for use by the general public, and to interest them in the goals which Man, in the many ages past, has envisioned for Man. It is possible now. But not unless we go about it in a sane and orderly fashion ourselves. That is the reason for our organizations and communications plans.

P.A.B. No. 48
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR’S BULLETIN

From L. RON HUBBARD

Via Hubbard Communications Office
163 Holland Park Avenue, London W.11

_____________________________________________________________________

18 March 1955

OPENING PROCEDURE BY DUPLICATION


Numbered R2—17 in The Creation of Human Ability and the mimeo edition of this, The Auditor’s Handbook, available from the HASI in Phoenix, Opening Procedure by Duplication has been doing things to cases hitherto untouched by extensive and intricate auditing.

Because this process is very arduous to run on people below boredom on the tone scale, and because it has very often been used on people on whom it should not be used, it was early called “Dirty 30.” Actually, “Dirty 30” is Procedure 30, which encompassed what is now R2—17 and two other steps.

Ranting and raving has gone on in various locales because of Opening Procedure by Duplication. It has been branded as a hypnotic technique. The fact of the matter is, it runs out hypnosis and in the process of running it the restimulation of hypnotism is sufficiently marked to make an auditor and a preclear believe that hypnotism is taking place. However, Opening Procedure by Duplication continued on past this point runs on out the hypnotism.

Before one does Opening Procedure by Duplication one should have done the earlier steps of the six processes, which are: Two-Way Communication, Elementary Straight Wire, and Opening Procedure of 8-C. Only when these are thoroughly accomplished should one attempt Opening Procedure by Duplication. Furthermore, it is a very good thing for an auditor to have had Opening Procedure by Duplication run on him before he tries to run it on preclears, for the technique is very difficult upon an auditor who, himself, cannot duplicate.

Inability to duplicate is also inability to be cause, and inability to be effect. The reason one has an engram bank is because “it mustn’t happen again,” or “it must happen again.” In order to make sure that something does not happen again, one has a picture of it which he considers necessary to prevent him from duplicating the action. The existence of a picture, of course, will eventually make him follow the action and follow the dictates of the picture. Thus we get the action of an engram and restimulation.

The minimum time to run Opening Procedure by Duplication (R2—17) would be two-and-a-half hours. There is no sense in running the process twenty minutes, for it may well happen that the preclear can bear up for a little while, only to bog thoroughly on the process.

Run on people who are below boredom on the tone scale, the auditor may experience the preclear’s bolting from the session.



Copyright (©) 1955 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.

When Opening Procedure by Duplication is being run, it is common for the preclear, by comments and reactions, to dramatize the Know to Mystery Scale. The Know to Mystery Scale, of course, is a very long, tall scale, but any section of this scale has in it the various levels of Know to Mystery. Thus, one can see a preclear going up from Mystery through Sex, through Eating, through Effort, through Emotion, through Looking, to Knowing, then going through a different, higher harmonic of Mystery, then Sex, then Eating, and so forth. The auditor may not see him go through all of the grades on the Know to Mystery Scale in order, but will see him spotting one after another of the levels of this scale. The preclear will make such comments as “Looks good enough to eat,” “There’s a lot of work connected with this,” “It’s a mystery to me.” Going up the Mystery to Know Scale, one of course crosses the Emotional Scale, which was described and witnessed in Dianetics: The Modern Science of Mental Health, but this Emotional Scale is, of course, a part of the Know to Mystery Scale.

In Great Britain, where auditors have used for the two objects required a book and a bottle, the process is called “Book and Bottle.” These two objects are a very good choice for working the process. A book, for instance, is placed in one part of a room, and a bottle is placed in another part of a room, far enough apart so that a preclear will have to walk between them. The auditor then sends him back and forth from one to the other, using for each item a stereotyped series of questions, which actually, themselves, never vary. Because these questions never vary, the auditor is apt to forget that he must maintain a two-way communication with the preclear. The auditor is not doing Opening Procedure by Duplication, the preclear is doing Opening Procedure by Duplication. When the preclear talks and asks questions and when he volunteers information, the auditor, of course, must answer him. There must be a discussion of some sort from time to time, and the auditor who is not content with the fact that the preclear has actually looked at it should, of course, insist that the preclear look at the object, or that he weigh it more carefully. However, one can err very easily in the direction of varying the process. Remember that no matter how much talking goes on, the basic process is the same. And the order of the commands, and the commands themselves, are all exactly the same.

To quote R2—17 from The Creation of Human Ability, which is the printed edition of The Auditor’s Handbook:

R2—17: Opening Procedure by Duplication is begun only after the preclear has some reality on his environment. Until the preclear’s reality on his environment is good, Opening Procedure by Duplication should not be done, for the preclear only turns on an unreality circuit and goes through it mechanically. The first part of Opening Procedure by Duplication is to get the preclear to examine, communicate with and own (somewhat on the order of Opening Procedure of 8-C) two dissimilar objects. These objects are then placed several feet apart and at a level so that the preclear can pick them up without bending over, but so that he has to walk between them. Once the auditor is entirely satisfied that the preclear has reality on these objects and can own them he then begins Opening Procedure by Duplication with the following commands, supposing that one of the objects was a book and the other was an ash tray, “Go over to the book.” “Look at it.” “Pick it up.” “What is its color?” At this point the preclear must give an answer. “What is its temperature?” Here the preclear must answer again. “What is its weight?” Here again the preclear must answer. “Put it down in exactly the same place.” When the preclear has executed, “Go over to the ash tray.” “Look at it.” “Pick it up.” “What is its color?” The preclear says an answer. “What is its temperature?” The preclear says his answer. “What is its weight?” The preclear says his answer. “Put it down exactly in the same place.” When the preclear has executed, “Go over to the book,” and the same words and the same formula are used over and over again until the preclear has had a sufficient number of hours of Opening Procedure by Duplication to enable him to do it without communication lag, without protest, without apathy, but only cheerfulness, each time seeing the items

newly. This is a process which is done by the hour. The process is better when done consecutively for so many hours rather than done an hour apiece each day for several days. This procedure is the first step of Procedure 30.





* 5503C21 DEMO Auditing Demo—LRH
* 5503C21 DEMO Auditing Demo—LRH
* 5503C22 DEMO Auditing Demo—LRH
* 5503C22 DEMO Auditing Demo—LRH
* 5503C23 DEMO Auditing Demo—LRH
* 5503C23 DEMO Auditing Demo—LRH
** 5503C23 PLPS-7&8 Scientology: A Technical Subject—Communication Lag,
Principal Kinds Found in a Pc
* 5503C24 DEMO Auditing Demo—LRH
* 5503C24 DEMO Auditing Demo—LRH
* 5503C25 DEMO Auditing Demo—LRH
* 5503C25 DEMO Auditing Demo—LRH
** 5503C26 HPC-2 Axiom 51
* 5503C28 DEMO LRH Auditing Demo
* 5503C28 DEMO LRH Auditing Demo
* 5503C29 DEMO Afternoon Auditing Demo
* 5503C29 DEMO Afternoon Auditing Demo
** 5503C30 PLPS-9 Conquered Territory (a summary of the achievements
and directions of Scientology)
* 5503C30 PPS Group Processing
* 5503C30 PLPS- 10 Session: “Making Things Real and Unreal”

THE WAY RON WORKS


Many people have questioned me regarding Ron’s research and investigation into the human mind. The funny thing is that the majority of the hundreds of research cases on whom he worked to give us the principles for building a better world were never aware of who he was or what he was doing. They had never heard of Dianetics or Scientology. All they knew or were aware of was that they felt better, their bad eyesight or maybe the limp in a once injured leg was gone.

Wherever we have been it has always been the same—in England, Belgium, France, Germany, Spain, or here in our United States—rich or poor, young or old, diseased or insane, there has always been the hidden man, woman and child behind the scenes who were helped and who, but did they know it, were contributing to the furtherance of a science. To me, the most important foundation upon which Dianetics and Scientology is built was stated in the First Book—that is, “Man is basically good.” I know of no one who believes this as strongly as Ron does. It is my feeling that this alone in times of contemptuous press, financial difficulties, the betrayal of friends—times when it seemed that all he had built was crumbling to pieces, kept him going, kept him persisting to his goal of helping MAN.

In Phoenix after the fall of Wichita, a producer with whom Ron had worked in Hollywood came to see us at our small apartment. He was offering Ron what would seem to the ordinary man like ice cream and cake for eternity. After picturing this dream in the clouds, he said to Ron, “Now, really, do you think this Dianetics, this research of yours, is worth it?” Ron sat for a very long time—silent, his eyes closed. Finally after what had seemed like hours he opened his eyes, and said, “Yes! Yes I do.” After his producer friend left, I asked him why he had taken so long to answer. He replied, “I was watching pass before me a parade of all the people I had helped, their expression one of hope and faith in the goodness of the future. Nothing can be worth more to me than that.”

And that’s the way he is. His belief in the innate goodness of Man, in being able to bring this and Man’s abilities to the fore continues him in his research. It enables him to communicate to anyone despite their physical disability to do so, or any language barrier.

His preclears are all over the world. The time he has spent processing is too vast to enumerate. Even he does not know the hours; he works and there is no time to him. This used to be very disconcerting to me. I remember one time in Spain, I had spent the whole morning shopping in the market and the whole afternoon preparing dinner on one oil burner and a charcoal fire. This was a difficult process for one used to supermarkets and a gas range. Ron had gone to the park. Dinner time passed. The food got soupy from reheating and the charcoal supply got nil. My patience wilted and I went to the park. I found him sitting at a sidewalk cafe, a middle-aged Spaniard with him. He motioned me to sit down and be silent. He was processing. The fellow had been in the Russian army, had fought in the battle of Stalingrad and then had been forced into servitude in Siberia. His legs had been so badly frozen that they would not bend at the joints. This peglegged walk was to carry him through life and to deny him work because of his slowness. After Ron had finished, we invited him home to dinner. He walked naturally again. His realization of what had happened to him did not come until he walked to the door to leave. He suddenly stopped and began shouting, “I walk—I walk. “

There are many such people and many more—you in the field have not been idle either these five years. Maybe someday we can realize Ron’s Project. Very few know about it, but someday he hopes to have every auditor in the field “who is worth his stuff as an auditor” on the HASI payroll. They would be given some person—someone in high government position, someone in the arts, someone in religion—people who are in the public eye and who supply thousands morale in the forms of good public works, books, paintings, humor, spiritual aid, to bird-dog until they submitted to processing. These auditors could then simply process and promote without depending upon public approval or financial support which is dependent upon public approval. Maybe someday we can accomplish this. It is a goal worth working toward. We, too, will have a better world someday.

It is Ron’s dream and yours and mine.

MARY SUE HUBBARD
from Ability Minor 3, ca. early April 1955

P.A.B. No. 49
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR’S BULLETIN

From L. RON HUBBARD

Via Hubbard Communications Office
163 Holland Park Avenue, London W.11

_____________________________________________________________________

1 April 1955

THE REMEDY OF HAVINGNESS


There is a great deal of upper-echelon theory connected with the Remedy of Havingness as a process, for here we are dealing with energy and the reasons and operations of a thetan in regard to it.

Just why a thetan should get himself so completely snarled up in energy might be an entire mystery to anyone who did not realize that a thetan has to cut down his knowingness and his total presence in order to have a game. The awareness of awareness unit builds space to cut down knowingness. Space makes it necessary, then, to look at something in order to know about it. The next thing a thetan does to cut down his knowingness is to create energy and to pass it to other thetans and to bring in the energy of other thetans so as to get a duration and a time span. If the thetan is successful and obtains a game in this wise, he continues on with this modus operandi of having a game, and when he does not have a game he simply cuts his knowingness down once more. Of course, he reaches a point eventually where he does not get a game simply by cutting down his knowingness, and eventually assumes a fairly fixed, stupid, aspect. He is below the level of having games, but because he has cut down his knowingness he does not know, now, that he is below the level of having games and thinks that all that is necessary to get another game is to further cut down his knowingness. He is by this time obsessively dramatizing the lowering of knowingness.

When one speaks of knowingness, one should realize that one is speaking of an embracive thing. Everything on the Know to Mystery Scale is simply a greater condensation or reduction of knowingness. At first one simply knows. Then he makes some space and some energy, and so now he has knowingness in terms of looking. By changing the position of the particles of energy thus created, and by exchanging particles with others, extant or self-created, the thetan cuts down his knowingness further, and gets time, and so gets emotion and sensation. When these become solid, he has effort particles and masses. Now, he could cut down his knowingness further by refusing to use emotion and effort, but by thinking about them thus introducing new VIAs into his line of knowingness. And, when he no longer knows entirely by thinking, he ceases to create knowingness and begins to eat, and from eating he drops into the ready-made sensation of sex instead of knowing what happens in the future. And from here he drops down into postulated mystery as something one cannot possibly know about. In other words, one gets a continued reduction of knowingness in order to have games. The greatest chess player in the world has no game, since he can predict that he will win and predict everything that opponents will do, so he will simply demonstrate how to play chess. Sooner or later, he will announce that he is “burned out” or has lost his knack for playing chess, and will go off into some other field where he can have a game. The field he will choose will be a less wisdom-demanding field than playing chess. A boxer, such as some of the very great ones of the past, will reduce his timing, which is to say his knowingness of arrival, to a point where he can at least put on a


Copyright (©) 1955 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.

good exhibition, and from this they will further reduce their knowingness, and then not noticing how far they have gone, get themselves thoroughly and consistently beaten. There will be a period, however, when they are fairly evenly matched against their opponents.

To understand this with any thoroughness, one would have to recognize the intention back of all communication. Creation, Survival, and Destruction is knowingness. When somebody talks to you his intention is to continue in a parity where he can have an interchange of communication, which is to say a game. He takes knowingness from you, and gives knowingness to you, with one form of communication or another. Two soldiers fighting and shooting at each other are using a bullet to make the other man know. What is there to know in this situation? That one is dead, of course, and for the victor, that one has won.

It is dangerous, alike, to a thetan, to have too many wins or too many losses. Give him too many wins, and he will correct in the direction of reducing his knowingness as represented by his dexterity, his prediction, his activity. Give him too many losses and he will seek another game, even to the point where he will die and pick up another body. Because the decision is on the basis of knowingness, the decision is always downward. One does not decide upward toward greater knowingness, actually, unless one has the full and complete intention of winning in a new game. If one discovers that there are no wins or losses either to be found in this new game, one will reduce one’s own knowingness, even to the point of forgetting all of his knowledge concerning it, in order to ensure a game.

As there is not an infinity of games in progress, one is apt, as he comes down seventy-four trillion years of track, to play out the available games and to put them in the category of “it must not happen again.” One then becomes bored. One is only bored when there is no game possible, from his viewpoint. Actually, all he has to do is become enthusiastic about the game on his own consideration and he will begin to know more about it again.

A thetan considers that some form or mass is necessary in order to have a game. He gets into the belief that he cannot create new masses, and so he begins to hold on to old masses, and here, whether he is exteriorized or in a body, we find him holding on hard to old facsimiles, old significances, old decisions, rather than taking on new decisions.

The Remedy of Havingness directly addresses the problems of giving the thetan something “to play with.” When he discovers that he can have new masses, he will begin to let go of old masses. It is an easily observed phenomenon while having a preclear Remedy Havingness, that old engrams go into restimulation, go into restimulation and run out, that they show up in front of his face and suddenly explode or disappear. The Remedy of Havingness actively does run out engrams.

This process is used from boredom up to conservatism for its best results.

This process is done by asking the preclear to mock up something and pull it in, or mock up something and throw it away. When a thetan is exteriorized, if you want to see him get very unhappy, make him change space until he begins to lose all the energy he is holding on to, and then fail to remedy his havingness. The thetan will become convinced that he is only a thought, and is therefore, by his standards, unable to have a game. Tell him to mock up eight anchor points in the form of the corners of a cube around him and pull them in upon himself. Ask him to do it several more times, and he immediately brightens up and becomes very happy. Why is this? You have reassured him that he can have a game.

The cutting down of knowingness and the Remedy of Havingness have opposite vectors. The Remedy of Havingness will knock out old energy masses the thetan is

holding on to, or that the body is holding on to, which tell the thetan he is stupid. The supplanting of these by new energy masses which do not have the postulate of cutdown knowingness in them of course makes the thetan brighter.

When you find a theory detached from a process and not demonstrating itself in a process, there must be something wrong with the theory. Similarly, if what I say here about condensed knowingness being all other things, and the cut-down of knowingness, were not demonstrated in the process of Remedy of Havingness, then we would have to get ourselves a new theory. However, this is demonstrated very definitely. Those people who cannot remedy havingness, wherever they are on the tone scale, can be brought to a point where they will remedy havingness simply by asking them what they wouldn’t mind knowing. The consideration of what they are willing to know then begins to rise.

If you only could see a Black Five operate you would see that his barriers are all erected toward knowing something. Of course he is very afraid of being told something bad, and so doesn’t want to be told anything at all, and when the auditor gives him a command he never receives the command as given, but does something else. He has a block up against knowingness to such a degree that he will eventually permit himself to be pressed into complete inactive stupidity. What are those black screens for? Basically to keep him from knowing. Knowing what? Then one will have to look closely at the definition of a datum. A datum is an invention which has become agreed upon and so solidified. In other words, a datum is to some degree a solidity, even if it is merely a symbol. To get into this state it has to be agreed upon. When it is thoroughly agreed upon it becomes, then, a truth. It is not at all a truth. It is an invention. What made it sure or what made it real was the fact that it was agreed upon. This opens the doors further to other processes.

In order to get the preclear in good condition we would have to put him into some kind of a condition so that he could create. The first thing he is liable to be able to create in auditing is a lie. The word “lie” is simply “invention with a bad connotation.” Society gives invention that connotation because of its anxiety to have a game and to agree, and so be able to communicate with one another.

Thus society frowns upon the invention of facts, yet the preclear’s sanity and continued happiness absolutely depend upon his ability to create new facts. The technique which remedies this is included in “The Creation of Sanity,” number R2-29: “Start Lying.” One can vary this auditing command with “Tell me some lies about your past,” and then keep the preclear at it long enough so that the preclear is able to come out of the complete blur which will follow on the heels of his taking over the function of and running of his memory machines. The invention of data is a step immediately toward the remedy of havingness. Simply asking the preclear what he wouldn’t mind knowing, what he wouldn’t mind having other people knowing about him will bring him into a condition where he can mock up and remedy havingness.

The Remedy of Havingness is the companion process to Spotting Spots, which will be taken up in the next PAB. The Remedy of Havingness, simply as a process by itself, if worked up to by getting the preclear willing to know things, and willing for other people to know things, and run thoroughly so that whole avalanches of masses can pour into him or pour out of him, will actually run out an entire engram bank, and thus is an extremely valuable process.

It has been reported by several auditors that exteriorization was accomplished on preclears by making them remedy havingness and do nothing else for eight or ten hours.

The auditing commands for the Remedy of Havingness are: “Mock up something,” “Pull it in,” until the preclear is doing this easily. Then, “Mock up something,”

“Throw it away,” until the preclear can do this easily. The significance of the object may be added by the auditor with “Pull in an ideal body,” or some such thing, but the actual fact is that the actual significance does nothing for the preclear. It is the mass which counts. The auditor can have the preclear pull things in two at a time, six at a time. He can have the preclear mock up something, copy it a dozen times, one time after another, then pull in the whole mass, but the real reason he is doing this with the preclear should never drop from sight. The auditor is remedying havingness in order to give the preclear enough mass to permit him to discard old masses which he is holding on to and doesn’t know anything about.

[The above was reissued as HCO B 5 May 1972R, Revised 17 January 1973, The Remedy of Havingness. ]




* 5504C01 DEMO LRH Auditing Demo
* 5504C01 DEMO LRH Auditing Demo
* 5504C01 SAC-1 1st Hour Staff Auditors’ Conference Series
** 5504C02 PLPS The Second Dynamic
** 5504C02 HPC-3 Axiom 51 in Action (The creation and uncreation of
energy and masses by postulate; Knowingness; and
Communication)
* 5504C04 SAC-2 Scale of Awareness [see page 191]
* 5504C04 DEMO LRH Auditing Demo
* 5504C06 PLPS-11 On the Second Dynamic
* 5504C06 PLPS-12 Session: “What Could You Say To .....?”
* 5504C07 DEMO LRH Auditing Demo
5504C08 CONF Staff Auditor Conference—Peggy’s Report and
Ron’s Comments
** 5504C09 HPC-4 Consequences and a New Understanding of the Six
Basic Processes (how to discover with precision and
raise the reality level of the preclear)
** 5504C13 PLPS-14 The Eight Dynamics
* 5504C13 PLPS-15 Session: Find Present Time

P.A.B. No. 50
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR’S BULLETIN


From L. RON HUBBARD

Via Hubbard Communications Office
163 Holland Park Avenue, London W.11

_____________________________________________________________________

15 April 1955

REMEDY OF HAVINGNESS—THE PROCESS


“When in doubt, remedy havingness.”

This is a motto which can well be followed by an auditor doing any process on any preclear.

But, if there is a process which one should do with any other process, then that process should be understood thoroughly, for if done incorrectly it would be likely to produce confusion into all the other processes of Dianetics and Scientology.

Therefore, in the first place, let us examine with rigor the name of this process. It is REMEDY OF HAVINGNESS. By “remedy” one means the correction of any aberrated condition. By “havingness” one means mass or objects. The process could also be called “Remedy of Un-Havingness.” It could also be called “Remedy of Acceptingness.” It could also be called “Remedy of Rejectingness.”

To those people who are deficient in havingness, the process is liable to mean that the auditor should increase the havingness of the preclear. Such an auditor with this misunderstanding would have the preclear put up large masses and push them into his body or himself. The auditor would neglect having the preclear throw away objects and masses.

If the auditor misunderstood the process and simply assumed that it had something to do with havingness, and if his own havingness were too great, he would be likely to specialize on all preclears by having the preclear throw things away.

Actually, the auditor should have the preclear push things into himself and his body and throw things away from himself and his body until the preclear can do both with equal ease. When this has been accomplished the preclear’s havingness has been “remedied.”

What, then, does a Remedy of Havingness mean? It means the remedy of a preclear’s native ability to acquire things at will and reject them at will. Amongst the havingnesses which would require remedy would be an obsessive inflow of money, sexual objects, troubles, somatics, and difficulties in general. Whenever one of these appeared in the preclear’s environment it would have a tendency to inflow on the preclear. The reverse difficulty would be an obsessive outflow, whereby the preclear threw away or wasted anything which he had, such as money, clothes, cars, or living quarters. When the process “Remedy of Havingness” has been done thoroughly and completely, the preclear should be able to reject or accept, at his own discretion, anything in his environment as well as anything in his engram bank.



Copyright (©) 1955 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.

The earliest use of this process is to be found in GITA, which is to say “Give and Take Processing,” one of the early SOPs which became an SOP-8 “Expanded GITA.” In Issue 16-G of the Journal of Scientology we have a long list of key items. The preclear was asked to waste, accept, and desire these items at will. This was the Desire-Enforcement-Inhibit Scale, or the DEI Scale. This process is the immediate ancestor of the Remedy of Havingness. Indeed, one could do far worse than to take the DEI Expanded GITA list as given in Issue 16-G, and in the form of mock-ups use it as such upon the preclear, or more modernly employ it directly on the Remedy of Havingness on these objects.

If one were to employ such a list in the Remedy of Havingness, one would, of course, have to employ gradient scales. The use of the gradient scale has never been discarded, and the concept and principle of doing things by gradient scales is inherent in auditing itself, for one starts with a process which the preclear can do, and gives him some wins, and on a gradual scale gives him larger and larger wins until he is cleared. Similarly, in remedying havingness, the preclear must be started at the lowest end of the scale and advanced on up to the higher end of the scale. Quantity is one of the methods of doing this. At first one can ask a preclear to mock up one of an item and shove it into his body or throw it away, and then go, finally, when he is doing that well, to two items, three, four, five, and six, all the same, but a greater quantity of the item. An even lower gradient on this scale would be to simply get the idea that something was there, and to progress on forward with the idea into the actual mass. An expert auditor working with this from the idea on through to the object would discover that he had no preclears who could not mock up.

He would have the preclear get the idea out in front of him of a ball, and get the idea of the ball being thrown away; get the idea of a ball up in front of him and get the idea of a ball coming in; he would then, when the preclear could do this excellently well, move forward into the actual mock-up of a ball. The mock-up would get better and better as the process progressed, until at last the preclear could mock up and throw away or push into his body at will, a ball. He could see this ball, he could even feel it, and its weight.

Now you may get the idea occasionally that these PABs are mostly, at least in this series, handling old material. This is not the case. Every time one of these PABs is written I put into it everything that is known up to the date that it is written, and this PAB is no exception. And, let me tell you, this is a very lucky PAB for you because Remedy of Havingness, by a slight change I made some weeks ago, has become a key exteriorization process. So, we have Remedy of Havingness for Exteriorization as a newer process than the old Remedy of Havingness.

Exteriorization Remedy of Havingness, or Exteriorization by Remedy of Havingness, is accomplished by having the preclear SHOVE or PUSH things into his body. One no longer has the preclear PULL things into his body. Simply by having the preclear mock up things and shove them into his body, mock up things and throw them away, mock up things and shove them into his body, mock up things and throw them away, a preclear who has already been run on the earlier steps of the six basic processes will, at this stage, exteriorize quite neatly after as little as fifteen or twenty minutes of the process. If he does not, then the earlier processes have been skimped and the preclear was really not ready for a full, forthright remedy of havingness.

Even when doing Route I, the preclear is told to push things into himself. This will rather take his flitter away for a moment, for he is there being one viewpoint, and in order to push something into himself he has to be a second viewpoint. In view of the fact that a thetan gets in trouble by being only one viewpoint, this remedies the viewpoint scarcity of the thetan, and he pushes himself up into two viewpoints with great rapidity. Thus we are doing duplication of the thetan at the same time that we

are remedying havingness, so one even has the thetan shove things into himself, rather than pull things into himself.

In short, one never has anyone pull things into his body any more. One has a person push things into his body. One has him, for instance, mock up a planet, and push it into the body; mock up a planet and throw it away; mock up a planet and push it into his body; mock up a planet and throw it away; mock up a planet and push it into his body, and then one says, “Where are you pushing it in from?” The preclear says, “Out here in front of the body.” The auditor simply goes on doing the process and very shortly the preclear will, if the earlier steps have been done well, which is to say the Six Basic Processes below Remedy of Havingness, the preclear will be neatly exteriorized and will be ready for Route 1.

One would omit, in such an instance, running Spotting Spots as such, for Change of Space Processing and Communication Processing have a great deal to do with spotting spots already.

If you were to do Remedy of Havingness forthrightly and all-out, and you were to accept this as the only process we had, we would work with its cousin process, R2—63 as given in The Creation of Human Ability, “Accept-Reject.” One would ask the preclear for things he could accept, one after the other, until the communication lag was flat, and then would ask the preclear for things he could reject, one after the other, until the communication lag was flat on that. One would then move into the Expanded GITA list and would have the preclear mock up and shove into his body (if interiorized) or into himself (if exteriorized) the various items on the Expanded GITA list as given in Issue 16-G of the Journal of Scientology. This would be a long process, and not entirely successful on all counts, but would nevertheless be a very effective and efficient process from the standpoint of gains. One would certainly get the preclear over a very large number of aberrations and would do a great deal for him. However, this is not the advised way of handling this process, for the process itself is not an end-all. Aberrations can be handled much more easily by communication processing as will be given in a later PAB.

The exact use and commands of Remedy of Havingness in ordinary and routine auditing are simple and effective. One has been asking a preclear a great many questions which “as-ised” large masses of energy. One, in handling Change of Space or interiorization and exteriorization into objects while the preclear is exteriorized, has been “burning up” a great deal of energy. Any time the preclear begins to feel dopey or “boil off” he has either run too long on a flow in one direction, in which case reverse the flow, or he has simply reduced his havingness down to a point where he feels tired or sleepy. Without waiting for this manifestation to occur the good auditor simply in the course of Straight Wire or Description Processing, or many other processes, such as those contained in Route 1, remedies havingness. Having achieved something like a momentarily flat comm lag on a process, the auditor says to the preclear, “Mock up a mass out in front of you.” When the preclear has done this, the auditor says, “Shove it into your body.” When the preclear has done so, the auditor says, “Mock up another mass out in front of you.” And when the preclear has done so, the auditor says, “Throw it away.” That, as given, is for preclears who are interiorized. It is simply repeated over and over. The mass is not specified. It can be almost anything, and in fact it does not much matter what type of significance the mass has. Any mass is better than no mass, according to the thetan.

If the preclear is exteriorized, the auditor already starts him on the Remedy of Havingness in the Route I step where the preclear is asked to copy what he is looking at (R1—5). When one is doing R1—5, one must be very careful to obey the gradient scale principle behind Remedy of Havingness. He would not make the preclear make twenty copies and then push them all into himself or the body. He would make the

preclear make two or three copies and push them in one at a time until the preclear could remedy his havingness with ease. The auditor would then have the preclear “Mock up a mass and shove it into yourself,” and then “Mock up a mass and throw it away,” and do this back and forth until the preclear could do this easily and well, at which time the auditor would tell the preclear, “Mock up two masses and shove them into yourself,” and then “Mock up two masses and throw them away,” until finally the auditor has the preclear mock up eight masses as though they were the corners of a cube around the preclear and “Shove them into yourself,” and then “Mock up eight masses and throw them away.”

One must remember that in spite of the fact that he cannot duplicate mass actually as himself, having no space or mass, natively, the motto of the thetan is “anything is better than nothing.” When you tear up a lot of facsimiles for a thetan and throw them away, he becomes very unhappy unless you have him reconstruct those facsimiles or remedy the mass he has lost accordingly. When you are having a thetan go into and out of MEST universe masses, a certain amount of energy is burned up, and after the thetan has been run for a short time on this step (R1—9 in The Creation of Human Ability), you must be particularly careful to remedy his havingness with eight masses shoved into himself and eight masses thrown away several times. A thetan who has been run a great deal without Remedy of Havingness comes to what is to him a horrible thought: “I am just a concept,” and will sag in tone. He does not come to this state as long as havingness is consistently remedied.

It may be, as you look at Scientology, that you’ve come to the opinion, watching Remedy of Havingness work, that all there is to anything is the Remedy of Havingness, that it is all based on the Remedy of Havingness. If you have a preclear shove enough havingness into his body he will exteriorize in most cases. If you remedy enough havingness while he is chasing around the universe, as in the Grand Tour, he will discover and as-is a great many communication lines which otherwise might be very detrimental. However, it is not true that havingness is the entire key to the human mind. Havingness is the “gimmick” or “weenie” for which the game is played, and having something is very like winning. However, above havingness there is doingness, and above doingness there is beingness, and above beingness there is communicatingness, and above communicatingness there is knowingness, and above knowingness there is postulatingness, and so we see we have a long way to go above havingness in order to get to the top activity of a thetan, which is making postulates, or unmaking them. You could, of course, rationalize each and every action of the thetan with regard to havingness. You could even extend havingness to space, although it normally refers to objects. You could do all manner of interesting things with havingness. You could get as specific and as significant as you like, or as un-significant as you like, and still find Remedy of Havingness working, but we do not have here in Remedy of Havingness the total clue, the total key. But we do have a process and an item which must not be overlooked in auditing.

In the Six Basic Processes the Remedy of Havingness comes after the Opening Procedure by Duplication as a process, itself, but remember that Remedy of Havingness is done and can be done at any time during any of the processes as long as the preclear is even vaguely in communication with the auditor. It does not matter how vague the mass is that the preclear is using to remedy his havingness. Here is a place where certainty is not necessary. An unreal, vague, or flimsy mass, if this is all the preclear can get, will still remedy his havingness. A case comes to mind out of the Advanced Clinical Course where a student was unwilling, after his second day, to continue his studies. He did not believe that he could stand the “hammer and pound,” as he put it, of the terrifically intense schedule. I took him into my office, asked him what he was doing in life, and he replied to me that he was a machinist. Also, it seemed to turn out that he had had something to do with a ship which had sunk under him, although his recollection of this was very unclear. I asked him what kind of a machine

he had customarily run, and he told me. Then I had him mock up this machine, and remedy his havingness with it. Then I had him mock up the ship and remedy his havingness with that, just as given above. I did this for about fifteen minutes, and enough change occurred in his case to entirely return his confidence in his ability to stand up to the course and to audit. Yet the mock-ups he was getting were so thin that he could barely vaguely discern them at all.

Mock-ups get unreal because the thetan is not-ising existence. He is trying to destroy masses by saying that they do not exist, that they are not real. He is so bent upon this system of destruction that he is making everything unreal or black. One of the cures for this is End of Cycle Processing run in the following fashion: One has the preclear mock himself up dead (no matter how unreal this mock-up is), then have the mock-up waste away to bone, and have the bones waste away to dust, and then have the preclear shove the dust into himself or, alternately, throw it away. One once more has the preclear mock himself up dead, have the mock-up waste away to bone, have the bones waste away to dust, and then have the preclear remedy his havingness with the dust. One continues this for two or three hours with the preclear if one really wishes the case to make a change.

Where a preclear is getting no reality on mock-ups or blackness, he is most commonly stuck in that Para-Scientological thing, that thing horribly abhorred by psychologists who have become Dianeticists, or by people who are just plain scared: a past death. If you wanted to convince somebody that past deaths exist, you would run End of Cycle Processing on them. This is a cousin process to the Remedy of Havingness. One could go a very long distance with this process and have the preclear mock up his mother dead, have her waste away to bones, and remedy havingness with the dust, or do this with the dust, or do this with the father or brothers, or grandparents, with a considerable change in the case.

This End of Cycle Processing, by the way, is a very fine process. It has been with us about a year and it has been successful whenever used. It has a tendency to fall into disuse because it has not until now had an exact place on the Six Basic Processes. But End of Cycle is actually an additional process to the Remedy of Havingness and is an effective way of remedying havingness. Do you remember in the old days the Dianetics “corpse case” who would lie upon the couch with his arms crossed neatly, all ready for a lily, and would always audit in this fashion? The solution to this corpse case is End of Cycle Processing, as given here. The preclear is so fixed in a death that he is trying to make everything unreal, and the only real thing, to him, would be the unreality of death.

In these PABs I have been trying to give you the basic auditing as it is done today in Hubbard Professional College in Phoenix, and in London. It is intensely effective auditing. A recent survey of the staff-audited preclears over a period of two months demonstrated by the most arduous and recognized testing that we had been jumping the IQ of preclears an average of ten points apiece for every twenty-five hours of auditing. Many of them went much higher than this. I, myself, in five hours of auditing, was getting this same result which was being obtained by a staff twenty-five hour intensive. But all that I was using, actually, were the Six Basic Processes. All that staff auditors were using were the Six Basic Processes. Of course, our having the know-how of using Remedy of Havingness and Communication Processing in the midst of these Six Basic Processes, these gains were not necessarily the gains being obtained across the broad field of Scientology. There is actually no substitute for good, thorough, professional training. A professionally trained auditor shows up like a lamp in a lighthouse on a dark night, if only by reason of inspecting his results.

You will find the background of this material contained in Dianetics, 1955! and in the recent hardcover edition of Intensive Procedure which, including now 75

separate processes, is called The Creation of Human Ability. This book is obtained from London directly, or from the HASI in Phoenix. Only the British edition is ready, but we have plenty of these, and if you ordered the book from Phoenix it was filed with a London edition. If you want to write for a London edition you will find that the cost is $5.90, and it will be airmailed to you.

We are discovering that it takes about eight weeks of very intensive training in order to indoctrinate an auditor into an adequate use of these Six Basic Processes. This is done in the HCA, or in London HPA, Course. The course has the additional bonus of getting these processes run on the auditor until he is in pretty good condition, if not cleared. In the upper echelon Phoenix course, which is to say the Graduate Course, all of the various “angles” and alternate uses are taken up. If you are using Scientology or modem Dianetics without professional training you would do very well to have somebody study these processes with you, as given in these recent PABs, and run them on you, just as given, in order for some subjective information concerning them.

Now, another footnote in this PAB. Some last-minute news on these Six Basic Processes is a change from the material given in the PAB on Elementary Straight Wire, and the PAB just before that on Two-Way Communication. In the next PABs [Numbers 57, 58 and 59 written by Jack Parkhouse] we will take up these highly advanced alterations, for the mission of these PABs is to keep you up to date as far as possible.

By the way, I heard from an old HDA recently, via a member of the staff to whom he wrote, and this old HDA complained, “Hubbard does not put out anywhere near enough material to keep us up to date.” A search through the PAB files disclosed that this HDA was not on the PAB mailing list. If an individual is not on the PAB mailing list it is certain he will be convinced that Hubbard isn’t putting out any material. The data which you should have in your kit to know Scientology and auditing and be up to date as of now are: The Creation of Human Ability from London, Dianetics, 1955! from Phoenix, and at least the last ten PABs. With the material which is immediately forthcoming you will be up to date, indeed, if not well into the future, as far as the rest of the human race is concerned.

And by the way, I wish you would write and tell me how you are getting along with these PABs, and how you are getting along with the auditing in general. It just might be that I’d like to know.

L. RON HUBBARD

















[The above PAB was reissued as HCO B 6 May 1972, Remedy of Havingness-The Process, making minor revisions and deleting the fourth paragraph on page 181, the last two paragraphs on page 184, and the text on this page.]

LRH TAPE LECTURES
Phoenix, Arizona
16—29 April 1955


** 5504C16 HPC-5 Service Facsimiles (its handling by modern auditing)
* 5504C18 LECTURE Dianetics and Scientology
* 5504C18 CONF Auditors’ Conference
* 5504C19 CONF Staff Auditors’ Conference
* 5504C19 DEMO LRH Auditing Demo
** 5504C20 PLPS-16 Para-Scientology—or Things That Go Boomp in the Night
* 5504C20 DEMO LRH Auditing Demo
* 5504C20 PLPS-17 Session: Change and No-Change
* 5504C21 DEMO Auditing Session
* 5503C21 CONF Staff Auditors’ Conference
** 5504C23 HPC-6 Thinkingness
** 5504C27 PLPS-18 The Direction of Modern Scientology
** 5504C27A PLPS-19 Grey Dianetics
* 5504C27B PLPS-20 Session: “Something you could say to “
and “Ownership”
** 5504C27C DAS Education on Problems—Who Doesn’t Think You’re
Insane
* 5504C27D DEMO LRH Auditing and Discussion
* 5504C28 DAS Demonstration Auditing—More Education on Ownership
Process
* 5504C28 DAS Demo Auditing—Ownership Part IV
* 5504C29 DAS LRH Discussion and Auditing of Ownership and Control
* 5504C29 DAS LRH Discussion and Auditing of Ownership and Control
Part V I
* 5504C29 SAC 6th Hour Conference

THE CREATION OF HUMAN ABILITY
by L. Ron Hubbard

Published

April 1955

The June 1954 Congress was offered a book free of charge, which they, by attending the Congress, had financed. This book was The Creation of Human Ability, published first in England in April, 1955, and a few weeks later in the United States.

It is basically a much expanded version of the very successful Auditor’s Handbook, updating the Codes, and adding R2—30 to R2—77, the Scientology Axioms, a Summary of Scientology, This is Scientology: The Science of Certainty from Journal of Scientology 16-G and SOP-8-C: The Rehabilitation of the Human Spirit from Journal of Scientology 24-G, as well as a section on Group Processing.

In the months between July, 1954, and April, 1955, L. Ron Hubbard had expanded the processes listed under Route 2 of Intensive Procedure from 29 to 77 (the last two have since been deleted) and further codified the Six Basic Processes. He developed communication processing and published Dianetics ‘55!, which is a companion book to Creation of Human Ability, even though it is quite different.

308 pages, 1 illustration, glossary, hardcover with dust jacket. Available from your nearest Scientology Organization or Mission, or direct from the publishers: Scientology Publications Organization, Jernbanegade 6, 1608 Copenhagen V, Denmark; or Church of Scientology Publications Organization U.S., 2723 West Temple Street, Los Angeles, California, 90026, U.S.A.

P.A.B. No. 51
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR’S BULLETIN

From L. RON HUBBARD

Via Hubbard Communications Office
163 Holland Park Avenue, London W.11

_____________________________________________________________________

29 April 1955

SPOTTING SPOTS


The essentials of this process are contained in R2—18 of Intensive Procedure as given in The Auditor’s Handbook or The Creation of Human Ability.

The goal of the process is to bring the preclear to a point where he can spot locations in space which do not have color, mass or shape, but which are simply locations, and spot that same location repeatedly without variation.

The auditor says, “Spot a spot in the space of this room.” The preclear does so. The auditor ascertains whether or not the spot has color, mass, or whether it is simply a location in space, which is what he wants. The spot should not have color or mass, it should have only location. The preclear is asked to locate several such spots in the room and is asked to walk over and put his finger on them. Spotting Spots markedly decreases havingness, so a Remedy of Havingness is necessary after a very few spots have been spotted in this fashion. The auditor will discover that if the preclear is asked to put his finger on the same spot and take his finger off and put it back on several times, that a preclear in bad condition will locate the spot in various places close to the original spot, but will not locate the original spot again. A preclear must be brought to a point where he will locate the original spot every time. Good two-way communication, as in all processes, is maintained while Spotting Spots is progressing.

When the preclear can adequately locate repeatedly and without upset spots of no mass or color in the room, he is then asked to locate them outside the room.

The ordinary phenomenon is that the preclear has various spots in this universe out of location.

A much more modern method of running Spotting Spots in Space is to locate a spot and say “hello” to it, and have it say “okay” back, and then have the spot say “hello” and have the preclear say “okay” back to it until the spot, itself, is in present time. The auditor can go into this even further, having the preclear sending showers of “hellos” and receiving back showers of “okays” from the spot, and having the spot sending showers of “hellos,” and having the preclear sending showers of “okays” back to the spot. This can be done with any spot, whether significant or not. It can be done to the place where an accident has just occurred. It can be done to the area where the delivery of birth was effected on the preclear’s body. It can be done to his school. It can be done variously and continually.

Grand Tour is the Route 1 or exteriorized version of Spotting Spots. The auditor asks the preclear to be in a spot of a certain description, such as his home town, asks him to be in the auditing room, asks him to be in his home town, asks him to be in the auditing room. This is the modern way of running Grand Tour. The modern way of

Copyright (©)1955 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.

running Grand Tour is when the preclear is asked to be in a spot immediately above his home town, to have the preclear send showers of “hellos” and receive showers of “okays” from the home town, and then when he is asked to be back at the auditing room, to send showers of “hellos” and “okays” at it. In other words, any position, or any motion, in the Grand Tour is accompanied by “hellos” and “okays” on a two-way basis. Naturally, once one has had showers of “hellos” sent to a spot and it has sent back showers of “okays” one must now have the spot send showers of “hellos” to the preclear and he must send showers of “okays” back at it. This will be found to remedy positional difficulties with the preclear as well as time difficulties.

The reason an engram comes into being and expresses itself on a preclear’s body is a lack of communication. The communication has become solid. It expresses itself as an engram, as a facsimile, as a lock, as a secondary. This expression comes about through absence of two-way communication. The moment that one runs two-way communication in upon the process, the spot has a tendency to go back to its original location. This is the phenomenon known as snapping or closing terminals.

It quite often occurs that when the preclear is asked to spot, let us say, London, he actually points in an entirely incorrect position and direction. London is sufficiently disoriented, as far as he is concerned, to cause him to lose it. He may have a picture of London sitting right in front of him, and yet he is being audited in South Africa. He will spot this picture as the location of London. London has snapped terminals upon him or he has snapped terminals upon London. In other words, there is no distance between the spot where he is and where London is. This means that the material on the subject of London is engramic. Lack of mass is one explanation of why the terminal snap occurs. Fear of and resistance to the spot is the actual reason why it closes terminals.

In doing the Grand Tour one will discover, if he sends the preclear between the Empire State Building in New York City and the Washington Monument [in Washington, D.C.], that a preclear who is having difficulty with havingness and locations will at first discover the Empire State Building to be some distance from the Washington Monument, and then will discover that the Empire State Building and the Washington Monument are almost exactly together, and then will discover that they have sprung apart. The auditing command producing this phenomenon is simply: “Be over the Empire State Building. Okay. Be over the Washington Monument. Okay. Be over the Empire State Building. Okay. Be over the Washington Monument. Okay.” In other words, the spots snap together. Actually, the spots themselves are not snapping together. What is snapping together is the facsimiles of the spots. As long as a location is expressing itself in terms of facsimile, one knows immediately two things: that the havingness of the area is low, and there is a lack of communication in existence about this spot. The preclear does not want to communicate about it. One remedies this in the crudest form by having “hellos” sent between himself and the spot. One, by adding the factor of communication to this, would have a process run with the following commands: “Be over the Washington Monument.” When the preclear is there: “Send a shower of ‘hellos’ at it.” “Have it send you a shower of ‘okays.’ “ “Have it send you a shower of ‘hellos.’ “ “Send it a shower of ‘okays.’ “ The auditor, of course, each time the preclear performs any action in any auditing of any kind, acknowledges the fact aloud with an “all right,” or a ‘‘fine,’’ or a “good,” or an “okay,” thus adding to the amount of communication on the subject. Failure of the auditor to do this has a tendency to stick the preclear in the session.



Minor 4 [1955, ca. early May]

The Magazine of
DIANETICS and SCIENTOLOGY
from
Phoenix, Arizona



The Scale of Awareness

L. Ron Hubbard

This article is a transcription of an important preliminary discussion by Ron of his investigations out of which have come very practical advances in the handling of communication and the discovery of the preclear’s level of reality in processing. The talk was given at a Staff Auditor-ACC Conference of April 4, 1955.

. . . I’ll give you a quick rundown on some data which has just materialized here-it’s an experimental scale and this experimental scale is quite interesting. It really is a Scale of Awareness. A scale of awareness would begin at the top with, of course, AWARE OF BEING AWARE. If a person were really aware of being aware it would be sufficient communication for him merely to be aware of the existing environment. If he were simply aware of the existing environment he would feel he was in communication and would feel very good—he wouldn’t have to talk about it. You get that level?
All right now, we drop down from there and it’s easier to describe from the bottom up. On the bottom is COMMUNICATION WITH SELF WITH SIGNIFICANCE. Worry. He can communicate with himself and he can worry. Now that isn’t the exact bottom of the scale, but the next lower level—and that’s UNCONSCIOUSNESS—becomes questionable as a communication level. But nevertheless, it really belongs with this scale. So we look at this and we find out that the guy could be aware of thinking a thought containing much significance, but not expressing it. Immediately below this level, as I say, is unconsciousness, which, of course, goes off the awareness scale and is the reverse of awareness.
But, as we work up from absolute unconsciousness we find UNCONSCIOUSNESS IS THE ONLY THING WHICH EACH HIGHER STEP HAS IN COMMON WITH THE LAST STEP UNTIL WE GET TO TOTAL AWARENESS OF AWARENESS. So each one of these steps is to some degree salted with unconsciousness, and up to the moment when you would get to ABSOLUTE, complete unconsciousness, every one of these steps would have some unconsciousness in it. But, absolute, complete unconsciousness happens to be an absolute. It happens to be unobtainable. Complete unconsciousness is not obtainable. Nobody has ever been or ever will be completely unconscious. And this is a fact, because processes do work out on unconsciousness, so the bottom of the scale would be absolute, complete unconsciousness, but it’s not the bottom of the scale, because that can’t exist.
So we would go up there to lesser and lesser degrees of unconsciousness and greater and greater degrees of consciousness. Now one of the best descriptions around that I have written on this unconsciousness business is Self Analysis. The first few chapters on Self Analysis is a discussion of unconsciousness. And when we consider alertness, we are considering ability. Now, we’ve been talking about this for some time. We consider alertness, then we consider ability. Awareness. If a person is aware of something he normally can control it.

Copyright (©) 1955 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.

All right, we look this over, and we find out that the place for a person to be on the tone scale would be at AWARENESS OF AWARENESS and we find out that he, there, would have sufficient communication just with his environment to stay cleared. Get that? He could stay cleared. But, now let’s start out from this level of complete unconsciousness—let’s go into the first point on the scale which is actually there on the scale. Some small, no matter how small, awareness that he is thinking a thought and communicating with the thought he is thinking. And that level includes the deepest anaesthetic possible, and it includes death. He always has some tiny little spark of awareness there, in spite of the ambition of the medico, the anaesthetist, etc.
He is aware that he is thinking something, no matter whether he thinks that it’s somebody else’s thinking or not. He’s just aware of some thinking.
The next broad level here is COMMUNICATION WITH SIGNIFICANCE. (Of course, in between, thinking a thought and thinking it to himself we get gradients of that, so the individual knows when he is thinking a thought, and knows when he’s not thinking a thought. Naturally that’s part of that same scale.)
The next broad level is this: COMMUNICATION WITH SIGNIFICANCE WITH SOMEBODY ELSE. You know what we mean, “with significance,” it’s got to have a reason, it’s got to have meaning, there has to be an intent. The next big broad scale that’s parked right up above this is SIMPLY COMMUNICATION, WITH INTENT TO COMMUNICATE.
The next broad level up above this simply requires THAT ONE KNOWS OF THE EXISTENCE OF COMMUNICATION.
And the next level above that is simply AWARENESS OF AN ENVIRONMENT AS SUFFICIENT COMMUNICATION.
Now, as we go down from that to the bottom we find out we are more and more fixed and less and less capable of spanning attention. So let’s look at communication between two people as a fixed double-terminal affair. The individual is less aware of his immediate environment. At Communication with Self he’s not aware of his environment out here at all. And so we get the contracting perimeter of the dynamics, which we’ve discussed before. As we go down this Awareness Scale, which is also Communication Scale, we get the individual closer and closer in until—one of the early symptoms of it—he doesn’t think anybody could possibly hear him unless he’s standing with his face right in their face. And the next spot below that is real worry. Now this individual may be across the room. It doesn’t matter. Now let’s add to this, and we get the actual name of this scale. And it is the Scale of Reality. That is the name of the scale. Now this seems strange, if it has to do with awareness and communication, that we call it the Scale of Reality, because it is the scale, a practical scale which is useful in processing.
Now, how is it useful in processing? We’re looking at a preclear that can’t find anything real very easily. We suspect he doesn’t even know he can’t find anything real. You know, it’s just the way the case behaves—it’s kind of spooky. Well, this guy, the realest thing he could do would be to think a thought and know that he thought the thought. That’s the realest thing the guy could do. Now, if you were to graduate him upscale from this, the next thing he could do that would be real to him would be to get the idea of saying something to somebody that has lots of significance to it, and having that person say something to him. Mythical personnel. And that’s their reality. With significance.
Now we go up above this, and we find out that the individual could have something real just by “hello” and “O.K.” And one of the reasons we’re using hello and O.K. is that it is an unreal communication. If a preclear can handle hello and O.K. without balking and consider it a real communication, this preclear is at that band. If he insists that that’s a bad reply—you know, he “really wouldn’t say hello” and then somebody else “wouldn’t say O.K.”—he would go at it possibly on hello’s back and forth, but he would go on it much better with significances. “WHAT COULD YOU SAY TO Pop?” “What could you say to your Mother?” And he’d give you significances. “Now, what could your Mother say to you?”
The funny thing about this is the way this scale was traced out. It’s very interesting. It was traced out by watching the separation of universes, and when these

universes come apart they first come apart as a WORRY, WORRY—then, “Think a thought”—”Think a thought the other fellow would think”—”Think a thought that you would think”—”Think a thought that the other fellow would think,” and all of a sudden the individual differentiates between the kind of things the other universe thinks and the kind of things that his universe thinks. So we get this differentiation.
Our next differentiation up the line would be SOMETHING YOU COULD SAY to that other universe and something it could say to you. And significance, significance, significance, and then I discovered that we had a point in the separation of each one of these universes when hello, hello, hello, with the answer hello was REAL. Perfectly real and acceptable. The preclear was not even vaguely uncomfortable about it. And then hello and O.K.—a perfectly real communication. And then, THE FACT THAT THE PERSON EXISTED was itself communication, and then THE FACT THAT THE UNIVERSE EXISTED AND THE REST OF THE ENVIRONMENT EXISTED, too, was a sufficient cognition without any further processing.
When you start to pull universes apart on the individual, these universes have a tendency to go through that span, and the universes we don’t see are the universes which are totally introverted. An individual is actually BEING his body, you see. He is in his body. He is actually, really being his body, and then his body is being his father’s universe. We could start in by thinking that the most BASIC universe to separate would be father and mother from him, but this isn’t the case at all. It would really be the thetan. So you could separate these other universes, but don’t forget that we have an artificial enclosure of universe with the thetan in the body and here we’re immediately talking about exteriorization, aren’t we?
So you could be almost any one of these universes. You’d find you’d go up on this gradient of reality. At first you could have the preclear think a thought and think a thought and think a thought, you of course making him express a thought, you’re making him communicate with you, but he doesn’t notice that. And think another thought, think another thought. Now, what kind of a thought could this other universe think? Another thought the other universe could think, another thought. When these become at last flat and squared away you’ve got these universes well on the way towards separation and then you can go into communication and separate them. Now, this is not a hard and fast rule because I have to do considerable more experimentation on it. I’m just letting you in on a particular echelon of the spirit. This might not hold true, we might be able to separate them all, all the way up the line, by simply thought, thought, “Think a thought,” “What kind of a thought would the other person think?” “What kind of a thought would you think?”
The way I’ve been doing it with great success has been just: ask the individual what he could then SAY to his father. Now, he has just discovered he can separate out his father’s pattern of thinking from his own pattern of thinking. Now, it’s time to communicate. Now we’ve got a distance, so we get “What could you say to your father?” Well, have him say, “Okay.” “That’s fine. Now, what else could you say to your father?” etc., and then you get this very flat.
In its turn THINKING A THOUGHT itself became flat, THINKING HIS FATHER’S THOUGHTS became flat, and then we got COMMUNICATION WITH SIGNIFICANCE flat and then we got BOTH WAYS flat on that, and then we got to this point where it is ENOUGH FOR HIM TO SAY “HELLO” or have his father say hello. And he says hello and his father says hello; he says hello and his father says hello, and then you could—you don’t have to—move him out of that bracket and have him say hello and his father say O.K. And this is still real, good communication and then he becomes AWARE OF WHERE HIS FATHER IS and at that moment you run into Spotting Spots. Got this? Up to this time all spots are misplaced with connection with this person. But, right about that time the spots start to go into their proper places.
The same phenomenon occurs somewhere in that band of “Hello and O.K. with Pop” if it’s sneaked up on in this fashion as occurred in running 8-D in a limited number of cases, and all of a sudden his universe starts to un-spin and he’s aware of this and aware of that and aware of where his father has been and aware of where he has

been in regard to his father, and he starts to get directionally accurate. DIRECTIONALLY AND DISTANTLY ACCURATE. And up to that time it’s just enough to be aware, as far as his father’s concerned just be AWARE OF EXISTENCE of father and NOT AWARE. That’s enough, that’s a cleared sphere. Now, do you see where we sneak up on something like this?
Well, that’s an interesting scale. It’s a scale of reality. I’ve been working for some time trying to get some way to sneak up on reality.
Now, how does this fit in with the real universe and objects? Well, there’s a little kicker in here. Along about the time of “What could you say to your father?” and “What could your father say to you?” and “What could you say to your mother?” “What could your mother say to you?”—in other words, separating part of these universes—we know that sooner or later we would take up “What could you say to a body?” “What could a body say to you?” We know we will run into that one, but that’s not so real sometimes. We’ve got to get him out of some other universes before we get him out of the body’s universe.
Right about the point where we would pass from that into communication by hello-hello, the individual on an 8-C level can spot unrealities. Isn’t that good. He can spot unreality. Your pc today, Crystal, was just about ready to take a look at the environment. But, he could spot unrealities much faster than he could spot realities. Now, you know what I mean by unreality. Supposing you ran 8-C on unrealities. It’s along about that point you could take up something like this if you wanted to. You’d run 8C— “Spot something unreal in this room,” “Spot something else unreal in this room.” Then the individual would spot a lot of things, the wall behind him might be unreal, or something like that, you see, and he’ll get out to a point where he’ll recognize that his sight line to the horizon is real, but beyond that it’s unreal, and he gets the idea of sort of living on a saucer. It’s a little saucer which goes exactly out to the horizon and no further, and everything beyond that is unreal.
Ask him to spot some unrealities in his environment until it’s real to him. It sneaks up on the preclear after a while because he finds out things are getting LESS AND LESS UNREAL. It’s as-ising unreality.
When we’re graduating a pc up the line it is very easy for the auditor to monitor the pc so that the pc can apparently run the most impossible, complex, the most advanced processes you ever heard of and just stall right there. The pc goes right on running them, “It’s all unreal and it doesn’t matter anyway,” and he just goes on through it and the auditor kind of monitors the preclear in every step and sneeze if we just keep on going. Well, there is where we sometimes come a cropper in auditing. We audit somebody in a rather advanced process and it’s unreal. Now, we’ve just had an experience of this happening. The guy apparently was just going bangity, bangity, bang, and yet it wasn’t real.
Well, it won’t do them any good unless it’s real. This is the way to sneak up, then, on a preclear and make sure it’s real all the way.



LRH TAPE LECTURES
30 April—11 May 1955

* 5504C30 HPC-7 Ownership Processing

** 5505C04 PLPS-21 Cause and Effect and Its Use in Processing

* 5505C04 PLPS-22 Session: Cause and Effect

** 5505C07 HPC-8 Meaningness (the basic formula for happiness—a new
process), Part I

** 5505C07 HCP-9 Meaningness, Part ll, Auditing Tips

* 5505C11 PLPS-23 Operation Manual for the Mind

* 5505C11 PLPS-24 Session: “Enchantment” Processing

** 5505C11 PLPS-25 Lookingness and Cause

P.A.B. No. 52
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR’S BULLETIN

From L. RON HUBBARD

Via Hubbard Communications Office
163 Holland Park Avenue, London W.11

_____________________________________________________________________

13 May 1955

AUDITING THE “WHOLE TRACK”


Let us move into top-echelon Scientology and utilize anything we know from Book One right on up to present time.

One is quite aware of the facsimile phenomenon, the engram phenomenon, and one can use this with Spotting Spots and Communication. (See earlier PABs.) When a preclear has an engram he is out of position with regard to the spot where the incident occurred. There is a very adequate description of this in Book One, centering around the activities and engramic content in the bank of a fish. Now, under Spotting Spots and Communication Processing we can at last handle this. And here come E-Meters back into the picture. The HASI is, at this moment, building a new and better E-Meter than has ever been built before, under the trademarked name of Physio-galvanometer, or O-Meter. It has very little in common with the old type E-Meter. Nevertheless, an old type E-Meter can be utilized.

By asking, as in Electropsychometric Auditing [see Vol. I, page 221], one discovers the length of time back to where the preclear is stuck. It does not matter how far back he discovers the preclear to be stuck. As soon as he ascertains where the preclear is stuck on the whole track, he swings into Spotting Spots and Communication Processing with the following commands. Let us say he has discovered the preclear to be stuck on the Genetic Line as a plankton in the ocean. The auditor says, “Tell me some things you can say to a plankton.” The preclear then says something that he could say to a plankton, although there may be a great deal of comm lag connected with this. As soon as he has made this statement, the auditor says, “Now have the plankton say ‘okay.’ “ The auditor runs this on the preclear using only the plankton until the preclear has no communication lag in giving things he could say to the plankton. As soon as this occurs, the auditor then says, “Give me some things which the plankton could say to you.” The preclear then gets some statement that the plankton could say to him, and the auditor has the preclear say “okay” to that statement. This, then, is run until the communication lag is flat. The auditor can then take up the sea with “What can you say to the sea?” And when the preclear has made some statement as to what he could say to the sea, the auditor has the preclear have the sea say “okay” to the preclear. Then, when this has been run thoroughly, “What could the sea say to you?” asks the auditor. The preclear gives aloud some statement the sea could say to him, and the auditor has the preclear say “okay” to that statement. It will be discovered that the preclear has certain energy masses connected with the sea, the plankton, and that he is out of location, which is to say that these spots, these facsimiles, are not in their original position but are impinged upon the body itself, and as this process is run it will be discovered that the original location tends to assert itself and become stripped of the energy masses connected with it which keep it out of present time. The location will become clean after a while, which is to say the spots are in present time.

Copyright (©) 1955 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.

Now this particular process can be run on anything in any fashion, whether Book One, What to Audit [History of Man ], or Universes.

To run this process on universes it is necessary to select out what universes the preclear is interiorized into. It will be discovered immediately that he was probably interiorized into his father’s or his mother’s universe. One ascertains this by asking the preclear, “Whom do you most resemble in the family?” And after careful questioning of the preclear, establishes that the preclear is thinking the thoughts of, and having the problems of, some member of the family. Then the auditor says, “What could you say to this person?” mentioning the person. And the preclear tells the auditor something he could say to this person. The auditor now has the preclear have that person, more or less located where the person actually is, say “okay” back to the preclear. The preclear, of course, makes the person say this “okay.” When this is flat, the auditor then says, “Now what could that person say to you?” And when the preclear has told the auditor something, the auditor says, “All right, now say ‘okay’ to that person.” Working this back and forth one gets the preclear out of various universes, which is to say out of coincidence with various spots where he has interiorized into another universe.

The whole problem of interiorization is a problem of coinciding spots which do not actually coincide. According to the preclear and the body, the place where he had an automobile accident yesterday is right here with him today. It’s not down on the comer. The trick is to get that spot clean and into present time, and at its proper distance from the preclear.

Naturally, the process could be extended to exteriorizing the preclear out of this universe, and should be, but remember this is probably not feasible until a great many incidents have been run with the preclear brought into present time. Practically any and every psychosomatic illness there is is represented by and caused by a facsimile on the whole track which is in suspension, with its location out of location as far as the preclear is concerned.

So we are running engrams again. So we are using a mechanical aid in order to establish this. The reason we are doing this is because the preclear does not get out of a body which is so out of position that the preclear doesn’t really know where he is. The body has birth in restimulation, has some whole track incidents in restimulation, and the preclear, being used to taking his data from the body, does not know where he is. Getting the body into present time, more or less, will permit the preclear to exteriorize. Further, cases which have not exteriorized easily in the past, or which have not stayed exteriorized, can be made stable by the use of this communication process in conjunction with Spotting Spots.

One does not have to pay too much attention to the Remedy of Havingness while he is running this type of process. It is an oddity that two-way communication applied to a mass will as-is the mass without particularly depleting the havingness of the preclear. The reason he had the mass in the first place, evidently, was to have something to talk about. He is being permitted to talk about it, over it, and through it, and so is ending the cycle of why he would have that mass. In actual practice, very little Remedy of Havingness is necessary when running this type of Communication Processing as given in the above paragraph. However, there is a tendency on the part of most preclears to “chew around” or change the direction or position of the energy masses which they are handling, and when this is the case there is a certain loss of havingness by reason of heat and friction. Thus, a Remedy of Havingness sooner or later is actually used, even though Communication Processing itself does not materially reduce havingness.

It is very astonishing to find ourselves at this late date suddenly scooping back and encompassing a tremendous amount of data which we thought had been passed

over and forgotten. It is startling to discover that everything we know about engrams, facsimiles, secondaries, the whole track, of the interiorization of the various types of traps, of adventures and misadventures of the thetan, without number, are all of use suddenly and forcefully to the auditor.

As a case history, an individual who has been run for some five hundred hours by various good auditors, and who is reputedly one of the toughest cases ever seen in Scientology, had his case broken completely a few days ago by the use of Spotting Spots and Communication in combination, as given. The individual was stuck in a certain present lifetime area. He was not so much stuck in one incident as he was stuck in all the incidents which took place between his eighteenth and twenty-second year. Everything and anything in that area was engramic and it was totally in restimulation, with all of its spots out of position and surrounding the preclear. One was then not auditing a preclear in present time at all, he was auditing a preclear in the area of the eighteenth or nineteenth year. The preclear was trapped in that area. The auditor asked the preclear for some things he could say to that area. The preclear then gave them to the auditor. Each time the auditor had the area say “okay” back. The auditor finally asked the preclear for things that area could say to him, and the preclear, each time, gave an “okay” back to that area. The area, at length, sprung out and took its proper position and came up to present time, and at this moment exteriorization was possible for this preclear.

Mass can be disintegrated, no matter what type of mass it is, by two-way communication. There are two types of mass. There is the first type which is simply mocked up mass in mocked up space. This we know by agreement to be the physical universe. There is a second type of mass, which is the space-mass experience mass, which we call a facsimile or an engram. This type of mass has been our target and goal since the earliest days of Dianetics, and two-way communication, used in the above fashion, can resolve this.

Some more data on this subject will be given in your next PAB. The announcement which this PAB contains is definitely a major point in the research and investigation in Dianetics and Scientology and pulls together many of the loose ends and details over which we have gone. I have worked very arduously to discover, first, data about the anatomy of man and his mind, second, the full details of this data, and third, methods of handling this data. At this time we have a method of handling this data which is very superior to anything we have had in the past and which can evidently work at any level. I invite you to try this on your preclears and then tell me how it works for you.


Best regards,

Ron








LRH TAPE LECTURE
Phoenix, Arizona
14 May 1955


** 5505C14 HPC-10 The Tone Scale (an important new understanding of
the tone scale)

P.A.B. No. 53
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR’S BULLETIN

From L. RON HUBBARD

Via Hubbard Communications Office
163 Holland Park Avenue, London W.11

_____________________________________________________________________

27 May 1955

OWNERSHIP

SPECIAL PAB


I wonder if you realize that research is paying off and has continued to pay off over the last hectic five years. In 1950 when organizations and the paper chains within them threatened to engulf all of my time, and when the absurdities in California where else?—of personal attack all but wrecked the continuing advance and finance of research, I pulled back sharply from organization and organizational matters, and made the decision that whatever else happened I would continue this line of investigation which I had begun in 1932 and would bring it forward to completion. It was my belief that this subject would go as far in the society as it worked, and no further. I confirmed this opinion in 1951 and 1952 when Big Business decided that the thing to do with Dianetics was to make millions of dollars with it, and that any further research in the matter was nonsense. The whole theory lying behind Dianetics and Scientology is a very easy one to comprehend, where it comes to its development, and that is, the subject will go as far in the societies of Man as it is workable, and no further, and no amount of advertising, and no amount of frilly stationery is going to push it an inch beyond its workability. Thus, I have continued research, whatever else I have done. Whoever and whatever has gone on harassing and barking, and whining and snarling on a hypercritical level in whatever part of the country, I have known and continued to act upon this formula.

At one time I envisioned huge staffs capable of correlating data and discovering many things. These staffs have never materialized. Where a “research department” has been formulated, as in the Elizabeth Foundation, it has been a joke, and has actually done more to impede the forward progress of research than otherwise. The sole purpose of organization has been to continue the finance of research and investigation into the human mind. The amount of finance demanded has not been very great. General Electric throws away more money on research in any month than has been spent on the entirety of Dianetics and Scientology, and they buy less for it. One of my friends—and I certainly do have them—commented the other day that Dianetics and Scientology, in the field of research, present the most astonishing picture that has ever appeared in the field of research. More actual biting data has been developed by myself under less money and under greater duress than in any other time or place. Maybe his statement was merely kind, but from where I sit, it certainly looks like it.

Very often a student or a preclear of the HASI wonders why he is paying what he does to be trained. Actually it costs about half the sum he pays to train or process him. The remainder is devoted to research. When a person buys a membership of whatever classification, almost all of that money goes into research or financing the dissemination of the material; although it costs quite a bit to keep the skeletal framework of an organization as big as the HASI running, it is yet capable of

Copyright (©)1955 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.

continuing on the funds it receives. Very few people, even students and preclears, realize this, but here is what is being done; and it’s time you took a good square look at this, when people out in the bullrushes start whining about the HASI. Every dime spent with the HASI is guaranteeing the continued freedom of Dianetics and Scientology. These subjects have been lucky enough not to get into such financial straits that they could not extricate themselves from ownership and control of persons who would have utilized them to the detriment of Man. Dianetics and Scientology have not depended upon large donations from personally interested persons. It is highly doubtful if the HASI would accept a colored donation which was meant in actuality to guide or steer the policy of “develop and disseminate.” Although various materials of Dianetics and Scientology have occasionally been tendered to official and private agencies, any effort on the part of these to monopolize or to classify under security headings this data, would not only have been resisted, it would have been defeated. Because Dianetics and Scientology and the existing organizations have been financed in this fashion, Dianetics and Scientology are free, and will not be used in the direction of some George Orwellian nightmare.

If you find something wrong with the organization of the HASI, its personnel or people, and if you criticize this weakly or strongly, remember you are criticizing your own organization. It’s not somebody else’s organization—it’s yours; and if you criticize constantly and continually about the various ills to which any human organization is subject, allowing of course that the HASI IS a human organization, you’re making it just that much tougher to get this job done. Actually, flatly, there is nothing wrong that cannot be corrected with any part of the organization of Dianetics and Scientology anywhere in the world. The HASI is far more efficient than most modern businesses, but rubbing elbows as it does with the human race day after day it is subject to breaks and omissions. The difference is that when it becomes aware of them it repairs them. If you think this level of efficiency should be raised, then why don’t you come down to Phoenix or London, or any other central office, and get to work. It’s your organization.

Or why don’t you do a better job of dissemination right where you are. The HASI today on the local scene is cutting a very deep swath into the society where it is immediately centered. Its main job, of course, is an international job and it pays most attention to this. It is actually doing a very great deal these days right here in Phoenix. It is working on very friendly terms with most of the civic organizations in town, and it is now working with the probation officers on juvenile delinquency and criminal problems.

Maybe one of the first things people should learn about Dianetics and Scientology is that there is nothing selfish in its forward thrust, and the only toes it ever steps on are the inefficient or the vicious ones. If the HASI makes an error, or some auditor makes an error, it should be put down to inefficiency, or lack of time, or too much to do, and from my experience, exempting of course those few auditors whose certificates have been yanked for very good and ample reason, the heart with which people in Scientology work is a good heart. They may make mistakes, but they don’t make them knowingly, and what is most important, they correct them when they have made them.

I hear a lot of whining and moaning here and there about how bad it is over here, but I notice it is always from people who are totally incompetent and who depend for their communication line on their imagination, and with as little recourse to fact as possible.

It is quite interesting that almost any influential person who is interested in Dianetics and Scientology sooner or later will begin to be the target of squirrel publications. These publications are uniformly run by people who will not accept processing, and none of these squirrel publications are written or published by

personnel trained in Dianetics and Scientology, and most of the people back of these squirrel publications are M.D.’s or Psychologists. Now, it is a remarkable thing that influential people receiving this literature believe they are receiving material from Dianeticists or Scientologists. The moment I became aware of the fact that this was going on and that poorly informed people actually did believe that Dianeticists and Scientologists trained in the subject were the authors of this barrage of nutty literature, I began to take action on a punitive level. And I can solemnly guarantee you that in a relatively short space of time none of these squirrel publications written by unlettered and untrained goof-balls will be in existence, for it has been clearly indicated to me that they have very often impeded the organization and made the HASI struggle in order to get this job of research done. If one of these publications prevented just one desperate preclear from seeking and obtaining the help he needed from the HASI, then frankly, I can promise a short circuit. We have begun to act very punitively in this direction—as a minor endeavor, to be sure, but nevertheless as an effective one, for remember that we have never done anything that is not eventually effective. That is a very awesome record. I would also like to point out to you that each and every one of the squirrels of yesteryear have met disaster. The biggest squirrel in Great Britain, Derricke Ridgway, was recently to be found in bankruptcy court. I wonder how he got there? We wouldn’t know anything about that, of course!

Recently we tackled California where half a dozen people have been keeping several million from having any respect for or interest in Dianetics and Scientology. These people would call a vast number of potentially interested public in and then tell them things which were calculated to disgrace and discredit the subject. The auditors in California sat around supinely and thought there must be some very good reason why these people kept on doing this. Of course the amazing thing is the apathy of the auditor himself who would permit this sort of thing to go on. I know if anybody were operating in my area with a media-type of attitude toward Scientology, who sent out vast numbers of postcards to mailing lists and got all the people in so that he could make an ass out of himself about how awful Scientology really was, and how bad the organization really was, and how it was all wild and flighty anyhow, I would have had a good fight on my hands, and somebody would have lost, and I don’t think it would have been me. Personally, if I were an auditor and found my area being muddied up to that extent, I would have a definite feeling, if I permitted it to go on, that I was not doing all I could do to spread Scientology in my area. I would have taken such a screwball out of the running so fast he would have thought he had been hit by a Mack truck, and I don’t mean thought-wise. But then the difference between me and an apathetic auditor is that I fight, and I get things done.

Of course there is always liability in attacking a source of entheta. One always gets a certain amount rubbed off on himself, but I am not so scared of this stuff that I won’t contact it. Right after we found that the CADA* in California was trying to put out of the running any and all Dianetic Auditing in the entire state by having legislation passed to forbid it, and after we pulled the certificates of the ringleaders for this entheta activity, a great many things happened—very strange things.

I don’t intend to stop anybody’s communication line as long as it has a shadow of truth in it, but when a communication line is woven from totally self-interested lies, I will not only cut the line, I will make it bounce.

Now the only real trouble with Dianetic and Scientology organizations in the past is because of this matter of research. We have not been very alert to people working


[* The California Association of Dianetic Auditors (CADA), which represented a handful of auditors who were also psychologists, secretly backed legislation that would require Dianetic auditors in California to come under a psychology examining board and in effect make it illegal for an auditor to audit. ]

their ill will from whatever reasons or causes in our own ranks. We just haven’t been interested. The important thing was to get the material researched and to get people trained. When we had that job done and when it was done very, very well, the spread of Dianetics and Scientology in the society would be inevitable. We need five thousand trained auditors. That is our first step toward this dissemination, for believe me, what we are doing with cases today wasn’t done last year, and has never before been done in the history of the human race. We need a clear public presence, and so we are taking a bulldozer to the communication perverters. We are putting ourselves in solid on every front where we can be effective. It is interesting that the American Psychological Association lost, hands down, a bill which was directly aimed at the HASI in Arizona. It lost so badly that it is doubtful that it will ever recover. We are not even vaguely propitiative toward medicine or psychiatry, and we are overtly intent upon assimilating every function they are now performing. We have great belief in the value of a welltrained doctor, and the psychiatrist is certainly welcome to the psychotic. We do not believe that the organizations of these people should have any bearing or influence in the world at large, for they have used their influence in the past to impede research.

We get terribly amused when some auditor writes in and says he has managed to address the local medical association, and when we hear that somebody is now calling himself a psychologist. These short-sighted people believe that the labor union called the AMA or the APA is worth propitiating and will be there long enough to influence anything. The general attitude amongst the Powers That Be in these organizations has definitely changed toward Dianetics and Scientology. They now regard these as a very serious and deadly menace. These people are getting scared. We know this because we had a recent reaction at a very high echelon. There is no real danger in these organizations. There is more danger in our own stupidity and in an apathy which would permit our fields to be plowed by any untrained fool who wants to tell us all how bad it is over there. We’ve been told how bad it is over there for seventy-six trillion years. It’s about time somebody said how good it can be somewhere. And that’s what we are doing.

I am telling you this because I want you to know how I feel about this, and maybe knowing how I feel about it, and knowing how inevitable I feel about the success of Dianetics and Scientology in this society of Man, you will be better able to understand both what we have been doing, what we are doing, and what we are going to do in Dianetics and Scientology.


ANATOMY OF THE SPIRIT OF MAN CONGRESS LECTURES
Fifth Anniversary Congress
Washington, D.C.
3—6 June 1955


The Anatomy of the Spirit of Man (Fifth Anniversary) Congress was held at the Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C., with more than 250 in attendance. At this Congress Ron gave a summary of the new Tone Scale (from -8.0 to + 40.0), showing how it differed and yet agreed with the Tone Scale so familiar to all Dianeticists and Scientologists, and of the processes above communication.


** 5506C03 ASMC-1 Address of Welcome—The Hope of Man [see page 209]
** 5506C03 ASMC-2 Practicalities of a Practical Religion
** 5506C03 ASMC-3 History of Research and Investigation
** 5506C04 ASMC-4 Direction of Truth in Processing
** 5506C04 ASMC-5 The Tone Scale—Three Primary Buttons of
Exteriorization
** 5506C04 ASMC-6 Group Processing—Meaningness
** 5506C04 ASMC-7 Composition of Beingness—Postulates,
Exteriorization, Beingness
** 5506C04 ASMC-8 Group Processing
** 5506C05 ASMC-9 The Descent of Man
** 5506C05 ASMC-10 How to Chart the Preclear, Knowingness and
Unknowingness
* 5506C06 ASMC-11 Six Basic Steps—Some Fundamentals of Auditing
** 5506C06 ASMC-12 The Mechanisms of Ownership in Living (the
ownership of information)
** 5506C06 ASMC-13 Group Processing—Additional Processing on
Meaningness
** 5506C06 ASMC-14 The Game Called Man
** 5506C06 ASMC-15 What Scientology Is Doing

THE TONE PLOTTING SCALE
by
L. Ron Hubbard

DIRECTIONS:

Name of PC .............................

Think a Thought, Problems, Solutions and Con- Date .......................................
sequences, Plus and Minus on each square.
Case Number ..........................


[This chart was made available at “The Anatomy of the Spirit of Man Congress”, 3-6 June 1955, in Washington, D.C. L. Ron Hubbard describes the use of this chart in Lecture 5506C04 ASMC-5 The Tone Scale-Three Primary Buttons of Exteriorization. He gives further data in Lecture 5506C05 ASMC-9 The Descent of Man and Lecture 5506C05 ASMC-10 How to Chart the Preclear Knowingness and Unknowingness.]

P.A.B. No. 54
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR’S BULLETIN

From L. RON HUBBARD

Via Hubbard Communications Office
163 Holland Park Avenue, London W.11

_____________________________________________________________________

10 June 1955

REALITY LEVEL OF PRECLEAR


Find the reality of the preclear. This is the watchword of processing. Although communication, as completely outlined in Dianetics, 1955! is a universal solvent, remember that there are also two other comers to the triangle, and that one of these corners is Reality. That R corner of the triangle is very important to you as an auditor because you, having very great certainties on this and on that, are very prone to forget that your Realities are greater than those of your preclear.

The reality level of the preclear is dependent on how much he is “not-ising” his environment. If he is not-ising it, he must believe that it is dangerous, and must believe that he himself does not have the power to make anything in it disappear or vanish for himself. Therefore, his reality level is as great as he is strong, and it is as poor as he is weak. Do you know that you are processing preclears who do not believe that thought has anything to do with action? You are processing preclears who believe that thinking a thought will influence nothing. You are processing preclears who believe that thinkingness is one thing and actingness is an entirely different thing, and that no amount of thinkingness is going to influence any amount of actingness. This is apathy, indeed, and along with that goes an unreality which would appall you.

Yes, these preclears can get mock-ups. They can get concepts. They can be very obedient. They can even be run with SOP 8-C and somehow or another muddle through it, but the joker here is that the auditor is actually monitoring the body of the preclear, and of course a body can respond to orders, and will respond probably faster to the auditor’s orders than to the thetan the auditor is processing. Thus a preclear can be put through any number of contortions and convolutions in processing without getting anywhere at all. The auditor is simply doing it.

Find the reality level of your preclear. Unless you find the reality level of the preclear you are not going to reach the preclear, because the preclear is as alive as things are real.

Now, if this is so important, then let us see how far south we would have to go to reach some preclears. Mechanical two-way communication might very well be much too tough for 75% of the preclears you will process. Just ordinary conversation is actually over their heads. People that we are trying to reach do not know the auditor is acknowledging them when he says “Okay.”

Let us look at this acknowledgment of the preclear, and let us discover that the auditor, in order to acknowledge the preclear, must also make the preclear aware that he is being acknowledged. Thus, when an auditor says “Okay,” or “All right,” or “That’s fine,” the other part of the statement is to make the preclear aware that an acknowledgment has been delivered. Thus, a “Did you hear me?” is quite often

Copyright (©) 1955 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.

beneficial. When the preclear finally admits that he did hear the “Okay,” and when the auditor makes sure that he time after time hears the “Okay,” you will notice that the communication, on the acknowledgment level, starts to work with the preclear. But it won’t work as long as the preclear is oblivious of the “Okays” the auditor is giving. Of course, you must give the preclear an “Okay” for every action or completed thought he performs. You must acknowledge what he has said or done, but you must also be very sure that he receives that acknowledgment. It is not out of order to face him squarely and hold up one finger and say, “Wait a minute, did you hear me say ‘Okay’?”

Now there are two processes which are at once the most basic of processes and which are very low on the Reality Scale as well as high on it. A person processed on these processes should not believe that the auditor believes his reality level is low. Quite the contrary. Such a process as this one happens to be very good anywhere on the tone scale. And this process is, “Think a thought,” “Receive a thought.”

You are in essence processing thinkingness. I wonder how long and how often you have processed preclears who could not clearly or differentiatively understand that they were thinking a thought? The auditing command is simply, “Think a thought.” The preclear is given this command time and time again, and he vocalizes the thought back to the auditor, and the auditor acknowledges the fact that he has received that thought, aloud. And the preclear is run until the preclear knows, absolutely, that he himself, not some machine, not some energy mass, not his toe, or his hat, is thinking the thought. The preclear will start out thinking thoughts which are actually handed to him from some mysterious source. When the communication lag on this is entirely flat, and when the preclear knows that he himself is thinking the thought, the auditor can then run the other side of the process.

“Receive a thought” is run with the following auditing command: “Tell me a thought you would be willing to receive.” This is then run until it, as a process, is entirely flat: when it is no longer producing any result or comm lag.

Part of the “Think a thought” process is to have the preclear place the thought in various locations after he has thought it. Have his shoe think a thought, have his hat think a thought, have a lamp think the thought, have a rug think the thought. This gets the preclear into the practice of placing the thought somewhere. Thus, thoughts are less likely to appear suddenly and magically out of his machinery.

Very curious phenomena result from “Think a thought” and “Receive a thought.” It will be found sometimes that it is easier for the preclear to think a thought for another universe than for himself to think a thought. Let us take for example a preclear who is entirely interiorized into the universe of his mother. It would, therefore, evidently be much easier for him to have his mother think a thought than for the preclear himself to think a thought. As a matter of fact it might be an enormous struggle, resulting in rebellion, for the preclear himself to think a thought, but it would be very easy for the preclear to have his mother think a thought. The way to go about this would be to take an E-Meter, or simply estimate, by finding out who the preclear most resembles, the probable universe into which the preclear is interiorized. Having established this (and you would only do this if the preclear were rebellious about thinking a thought himself) you would then have this likely universe think a thought, with the auditing command (having established that he is interiorized into his mother’s or his father’s universe): “Have your mother (father) think a thought.” This would then be carried out until the preclear was absolutely sure that he was making his mother or his father think a thought. This would betoken an initial division of the universe.

Slicing up universes with communication processes is a very easy thing to do. All one has to do is use the process: “What could you say to your father?” and have the

preclear say it, and get an Okay from his father. And when this was flat, “What could your father say to you?”, and when the preclear has vocalized this, the auditor would say, “Now give your father an ‘Okay’ to this.” However, this workable process which splits universes (in old-time parlance “valences”) is yet much too high for a preclear who is very low on reality, and would take a very long time to do. It would be a process into which you would eventually move the preclear who had been thinking a thought for his mother, but remember that thinking a thought for his mother would be only a start into communication processing, and would be an elementary process, run until the preclear is entirely certain that he is thinking a thought that his mother would think or that he can make his mother think a thought—the latter being the most desirable condition.

You should be aware of the fact that you are processing thinkingness. You are not processing spaces, you are not processing masses at this day and state of development of Dianetics and Scientology. You are processing thinkingness. A man is as well as he thinks. The more masses and spaces, phrases and engrams you process, the less you are validating the fact that you are actually processing a thinkingness: a thinkingness that we call a thetan. To process this directly is, of course, the most indicated process there could be, and sure enough, we are producing good results with it. But the remarkable thing about the process is that it works on people who heretofore have had very, very poor reality.

Now there is a process which is a little bit lower than this “Think a thought” process, and this is the process of finding something real in the room. Recently I have had some very excellent results with “Find something in this room that is comfortably real.” This is a variation on the initial auditing command as given in the early SOPs. It is apparently better. A preclear who is not-ising everything in sight will find things real, he says, but actually he is not comfortable about it, and if you ask him to find something that is comfortably real, it may take him a long time to discover anything that he would tolerate to continue existence, and once you have begun this process of toleration you would be able to do a great deal for his case.

“Find something comfortably real” is not necessarily a low-toned process. It will work in varying degrees on anyone. It is not recommended for any particular case level. If a preclear utterly bogs on “Think a thought” (which isn’t likely), then you should have him “Find something in this room that is comfortably real to you.”

I am reminded of an auditor recently processing a very bad arthritic, who processed him as an exteriorized case for some little time without any apparent gain in the case before it occurred to this auditor that something must be wrong. Actually, a great amount of time was invested. The auditor asked Nibs, my boy who was then instructing the ACC course in the United States, and who is at this writing in England, teaching the BScn course there, what could possibly be wrong with this hung-fire preclear. Nibs looked him over and discovered that the auditor had never yet gotten the preclear into any kind of a situation which was even vaguely real to the preclear. The auditor in one chair and the preclear in the other chair was not a real situation to this preclear, and yet the auditor was running him as an exteriorized case. Of course he was exteriorized, but with such a low level of reality that very little benefit of course was resulting from the processing.

Processing is as beneficial as it is real and factual to the preclear, and if you cannot raise the preclear’s reality level by the use of Affinity and Communication, then you are letting the whole triangle hang fire. This triangle of ARC may have suddenly gotten very important on the C corner, but it is still foremost in the tool-kit of the auditor.

Now you will want to know why you should use “Think a thought” when what is obviously wrong with the preclear you have in mind is a withered leg. Let me assure

you that if you process directly this withered leg, you are processing something and somebody who probably has a very low level of reality. He wouldn’t have a withered leg if he had a high level of reality. Where you have anybody who is neurologically, physically, or psychosomatically ill, unless it be from an acute infection or an accident, you have somebody who has been trying to not-is his body. When an individual is not-ising his body, making his legs wither, or his stomach get ulcers, or his head get migraine headaches, or his teeth fall out, you have somebody who is trying to not-is the environment. He is already going in the direction of succumb. The one thing that would make him very happy would be the entire disappearance of the physical universe. Well, with modern processing you can make this happen, too, and maybe this is something you should have happen for him in order to demonstrate that it could happen. Of course, if you did this you would have to go through a modern BScn course at least, for this is a very tricky procedure. In view of the fact that unreality is the action of realizing things are there and then saying they aren’t there (not-ising them; see Creation of Human Ability and the Axioms of Scientology) you are dealing with a protest against reality which results in unreality. A person will let things be as real as he is willing to let them exist. When an individual isn’t willing to let a leg or a tree, or this universe exist, then things are not real to him. One of the best ways you could get him to raise his level of reality would be to give him some reality on thinkingness. It isn’t actingness, it isn’t getting tired, it isn’t being unable to work, it isn’t the second dynamic that impedes your preclear—it is his thinkingness. All you have to do is to get him to change his mind. If you could get anyone to change his mind enough he could then command anything that was bothering him. But a preclear who is not-ising things is trying to use force and pressure of one kind or another against physical objects and spaces in order to push them out of existence. This will never win, let me assure you. Energy will never destroy energy, I don’t care how many atomic bombs the peanut whistly brigade builds, they will never destroy any space or energy with them. Your preclear who finds things unreal has stopped trying to do anything with thought and is trying to do something with force. He no longer conceives that thought can generate or handle or give existence or life to space and energy.

Now you take this to heart, and take a good, hard look at some of these preclears you have been processing on very fancy and frilly processes, and you take a think back over all of these preclears who, after you processed them, didn’t think anything had happened. When the preclear didn’t think anything had happened, nothing happened. What was in error? You were processing him above his level of reality. If you could get him to think a thought and know he thought it, and receive a thought and know he had received it, even though he put it there to receive it, which is what he does, you would then be directly addressing the very thing that is doing unreality and reality. An individual who has a compulsive outflow is simply unwilling to receive a thought. An individual who is silent simply can’t think of anything. Thus, if an individual had control of his thoughts he would have control of the universe. We can prove this now in a process.

And don’t think you are going to finish this process, either side of it, in a half-hour or forty-five minutes. Some of these glib preclears you process will “fall in” on this process and begin to comm-lag an hour or two after you start processing them on it. The main errors which have been made with this process so far have been failing to run it long enough to have the preclear really know and really understand that he, himself, has thought the thought and that he, himself, has received the thought, or is willing to receive the thought.

“Find the reality level of the preclear” is one of those bywords that you can’t use too often or look at enough.



Minor 5 [1955, ca. mid-June]

The Magazine of
DIANETICS and SCIENTOLOGY
from Washington, D. C.



The Hope of Man

L. Ron Hubbard

From the Welcoming Address by L. Ron Hubbard to the Congress of Eastern Scientologists at the Shoreham Hotel, Washington, D. C. on June 3, 1955.

. . . The Congress here in Washington is a rather special event. One of the reasons why I came East to give this Congress and why I was very happy to be able to do so has to do with the development of information of sufficient importance, as I believe you will see at this Congress’ end, to warrant telling as many important people as possible about it.
The things which have been happening in Scientology by reason of research and development, have removed Scientology entirely from any classification as a psychotherapy. The facts behind Scientology today are that it is doing things which nothing has ever done before. One of the things which I am very pleased to announce immediately is that we have seldom failed in recent months to raise the intelligence quotient of any individual undergoing twenty-five hours of processing at least ten points. And for those who have undergone as much as seventy-five hours of processing we have raised it as much as thirty-five points and we consider twenty-five points routine. This is something that has never happened before, and therefore it is an important thing that we take a look at this. According to psychology this is an impossibility, completely impossible, and therefore I want to tell you why it is impossible in the field of psychology.
Dianetics, our earliest beginning, was a mechanistic science, very mechanistic, but very precise. Without Dianetics we could not have proceeded, but we had Dianetics and we did proceed. All Dianetics was, was a very exact analytical approach to problems of the mind and in Dianetics we were closely allied, of course, to psychotherapy. We couldn’t help but be, because all of the data upon which we were depending, all of the procedures through which we were going were, one way or another, related to psychotherapy. But when we moved out of this mechanistic approach, back in 1952, it was necessary to distinguish the fact that we had moved out of a mechanical approach. We were no longer considering Man a robot. We were no longer considering Man something which you wound up, and set him on the track of life, and he ran for a number of years and ran down. We no longer considered Man was doing this thing or was doing this kind of thing. We graduated from that. We recognized that Man was basically a machine only as far as his body went, that Man was, otherwise, a spiritual entity which had no finite survival. It had, this entity, an infinite survival. One of the basics, you understand, of Dianetics was survival. The basic principle of existence is survival and that is only true for the body. A spirit cannot help but survive whether in heaven or in hell or on earth or in a theta trap. That is the saddest thing to most people. It is so sad that they very well like to forget. They say, “Well, I am going to live a number of years and then I am going to die. And that will be the end of me and you should all feel sorry for me and send flowers.” This is an interesting game, but it is not true. If he

Copyright (©) 1955 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.

thinks of this at all in the Western hemisphere he ordinarily thinks of it in this wise: “I am going to live a number of years and then I will go to my reward. And I hope it won’t be what I deserve.”
Now this is another game. This is not to frown in any way upon the principles and beliefs of other religions, but it is nevertheless demonstrable, too accurately demonstrable, that an individual is not finished with the game once his body dies. We are on a much higher level in Scientology than the Western religions have been, but we are not on a higher level in Scientology except in our technologies, except in the exactness of our understanding, than those great religious leaders of India who kept the spirit, the spiritual side of life alive for thousands of years against all materialistic ingression. And when we consider that a great deal of what we now know with great exactness was already known and lost thousands of years ago, we begin to see that we are not dealing with something new when we deal with Scientology. It is not something new. What we are doing with this data IS new. The way this material is organized is new. The technologies with which we can bring about a new state of being in Man are new, but the basic idea, the basic hope of Man, as it appears today in Scientology, is thousands of years old. If we call Scientology a religion we are calling it a religion out of a much deeper well than the last two thousand years.
This Congress is given here to signalize an accomplishment of material studied over a long, long period of time, over a quarter of a century, which is a long time to study anything. If you have ever sat and looked at anything for a quarter of a century, why you would know that was a long time to sit there and look. I would like to say that this Congress is here to honor the great spiritual leaders of the past—not of modern times, but of the past—since these people handed along enough tradition to make us aware of the fact that there was a spiritual side to Man. These great spiritual leaders have been hanged, reviled, misinterpreted, badly quoted, have not been at all comprehended, but nevertheless they are the hands through which a torch has been handed through the centuries so that we could culminate with a greater ability for Man and some hope for his future.
These great religious leaders, at least those I consider great religious leaders, begin with a monk, a legendary, mythical monk, whose name is probably not, but is said to be, Dharma. That word has meant wisdom ever since. Some many thousands of years ago in the highlands of India he handed out or handed on information which was taken up and carried forward by someone who might never have existed, just as they say Christ might never have existed, and that person was Krishna. And we go forward from there and we get to Lao-tse, who in his Tao again handed on knowledge and said there was a spiritual side to life.
But all of these people were saying something that was much more important than “There is a spiritual side to life.” They were saying, “There is hope. They can come to you and they can tell you that all is lost and that you are dead, you are trapped and there is not hope for you. They can come to you and say this, but this is not true. There is hope. You do go on living. This life is not all there is. There is some future life in which you can do better, succeed more worthily than you have.” That is all these men said. Whatever trappings have been hung upon their words, we don’t care. Whatever technology they had has certainly been lost. Nevertheless, they did hand on this message to Man; they said, “There is hope, you can be better, this life is not all there is and somehow or other it is all going to come out all right in the end.” Without that hope I do not think Man could have survived this far down the track.
Another one of these great leaders, Gautama Buddha, who oddly enough never pretended to be a god, pretended to be nothing but what he was, a man inspired with the wisdom which he had gained and which he taught, and at one time one-third of this earth’s population knew of and was better for Gautama Buddha. In the Western world, if you walk up to a man casually and you say “Buddha,” he’ll say, “An Idol,” which was the furthest thing from Buddha’s thoughts—to be an idol. He would have laughed and probably did laugh after he exteriorized and came back and took a look around and saw everybody building temples, burning joss to Buddha. Nevertheless, this was not the attraction of the Buddhist; the attraction was again wisdom and hope. People

poured out of China for centuries over tortuous and dangerous mountains, snow-filled passes to drop down into India just to come close to the area where Gautama Buddha had taught that there is hope and that the endless cycle of life and death does not have to continue, that an individual can be free even from this. Now that’s interesting, isn’t it? Yet, the ignorant deified him. But, due to him, a great deal of this work was handed on and an enormous amount of what we call religion in this Western hemisphere today was given to this Western hemisphere directly by Gautama Buddha. It was filtered through the Middle East. “Love thy neighbor” was one of the first lessons he taught and it is that lesson which we have received from the Middle East. But, what I am telling you is that these people handed on a torch of wisdom, of information, generation to generation. It was handed along geographical routes, and one of those geographical routes was the Middle East and one of the people who handed it on was a man named Moses. And again it was handed on to a man named Christ. And he handed it on, and even the Arab nations benefited from this through their own prophet, Muhammad. And these men I consider great spiritual leaders, because they gave to Man on down through the years the hope that life could go on, that there was a spiritual side to existence, that the business of barter and gain was not all there was to life. And today, sitting in a materialistic society, which almost vilifies anybody who speaks of the fact that you don’t die right away—when you’re dead, you’re dead and you’re dead, you see, you’re dead—and right on down to this time, we are indebted to these men.
Now the only reason we know anything about these men is the printing press. And the only reason we really know anything about what they have taught us is because here and there somebody set something down. But, today we came into possession of an enormous amount of information, magnificent information. The physical sciences. And although these ran off and pretended to be an end-all to themselves and completely divorced from spiritual existence, they nevertheless furnished a modus operandi by which we could analyze the teachings and understand them better. And out of the analysis and understanding we actually achieved a great deal.
Don’t think for a moment that when I put together Dianetics I was not completely aware of practically everything any one of these men said in his own district and on his own home ground. If I had not had that information we would never have had Dianetics. But, what did I, a Western engineer, do? I said, “Well, these men are too sold on the spiritual side of life, they’re overboard. Nothing practical. We want everything workable. We want wheels. We want cogwheels. We want a standard procedure by which we can take a look at somebody on a couch and say, “Zip, zip, rip!” I was persuaded into this to some degree by my engineering friends—to some degree.
I could not completely tolerate looking this picture in the face. And I dare say that there are some Scientologists who cannot tolerate looking this picture in the face directly, because it’s too much truth. They like a few more vias. If you look at something too straight it’s likely to look back. So, I said, “They’re too spiritual, they’re too unworkable. They themselves, the Eastern cults, religions, and so forth, are themselves in poverty. They cannot handle their own problems, therefore they do not have an answer, except, perhaps, that there is hope.” And I was wrong, I was wrong. The biggest mistake that I have made, and I have made mistakes, believe me, but the biggest mistake I have made was the day when I said, “All right, boys, we’ll call this a science. All right, we will agree that the Western hemisphere is not ready to accept anything spiritual or religious; all right, we will call it a science. And this science we will call Dianetics, which means ‘through mind.’ “ And that was myself approving with society and I never should have approved. Why? Because, we went on a wide, a large via. We associated ourselves with psychotherapy, and that was not good. It’s not that there is anything wrong with psychotherapy; it’s that they already have a tremendous backlog of failures and so we failed to some degree ourselves. And it was only in 1952 that I recognized that we must be dealing with what we called right there in Dianetics the Awareness of Awareness unit. We must be dealing with an awareness of awareness unit which had tremendous survival power, because, by very scientific, unquestionable means I could track back the life of this awareness of awareness unit life after life after life. You and I or any scientist here in Washington government worthy of his name—I

mean a scientist, now, not a psychotherapist; I mean a man who is educated into exact mathematics, who was educated into precise disciplined ways of thinking—and if such a man or any thousand of them cared to go over the back track of this research, they would have to come to the same conclusions. And these conclusions are that Man is actually a body run by an awareness of awareness unit which has infinite survival power—even though it can get into a great deal of trouble.
And so we have today a little turbulence which stems immediately from the fact that a lot of people are saying, “Dianetics was all right, but this Scientology, we don’t know. Dianetics was fine, I liked Dianetics. Dianetics had something, but Hubbard went crazy or something and he moved out of that and now we don’t have anything.” That’s right. They’ve got a handful of nothing called a Thetan. And that nothingness contains all the life there is and all the experience there is.
All right, we knew once upon a time that we had to raise peoples’ selfdeterminism. We knew that by raising their self-determinism we would have better people. Well, let me tell you something. If we do anything else BUT raise their selfdeterminism, if we do anything else but better their self-control of their environment as a spirit, we’ve failed—flatly. Remember, I have watched a long, long parade of cases. Thousands and thousands and thousands of cases, more case histories than have ever been examined by anyone in the field of psychotherapy, because believe me, we collect them. People are anxious to be processed, they are not anxious to be psychoanalyzed. In the few short years that Dianetics and Scientology have been alive we have processed more people than were ever processed in the sixty years of psychoanalysis. These are exact figures. But we were not in the business of psychoanalysis. Now, I can tell you that wherever we have neglected this factor of raising the self-determinism and ability of this awareness of awareness unit, wherever we have neglected, wherever we have stressed machine reaction, wherever we have attempted to heal the body at the sacrifice of the man, we have gotten a leg, maybe, that worked better, we’ve gotten a nose which maybe twitched better, but we haven’t gotten a better man. Now that’s interesting, isn’t it? And, the culmination of this material and a study by reason of intelligence testing and personality testing over the last many months—a program eight months in length, which has just been concluded—has brought me to the conclusion (which as far as I’m concerned is THE conclusion) that we cannot lose if we stress the spiritual side of man and that we always lose when we stress his material side. It’s taken me twenty-five years to come to this conclusion and I give it to you just that way.
Why didn’t psychotherapy ever raise anyone’s intelligence? Why do they cut up men in order to heal them? Well, they do that just for this reason: that they know they can get nowhere by doing it. They can get nowhere by handling this mechanical object called Man. The mechanical object is not handleable by other mechanical objects. Now, that’s interesting, isn’t it? We have the same proposition. Two cars sitting down here in the garage and one of them has a flat tire and the other car is sitting alongside of it without a flat tire and we come back there three months later and those cars are still sitting there, one of them with a flat tire. Did the other car ever repair the flat tire? Well, Man is better than that, which is baffling; he can always grow a new tire, one way or another through the genetic line or something, he can always have a new tire. A car can’t even do this. But as long as we treat Man as a machine, he is capable of doing all the things a machine can do and no more. And a machine cannot change its intelligence and cannot change its personality. This is a fantastic thing that today in this twentieth century, thousands of years of belief in the field of religion have materialized into an actuality which can be put into an effect rather easily by the average individual. We have at last brought this material into the category of practical. The oldest material Man has, hope, the spirit, has come to a culmination of being intensely practical. Now, let me say something about this word “religion.”
You know that religion has a great many meanings. It has a great many different meanings. It can mean an enormous number of things. And where the public at large turns away from religion they don’t really know what they are turning away from, but where they are turning away from it they are turning away from its impracticality and that’s all they are turning away from. If you ask some avowed atheist, “Why are you

mad-dogging on the subject of God? Why do you talk, talk, talk on the subject of God?” this man says, “Well, it started out when I was a little boy and I asked him for a new bicycle and he didn’t give me one and my father beat me with the Bible.” He’s telling you what? He’s telling you it didn’t work.
I practically cleared a preclear the other day by asking him just one question. The preclear sat back—of course, this was just a freak case—the preclear sat back; he was well educated in Scientology; he sat back and he did a sort of dazed look at his past on this one question and all of a sudden heaved a deep sigh of relief and was in beautiful condition. What was the question? “Which of your parents,” said I, “would you rather have run 8-C on you?” Now, 8-C, you know, is a little process by which you have someone go over and finish a cycle of action on one command. And he took a look at his father, and he said, “Well, my father would probably be best,” to himself, and then he said, “No, my mother. My mother sure would have made sure that I went over and touched that wall. No, but she wouldn’t have let me touch the wall. She would have said, ‘You go over there and touch that wall; no, I mean the other wall. What are you doing that for?’ “ All of a sudden the preclear said, “About my father, he just would have said, ‘What wall?’ He never would have ordered me to go over and touch the wall.” The preclear said, “Gee, with the kind of auditing I got when I was a kid, no wonder I got messed up.” Accepted it as an explanation, and revived. Remarkable, very remarkable.
But, do you realize that where religion is used for the self-centered and selfish control of other human beings it has been defamed? When papa was a member of the Baptist Bible Class and he came home and he said, “If you don’t be a good boy, yak, yak, yak, you’re going to hell. If you don’t do this, if you don’t do that—threat, threat, threat, punishment, punishment, punishment, threat, threat, threat.” You know that’s awfully bad control. That’s not good 8-C, is it? And where something has been used as bad 8-C, we can then expect that a great many people in the society are going to rebel against it. Just as they would rebel against any auditor who said, “Now look, there’s a wall right there in the air. Now walk over to it and touch it. All right. Now feel the floor two feet above where you are standing. That’s fine.” Then he’d close the doors very firmly and he’d say, “Now, there being no doors here, walk out into the hall.” Supposing he did this, however: said, “Now, if you don’t locate your chair at once a lightning bolt is going to originate somewhere in the vicinity of your head and you’re going to be sorry.” Does this sound like good 8-C?
There are two kinds of control. There’s good control and there’s bad control. I can show you a process which demonstrates that a total absence of control is sickness itself. A child who has no one in his vicinity to control him as much as he is controlling things is on a stuck flow. He is incapable then of proceeding. He gets upset. The total absence of control is itself sickness. I could demonstrate that to you, but you’ll have to take my word for it. The most aberrative person in your bank is probably the person who should have but did not control you. Now, that person, if you start running it this way—what did this person want changed, what did this person want unchanged, what did this person want changed, what did this person want unchanged—you’ll find your preclear becoming quite ill. All of the tiredness, the upset, the confusion and the hectic necessity to make an effect upon someone will suddenly rise up and haunt him, because that person should have controlled him—his mother, his grandmother, his father—and did not, and left then a sort of a hole in existence which was timeless, because time depends upon change. And change is part of control.
Without control, without moving particles, without being oneself moved, do you know that you would just float forever in a timeless void? So, there is something to control. But, the word control and control itself has been so badly done that control is almost a curse word. But there is good control. It would be a type of control where we had some agreement and knowledge of the goal to be attained. Do you see that? Some agreement and knowledge of the goal we were trying to reach. That would have to be there. It would have to be knowing. At least one party would have to know it very well, and both parties would have to know it somewhat for control to be functional. We would have to have an agreement of goals. Another thing we would have to have would be completion of a cycle of action. Once a command was given it should be

completed before a second command is given. We shouldn’t tell somebody, “Now, pick up that bunch of flo—no, leave it there.” Well, now, what I am describing to you is bad control, and that is very bad, because it scrambles and confuses one’s time. And bad control is done when one of the parties is totally unaware of control being accomplished. Usually the person who is being controlled is unaware that he is being controlled or something of the sort, the person who is doing the controlling does not know it but is merely acting compulsively or obsessively—and here we get a situation where cycles of action are not agreed upon, the goals are not agreed upon, the cycles of action are not completed and we get chaos and we get bad control.
Where something has been used for bad control it becomes infamous by the mere association with the confusion of bad control. We could say then that if all of the auto license bureaus in the country were to get even worse than they are and were to get into a situation where when they issued a car license and you put it on your car they would then write you a letter and tell you that it was the wrong license and you should therefore return it, otherwise you would be arrested, and when you had returned it you were arrested for not having a license. When you sent them $200.00, which I think is the usual tax on a 1930 Model A car today, for tax and license fee they then lost all of the records and then had you arrested for not applying. Now this would be interesting, wouldn’t it? The first thing you know, every auto license office would have a very bad name and we would say that auto licensing is bad, wouldn’t we? That’s bad. Let’s just dispense with the whole thing. It’s impractical, it gets us nowhere, we have enormous confusion and that is the end of it. And do you know that in this Western world to a large degree that has happened to religion.
We look at the spectacular, unreasonable stunts. We look at some young man saying, “I could run this country much better than anybody else. All you have to do is tell everybody to believe in God and therefore the whole country would run well.” He gets up here on the Capitol steps right here in Washington, D.C. and forty-five thousand people come out to hear him say that and he says, “That’s all we need and that solves all of our problems and be good or you’ll all go to hell.”
Now, when we look at a stunt like this we say to ourselves, “Religion.” But, when we are saying “religion” the way we are saying it, we are talking about the spiritual side of existence. We are talking about this strange fact that if the awareness of awareness unit is not itself in control of the body the body is sick. In other words, if we neglect the spiritual side of existence and we do not recognize the existence of a spirit, we don’t recognize the part which this plays in life. We are making an open armed bid for all the evils which escaped from Pandora’s Box. We’re just asking for it. A little child goes to school and they say, “Be careful now, eat your vitamins, be careful how you walk across the street, wear your clothes, wear your rubbers, don’t play in those mud puddles,”—on and on and on, a constant tirade of what he is not supposed to do or what he is supposed to do with his body, one way or the other, reasonable or not.
And nobody ever says to him, “Son, your self-determinism depends upon your ability to tolerate the actions of others or to direct them at will. It depends upon your ability to have charity towards your fellow men. It depends upon your ability when in a position of trust to demonstrate mercy. It depends upon your ability to make a postulate stick on that body. When you tell it to walk, it walks.” Nobody tells him that, and by not telling him we have forecast for him a life of turmoil, confusion and sickness, and I would say that is a dirty trick to play on any kid. If the awareness of awareness unit is in control of the organism, the body, knowingly, we can expect a healthy body and a successful life. And if a machine is thought to be in control of the awareness of awareness unit, if it’s all just figure-figure and you-are-what-your-body-is-and-no-more and everything runs for the body exclusively, we have sickness.
Scientology is knowledge. That’s all Scientology is. The word “Scientology” means knowledge, that’s all it means. Scio means knowing in the fullest sense of the word. Many people believe that this is named after science. No, it’s scio, knowing in the fullest sense of the word, studying how to know in the fullest sense of the word, but this is the same word as Dharma, which means knowledge; Tao, which means the way to knowledge; Buddhism, which means the way to spiritual knowledge. It’s an old

word, a very old word. It happens to contain within it today possibly the bulk of what is knowable in terms of theory, that is immediately knowable to anybody anywhere. But it contains in itself something else. It contains a positive direction, a positive goal and is itself committed along a certain path, and this is the first time that this has ever been committed along this path and is the principal thing I wish to announce to this Congress. There is no doubt any longer in my mind that a postulate made by an awareness of awareness unit is a higher manifestation than any energy-space manifestation and that the postulate is totally and entirely in control of space-energy manifestations, a thing which would be news to a nuclear physicist, but which could be proven to him. It would probably make a very old man of him. Now we have that fact, that postulate. A thought is the most senior thing there is. It is senior to any and all masses because thoughts can handle masses, as I hope you will see in the group processing here to your abundant knowledge.
Now, thought handles mass. Of course, they have been saying this for years but they couldn’t prove it. A fellow says, “All right, there’s that big truck running right at me and all I have to say is ‘no truck.’ Is that the way I do this, right away, that handles the whole situation?” What are you doing there in a mass that can be run over? That’s where you enter that problem. What are you doing there in a mass that can be run over? Since you could be there just as easily in no mass at all; and that is what is startling and what is new. Now Scientology contains, then, a direction and it contains a goal, and the goal is simply a greater freedom for the individual, and when we say the individual we are talking about something as precise as an apple. We are not talking about a collection of behavior patterns which we all learned about in the study of rats. We are talking about something that is finite. We are talking about somebody. The somethingness that you are and the capabilities you can be and this is what we are talking about. We are not talking about the color of your hair or the length of your feet. We’re talking about you and we know what we are talking about when we talk about you, and therefore, a greater freedom is indicated for this individual, you. Why? Because this individual, you, is today threatened by one of the greatest cataclysms Man has been called upon to face. He is threatened by a lot of bodies running around, evidently on total automatic, doing and planning interesting things for the demise of the race. In the next few years, since this kind of an attack will not occur for some time, the next few years are going to be nerve-racking years.
If we understand what we know—you know, that’s an interesting thing, you have to understand what you know—if we understand what we know we can go a long way in assisting or mitigating the effect and onslaught on a society of weapons which exceed the imagination of any of us in their destructive power and which are going to cause on every hand a decline of the state of Man unless some of us know what we are talking about. And fortunately, right now, we do know what we are talking about. It will depend upon us to a very large degree whether Man will become an animal in earnest or will continue to be a spiritual being. Because, Man is today threatened by men who have become animals, who have no thought of any other thing than this. This work does not represent a revolt; it doesn’t even vaguely represent a desire for the demise of any of these things. All it represents is the hope that Man again can find his own feet, can find himself in a very confused mechanistic society and can recover to himself some of the happiness, some of the sincerity, some of the love and kindness with which he was created, and if Man can do this and if we can help in any way to accomplish this, then all the years of my life and all the years of yours will have been well paid for, and none of us will have lived in vain.
I am very, very happy to see you here. I have a great deal to tell you that is technical. I want to tell you first that we have a practical religion. And before you say, “Religion, grrrr,” think of that it is a practical religion and religion is the oldest heritage that Man has. Many, many of those present are ministers. The fact is that we do not fit at all or influence or have any real contact with medicine, certainly not with psychiatry. We do not exist in the tradition of psychology. We can only exist in the field of religion. Of course, it would be up to us to make religion a much better thing than it has been and to use it to run much better 8-C on our fellow Man. Thank you.



Major 4 [1955, ca. early July]

The Magazine of
DIANETICS and SCIENTOLOGY
from
Washington, D. C.



STRAIGHT WIRE

A MANUAL OF OPERATION

L. Ron Hubbard



ARTICLE ONE

Modern Straight Wire

On the theory that someone may pick up this book and have only time to read a few lines, or have a constricted ability in amount of material assimilable, right here in a hurry I wish to give you the type of Straight Wire which is today producing phenomenal results on preclears.
THE COMMAND: Recall a moment of ______ .
NUMBER OF TIMES COMMAND USED: Until the complete flattening of the preclear’s communication lag takes place, so that he can readily and at some length and quantity give replies without any difficulty.
COMMUNICATION: Always acknowledge with an “O.K.” or an “all right” every answer which the preclear gives you. Always let the preclear originate any communication he wishes to originate, or comment on the process, and acknowledge his origin of communication or comment. In other words, do not override his effort to communicate to you as this will considerably reduce his tone rise.
DUPLICATION: Make sure that you, the auditor, duplicate the command over, and over, and over until the comm lag is flat, and do not be detoured by any rationale of your own into any other process simply because you are unwilling to continue the duplication of the command.
APPLICATION: In the blank space of the command can be placed any subject of any concern or consideration of the preclear whether theta or entheta.
EXAMPLE: The preclear is studious. The auditor then applies Straight Wire in this fashion: “Recall a moment of studiousness*.” The preclear does so and says that he has or describes the time. It will be observed that the first one may take a considerable length of time and that the length of time intervening between the question and the reply will vary from here on until the communication lag is entirely flat, which means that the process may have to be continued for half an hour, an hour, or many hours. The communication lag is known to be flat when the replies are readily given without pause or hesitation and without any comment on the preclear’s part. The moment the preclear says he has recalled a time or describes the time he has recalled, which is optional, the auditor says, “O.K.” or “all right,” acknowledging the fact that

* The reason we’ve used “studious” here instead of “tired” or “dead” is to keep the reader in present time. We want him to get the data not paralysis.


Copyright (©) l955 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.

he has received the preclear’s communication, at which moment the auditor then places the exact question once more. An additional symptom of a flat process is that the preclear will no longer be studious. But, as preclears do not know how studious they are, it is best to run the process until the communication lag is flat. It is not necessary for the auditor to demand NEW times every time. The preclear can recall the same time if he desires to do so.
OBSERVED PHENOMENON: The time track phenomenon will be observed while delivering this Straight Wire question. It will manifest itself in this fashion. The first answers of the preclear will probably be relatively close to present time and then will be further back into the past, at which time they will begin to progress (at some time they will begin to progress forward into the future) and will come close to present time again, when they will once more turn around and go into the past and then come into the future. In other words, the preclear will give the time A DAY OR SO AGO when he was studious, then a time A YEAR OR SO AGO when he was studious, then a time WHEN HE WAS A CHILD when he was studious, then a time WHEN HE WAS SIXTEEN when he was studious, then a time LAST YEAR when he was studious, then a time THREE DAYS AGO when he was studious, then a time TWO YEARS AGO when he was studious, then a time when he was THREE YEARS OLD and he was studious, then a time when he was EIGHT YEARS OLD and he was studious, then a time YESTERDAY when he was studious, and so forth. In other words, the preclear sweeps up and down the time track. The caution to be observed in this is, never leave the process when the preclear is recalling moments which are far into the past. Leave the process when the preclear is recalling times relatively close to present time. Otherwise you stick the preclear on the track.
GOAL OF THE PROCESS: The goal of many processes is to raise the selfdeterminism of the preclear. Memory is an automaticity which is not under the control of the preclear. By taking over the automaticities of memory and forgetting the preclear is capable of greater self-determinism. In view of the fact that all mass could be said to be memory, you will see at once that Straight Wire leads to the control of mass.
PREREQUISITES TO SESSION: Present must be an auditor, a preclear, a place to audit and time in which to audit.
WHEN THE SESSION HAS BEGUN: The session is actually in progress and the process is ready to be administered only when the preclear is aware of the fact that an auditor is present, that HE is present, that the auditing room is present and that an auditing session is in progress. TWO-WAY COMMUNICATION or asking the preclear to locate objects in the room simply by NOTICING THAT THEY ARE THERE (a lower process than Two-Way Communication) should then be engaged upon until such time as the preclear is aware of his surroundings and the condition.
ON WHAT PRECLEAR TO USE STRAIGHT WIRE: Straight Wire can be used on any preclear who is AWARE OF HIS SURROUNDINGS, THE AUDITOR, AND AUDITING SESSION AND WHO HAS REALITY UPON THE GOAL OF AUDITING. This is signalized by the preclear being in fairly good two-way communication with the auditor. Straight Wire should not be employed on preclears who are in very poor two-way communication.
SUBJECTS ON WHICH STRAIGHT WIRE CAN BE USED: Straight Wire can be employed on ANY SUBJECT OR CONDITION. It will be discovered that the straight wire processes are PROBABLY THE BEST RESOLUTION OF BLACK CASES. The resolution of a black case is indeed contained rather succinctly in the auditing command, “Recall a time when you were looking at blackness.” The entire HIDE to SERENITY scale can be employed with considerable tone change in the preclear. The key to exteriorization lies in the auditing command: “Recall a time when you were in or associated with a body.” Peculiarities, physical deformities or conditions of any kind could be used on the above straight wire basis with success.

I have given you this brief rundown on Modern Straight Wire, not because it is all there is to say on the subject, but because I wanted to give you the exact essentials

present in Modern Straight Wire as rapidly and as efficiently as possible, so that they could be used without having to go through a great deal of material. However, a person, to use Straight Wire, should know a great deal about Straight Wire. While he could simply use the essentials above and could produce a considerable change in a case on any subject, an auditor who is not skilled would be held up by the duplication factor. He would have a tendency, under, of course, very good alibis of his own, to desert the command itself before the process was flat. He would have a tendency to change the command to something else. He would have a tendency to go on excursive trips into the side roads of the process, since a great many comments, considerations and phenomena will come up while Straight Wire is in progress. The self-discipline necessary to continue an auditing command over, and over, and over, and over is not a light discipline. In fact we could say that an auditor who has not himself had a great deal of duplication run would find himself very resistive to repeating this auditing command to a preclear for a long period of time. However, this does not go to say that an auditor in terrible condition himself, knowing this fact, could not then grit his teeth and pitch in and go on and continue a two-way communication with the preclear, and go on and ask this auditing question over, and over, and over, and over until the preclear’s case was solved. Not only is this possible, but it has been done very often. And, in fact, we have a great deal of respect for auditors who, although they themselves are in relatively poor condition, yet go on and produce tremendous advances in cases. We, of course, get more enthusiastic about auditors who are in good shape, producing good results, but we cannot but admire the stick-to-itivity some auditors have in carrying through processes which are above their own case level.
Now, just because we have a modern Straight Wire which is interestingly exact in its application and very predictable in its results, is no reason why we have to throw away all other processes. The Six Basic Steps, done as they are done today, are, of course, of great value and do not go into the discard simply because we have a more effective, more exact and simpler Straight Wire.
There is one particular caution which should be observed in administering Straight Wire: that A PRECLEAR WILL VERY OFTEN GIVE A NO-COMM-LAG REACTION TO A PROCESS WHICH IS ABOVE HIS LEVEL. He will not get well on the process; he will not improve on the process, but also he does not comm-lag on the process. The process is being done more or less by some circuit. It is being done without any reality and it is not involving the preclear at all. One has to go far enough south so that the preclear develops a comm lag. Now, if you were to run Straight Wire on some preclear and simply get your answers every two or three seconds and keep getting answers for a long period of time, you would discover at length that the process was not improving the preclear. The reason the process is not improving the preclear is because the process is above the preclear and the preclear has no reality upon his recalls or his answers. In such a wise it would be very wise to start in below Two-Way Communication and get the preclear to spot objects in the room. Not walk over to them, or perform an 8-C, which is above Straight Wire on the tone scale, but simply to look around and find that there is a chair in the room, that there is a table, and so on. This done for a while orients the preclear and it is discovered that he will go into two-way communication with the auditor. Two-Way Communication, then, about the preclear’s everyday life should ensue, and after this, R2-20, PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS, should be run flat on the preclear, for the preclear who is very short on problems and who is incapable of arriving at solutions is not likely to give up any case problem and is not likely to arrive at any solution. So, we understand that there are actually three points below Straight Wire. Now, a preclear who would need Problems and Solutions run on him at great length is liable, oddly enough, not to comm-lag on Straight Wire and also not to improve upon it. In this wise, the preclear’s reality on the question or the response is very low and he is simply being monitored by the auditor. The auditor is more or less running all of the preclear’s machinery, an oddity which we observe in some auditing sessions. Although the auditor is running the preclear’s machinery, neither the auditor nor the preclear is aware of it. The auditor isn’t aware of it because he would rather not be, and the preclear isn’t aware of it because he isn’t aware of very much anyhow.

Just as an automobile doesn’t much care who drives it, so do some low toned preclears not care who is running the circuits.
A variation on Modern Straight Wire, a little older but still quite effective, is “Give me something you wouldn’t mind remembering,” and “Give me something you wouldn’t mind forgetting.” These two commands are run independently of each other, not alternately, and each is flattened. These are very, very effective commands. It is remarkable that “Give me something you wouldn’t mind forgetting” hits people who are dislocated so hard that a many-hour comm lag may ensue on the question. These people are afraid to forget anything. This is very, very effective auditing and is not discarded. It can be used a little lower on the scale than Modern Straight Wire, but it is slower.
An auditor should test Straight Wire very rigorously in the recommended form given above before forming any forthright opinions concerning it. He should observe that running this Straight Wire on a very low toned preclear produces no comm lag and no betterment of the preclear. This is the first thing he should learn about it. Then he should learn that run in its proper place on a preclear who is in two-way communication and is in fair condition, it produces remarkable, stable results which last for a very long time. It is not a trick process. It is a plow-horse sort of process, but once it has hauled the preclear up the scale it leaves him there. A preclear’s continued stability for a long time after an auditing session is very desirable. The trick momentary flash results sometimes do not last. An auditor should also learn that he himself is capable of repeating one command over, and over, and over, and over, without varying it, without getting so bored with it that he himself goes out of the auditing session. Remember, when the auditor leaves the auditing session (although he is still there giving auditing commands) it sometimes occurs that very little auditing gets done, since an auditing session of necessity has to have an auditor and a preclear present and auditing in progress.
It will be startling to you to know that this process is a specific process for a black case and does relieve the black case’s blackness. And, after and above the black case level this process is a specific for non-exteriorization and will produce exteriorization if “Recall a time when you were in or associated with a body” is employed over a long enough period of time.
There is a great deal more to know about Straight Wire. There are a great deal of phenomena which occur in Straight Wire and there are many other data to be studied about Straight Wire. However, if the auditor cares to study these, first let him learn thoroughly what we mean by Modern Straight Wire and that is laid out above with exactness.


ARTICLE TWO

The History of Straight Wire

The old Dianetic auditor will have no difficulty in recalling the earliest days of Straight Wire.
Once upon a time Straight Wire was one of the most intricate, tricky, intuitive processes known. There were auditors who were excellent at this, but they were alone in their skill. There were many, many auditors who never did make Straight Wire work.
Straight Wire of the old Dianetic type, expertly done, many times produced such fascinating results that auditors would then specialize in it, but, because it has often failed, their specialization would be tempered with a restless search for some other process that would do the job with greater exactness.
The genus of Straight Wire immediately followed the release of “The First Book,” Dianetics: The Modern Science of Mental Health, on May 9, 1950. I developed Straight Wire a little too late to get it into the text of that book, but taught the first ten students at 42 Aberdeen Road, Elizabeth, New Jersey, this process and actually got these students sufficiently expert in the use of Straight Wire that they could straighten out present time problems on preclears with remarkable facility.

Here is an example of the earliest form of Straight Wire: A preclear is observed to be possessed of a nervous affliction—the rapid blinking of one eye. The auditor asks him, “Who had that affliction?” and asks him this with sufficient communication and discussion so that the preclear at length actually SPOTS A TIME WHEN HE OBSERVED THIS AFFLICTION IN ANOTHER THAN HIMSELF. Now, today with our understanding of Ownership Processing, as covered in the Congress of Eastern Scientologists on June third to sixth [1955] at the Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C., it becomes highly technical, for naturally the affliction, if it persisted, must be misowned. But, it would also be understood that the preclear himself might be the creator of the condition. If the preclear himself had created the eye twitch at some time in his past, recalling it in somebody else would simply reinforce the eye twitch; thus Straight Wire would not work. As, let us say crudely, this condition exists in about 50% of the cases on whom Straight Wire was used, we certainly would have, by the factors involving ownership, a misunderstanding of the process and a great many failures.
In view of the fact that a thing persists only if it is misowned—if a person himself has created it and says somebody else has created it or if a person is saying he created something which somebody else actually created—we get a persistence of the space or mass. If a person created the condition and then says that he himself created the condition, a vanishment of the condition will occur. If somebody else, a specific person, created the condition and the preclear says that person created the condition, then again we get a vanishment. Only when we misown or miscall the creation of a condition do we get a persistence. Thus we can see that the earliest Straight Wire depended in a great measure upon calling the correct ownership; and recalling the correct ownership by recalling observation of the condition in somebody else would be then sufficient to bring about a diminishment of the condition.
Thus, repeating, Straight Wire would not work on conditions which the person had himself created, as long as the auditing command was “Recall a time when you saw that in somebody else.” This would have to be supplemented by “Recall a time when you decided this was a good thing.” And if those two auditing commands had been used on any condition and if we had also known about comm lag and duplication of the question, then Straight Wire would have been very successful. As a matter of fact it was quite successful and quite startling but had the above limitations.
Now, the earliest type of Straight Wire was interesting in that it did not embrace the case that couldn’t remember. To handle this type of case we invented a variation, which was simply to ask the preclear to remember something, anything, and keep him remembering something or anything until his confidence in his own memory rose to a point where he could remember and thus could experience the benefit of old-time Straight Wire. An example of this variation was to ask somebody if he could remember something that had happened today or something that he had had for breakfast, and keep on asking him for various things until he did have a solid reality on one recall or another.
But this too was quite limited as to process, and in order to further improve memories we came out with what is now known as the next-to-the-last list of Self Analysis, which is “Recall something real,” “Recall a time when you were in communication with someone,” “Recall a time when someone was in communication with you,” “Recall a time when you felt some affinity for someone,” “Recall a time when someone felt some affinity for you,” which process capitalized on the ARC triangle which we came out with in July of 1950, which was much better described in the book Notes on the Lectures of November of 1950 and expanded considerably in Science of Survival which was written in the spring of 1951 and released that summer, the above list appearing in Self Analysis, which was written in September of 1951.
Succeeding this “next-to-the-last list of Self Analysis” was Validation Straight Wire, the theory of which was to validate all the good moments in the preclear’s past by having him recall them. An oddity immediately demonstrated itself, however, in the use of Validation Straight Wire to the effect that the preclear would recall just so many moments which were good and would then fall off into moments which were very bad

indeed. This phenomenon had, by the way, been observed much earlier as a comment on the running of pleasure moments, a process developed by Parker Morgan in Elizabeth in 1950.
After Validation Straight Wire the whole subject of Straight Wire more or less fell into disrepute and decay, and a great deal of concentration was given to actual incidents on the whole track and an enormous amount of phenomena which had been dug up through my work in Wichita. Only “next-to-the-last list of Self Analysis” continued to be used right up to the time when we developed “Something you wouldn’t mind remembering,” “Something you wouldn’t mind forgetting,” in one of the clinical units of the summer of 1954. Immediately a great many limitations on Straight Wire were swept away and Straight Wire became a much more important process because it was getting much better results. Here for the first time we had entered into the idea that forgettingness was an actual attribute. In other words, it was a skill. A person forgot things so that he could have things. And, realizing that this was a skill and that it was on full automatic we, of course, had the reason why people were not able to remember. They were so anxious to forget.
In the spring of 1955, in the tenth clinical unit, we discovered that “something you wouldn’t mind FORGETTING” was far, far more important than “something you wouldn’t mind remembering,” and made several tests which demonstrated a considerable rise in tone as a result of using this single command: “Something you wouldn’t mind forgetting.” However, because many more interesting things were showing up and occurring we did not give this really the attention it deserved, and actually to this moment the process is not as thoroughly tried as it might be. It might very well occur that this process would succeed many other processes as something which would produce a long-continued and stable result.
With the first clinical unit [October 5—November 16, 1953], which was taught in Camden, New Jersey, we made a considerable codification of “automaticity” and “randomity,” which had first been introduced in the Philadelphia lectures of December, 1952. The understanding of these two things demonstrated that THE GREATEST AUTOMATICITY IN WHICH ANYONE WAS ENGAGED WAS REMEMBERING AND FORGETTING. Thus, exercises on remembering and forgetting were, of course, very, very important.
It should be understood, then, that no amount of engram running or present time processes would handle this highly specialized thing, automatic remembering and automatic forgetting. And in view of the role remembering and forgetting play in everyday living we couldn’t consider the person very thoroughly processed unless we had taken his memory into account. Thus, whatever other processes are run on the individual, something should be done in order to bring this automatic memory factor under control.
We have rather suspected of recent months that it is not necessary to have a great versatility of subject in remembering in order to restore memory. The mere act of remembering something is enough to take over the automaticity. In other words, there isn’t an automaticity for every subject you can remember; there is simply an automaticity on the subject of memory. Similarly on forgetting. One might think there was a forgetting automaticity on every type and subject known, but there is only one mechanism behind all of this and that is simply an automaticity of forgetting.
Now, if you were to stabilize a preclear in present time and do all sorts of other things with him and yet neglect exercising his memory in any degree it is probable that you would have left the sphere of recall untouched to his detriment and would have left him with this automaticity. And the automaticity of remembering and the automaticity of forgetting could, of course, push him on down again. So, we should say that any preclear who becomes stable should have had exercises in remembering and forgetting.
The actual history of Straight Wire is of course a very old one, much older than Dianetics. We did not invent Straight Wire. We discovered and observed a great many mechanics about memory which had been neglected hitherto. But, we find that Straight Wire or memory exercises are actually very ancient and have been used for at least sixty-five years.

There were many excursions and experiments made in Straight Wire in early Dianetic days. One of these was Repetitive Straight Wire. Simply asking a person to remember something over, and over, and over again. This naturally succeeded from the running of an engram. Running an engram through, and through, and through eventually erases it, so it was tried with Straight Wire and it was discovered that this was fairly effective, but again was not an answer.
The old Dianetic auditor can probably remember early Straight Wire with affection and probably can remember a great many successes as a result of using it. And strictly as a nostalgic exercise, he should know now that with OWNERSHIP PROCESSING as given in the Congress of Eastern Scientologists, he could make old-time Straight Wire totally effective with the question “Can you recall a time when somebody else had that condition?” “Can you recall a time when you decided to have that condition?” on all those cases who are already in fairly good condition in the memory department. He would have to ask BOTH of these questions of ANY case in order to get a result and he would have to ask BOTH of these questions MANY, MANY TIMES, until the preclear had flattened his comm lag. This would be a rather crude form of Straight Wire, but it would at least be completing the cycle of action from olden times.
Straight Wire is one of the most agreed upon things in Dianetics and Scientology. There may have been many people who questioned the advisability of running engrams or running secondaries or scanning engrams or doing something else, but, nobody ever questioned very seriously the efficacity of Straight Wire when it worked. It is, and has been broadly accepted as a near synonym for Dianetics and Scientology.


ARTICLE THREE

The Theory of Straight Wire

Memory has played an intimate part in existence since the first Thetan. The creation of time and the creation of memory were concurrent incidents. Let us take a single particle. We find that with this single particle no time is possible, since the space occupied by the single particle would be indeterminate in placing the particle. Unless, of course, there were eight particles demarking the space itself, at which time you would now have nine particles, and it would be very simple to have time. But, with one particle we cannot have time. We have to have two particles to have time. And we have to have two particles to have memory.
We have to have two particles to have memory because we would have to have a reference point for establishing where the moving particle had been if one had remained motionless. In other words, let us take a motionless particle and then let us have another particle move in relationship to that motionless particle; we would then be able to tell that it had moved by remembering that it had been where it was originally. And then remembering successively the positions it had gone through until it arrived at its present time position. The moment that it moved further one would have a situation again of remembering what had been present time for it, but observing what was now its present time position.
MEMORY IS THEN, MECHANICALLY, THE TRACKING OF POSITIONS. Where POSTULATES or CONSIDERATIONS are concerned, however, we must first have the consideration that space, particles in time can exist and then THAT ONE CAN REMEMBER. This latter is more important than the mechanical facts of time. For if one continually makes the consideration that he cannot remember, he is at once making the consideration that he cannot discover the former position of earlier particles, and any advanced student who knows about PERFECT DUPLICATION, or if you care to read about that in The Creation of Human Ability, will find that it would now be next to impossible for the individual to cause the vanquishment of the particle. In other words, if the person cannot remember where the particle came from originally, he cannot establish its original position. And being unable to establish its original

position he cannot get an exact duplication of it, which is to say a perfect duplicate of it, and so will get a persistence of the particle. Once one has forgotten its original position, which is the mechanical aspect of this, one is then no longer able to cause it to disappear.
In processing we very often run into a person who has “heavy facsimiles.” In other words, these facsimiles are so heavy and so weighty that he can barely push them around. This is simply basically a postulate that these things are heavy, that energy is heavy, but next to that it is a consideration that one cannot do anything to them. One cannot cause them to vanish—therefore, one cannot cause them to affect one less.
Observing, then, that things tend to become more permanent and more solid the less one can remember where they came from (though this is not a total truth, you understand), we could consider that ALL OBJECTS ARE MEMORY. Or more accurately, that ALL OBJECTS ARE MIS-MEMORY. If an object is there, one comment you could make about it is that everybody has forgotten when and where it was created. And having forgotten when and where it was created, it now persists. Thus, you might say that objects depend, or persistent spaces depend, entirely for their persistence upon forgettingness. Which is to say, mis-memory.
Now, as memory applies to postulates and considerations as well as to spaces and masses, it becomes obvious that conditions, good conditions or bad, would tend to persist where they were mis-remembered. In other words, if you knew exactly where all the particles of your car were created and how many movements back they were created and who had created them (the more important fact) and who had assembled them into a car you would not have any car. It would simply disappear. In other words, a perfect memory would bring about a vanishment of all objects and spaces.
Well, at least that is the theory and the theory is borne out by the fact that it is only necessary to remember who created something to have it diminish in density, or, in case of a light mass of energy, such as an engram, to vanish.
In that Thetans become very possessed with the idea of making nothing out of everything (their primary obsession), memory, an exact and persistent memory, becomes an obsession with the Thetan. He knows that when he no longer remembers the exact genus of all those things in his vicinity he will no longer be able to make them disappear. Therefore, a failure in memory causes a Thetan to be very frantic.
Now, we needn’t go too deeply into just exactly why this is, but I will brush it in passing. ALL THINGS LIKE TO BE DUPLICATED. A THETAN HAS NO MASS, NO SPACE, NO WAVELENGTH, AND NO TIME. Therefore to get a perfect perception of anything, he thinks the best choice would be to look at something which has no mass, no space, no wavelength, and no time. Of course, this is impossible. But, this is a Thetan being duplicated, and this, indeed, would be the most comfortable frame of mind for a Thetan—to have no persistence or non-persistence of any kind in its vicinity. Thus, when a Thetan begins to see more and more spaces (and he is not space) and when he begins to see more and more masses (and he is not mass) and when he begins to see more and more wave motion (and he is not wave motion) he conceives the fact that nothing is duplicating him, which is to say that nothing is taking a look at his nothingness and becoming nothing. In other words, he’s losing control of things.
Well, it just so happens that a Thetan knows that if he could remember the exact place everything had been generated, the exact time and the exact conditions and the exact person who did it, he would then get a disappearance. Thus, when a Thetan begins to object to life and considers that this idea of masses and spaces is foolish and should be discontinued (as the boys evidently believe in the nuclear physics department) they can only think in frantic terms of making nothing out of everything.
It does not happen to be a healthy frame of mind for a Thetan to be obsessed with making nothing out of things. We see people around who, themselves, have considerable bulk but who are unable to make nothing out of things but who try all the time to do so anyway. For instance, you tell a joke; they say, well that’s nothing, and they’ve heard that before. You buy a new hat and they say they’ve always liked it. You invent a new dance step and they say it has been done before. They are, on a covert level, trying to make nothing out of something. These people already know they can’t

make nothing out of masses and spaces. They are already obsessed with the idea that masses and spaces are dangerous to them and therefore, they do have to make nothing out of them. And these people at the same time will be obsessed with problems in memory and will probably develop a fantastic comm lag on the auditing question “Give me something you wouldn’t mind forgetting.” It does not follow that everybody who wants to improve his memory is obsessed with making nothing out of everything. But it does demonstrate how we get these obsessions on the subject of memory. Actually you could probably remember one-one hundredth of what you are able to remember and still get along. Certainly I know lots of places where people would employ you if you could remember just one-thousandth of what you are able to remember at this moment. The income tax bureau is one of them.
Memory, strangely enough, has very little to do with intelligence. Intelligence is the ability to pose and resolve problems relating to survival. Without some memory, one would have no track of time, but, an absolutely perfect memory does not necessarily connote a perfect intelligence. If one’s memory were really perfect, he would have no objects or spaces with which to pose or resolve problems. So, therefore, a certain amount of mis-memory (or forgettingness) is necessary to have factors with which to play a game.
When memory is entered as a factor into the posing and resolving of problems one then gets the phenomenon of time track. One conceives through “experience” the IDENTITIES, SIMILARITIES AND DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE PRESENT TIME FACTORS AND THE FACTORS OF THE PAST. AND HERE WE HAVE THE KEY TO ABERRATION.
Theoretically, a person could not be aberrated who was not living on a time track, since he would have no need of any kind to associate any spaces or objects of the present with any spaces or objects of the past. Now, naturally, no spaces or objects of the present are ever exactly identical to spaces or objects of the past. But, a person through mis-memory will eventually come into a situation where he does actually conceive a present time situation to be identical with a past situation. When he conceives this automatically and with great ease he is then in a fair way to being aberrated.
One could not go so far as to say that no experience at all is necessary to the living of life. But, one could go so far as to say that a total reliance upon experience or hearsay or second-hand observation in life brings a person into a very frightening state of mind.
Therefore, mis-memory could be of this kind. One sees a certain number of factors before him. One misremembers some factors that happened to him earlier sufficiently to conceive that these earlier factors are now identical with the factors he faces. When he has managed this he has essentially no time. In other words, IDENTITY does not give him PAST. He says the factors I face right now ARE the factors which confronted me five years ago. But he does not conceive this articulately. He conceives this on a mis-memory basis. He “feels” that the present factors have a significance which is due to nothing but themselves, but it’s actually due to a combination of past factors. This essentially is about all there is to aberration. Aberration is “NO TIME.” It does not conceive that there is any earlier position for any particle.
Thus, we have the interesting fact that a perfect memory to an extreme and absolute that has never existed would bring about a situation of NO UNIVERSE, NO FORM, NO MASS, NO SPACE. And that a completely IMPERFECT memory, which again has never existed, would bring about a total COLLAPSE of all time, and would bring all factors into the present. Now, somewhere between these two lies the game called SANITY. It is in the effort to attain this game called sanity that the auditor exercises the memory of the preclear. He must exercise the memory in such a way as to uncover a great many similarities which the preclear thought were identities.
Now, here is the subject of valence. By valence we mean personality. Theoretically a person could have his own valence. But, more familiarly the term is used to denote the borrowing of the personality of another. A preclear “in his father’s valence” is acting as though he were his father. The word “valence” means in Latin, strength (valentia). We use it in Dianetics and Scientology as meaning personality, but it has not

escaped the value of strength. A person takes at will the valences of a commanding nature or valences of a very obedient nature in order to answer up to various situations. One person may routinely use several valences. In order to handle women he takes the valence of his father, in order to handle students he takes the valence of a bulldog. In order to get drunk he takes the valence of a horse. There may or may not be any sense to the valence beyond the fact that it was a strong valence in a situation relating to the subject. In other words, he has mental image pictures unconsciously experienced by him which have as their dominant or obedient personality things related to the subject which he then identifies with the subject. Many a psychotic is in the valence of a bedpost. Others are in the valence of God. But these are totally stuck valences; any sane person routinely uses in his modus operandi of existence a vast category of valences. To say that somebody is capable of two or three valences would be a misnomer. A person takes many valences. Now, it is not necessary to pick up these valences or these personalities or “strengths” or “weaknesses” in our expanded understanding of the word in order to handle existence. A Thetan is perfectly capable of mocking up a beingness or valence sufficient to the situation simply compounded from the elements of the situation. If he does this easily he is very intelligent. He has a good imagination. Or you might say a good valencination. Only when he has a tremendous successful valence in the past which has enormous command value or enormous obedience value and then when he forgets this and conceives that it is all in the present does he assume anything like a fixed valence. He then is, you might say, “himself.” The “himself” or “herself” is simply a valence which is moderately commanding, moderately obedient and which is “dreamed up” or “taken out of past experience.”
The automaticities of memory are dependent upon this valence situation. By automaticity we mean anything that goes on running outside the control of the individual. This in its severest definition would seem to indicate that everything was automatic except those things upon which the person had his immediate attention. And this is not too far from wrong. It is not bad to have things automatic, it is bad to have placed things on automatic which are detrimental to one’s happiness and life. The more automaticities exist around the individual the less living that individual is likely to do.
This is quite interesting to observe, off the subject a little, in a business office which is determined to modernize with all the latest machinery and equipment. It is the theory that the introduction of all these automaticities will bring down the number of people on staff and will bring up the volume of work. Now, there is a make-or-break point beyond which the introduction of automaticities is detrimental to the business itself and will actually cut down the amount of outgoing communication. In fact, in a great many overly machined business offices the greatest amount of work done is by the repairmen, keeping the machinery in action. But, without a certain amount of automaticity in an office, it is true that very little work gets done.
Harm comes from this factor of automaticity only when people have forgotten that something has been put on automatic, for when a thing is put on automatic, which is to say, when it is put in a situation where it is intended to run without any observation of any kind from anybody and without any knowledge on the part of anybody that it is running, we suddenly find a sphere of deteriorization, and we cannot trace it. We do not know what has broken down since we did not know what was there and had been placed on automatic.
Here memory plays an interesting role. The first requisite to putting something on automatic is to forget that it has been placed on automatic. And that in the severest Scientological use of the word is what we mean by a full automaticity. Something is going on and we do not know its cause. We do not know its cause because we have forgotten that we have placed it there. Or, we have forgotten that anyone placed it there. We do not even know that anything IS there. But, something is happening in that sphere.
Now, although this relates to many parts of life we are apt to specialize on the psychosomatic character of this manifestation. We have forgotten or maybe never did know who put a bad leg into this body. A bad leg is in this body. We try, by moving it

around or by manipulation, to change the bad leg and find out that we get an additional persistence to the bad leg. Only by discovering the ownership of the decision or idea or mass of the bad leg would we get a complete vanquishment of the bad leg. Now, if we went just a little bit further and remembered also who made the leg in the first place, and remembered this fully to the extent of remembering who made all the particles that went together and made the leg and who made all of the organizations of food which fed the leg, we would have no leg. So, we see that we could carry memory through to a complete vanquishment.
But, automaticity and memory do not happen to be limited entirely and completely to just one factor—psychosomatic illness. In fact, a person who would work memory simply to get somebody over a psychosomatic illness has himself a very bad identification. Life does not consist of psychosomatic illnesses. As a matter of fact, the Scientology auditor who tells preclears that he is going to get them over their psychosomatic illness has already created a new automaticity, as far as the preclear is concerned.
Now, the PRECLEAR isn’t going to go do it; the AUDITOR, by some necromancy, is going to do it and we’re likely to get a failure on the part of the auditor to remedy that psychosomatic illness. As a matter of fact, an auditor has no business at all promising anybody that he will ever do anything about a psychosomatic illness. Not, of course, because he can’t, because of all the professionals in the world, the auditor is probably the one most likely to knock out a psychosomatic illness. But an auditor who says he’s going to knock out a psychosomatic illness and goes in the direction of knocking such things out is limiting himself so woefully that it’s hardly worth while knowing how to audit. When preclears start telling us that they want to get rid of such and such a psychosomatic illness we are apt to gaze at them with a questioning eye since the person has an insufficiency of problems or he wouldn’t have the psychosomatic illness, and if we took it away he would just get another one unless we also remedied PROBLEMS. And all we can see out of this statement of the preclear is that this preclear has his attention fixed on something and he ought to have his attention unfixed off of it. Well, if he has his attention this thoroughly fixed on a psychosomatic illness he probably, on a gradient scale, has his attention fixed on a great many other and unpleasant things. And as a result we have a problem here in an individual who is stuck all over the track. He’s identifying, he’s misremembering, he is in, to say the least, an interesting state. And even if we did get him over the psychosomatic illness we probably, if we limited the auditing to this, would not have made him happy. So what we tell such a preclear is, “Well, I may or may not do something about the psychosomatic illness, but I will certainly make you feel happier about it.” Usually he is fairly satisfied with such an answer.
The earliest coining of the memory exercises known as “Straight Wire” came from the formula of cause and effect. In 1950 in the early HDA Lectures we described this as the act of stringing a line between present time and some incident in the past, and stringing that line directly and without any detours. In other words, we conceived the auditor was stringing a straight wire of memory between the actual genus of a condition and present time, thus demonstrating that there was a difference of time and space in the condition then and the condition now, and that the preclear conceding this difference would then rid himself of the condition or at least be able to handle it. This essentially was the overcoming of automaticities or the locating of automaticities. The preclear had some engram that had a command value over him and it was necessary to locate the source of that situation in order to bring it under the preclear’s control. The term “Straight Wire” was used to differentiate between Dianetic memory exercises and those which had been used by psychotherapy in the past. And a great need for such differentiation was necessary, because there’s many a Dianetic auditor who permitted “free association” and other unworkable techniques to go on in the guise of auditing. Hence the term “Straight Wire,” and that term seems to be an apt one since it stuck with auditors all during these years.
The motto of Straight Wire could be said to be, DISCOVER THE ACTUAL GENUS OF ANY CONDITION AND YOU WILL PLACE THE CONDITION UNDER THE CONTROL OF THE PRECLEAR.

ARTICLE FOUR

Straight Wire and Present Time

One of the earliest observations of Straight Wire which we made was on no less a preclear than Burke Belknap (then studying to be an HDA) in the small reception room at 42 Aberdeen Road in Elizabeth, New Jersey. Burke had come in complaining of a headache and in an offhand way I said, “I’ll handle that” and asked him to remember who had a headache. He promptly came up with a memory of someone else having a headache and then someone else having a headache and finally of someone who complained about headaches and abruptly his headache was gone. Well, this was very triumphant, but I did not have enough sense to quit at that exact moment but started to run him through the incident he had last recalled, and instantly his headache was back.
Now, we are telling you this for more reason than nostalgia. This was the first time we observed the difference between Straight Wire and engram running to the degree that: Straight Wire did not run out the engram but only got it out of present time. Naturally, in theory, we had had this around for some time. But, here was an exact example of this very thing occurring. In other words, you could remember something and feel good, and then could run immediately into the engram and feel terrible all over again. Now, this immediately and instantly gives us the reason why psychotherapy was unworkable before Dianetics. One would get the preclear into present time (and of course the preclear is always in present time but the engrams are there also, so it is more accurate to say, get the engrams out of present time) and then have the engram get into present time again and have the preclear in the same state as before. In other words, as long as and as often as we wanted to get these mental image pictures of pain and unconsciousness into and out of present time we would have a change accordingly in the preclear. Theoretically we could throw birth into present time and out of present time, into present time and out of present time, and have the preclear as rapidly have and not have the symptoms of birth. Now when we realize that our machinery as a body-plus-Thetan is being continually monitored by the environment and that the machinery which throws engrams into present time is also monitorable by the environment and by others in it, we see that simply throwing the engrams out of present time and keeping the preclear in present time would apparently be inadequate processing. Here evidently we would make a preclear well and would then make him unwell just to the degree that we took out of present time and put into present time the engram causing that unwellness.
Now, in view of the fact that an engram contains pain and unconsciousness, it is very likely to become an automaticity. Thus, we are playing tag with an unknown genus whenever we are playing tag with engrams. A preclear does not like to look at things which suddenly make him feel like his head is being torn half off. Thus, he will continue to keep out of existence for himself, and to refuse control over, all engrams.
By old Dianetic standards, then, Straight Wire was merely a patch-up process. It did not do too much for the preclear but made him momentarily comfortable. It did this simply by slipping out of present time, engrams. Engrams were held in present time by the preclear’s making a bridge between present time and the engram, of locks, which is to say conscious moments which lay on top of the engram. In other words, we could have a sort of a picture of a dark, Lying-in-wait engram, which had happened or had been created at some early date, which had been keyed in by a conscious incident a little bit later, which had been bridged by a repetition of similarities until at last the preclear conceived an identity between the moment of the engram’s occurrence and present time. By this bridge of locks we would then have an engram being present time.
So much for the early attitude. What is the attitude about this now? There is no real change. It’s just that THE PRECLEAR CAN BE BROUGHT TO CONTROL A MASS OF ENERGY AS HEAVY AS AN ENGRAM BY THE GRADIENT SCALE OF CONTROLLING LIGHTER MASSES.

Here we have essentially the idea of the person who lifts a calf every day until the calf becomes a bull. Then we have a person who is able to lift a huge animal. Now, I don’t know that anybody ever tried this, but theoretically it would actually occur. Certainly, it is much more likely that this gradient scale of lifting would more workably apply to locks and engrams than to pure bull.
By Straight Wire, on modern standards, we get the preclear to handle the light key-ins. Over and over and over, new incidents or the same incidents until at last he is able to handle the actual genus of the situation, at which time the condition, of course, will vanish.
The great oddity is that a preclear is so wary of a heavy, hidden mass like an engram, that when it comes into present time automatically he will not or cannot throw it out of present time. And this is the main thing which is wrong with the preclear. A heavy mental image from the past comes into present time, then the preclear cannot throw it out of present time. If he is unable to throw it out of present time it will stay in present time, which is to say, ride along with the preclear.
One of the goals of Modern Straight Wire is to get the preclear to throw the engram out of present time or into present time at will. In other words, to teach him that he doesn’t necessarily have to vanquish all energy masses—that he can handle these energy masses and get them up to him or away from him at will.
A clear, by definition, is somebody who does not have any engrams in present time with him. By actual practice a clear would have to be a stable Thetan exterior since the body itself is composed of energy masses which unfortunately contain engrams.
We are no longer trying to rid present time of all engrams. We are simply trying to bring about an ABILITY on the part of the preclear to handle energy masses in the past or in present time at will. And by a gradient scale to cure his fright of being confronted with a picture and his compulsion and necessity to obey that picture.


ARTICLE FIVE

Straight Wire and Pictures

With the advent of communication processing a new method of handling pictures arose. Within minutes after the first discovery that communication alone would vanquish masses we found that communication would handle pictures themselves. In view of the fact that pictures have been more or less a common denominator of investigation since the earliest Dianetic days, we became very interested in this startling new method of handling the bank.
Whenever a person of the usual Mark I Homo Sapiens type is asked to remember something, he gets a picture along with it. This, no matter what names or description you place upon it, is simply a picture which has been taken of an event in the past, said picture now being in the present. This automatic feed mechanism has gone relatively unnoticed but occasionally described back through the centuries. It seems that this should be considered very usual. However, it was not until Dianetics that anyone made any kind of a thorough study of these pictures.
In the first place, of what were these pictures composed? It was an old saw in mysticism that mental energy was one thing and physical energy was another thing. I suppose this was stated many times out of hopefulness rather than fact. Today enough data has come to hand to establish that this mental energy, such as is contained in a picture, and the energy of earth or of the electric light company, are different only in wavelength. The proof of this is that a person, by remedying havingness, can increase his weight if he only pulls the havingness in, and can decrease his actual weight by throwing the havingness away. Of course, a preclear has to be in fairly good condition and has to be able to throw away or possess havingness at will in order to do this, but in actual experiment weight has been changed many pounds either way by this. And, believe me, if you can weigh mental energy on a set of Toledo scales you certainly have


something very intimate to the energy of the electric light company, and you don’t have anything different than the energy of the electric light company, save only in characteristic.
These mental image pictures, then, are actually composed of energy. They have mass, they exist in space, and they follow some very, very definite routines of behavior, the most interesting of which to us just now is the fact that they appear when somebody thinks of something. He thinks of a certain dog, he gets a picture of the dog. When a person is rather far gone, when he thinks of the dog he gets the picture of a house. When he thinks of a house he gets a picture of a cactus. This person’s pictures are not associated with his own thoughts, but are occurring on a total automaticity.
But, what do we have in the first place but an automaticity? An individual thinks of a dog and he gets a picture of that dog. This carried on long enough would bring it about where he would think of one dog and get the picture of another dog. And a little bit further, he would merely think the thought and get a picture without any relationship between the thought and the picture.
Well, if these pictures are actually more or less the same stuff as is sold to you for five cents a kilowatt hour by the power company, then you could suppose that they would have some effect on the human body, and so they do. Pictures are continually being taken by the body or the Thetan or the Thetan’s machinery or the body machinery. You never saw such a complete cinematographic plant in your life as the Thetan-plus-body, Mark I, Homo Sapiens. Something even takes pictures when he is deeply unconscious and during an operation.
Not only does a person take pictures of anything and everything just as you right this moment are taking a picture of this page (if you don’t believe it, close your eyes and take a look at the page again) (oh, you didn’t know you were taking pictures all the time?), but also these pictures then react back on the individual more or less as the incident itself reacted on the individual. Thus, if a person had a bang on the thumb from a hammer, he is certain to have taken a picture of this. Later on this picture gets into present time and his thumb hurts. It is a picture which is impinged upon his beingness so as to reproduce some of the qualities in the picture.
One of the oldest obedience stunts on the track was to convince the Thetan that he ought to “obey the picture.” In fact, according to the O-Meter, people within the last many generations have taught their children to “obey the picture.” In other words, made use of these mental image pictures in order to produce a higher level of obedience on the part of a child. Certainly it might or might not have produced a higher level of obedience, but it did produce a much higher level of conscience and it is in itself practically the anatomy of conscience. Overt act-motivator sequence is itself only the action and reaction of these pictures. A person takes a picture and then the picture turns on him.
Thus, the handling of these pictures becomes very important if one’s going to change the characteristics of an individual. One of the first things, then, that an individual ought to be able to do is to handle these pictures. An individual can’t handle these pictures? He’s in bad shape.
Now, let’s take this thing we call a Black Five. This poor fellow is so far gone he can’t even see pictures any more. He only sees blackness in front of him. Well, this blackness may be some kind of a screen; it may be anything; but at least it prevents him from seeing pictures, and he’s very often keeping himself from being victimized by all these pictures by having a continuous black screen in front of him. That the pictures reach THROUGH the black screen and do influence him anyhow, he hopefully overlooks. However, remember that THIS BLACKNESS ITSELF IS ONLY A PICTURE, and so we don’t have a special category of ( 1 ) people who get pictures, and (2) people who get blackness. We have only one category. We get people who have pictures of various things and people who have pictures of special things. And this is simply a GRADIENT SCALE of how easily does the individual handle these pictures that get into present time. When he handles present time returned pictures very poorly more and more pictures get stacked up in present time and pretty soon he is a fairly “massive” case.

Hence you can appreciate our excitement when we found a new way of handling pictures. There have since been developed, as we became more versed in handling special problems, additional ways, such as Ownership Processing. But to this moment we know of no better routine way of handling pictures than a combination of Straight Wire and the data which we are going to give you here.
Before we go very deeply into this, you should realize that pictures are not bad, and that blackness is not totally bad. Pictures are used by the Thetan to assist his memory. They are not necessary to his memory, but he begins to play with the idea of taking pictures of everything and remembering by pictures as a sort of a game. It is an interesting game. Gives him something to look at. Gives him some mass and makes him happy—up to the point when he collects pictures of great unhappiness; then these moments of unhappiness stay with him simply because he has pictures of them and really for no other reason. As far as blackness is concerned, blackness is usually the protective coating between the preclear and the pictures. Not unusual for a preclear to have a machine, either of his own or belonging to his body, which black-coats every picture that shows up before he looks at it. This keeps him from getting stunned by these pictures. This, by the way, is somewhat different than having blackness in continual and total restimulation. Both of these conditions regarding blackness exist: the machine that makes blackness, and having a black picture in restimulation. There is also simply the blackness of looking around inside of a head, and as yet, the modernness of science has not installed electric lighting inside skulls.
We also get the condition, where these pictures are concerned, of the Thetan’s machinery taking pictures and then trying to show them to the Thetan while the Thetan is inside the head. This is a very interesting condition because the machinery cannot reach the Thetan, but reaches the head of the body instead, and if this machinery is very powerful, which it usually is, the body becomes very uncomfortable solely by reason of having pictures shoved up against it by machinery which is foreign to it.
So we get a lot of conditions which are germane to pictures. But these pictures are not all bad, and the whole subject of pictures is not a bad subject.
And again, before we go any further, you should realize that it is not ABSOLUTELY necessary for the auditor to handle pictures in the fashion we are going to outline now in order to have Straight Wire as given in an earlier article work. But, this is the fillip which really handles pictures and is called “HELLOS AND O.K.’s TO PICTURES.”
The technique has limitations. It is limited by the fact that the auditor can audit Straight Wire on preclears lower on the scale than those who can handle pictures with hellos and O.K.’s. In other words, a rather low toned preclear can simply be run on Straight Wire as given earlier, but when he comes upscale and starts to get pictures this process can then be applied.
The anatomy of the process is simple indeed. Every time the preclear remembers something the auditor asks him, “Did you get a picture?” If the preclear did, which is usually the case, the auditor tells him, “Throw a shower of hellos at it.” The preclear does. The auditor then says, “Have it throw a shower of O.K.’s at you.” The preclear does. The auditor then says, “Is the picture still there?” If the preclear says it is the auditor simply has the preclear complete the cycle of two-way communication with, “Have the picture send a shower of hellos at you,” and when the preclear does, the auditor says, “Throw a shower of O.K.’s at the picture,” which the preclear does. Again the auditor asks him, “Is the picture still there?” If it is, the auditor simply repeats the four commands given above, which is to say, he has the preclear throw a shower of hellos at the picture, has the picture throw a shower of O.K.’s to the preclear, has the picture send a shower of hellos to the preclear, and the preclear send a shower of O.K.’s to the picture. Actually the auditor can have the preclear do this over and over until the picture is gone, for that is the single and solitary goal of the process: to make the picture disappear. It will be discovered that early in processing the auditor will have to make the preclear complete several two-way cycles of communication with the picture before it vanishes, but, as processing continues and as the preclear becomes more and more capable, that fewer and fewer two-way exchanges are necessary to

make the picture vanish. And at length all the auditor has to say is, “Throw it away,” and the preclear will be able to do so. Of course, the case which can simply throw the picture away in the first place and get it back at will does not need to use communication processing on this, a fact which most auditors overlook—they neglect to test the preclear to find out whether or not the preclear can throw these pictures away. Now, in the case of blackness this is rather foolish, to ask the preclear to throw hellos at the blackness, since these screens are very resistive, indeed. In the case of blackness one would simply use STRAIGHT WIRE with the question, “Recall a time when you were looking at blackness” over and over and over until the blackness was gone. If the blackness doesn’t go, then it’s a machine which is making the blackness, but this is found to be handleable too by the same process, if it is carried on long enough. And even if that did not work, machine processing would.
Very well. We have here, by throwing showers of hellos and O.K.’s back and forth between the preclear and the picture, a method of vanquishing the picture. BUT, IF YOU AS AN AUDITOR ASSUME THAT ALL PICTURES ARE BAD AND OUGHT TO BE THROWN AWAY, YOU WILL HAVE IN YOUR HANDS IN A VERY SHORT SPACE OF TIME A VERY UNHAPPY PRECLEAR. If he is fairly upscale he will tell you why he is unhappy. If he’s fairly well downscale he will simply hug it bitterly to his bosom. The fact is, you are getting rid of his pictures, and his pictures are not a bad phenomenon, totally. Thus, you were robbing him continually. Now, the old Dianetic auditor who is trained only to make pictures vanish or a person who is obsessed with the idea of making nothing out of everything, is liable to neglect this vital little step, and if this vital little step is neglected this entire process will wind the preclear up in an unhappy state of mind. So, after the picture has been vanquished by either throwing it away or by throwing hellos and O.K.’s back and forth between the preclear and it, the auditor MUST ask the preclear TO GET THE PICTURE BACK. This is, of course, part of the automaticity cycle. The picture got there automatically; well, the preclear had better take over that automaticity—for all automaticities are conquered by having the preclear do what is being done automatically, or by simply sighting the genus of the automaticity.
Thus, having completed this two-way cycle of hellos and O.K.’s, the auditor now says, “Get the picture back.” This usually startles the preclear, for at first the preclear will be very victorious at having gotten rid of this automatic function of pictures. But the preclear, one way or another, will get the picture back. He may get back some other facet of the scene. He may get back a picture different from the first one, but what you want is that same picture. Of course, don’t badger and hound your preclear until he goes out of communication with you to get the same picture back. You can tolerate a certain amount of looseness at this stage of the processing, but what you really want is the same picture back again. Now, having gotten the preclear to get the picture back, you now have him throw once more showers of hellos at it, have it throw showers of O.K.’s at him, have it throw showers of hellos to him, and he throw showers of O.K.’s to it, until it vanishes again. And when it is vanished, you ask the preclear to get the picture back. Now, before you have handled this picture very much you will find usually that the preclear can simply bring the picture up and throw it away at will, at which moment you go on to the next auditing question on Straight Wire, which is, “Recall a time when—” or “Recall a moment of—” whatever you were asking before. And once more you ask him, “Did you get a picture?” You handle it in this fashion. You have him throw hellos and O.K.’s back and forth. You have him throw it away, get it back— you have him handle it, in other words. After a while you will find the preclear will be able to get all sorts of pictures at will and throw them away at will. You will also find that some of his automatic machinery starts to break down. If this starts to happen, why just continue him on the process. You may have to drill him for a short time on mocking up pictures. If you knock out his automatic machinery which is giving him pictures—doing the mock-ups for him—you have made it necessary for you to give him the assurance that he can make pictures, which will again make him happy. Very often a preclear who is unable to make pictures but is getting everything automatically will recover his ability to create pictures once he brings this automaticity under control.

“HELLOS AND O.K.’S TO PICTURES” is a very valuable process. A preclear will work up a gradient scale to where he can throw some hellos and O.K.’s to engrams that pop up and will then be able to bring engrams into present time or throw them out of present time at will. And when he can do this he has no further worries or upsets about energy masses.
You will understand that this process of communication is entirely independent of locating the genus of the picture. The actual knockout of the machinery making the pictures could be accomplished by having the preclear state that this or that CREATED or OWNED the machine, including himself, until the machine was gone. But, this is not a very good process. It is robbing the preclear of something on which he has no reality. However, we expect future developments will embrace something which gives us a superior process along ownership lines.
Remember, now, that our goal is not to make the preclear get rid of every picture that pops up. Our goal is to make him capable of handling those pictures which pop up, throwing them away and getting them back at will.
This process is also used with the technique “Tell me something you wouldn’t mind remembering,” “Tell me something you wouldn’t mind forgetting,” and was originally employed as part of this process.


ARTICLE SIX

Psychoanalysis and Straight Wire

When Sigmund Freud and Breuer first began working on the theory that if an individual could recall enough he could be well, they were working primarily on the assumption that there was something wrong, which they now had to make right, and that the wrongness was a hidden or buried memory.
It is notable to remark today that Scientology does not try to find something wrong in order to make that wrongness right. This introduces a via on the line, introduces an assumption into the case which is not justified. All we assume is that an individual can be more able than he is and we take it from there. We are not looking for hidden memories.
Another thing which Freud assumed was that guilt underlay these hidden memories as their primary propulsive mechanism. This was not necessarily true, for you will discover that anyone, no matter how innocent, who has been struck, if he has been struck hard enough, will begin to believe that he must have been guilty of something. In other words, he gets a reason why he has been punished, which may or may not have any actuality in fact. In other words, any sudden blow or duress can be expected to have as its consequence the feeling that one has been guilty. In order to stay a reasonable or rational being an individual has to assume that there must be a reason for everything. This is not necessarily true at all. Thus, guilt comes about merely from a blow or duress. I imagine if you put a man in prison long enough he would be absolutely certain at the end of that time that he had committed the crime for which he was incarcerated. I suppose that if you questioned a man long enough about his guilt, if this questioning were under duress, he would begin to feel he was guilty of the crime of which he was being accused, which accounts for many of the confessions which are brought forth by third-degree methods. Even the police have begun to question these, having discovered all too often that the person was really innocent although he now believed he was completely guilty. Thus, we have the fact that physical pain and unconsciousness in a memory would produce a HIDINGNESS in the memory, since a person would not want to confront a painful picture, and would bring about a feeling of guilt. All this is resolved simply by MAKING THE INDIVIDUAL CAPABLE OF HANDLING ENERGY PICTURES OR ENERGY MASSES OR SPACES REGARDLESS OF THEIR SIZE, SHAPE OR THREAT.
In performing a psychoanalysis, emphasis was then laid upon memory and upon things about which society expected people to feel guilty. In this alone we have the

reason why psychoanalysis is such a long drawn-out affair and why it leaves a person in such a careful frame of mind.
The psychoanalytic patient was expected to talk long enough—without much acknowledgment from the analyst—to disclose hidden memories. The actual hidden memories were, of course, moments of pain and unconsciousness, and if the psychoanalyst had ever gotten a patient into one of these moments of pain and unconsciousness he wouldn’t have known what to do about it. But this was outside the theory if well inside the practice.
In the process of trying to recover hidden memories the analyst was continually in combat with the automatic forgettingness of the patient. By asking a person to recall and recall and recall and recall and think about the past, the analyst often got the individual back down the time track and didn’t get him up again. In the first place, the analyst, not being very able in the field of DUPLICATION seldom gave a repetitive question which would have freed the patient from one line of action.
Further, the analyst was insufficiently observant and inquiring. He may or may not have noticed this phenomenon of energy pictures but, being trained in a rather mystic school, he probably did not believe that these energy pictures possessed any energy and so could not do the patient any harm.
But, let us suppose that we were actually trying to uncover hidden memories for the preclear. If this were the case, then, we would have to get his forgettingness off of automatic and into his control.
If you wish to reform the entire field of psychoanalysis, which is not any particular mission for the Scientologist, as Scientology is not psychotherapy, you yet could do so by the publication of this material:
Have the patient relax and become aware of the fact that you, the analyst, are there, that he is there, that the room is there and that you are about to do some psychoanalysis.
Enter into a discussion with the patient concerning his trials and tribulations in the present-time world, permitting the patient to originate communications and become relaxed about talking with the analyst.
Now that these steps have been accomplished, ask the patient this question, and use no other question aside from incidental and momentary discussions and acknowledgments, no other: “Tell me something you wouldn’t mind forgetting.”
No matter how long the patient took to answer this question, do not abandon it and do not go away from the question. But, at last, still maintaining pleasant relations with the patient, obtain an answer to this question.
Having obtained the patient’s statement that he has at last found something that he is very certain he wouldn’t mind forgetting, the analyst should then say, “Very well,” as an acknowledgment of the fact that the question has been answered. And the analyst should never at any future time omit to acknowledge with a “Very well” or some such statement the fact that the patient has completed the analyst’s command.
Having received an answer to this question, the analyst must now repeat the very same question and again must get an answer to this question and again must acknowledge the fact that an answer has been received.
The analyst should not go into discussions of the material and should not tell the patient what the material means, for the analyst should be well aware of the fact that if the patient has already reached this depth in his psyche he must perforce be capable of reaching much deeper depths and that better information will always be forthcoming.
Even though the analyst finds himself becoming inattentive or upset by the repetition of the same question over and over he must continue this. He must, each time the patient has complied and the analyst has acknowledged, ask again, “Tell me something else you wouldn’t mind forgetting.”
This should be the sum total of the analysis and this program should be continued as long as the patient is being analyzed, whether that be four times a week for a year or four times a week for two years. No other interchange or material should be discussed or addressed than these things the patient would not mind forgetting.

If an analyst were to follow this program and if he were capable of repeating this question or duplicating so often and so long, he would discover that his patient had come into more possession about his life and his beingness than any other program could have accomplished, and that it will no longer be necessary for the analyst to evaluate for or make decisions for the patient.
We recommend that this process be coached to analysts in the hope that the field of psychoanalysis could be made into a successful psychotherapy, for Scientology is not a psychotherapy and does not intend to take the place of any existing psychotherapy.


ARTICLE SEVEN

How to Do Straight Wire

There is a happy medium of two-way communication which must be present in all processing, whether that processing be Opening Procedure by Duplication or Straight Wire.
ENOUGH TWO-WAY COMMUNICATION WILL KEEP THE PRECLEAR AWARE OF BEING AUDITED AND AWARE OF THE AUDITOR’S INTEREST. AN INSUFFICIENT AMOUNT OF TWO-WAY COMMUNICATION MAY CAUSE THE PRECLEAR TO FEEL A LACK OF PARTICIPATION IN HIS CASE, WHICH WILL CAUSE THAT CASE TO SAG OR BOG. TOO MUCH TWO-WAY COMMUNICATION WILL SIMPLY GET IN THE ROAD OF THE PROCESS. An auditor must be aware of these factors and have a feeling for the right amount of two-way communication whenever he is processing a preclear.
One of the most delicate subjects in all auditing and one of the most delicate skills in auditing consists of knowing HOW MUCH TWO-WAY COMMUNICATION TO ENTER UPON AS AN AUDITOR WITH THE PRECLEAR.
Straight Wire requires this as in any other process. However, many errors can be made in Straight Wire with two-way communication which would have peculiarly detrimental effects. The preclear, you must understand, is indulging in recalling his past, and we can forgive preclears for being excited about remembering various pleasant parts or various unpleasant parts of the past. We can also forgive the preclear for trying to justify some of the actions he has suddenly recalled having entered upon in his past. Thus, we can understand that it is necessary for the preclear to be permitted to communicate about what he is doing; otherwise he will feel suppressed and straitjacketed by the auditor who refuses to let him talk. BUT, THE PRECLEAR WHO JUST GOES ON TALKING ENDLESSLY ABOUT WHAT HE IS RECALLING IS NOT DOING HIMSELF ANY GOOD. HE IS NOT DOING THE PROCESS, HE IS TALKING ABOUT THE PROCESS. Thus, to some slight degree he must be checked on this excessive comm lag. The auditor should be very definitely aware of what comm lag is before he does very much auditing. He must also be aware of what acknowledgment is before he does very much auditing.
COMM LAG—COMMUNICATION LAG—IS THE INTERVAL OF TIME BETWEEN THE MOMENT OF THE AUDITOR’S ASKING THE QUESTION AND THE REPLY TO THAT EXACT QUESTION BY THE PRECLEAR. A near reply is not a reply. A reply to some related question is not a reply. The interval between may be occupied by argument from the preclear, talk from the preclear or silence from the preclear. It does not matter what goes on between the asking of the question and the answer to the question; the internal is communication lag. In other words, communication is not taking place during this interval.
A COMMUNICATION LAG IS FLAT WHEN IT IS CONSISTENT. A person may have a habitual lag of ten seconds. He may answer everything after a ten-second pause. If a person then answers after a ten-second pause on a particular process it could be said that his communication lag was flat, since his communication lag is always ten seconds. We say that a question is flat when the communication lag has been similar for

three successive questions. Now, that is a FLAT QUESTION. The communication lag might be five seconds, five seconds and five seconds. We would still say with some justice that the QUESTION lag was flat. However, the process lag would not be flat until the actual normal exchange lag was present. The question would no longer influence the communication factors of the preclear when the process is flat. Usually, because these processes are very beneficial, it occurs that the individual under processing talks very rapidly after a process is flat. His basic lag has changed.
There is another kind of communication lag with an automaticity of communication which an auditor should understand. When the question has excited a machine into answer it is quite common for the answers to come very rapidly, often too rapidly for the preclear to articulate. When this occurs the auditor is advancing against a communication SPEED which is as artificial as a communication LAG, and it will be discovered after the question is answered several times that this communication speed will drop into a normal and will then expand out into a communication lag.
ACKNOWLEDGMENT is a very necessary study. AN AUDITOR MUST ALWAYS ACKNOWLEDGE WHAT THE PRECLEAR HAS SAID. This may enter a compulsiveness into auditing for the auditor, but it is nevertheless true that a preclear will keep on talking until he KNOWS he has been acknowledged. Some people would require a sledgehammer in the face to know that they had been acknowledged. One auditor stood in front of a preclear and waggled his finger close to the preclear’s nose for several seconds and said very loudly, “Good!” and the preclear knew she had been acknowledged. It very often happens that the auditor is saying O.K. but is not acknowledging the preclear because the preclear does not understand or even hear the auditor saying O.K. Thus, occasionally an auditor should ask, “I just said O.K. Did you hear that?” And the preclear will sometimes look rather sheepish and realize that he has not known that his statement was acknowledged.
Very often the crankiness or upset of old people or children simply stems from the fact that nobody acknowledges them. They begin to say something and then can’t stop saying it, and will keep on saying it until it has been acknowledged by someone that they have said it. They would have to know that that statement had been acknowledged before they could “come off’ the statement. You could say that a thing persists until it is acknowledged. This, by the way, is quite applicable to machinery. Machinery keeps putting up pictures until the pictures are acknowledged, and the Thetan seldom acknowledges these pictures, and so we get into a dwindling spiral of automaticity which ends up in blackness. It is not a cure, however, to simply have the preclear say “O.K.” to all the machinery.
The auditor should also understand THE AXIOMS as contained in The Creation of Human Ability, particularly the CONDITIONS OF EXISTENCE which are outlined in THE AXIOMS. These are quite important. Particularly important are those axioms devoted to “ISNESS” and “NOT-ISNESS.” We find that a person very often not-ises his pictures or not-ises his memory. In other words, he meets his memory or pictures with force. He pushes force against force and then we have accumulation of force, and this is not particularly good. The apparency, or isness, condition of existence comes about, of course, through alter-isness. Where we try to change a mass for a long time we eventually get a mass which is persisting and that persistence is isness. So, we see that CHANGING MASSES WITH ANYTHING LESS THAN LIFE OR MEMORY OR COMMUNICATION OR POSTULATE BRINGS US INTO A CONDITION OF PERSISTENCE OF A CONDITION. The auditor who knows this well knows that if he were to try to change with not-isness or alter-isness a deformed shoulder he would find that the condition of the deformed shoulder was persisting greater than ever.
SUCH A WELL INFORMED AND SKILLED AUDITOR MIGHT USE, WITH GREAT PROFIT, AN ADDITIONAL COMMAND—MAKING TWO STRAIGHT WIRE COMMANDS IN ALL. THE ADDITIONAL COMMAND WOULD BE “RECALL A MOMENT OF PREVENTED .”
EXAMPLE: THE PROCESS WOULD THEN BE “RECALL A MOMENT OF STUDIOUSNESS.” AND WHEN THIS COMMAND SEEMS FLAT, “RECALL A

MOMENT OF PREVENTED STUDIOUSNESS.” THE LATTER COMMAND TAKES OUT THE NOT-ISNESS OF THE PRECLEAR.
ACTUALLY THE BEST RESULTS ARE OBTAINED BY USING THESE TWO COMMANDS, SUPPLYING WHATEVER IS NECESSARY IN THE BLANK. ONE IS RUN FAIRLY FLAT. THEN THE OTHER IS RUN UNTIL IT IS FAIRLY FLAT. THEN THE FIRST IS RUN AGAIN. WHEN IT IS AGAIN FLAT, RUN THE SECOND AND SO ON—AS NEW MATERIAL THUS IS DEVELOPED.
The duplication of questions is something that is very hard for an auditor who has not had much processing to do. He will get discursive, he will go off away from this necessity to duplicate it over and over and over. Thus, many processes are rendered null and void by an auditor failing to complete the process. He cannot stand the idea of duplicating, doing the same thing again and again and again, because he apparently is stacking his time track up. Actually he is not doing so and if he did it long enough, if he simply would go ahead and audit and ask the same question over and over and over again long enough, he would get a drill for himself which would cure him of his inability to duplicate. The biggest stumbling block to auditing is the obsessive change factor on the part of some auditors. Actually, when an auditor has an obsessive change factor he seldom makes a good auditor, because his obsession to change gets into his auditing. He has an obsession to change the preclear so he starts to force the preclear into changes which the preclear does not particularly want. The preclear may want changes but not necessarily the kind the auditor wants. The auditor precomputes the case, in other words, and decides in which direction he’s going to change this preclear. That’s all right and an auditor can do it, but when an auditor obsessively has to change the preclear we discover that the auditor at the same time will change THE PROCESS. In other words, both of these are inabilities to duplicate. An auditor can also err in the opposite direction. He can use the process so long and so consistently and so far beyond its doing the preclear any good that the whole idea of auditing is defeated. For more data on this look at the new Auditor’s Code, which is printed in The Creation of Human Ability and in Dianetics, 1955! These enjoin the auditor to run the process as long as it produces change. When it no longer produces change don’t run it. However, an auditor who changes the process and says to himself, “Well I changed this process because it was no longer producing change,” when in reality it was, and the auditor couldn’t stand the duplication any longer, is, of course, reasoning himself out of good results for the preclear.
The auditor should understand that the discovery of the actual creator or genus of anything will bring about its vanishment. This is also done by communication only. Ownership Processing can be used very effectively on preclears and in Straight Wire, but actually using communication as given in an earlier article is a superior activity. Ownership Processing is run by having the preclear state that this owns the condition or that owns the condition, and just have him keep stating that this or that or the other thing, and including himself, and his machinery and the body’s machinery owns or made the condition, or the pictures own or made the condition until the condition vanishes. One has sighted the actual owner often enough. However, if one went on sighting the wrong owner often enough the picture or condition would strengthen. In other words, you would be mis-owning it. All masses, spaces, conditions depend on mis-ownership for their persistence. In the absence of mis-ownership—we own up to the ownership of everything that we did and know the ownership of everything that everybody else did, or has—why everything would disappear. Ownership Processing is declaring the proper owner. It’s a very amusing process.
Ownership Processing is best done using an O-Meter or any type of physiogalvanometer. Here we see at once that the principal ownership is the response that we get on the meter. We get greater masses when we get mis-ownership. We get more reaction when we get mis-ownership. All the needle of a lie detector or any such instrument registers is mis-ownership. When mis-ownership is present the needle registers and when it is not present the needle doesn’t register. Thus, a lie detector does not detect a lie; it merely detects the mis-ownership of the picture of the incident. A criminal who says that he didn’t do a thing when he did will of course make the picture of the

incident become stronger; thus, it will register. Similarly, the criminal could say, “I did it,” when somebody else did and you would get an additional lie or the same reaction. If the preclear says that he caused the picture when something else caused the picture the picture will become stronger and the needle of the meter will register. This is about all there is to electropsychometric auditing.
One of the most notably lacking qualities in the unsuccessful auditor is charity. I am reminded of a section in the new testament which I misquote, because it sounds better, to the effect, “Though I speak with the tongues of angels or of men, though I have not charity, I am as sounding brass or the tinkling of the temple bell.” An auditor who has no charity, who is continually critical of the preclear, who is trying to change the preclear because the preclear is so bad, seldom achieves very great results with the preclear because he’s out of ARC with the preclear. Mercy, charity, kindness are qualities which are not low scale. They are the highest and kingliest qualities there are. And an auditor should never forget them.


ARTICLE EIGHT

Scientology and Straight Wire

It is a great temptation to call anything a psychotherapy which uses memory. Because psychotherapy has devoted itself to memory in the past. This is a fluke or a freak. Psychotherapy should devote itself to aberration.
Because Scientology has a process known as Straight Wire, which uses memory, it might be very easy to conclude that Scientology was then a psychotherapy. And this, of course, would be true if the goals of Scientology were those of psychotherapy.
The goals of psychotherapy are to eradicate unsocial or aberrated behavior in an individual.
The goals of Scientology are to create better abilities in the individual.
Scientology is far more closely related to education and its goals than it is to psychotherapy, but because of the factors which Scientology handles it is perforce not only intimately related to but is basic religion.
If you find anything disturbing about that association—Scientology and religion—we might cockily ask, “If religion treats of the human soul has there ever been a religion before Scientology?”—since there was precious little information available about the human soul until we took our textbooks in hand.
Naturally when you know the broad principles of anything, such as memory and forgettingness (these being two different items), you can apply them to almost anything you want to. And, as we have stated in an earlier article, you certainly could take an elementary form of Straight Wire and apply it to the field of psychoanalysis and let the analyst go on and do much of the things he does. As a matter of fact, if I were a Scientologist practicing in an area which contained some psychoanalysts I would definitely make it my business to associate myself with these people, and train them to give the same question as given in an earlier article, over and over, to duplicate, to acknowledge and to get some good works out of their patients. This is a very simple thing to train somebody in a sharp discipline and it would not be out of order for a Scientologist to take this under his wing because, Lord knows, the analyst has a hard time in the society and has a hard time with his patients. Furthermore, it is not unusual for the field of psychotherapy to turn to the church when it is blocked. And we hope it is not unusual for the church to try to make the world a better place to live in.
But, when you are using Scientology as a Scientologist, and you’re employing Straight Wire, you had better realize that your best results come about BY RETURNING SELF-DETERMINISM TO THE PRECLEAR. Which is to say, make him better able to handle and control himself and his environment. In fact, you will not be able to achieve any results of any lasting quality or of note unless you do this for the preclear. Therefore, the degree to which you suppress his self-determinism by finding things

wrong with him will depress as well the results of auditing. As a Scientologist you should concentrate on increasing the abilities of a person.
In the field of education memory is of the essence. Unless we could handle memory well we could not educate people well. Automatic forgettingness sets in on a student almost as fast as the textbook is closed. This is because he is on a forced draft of memory. He is expected to remember everything. Until the day comes when he can forget and remember at will he will be no better than the book from which he has studied. Thus, as a Scientologist you could explain this to an educator and use your skills and technologies to train this educator into the elementary steps of Straight Wire. The delivery of the question, the giving of the acknowledgment, the duplication of the question. You could train the educator into this as a necessary step to education, since every student he has who is failing, is failing not because of a real antipathy toward the subject, but because the automatic characters of his memory are not properly engaged and in gear. Before we would spend years and great quantities of wealth upon the education of a young man, we would certainly see that he was in shape to REMEMBER OR FORGET HIS MATERIAL AT WILL. We would also see to it, even as importantly, THAT HE WAS ABLE TO POSE AND RESOLVE PROBLEMS RELATED TO ANY SUBJECT. Were he able to do these two things he would always be an honor student. Why should we waste time as educators, and as a nation obsessed with education, in handling minds which cannot remember and forget, which cannot pose and resolve problems? Were we to practice this on an educational level and if we were to be careful at all times with all students to bring them into a state of ability with regard to memory and problems and solutions, before we gave them things to have memory and forgettingness about, and problems and solutions, we could probably place eight or nine foreign languages and eighteen or twenty new majors in any standard educational span and do it with success. Therefore, education would be far more effective and would have much greater duration with the individual, and as a result we would have a much higher culture.
In the field of business efficiency, memory, forgettingness and the posing and resolving of problems are the difference between an ineffective slavey and a powerful executive. With these processes, almost any second-rate file clerk could be moved into a valuable asset, and certainly the moving of a business executive from the lower brackets of ability in memory, forgettingness and posing and resolving problems to an upper bracket might mean the make or break of that business.
While Straight Wire does not, in any way, supplant any of the other of the Six Basic Processes, you can be very certain that it can stand by itself as a process. It is very important to know this, for it is the easiest process to teach anyone, and it is the easiest way to obtain stable results.
If you were to essay to teach those people who had the handling of other people in their charge the elements of Straight Wire, exactly how to do it as a drill, not to burden them in any degree with any theory, to reassure them about the phenomena and to turn them loose to do exactly the drill called Straight Wire on those intimate to them, you would have Scientology spreading at a very rapid rate.
The only other solution akin to this would be to teach everyone 8-C. Particularly parents who ordinarily run very poor 8-C on their children. However, 8-C appears to be more childish than Straight Wire. Straight Wire appears to be deep and has great significances connected with it and would be done by adults much more easily. Furthermore, an individual could conceive himself to be very wise in delivering Straight Wire and listening to the answers he got from it, but do not let your student, of course, get so wise that he will stray from the process.
In other words, I recommend to you that you would take some of the people who have some vague interest in Scientology and take a certain facet of their existence and run the basic Straight Wire question given in the earliest article in this series on that one facet until they understand something has happened. Then teach them how to do the process on others. TEACH THEM THESE EXACT RUDIMENTS:
ONE: Awareness of the auditor, the auditing room, that an auditing session is in progress.

TWO: Two-way communication on a casual basis.

THREE: The delivery of the question.

FOUR: Communication lag.

FIVE: The acknowledgment of the question.

SIX: The duplication of that exact question.

Having taught a person to do these things and having taught him to do them well, you could see that you have expanded his livingness and his beingness. He can MEAN more to more people by this knowledge. This knowledge is not difficult to learn; it is not difficult to teach, and we hope that we have placed in your hands at this time something which will help you to disseminate the information of Scientology and to bring about a better culture than that we have.







ACADEMY LECTURE SERIES
Washington, D.C.
11 July—21 September 1955


“At 1845 ‘R’ Street, N.W., Washington, D.C. in a ten-room building of its own, the Academy of Religious Arts and Sciences is training people to be Scientologists.

“The only place in the world where all three levels of Scientology training may be obtained, the Academy grants certificates as follows: Hubbard Certified Auditor, Hubbard Advanced Auditor, Hubbard Graduate Auditor.

“Refining its training and certificates upon five arduous years of experience in Dianetics and Scientology, the Academy program is bringing auditors to a level of ability hoped for for years but just now achieved.

“Receiving personal lectures from L. Ron Hubbard, associating daily with the best auditors and instructors five years have produced, the courses follow a pattern laid down almost a year ago and which has varied little since .... A new student ... enrolls at 8:00 a.m. on Monday morning (any Monday morning). He then enters a week’s indoctrination course where he receives careful personal coaching by a staff auditor and some professional auditing .... After his indoctrination week he enters the course into which he enrolled .... The HCA Course is eight weeks long. The HAA Course is five weeks in length. The HGA Course is six weeks long.”

—Ability Minor 6, July, 1955


** 5507C11 HCA Seven Basic Steps (In this tape Ron describes the curriculum of the HCA Course and the part the six steps [in bulletin above] play in the training of an auditor.)
* 5508C23 ALS-1 The Auditor’s Public
* 5508C23 ALS-2 Axiom 53: The Axiom of the Stable Datum
* 5508C30 ALS-3 Rugged Individualism
* 5508C30 ALS-4 Union Station—R-46
* 5509C14 ALS-5 The Unknown Datum—a MEST-shaking Lecture
* 5509C21 ALS-6 Postulates 1, 2, 3, 4, in Processing—a new
understanding of Axiom 36

P.A.B. No. 56
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR’S BULLETIN


From L. RON HUBBARD

Via Hubbard Communications Office
163 Holland Park Avenue, London W.11

_____________________________________________________________________

8 July 1955

AXIOM 51 AND COMMUNICATION PROCESSING


Let me give you a small review on communication. Axiom 51 says that MEST cannot change MEST, and we find that postulates and live communication do change MEST. MEST cannot change MEST, therefore a pair of forceps cannot basically change a tooth condition. This is sweeping and I want you to realize how sweeping it actually is. A medical doctor would not be able to alter completely a broken leg. You may say, “That’s silly, of course he could. He could come in and snap the bone back into place and the fellow would feel a lot better.” No, I’m sorry, a medical doctor cannot over a period of time change a broken leg. Do you know what will happen? Let’s look at it from the standpoint of life, now, and we find out that the individual got attention for his broken leg, didn’t he? It will emerge as rheumatism some day. In the next life it will emerge as two broken legs! We’re going to get a repetition of this because as soon as you attempt to change MEST with MEST in one fashion or another you are going to get persistence, and that is all. Persistence of what?

In view of the fact that all conditions are postulated conditions, and that the consideration behind them that they are bad or good is simply again a consideration, if we say persist it doesn’t mean that it is either bad or good, it simply means that condition. What condition is it? The condition we are trying to change. And whenever we try to change MEST with MEST we get a persistence of that condition. It will crop up one way or another, and you will see this time after time.

Dealing as we are in a very high echelon of live communication, when we try to alter a condition with MEST we get this persistence. Restimulation is the condition persisting in the auditor, as an auditor who goes around altering energy masses gets restimulated. The auditor comes along and says, “Now all I have to do is change this energy mass one way or the other,” and he may succeed in doing so as far as he can see for the moment. So he goes off restimulated. That is the condition persisting. It’s going to persist, one way or the other. The only motto back of MEST is “PERSIST.”

But we have this licked. Hence Axiom 51. Postulates and live communication actually can bring about a permanent change and can actually stop a persistence.

Now, this process, “What wouldn’t you mind____communicating with?” “What wouldn’t mind you communicating with?” is actually not a low echelon process. A low-echelon preclear, one with no mock-ups and very little reality, one who is not well off, will not be touched by this process. He cannot assimilate the process. Why? Because, to run this process, you have to have the cooperation of the preclear’s ability to as-is. You have to have the ability of the preclear to have a cognition and the ability of the preclear to as-is a piece of energy, that is, to make a perfect duplicate of it.



Copyright (©)1955 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.

Where, then, does that leave this process to be totally functional? It leaves it upstairs, because when you run it downstairs, the individual begins to “chew energy.” Just “chewing the energy around” doesn’t make it persist, but, with all this chewing, he isn’t as-ising anything. All he is doing is moving mass “A” to position “B.” Anybody who is doing this gets no cognition out of it at all. He is waiting for that piece of energy to tell him something, and this tells you a great deal about the preclear who couldn’t run an engram. He was waiting for the MEST to say something.

The preclear who could run engrams could still play a game well enough to make the MEST say over and over again what the MEST had imprinted on it. That is exactly why an engram could run and why we had success in running engrams, and when an engram disappeared that is exactly what happened. It was up there all right, it was up there in lights, but it wasn’t saying anything. It was a bunch of sound waves imprinted on a bunch of molecules of one kind or another, and the preclear had to sort of pretend it was saying these things over and over. In other words, he made it talk. Now today an individual gets an engram in front of his face and you just tell him to make it talk. Make it say, if you please, exactly what is in the engram, or make it say anything—it doesn’t matter which.

As we look over this running of an engram, let us say that we are getting an individual to run birth. What we are doing is to get an energy mass called birth to articulate to an individual, and it would run very handsomely indeed if we had the preclear saying Okay. This is actually a terrifically effective way to run an engram. If we wanted to start today running engrams, we could, full out, and achieve tremendously superior successes because we could certainly run any kind of an engram in the bank. We could dream it up, and the preclear could dream it up, could do anything he wanted to, just to make these energy masses talk.

Of course very strange phenomena happen on an occluded case when you have him dream up the fact that he has the concept of an engram in front of him. You just look at him and you say, “Now let’s make believe that you have birth in restimulation in front of you.” (This would be a roughie, and a weird way to go about it.) “And now let’s pick up the engram at the point where the doctor is saying, ‘If you will just take this pint of strychnine, mamma, the child will be born much earlier.’ “ You have him to make this concept say this, and have him say Okay to that.

The strange part of it is that you don’t have to pay any attention to whether birth shows up or not. I counted the number of births on an individual one time and it was several thousand, believe me, and they all go back to Fac Ones and things like that. So we just have him get the idea that he has birth in front of him and have it articulate. Quite often this totally occluded case will have a complete birth show up and begin to run off. But, he was totally occluded, wasn’t he? He couldn’t run an engram.

We could just buckle right down at that point and actually run that engram with Okays from the preclear, just as it showed up, or we could go on running a synthetic engram. In either case facsimiles would go out of restimulation in the individual. As long as we have communication those energy masses will disintegrate and you will stop the persistence of the condition.

So let’s look at the optimum way that I know of at this moment—the best way I know of—to separate universes, on which I have had considerable success and to date have had no failures as long as the preclear could at least articulate anything. As long as you can make him do anything at all you can make him do this. You have seen the process already.

“Give me some things you could say to your mother.” If you wanted to make this very perfect, if he is unable to play a game you don’t have to (very often the preclear is

unable to play a game), you would say, “Now get the idea mamma is out there saying Okay to all of this.” “Now give me something else you could say to your mother.” Then you say, “Get the idea mamma is out there and have her say ‘Okay.’ “ “Now give me some things that mamma could say to you.”

Now you will get a positive blow-apart in a fairly rapid order of the interiorization of the universe. We know very well that people interiorize into a body, into other bodies, into MEST objects, into planets. So, if you were to run this one all the way backward you would take somebody who is obviously seen to be interiorized into earth, and what would you have him do?

You would say, “All right now, give me something earth could say to you.” If he is really interiorized into earth he’ll think up something. Then you have him say Okay. The next thing you know he will get the ball of earth ‘way out there somewhere. Maybe it’s the first picture he has ever had! You will say, “That’s fine. Now give me some more things that earth could say to you.” “Now give me some things you could say to earth,” and very ordinarily he will come right on up the tone scale. You will never see such perfect behavior of a tone scale as when you use a MEST object.

Then we would pick out (if we really were bent on exteriorizing Mr. Doakes and Mr. Doakes was interiorized into the interiorizations) another universe when we knew that we had the first one blown, and we would know that because his physiological condition would very definitely alter. We would go on to the next likely universe.

We find this fellow who has been a linotype operator for eight thousand seven hundred and sixty-two months, or something of the sort. We don’t have to be specific. We pick a linotype machine, and we say if he got into earth he certainly got there via some sort of apparatus he was controlling, so we say, “All right, what could a linotype machine say to you?” He would think it over for a moment. A very literal-minded fellow would probably say, “It could say ‘clank.’ “

“Okay, have it say clank.”

“You know, I don’t get any sonic on this,” he’d say. (I’ve had this happen.)

“Well, just get the idea of its saying clank.”

“Well, it’s going clank, all right.”

(“Oh no you don’t,” says the auditor, aside and to himself.) “Have it SAY clank.”

“Have it SAY clank? A linotype machine can’t . . . well, I guess it could. On thinking it over I guess a linotype machine could.... All right, I’ll have it say clank.”

“All right. Now have it say something else.” He does, and we blow him out of the universe of the linotype machine.

Now let’s pick the wife he hates worst, or something like that. What could she say? etc. Admittedly this is not a short process, but it keeps going faster and faster. Next we would pull him out of papa and mamma, and maybe grandma and grandpa, and so on. We are doing one of these schoolbook, by the table, separations. Then we say, “Now give me something your body could say to you.”

“My body say something to me?”

And away we would go, and we would blow him out of his head.

It will work with almost that mechanical ease. The question is, how many hours of auditing would it take to bring somebody who is totally interiorized into a planet out through these various stages and finally out of his head? As far as I’m concerned it is the minimum number of hours he could be audited for maximum result.

We could do a tremendous number of things for him. We could do a momentary patch-up on a lot of things, we could do this and we could do that, but if we were going straight toward the goal of making this individual into the highest level of condition that we could make him into, we would follow a process just about like this. It would be slow, and it would be arduous, but we would get better, and better, and better. He would finally get to a point where he could feel these things blow off and blow out on him.

I went so far one time as to try to exteriorize a fellow from his engram bank. I think I exteriorized a lot of thetans from that bank, but I never got the fellow out of it entirely because I didn’t have the time. His track finally stretched out in all directions and he could view it clearly, and then he was terribly interested and wanted to run and have to do with each individual engram—and there were about seventy-six trillion years worth of them. Then there was the whole GE line. So I abandoned that attempt. He felt wonderful, though, and went around telling everybody he was cleared. Compared to his earlier state he sure was. He was cleared easily from eight or nine heavy engrams in about eight or nine hours’ auditing.

The articulation of the actual communication would be something you would do on an individual who is having the vaguest difficulty playing a game, who couldn’t as-is birth at a glance. And this is the conclusion I have reached rather arduously over these past weeks on this. I give you data when I have it.

Axiom 51 is right. It says you can’t change MEST with MEST, but postulates and live communication can change it. But realization on the part of a preclear with no cognition is not possible. So if he can’t realize, that means he can’t as-is, so if he can’t as-is, there he is. But I have seen preclears pass right on up the line from cognition zero to almost instantaneous cognition. In the Air Force they have ceiling zero. We have cognition zero, but it’s the same thing—total fog.

It is immensely safe for an auditor to change by communication. There is no restimulation involved.







Minor 6 [1955, ca. mid-July]


The Magazine of
DIANETICS and SCIENTOLOGY
from
Washington, D.C.




The Adventure of Scientology


L. Ron Hubbard


As a member of that crew of experts on the subject, the Explorer’s Club, as one who has plowed keel into Seven Seas, who has ducked shots fired in anger and watched others fail to duck, I can verify that when all horizons are measured, all swamps mapped, all deserts charted and supplied with water and instant rescue, there will yet be a world of unknown frights and glooms and cheers to explore, there will yet be a universe of adventure left, a universe sufficiently powerful to daunt the last few thousand years of thinking men—You. The universe of You.
From the first moment of a co-auditing session the preclear begins to make discoveries—discoveries to him far more important than Balboa’s glimpse of the Southern Sea or Columbus’ glance at San Salvador. The preclear begins with mystery and ends with knowledge. And even in those few cases where “nothing happens” he at least discovers the pattern of his life—nothing happening.
No matter if one travels the six basic steps or the whole track, the universe of Mind minute by minute opens and unfolds. For this is the adventure of Scientology: to discover not a wrongness as in psychotherapy, to create not a peculiar pattern of individuality, as in education, but to find and come to grips with the totality of Mind itself, its “substance,” “meaning” and “vastness” or whether these exist.
To use Scientology “to get well,” to “become less nervous,” is like using an alpine stock to dig a ditch for a water pipe in the back yard. To use Scientology as a guidebook to the discovery of the Infinity of Infinities is a proper use.
Perhaps you seek to “sell Scientology” to some chair-rooted conservative. Will you? If that person cannot buy adventure he cannot buy Scientology. There may be nothing really wrong with the person who refuses adventure. He MAY be the one who is right. Perhaps it is best to cower behind barriers with grip-shut eyes and hope never to find out. But this attitude will not appeal to the Scientologist. If he is being shot at from some mysterious and hidden quarter of body or mind he wants to stand up and take a good, hard look. If he is being wracked by unknown shivers, he wants to know (a) can he shiver harder, (b) do other people shiver and (c) can he turn it on and off.
The trained Scientologist is the greatest adventurer of all, for he adventures into many, many minds. The expertly processed preclear is the deepest adventurer of all, for he sees more and faces more in any given instant. But trained or not or processed or not, the Scientologist is an Adventurer. Many men as ages go will own Earth. The Scientologist, in addition to visiting many universes, doesn’t care WHO owns them. And that is the test of he who would walk above kings—the doing is as good as the adventure therein—and that’s the way it is.



Copyright (©)1955 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.

CERTAINTY

Vol. 2, No. 8 [1955, ca. August]


The Official Publication of
DIANETICS and SCIENTOLOGY
in the
British Isles



An Idea Versus War

L. Ron Hubbard



Creation precedes destruction: for to be destroyed, a thing must have been created.

The initial form of creation is an idea, and from an idea flows the energy and forms necessary to action.

Destruction requires action when that destruction embraces nations, towns, and the bodies of man.

Since civilization began on earth, men have been seeking to destroy men in the “glorious cause of ending war.” Force begets force; the spear only seeks the weak point of the shield; the shield itself, offered long enough, will provoke the invention of a spear which will pierce it.

Man has sought to solve his confusion by applying it to the chaos and confusion of force on the level of the material universe. Yet no progress or advancement ever has been made by mankind which did not have as its vanguard an idea. An idea alone is capable of altering man’s circumstance with regard to war. Ideas, their creation and control, alone can defeat an atom bomb. The idea which will defeat the bomb may be as low as the construction of a force stream to render impenetrable the defences of a city, but that idea would end war only for a time. Observably it will require an idea of far greater magnitude to stop the bloodlust of nations.

Perhaps in Scientology there exist sufficient techniques for the origin of new ideas and the control of ideas to halt the willful suicide of man through the machinery of battle.





Copyright (©) 1955 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.



Major 5 [1955, ca. early August]

The Magazine of
DIANETICS and SCIENTOLOGY
from
Washington, D.C.



With A-R-C

L. Ron Hubbard

WE STILL SPELL SUCCESS WITH A-R-C.
If the old-time Dianeticist feels strange today with the SIX BASICS and all this fantastic STUFF about COMMUNICATION, he still has an anchor point to windward, he still has a comfortable harbor, he still has a sound hull in A-R-C.
Science of Survival is still as modem as tomorrow’s headlines. Science of Survival with its huge chart was written clear back in the unclear days of 1951 but its message is still talking in every today piece of auditing that is done.
That huge chart of Science of Survival was evolved from the basic principles of A-R-C and now we discover that the only way you can tell if modern auditing is working is whether or not it increases the pc’s A-R-C. Yes, THAT is the best test. That is the only reliable test.
If today’s auditing session does not raise the pc’s A-R-C then it wasn’t an AUDITING session. It might have been a jam session or a bull session. But it wasn’t an AUDITING session.
If a pc “blows a session” he blew it because there wasn’t enough A-R-C in the auditing itself or because HE didn’t have, wasn’t capable enough of A-R-C to match the session s process.
EVERY one of the Six Basic Processes today is designed and delivered only to increase the pc’s A-R-C. Every one of these processes is successful today ONLY when it improved the pc’s A-R-C, ONLY when it raised him, in other words, on that tone scale detailed in Science of Survival.
Thus today there would be NO excuse not to know whether or not the pc benefited from the session. If his A-R-C improved, he benefited from the session. Thus today there is NO excuse not to know WHAT process to run on the pc. The auditor runs THAT PROCESS which LEADS slightly the preclear’s A-R-C and into the lower rung of which the pc can enter with SOME A-R-C.
The only auditor judgment required today is the ability to estimate the A-R-C of the pc. The best trained auditors at the center in Washington or from the Academy are those who CAN estimate the A-R-C of the pc and who, KNOWING the tone scale chart and where the Six Basics fit, can ADDRESS the right process to the preclear and THEN LEAD the pc upscale by improving his ability to do the process.
Slow boat auditing is auditing done without an ability to estimate the A-R-C of the pc or know where the Basic Processes fit on the tone scale.
When we ask how clear a man is we are asking how ALIVE he is. When we are asking how ALIVE he is we are asking how much UNDERSTANDING he has. When we are asking how much LIFE and UNDERSTANDING he has we are asking how much A-R-C he is capable of performing. And that’s about all there is to it—IF you know your Science of Survival, IF you know your Six Basics and where they belong on the chart.

Copyright (©) 1955 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.

AFFINITY - REALITY - COMMUNICATION are the corners of the triangle of UNDERSTANDING. They are interdependent points. Without affinity, one cannot have either reality or communication. Without communication one cannot have affinity or reality. And one has as much affinity, reality OR communication as he has communication, affinity or reality. The DEGREE of any one comer brings about the degree of the other two.
By affinity we mean, roughly, the liking or disliking of something.
By reality we mean the similarity or dissimilarity of IDEAS about something.
By communication we mean the interchange of ideas about something.
Now let us say that you tried the material in the Ability article “Straight Wire” and you did it all right. You tried it on three pcs or friends. It worked, let us say, with magnificent results on two. It did NOT work at ALL upon the third. WHY?
On the third man it didn’t work because his A-R-C was not UP to confronting his past. It might have been up to a process lower on the scale than Straight Wire. But it WASN’T up to Straight Wire. In other words we started with NO toehold of A-R-C which we could improve by auditing.
And HERE we have the only real auditing DIFFICULTY. There MUST be SOME A-R-C present in order to improve a pc’s case. He must at least quiver slightly when touched. There MUST be some life present in order to upscale a case.
Now it is TRUE that one can, theoretically, animate inanimate matter. IF one lifts a match without manual contact, by “force of will,” he MUST imbue it with some LIFE. If one cannot imbue with life he can’t handle objects or spaces. They DEFY him. Thus the Granting of Beingness. BUT, for our purposes the auditing of this extreme of NO LIFE is not then auditing. It is ANIMATING. Anybody can ANIMATE a pc. He can actually monitor his machinery with words alone. But auditing involves RAISING THE SELF-DETERMINISM (pan-determinism) of the pc. Maybe you could imbue with life and then raise THAT into self-determinism. Maybe you do. But that is NOT auditing as we understand it. It is NECROMANCY. (Though I will admit we all practice it somewhat.) Auditing consists of DISCOVERING a spark of A-R-C and, by processes AND A-R-C fanning it into a proud flame.
A pc may have enough A-R-C to do Locational Processing. If he does, then Locational Processing (having the pc sit still and spot things by glance in the environment) will UP his A-R-C to a point where the pc can do TWO-WAY COMMUNICATION (not mechanical, which belongs with Opening Procedure by Duplication). If a pc has enough A-R-C to simply talk over things THEN this can be fanned up to enough A-R-C to do PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS. And if he can do this one (R2—20 in The Creation of Human Ability) he can then, in doing it graduate upscale to THINK A THOUGHT. And if he now has enough A-R-C to do THINK A THOUGHT he will gather force and momentum in thinking thoughts to at length enter the lower A-R-C floor of STRAIGHT WIRE. And so on up the rest of the processes.
HERE you see where we are going. Here you see the LADDER we are climbing. Here you see WHY we are climbing it. And here you see also why Straight Wire on that third pc didn’t make any improvement on his case.
If they don’t improve on the Six Basics in auditing by the code and by the book then the auditor has ASSUMED more A-R-C in the pc than the pc could muster.
When a preclear is run on a process without change, the process is just too high on the A-R-C scale for the extant A-R-C of the pc. And that’s ALL there is to it.
In the game of living (often carelessly called a business by low-toned people) you are as UNDERSTOOD by the people as they have A-R-C to understand you OR you are as understood as you grant them A-R-C to understand you.
You are as ALIVE as you can do a process. There is no shame in being partially dead. There is only shame in WANTING to be dead, for you can change that.
Now maybe, looking at your Science of Survival, you can estimate your pc and lead your pc into greater life. BUT remember, if he DOESN’T QUIVER on a process, he hasn’t entered into its life band and all his doing of it will be SOCIAL RESPONSE or YOUR running of his machinery. You can do it too.
Good hunting.





[The above “Old Cuff” was originally printed on the back of PAB 58, 5 August 1955. The text of this PAB was not written by LRH so it is not included here. ]




LRH TAPE LECTURES
Washington, D.C.
23—30 August 1955


* 5508C23 ALS-1 The Auditor’s Public
* 5508C23 ALS-2 Axiom 53: The Axiom of the Stable Datum
* 5508C30 ALS-3 Rugged Individualism
* 5508C30 ALS-4 Union Station—R-46



Major 6 [1955, ca. early September]


The Magazine of
DIANETICS and SCIENTOLOGY
from
Washington, D.C.


L. RON HUBBARD



[The above letter accompanied Ability Major 6 when it was originally sent out. The process “Union Station” referred to above as being on “page 26” of the original magazine is now on page 254. In addition to the text on the following pages, this issue contained The Axioms of Scientology, The Code of a Scientologist, The Auditor’s Code, The Prelogics, The Logics, The Axioms of Dianetics and The Tone Plotting Scale.]
Copyright (©) 1955 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.

Basic Processes

RUDIMENTS: One: Awareness of the auditor, the auditing room, that an auditing session is in progress. Two: Two-way communication on a casual basis. Three: The delivery of the question. Four: Communication lag. Five: The acknowledgement of the question. Six: The duplication of that exact question.

I
1. I. FIND A PC.

2. II. ESTABLISH THE EXISTENCE OF THE AUDITOR.

3. III. ESTABLISH THE EXISTENCE OF A SESSION: LOCATIONAL PROCESSING.

“Notice a chair in this room.”
“Notice the ceiling.”
“Notice the floor.”
“Notice ..., etc.”

4. IV. TWO-WAY COMMUNICATION RECALLING PC’S SECRETS (see Dianetics, 1955!)

5. V. DISCUSS PRESENT TIME PROBLEM, IF ANY.

6. VI. HELLO’S AND OK’S TO PICTURES (article 5, Ability Major 4, “Straight Wire—A Manual of Operation”):

“Recall a moment.”
Hello’s and OK’s to and from any picture or blackness.
Bring back the picture.

“Recall a moment.”
Hello’s and OK’s any pictures or blackness.
Bring back vanished pictures.

(SPLITTING UNIVERSES)

7. VII. PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS (R2-20, Creation of Human Ability):

“What problem could you be to yourself?”
“Give me another problem you could be to yourself.”
“Another ..., etc.”

“What solution could you be to yourself?”
“Give me another solution you could be to yourself?”
“Another ..., etc.”

8. VIII. THINK A THOUGHT:

“Think a thought.”
“Think another thought.”
“. . . another thought, etc.”

“Receive a thought.”
“Receive another thought.”
“. . . another thought, etc.”

(ASSIGN, INVENT, MAKE TYPE PROCESSES)

9. IX. CONSEQUENCES:

“What would happen if you were apathetic?”
Repeat, etc.

“What would happen if you got angry?”
Repeat, etc.
APPLY TO TONE SCALE AND AWARENESS SCALE.

II

X. ELEMENTARY STRAIGHT WIRE (ABOVE 1.0):

“Give me something you wouldn’t mind forgetting.”
Hello’s and OK’s to any pictures.
Put back any pictures.
Repeat, etc.

“Give me something you wouldn’t mind remembering.”
Hello’s and OK’s to any pictures.
Put back any pictures.
Repeat, etc.

(STRAIGHT WIRE ON SECRETS, KNOWINGNESS)

III

XI. OPENING PROCEDURE OF 8-C (A, B, C) (ABOVE 1.9):

A. “Do you see that (large object or area such as a wall)?”
“Go over to it and touch it.”
“Now look at that (another large object or area).”
“Go over to it and touch it.”
Repeat, etc.

Exact spots. “Do you see that black mark on the left arm of that chair?”
“Go over to it and put your finger on it.”
“Take your finger off of it.”
Do this with many precise spots.

B. “Find a spot in this room.”
“Go over to it and put your finger on it.”
“Now let go of it.”
“Find another spot.”
Over and over, etc.

C. “Find a spot in this room.”
“Decide when you are going to touch it and then touch it.”
“Decide when you are going to let go and let go.”
Repeat, many spots, etc.

IV

XII. OPENING PROCEDURE BY DUPLICATION (ABOVE 2.6):

Have pc become familiar with two objects.

“Go over to the (book).”
“Look at it.”
“Pick it up.”
“What is its color?”
“What is its temperature?”
“What is its weight?”
“Put it down in the same place.”

“Go over to the (other object).”
“Look at it.”
“Pick it up.”
“What is its color?”
“What is its temperature?”
“What is its weight?”
“Put it down in the same place.”

“Go over to the (first object).”
Etc. Repeat. Run for hours.

V


XIII. REMEDY HAVINGNESS (ABOVE 3.1):

“Mock up a (planet, man, brick, boulder).”
“Make a copy of it.”
Explain “copy” if unknown by pc.
“Make another copy of the original.”
“Make another copy of it.”
“Make another copy of it.”
“Make another copy.”
“Another copy.”
“Another.”
“Another.”
Etc. as many as pc can comfortably make.

“Now push them together and push them into the body.”

“Mock up a ....”
“Copy it.”
Many copies, as above.
Have pc push them into the body.

Repeat many times.

Have pc mock up and copy as above, and:
“Throw them away—have them disappear in the distance.”
Etc. many times.

VI

1. XIV. SPOTTING SPOTS IN SPACE (ABOVE 3.6):

“Spot a spot in the space of this room.”
“Spot another spot.”
Etc. many spots.

“Spot a spot in the space of this room.”
“Walk over to it. “
“Put your finger on it.”
“Let go.”
Etc. many times.

Intersperse:
“How big is the spot?”
“Does it have any color?”
“Does it have any mass?”
And similar questions until spots have no mass, simply locations.

VI

2. XV. ROUTE ONE: 5, 6, 7 (FOR EXTERIORIZED PC):

(5) “What are you looking at?”
“Make a copy of it. “
As many as pc can COMFORTABLY make.
“Push them into yourself.” (Not the body) (Alternate with “Throw them away.”)
To do this, the pc will assume actually two or more locations at once.

“Can you find a nothingness somewhere around you?”
“Now make another one just like it.”
Have him make many like the first nothingness.
Have pc push them into himself or throw them away.
As many as the pc can comfortably make.

(6) “Locate the two upper back corners of the room (those behind pc’s body). Hold on to them, and don’t think.”
Have pc do this for at least two minutes.

Alternate with:
“Find two nothingnesses.”
“Hold on to them and don’t think.”
At least two minutes by the clock.

(7) “Let go.” “Find a place where you’re not.”
Many places.
Repeat 5, 6, 7, many times.

THE H.A.A. SHOULD BE CONVERSANT WITH ALL THE FOLLOWING:

ASSIGN some INTENTIONS.

Waste, accept, INVENT:
Wrongnesses
GAMES
Bad conditions

MAKE some TIME.

Three spots in your body. Three spots in the room (will exteriorize pc).

INVENT a dangerous mock-up.

What kind of a mock-up SHOULD you put up? What kind of a mock-up COULD you put up? What kind of a mock-up should you be able to DESTROY? What kind of a mock-up could you DESTROY?

RECALL SOME SPACE. All right. Is it TOO MUCH or TOO LITTLE? (Can be used with HELLO’S and OK’S.)

Someone who doesn’t think you’re insane. Someone you don’t think is insane (eases pc found worried).

If pc fails R1—4: What could you OCCUPY? What could you BE?

In what could you PARTICIPATE?

WHO or what IS MAKING ALL THE SPACE?

What is EXTERIORIZATION?

What do you want CHANGED? What do you want UNCHANGED?

OTHER PEOPLE (R2—46) to be run ONLY in railroad terminals, large bus terminals and airports. Use live people. Tell me something you REALLY KNOW about that person. What would you PERMIT THAT PERSON TO KNOW ABOUT YOU? (This process is known as “Union Station.”)

What could you say to (papa, mama, wife, husband)?
What could (......) say to you?

Find something COMFORTABLY REAL. (Eases pc found uncomfortable.)

Use HELLO’S and OK’S to the spots in Change of Space.
(R1—9 Creation of Human Ability)

See the space in that room? MAKE it. See the space in that (another) room? MAKE it. Alternate.

WHAT ARE YOU DOING? WHAT ARE YOU DOING THERE?

COGNITION

COGNITION IS AWARENESS OF AWARENESS. Example: An individual has been studious since age five. Preclear is run on studiousness. Preclear says, “Well, I’ll be darned!” Auditor says, “What happened?” Preclear says, “I have been studious since I was five years of age! This is remarkable in view of the fact that until this very moment I never had the slightest notion that I was being studious. Remarkable.”

This is an example of COGNITION. The awareness of awareness of a condition permits the lessening or vanishment of that condition. The awareness of awareness of a scarcity permits the lessening or vanishment of that scarcity.

Cognition is of the highest importance in processing. A process used, when it is the right process for the case, should normally bring about a cognition on the part of the preclear and when there has not been a cognition the process is not the correct process, or it has not been run fully.

The most important communication lag is the cognition lag. A process should not be left for the next higher process until there has been a cognition on the process or the considerations addressed in the process.

GRANTING OF BEINGNESS

A process has not been the correct process or has not been run correctly, or has not been run long enough if there has not been in the preclear an increase in his ability to grant life to others and to his environment.

ACKNOWLEDGEMENT

A. The auditor must acknowledge every answer, every command carried out, every comment, every communication, every attempt to communicate on the part of the pc. He should further invite communication wherever the preclear desires or needs to communicate.

B. The auditor must be willing to grant beingness (life) to the preclear.

C. The auditor must be alert to the pc at all times.

D. The auditor must be real to the pc at all times.

E. Cognition (awareness of awareness) is the goal of any process. The pc must be invited to impart any new cognition which he has gained during a session, or between sessions. A major cognition resulting from any process is generally a flattening of that process. The next process can then be delivered.

F. Acknowledgement is given by the auditor by the use of: “OK,” “Good,” “Fine,” “All right,” “OK, good,” “All right, fine,” etc.

G. The auditor does not use: “That’s right, I agree,” or “Yes, that’s correct,” or “Now you’ve got it,” or any such phrases denoting validation. This is not acknowledgement, but is evaluation, either the auditor evaluating for the preclear or the preclear evaluating for the auditor, neither of which are auditing situations.

P.A.B. No. 60
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR’S BULLETIN

The Oldest Continuous Publication in Dianetics and Scientology

From L. RON HUBBARD

Via Hubbard Communications Office
163 Holland Park Avenue, London W.11

_____________________________________________________________________

2 September 1955

“ANYTHING—EVERYTHING—NOTHING”


I want to call your attention to something you might watch with some interest. It is the systematized generality with which a certain type of preclear answers questions. He categorizes. You ask him about a cat and he gives you all cats. Many people will answer in that way, and they very often answer with system.

There is nothing mysterious about this, but it denotes the existence of groupers, good old Book One groupers. When a preclear answers in this fashion, his track is very grouped, whether he knows it or not.

In auditing this type of preclear, I have countered this with some highly general processes. I took up solutions, but I didn’t leave them specific. Why did I leave them unspecific? Why didn’t I leave solutions and problems as solutions and problems? Simply because such a preclear’s attention needs direction.

One of the handiest ways to go about this is just to take the Eight Dynamics with the Know to Mystery Scale. If you are going to categorize something you will have it well covered, and you are going to hit most of the corners of the universe one way or the other.

By way of example, I would like to tell you a little more in detail about one such

case I audited. Although his case level was in poor condition, psychometrically and actually conversationally, this man was sane among sane. He had a very good impulse toward healing, he was very sensible and so forth. He was rather intensely local in his Scientology interests, and he had a tendency toward “the only one” and rather resented anything that might come in from another quarter on this. (This is the critical level.) He was not really powerful, but he was a fine man and had done a lot of good processing.

At the beginning, I had to actually work around in the session to get some sort of communication with the man so he could answer questions. In other words, “Give me some solutions for God” was utterly beyond him. He couldn’t communicate on this basis. “What is God a solution to?” did communicate, so that was the question we settled with, and from there he went on down through all the dynamics. We did not bother to take up “himself” very much because his generality was so great that he probably wasn’t there!

Now this man was not in bad shape. He was in pretty good shape, but case-wise the mechanical aspects of his case—he was grouped, generalized, and far, far too fixated on others to the exclusion of himself. He wasn’t there. The optimum situation is: Earth is here, other people are here, I’m here, my machines are here, my body is here, the


Copyright (©) 1955 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.

reactive bank is here—awareness of all these things. He, however, was so far from being exteriorizable from the body that he had to be pulled out of the planet, then out of some other bodies, and then out of his own head, one way or another. It took some doing!

At first I could only try to develop some kind of two-way communication with this man. I found him hell-for-leather on an obsession toward knowledge, and telling a person that you did not know something was not a communication to him. If you said “When does the train leave?” and he told you “I don’t know,” he would not have communicated to you. I almost bludgeoned him into the recognition that there was a communication involved in telling somebody “I don’t know,” that you did refer to the problem or situation if you said “I don’t know” and went right on off on one of those techniques which can be used on a low-level case: “Give me an unknown datum.”

Consider the case reality! If I asked him for “Something you wouldn’t mind remembering; something you wouldn’t mind forgetting,” I would have actually exceeded his level of reality. Any man who is as obsessed on the subject of having to know as this, normally is sitting in a tremendous “I don’t know.” So I just used one of the R2s: “Give me an unknown datum.” He didn’t interpret the auditing command. He missed on each one of them. Somehow it came out wrong. He couldn’t be audited on whom he wouldn’t mind communicating with. It just didn’t audit. He didn’t have any reality. There was no reality on the process as far as he was concerned. We were just sitting there talking.

Somewhere along the line, when you have to handle such a preclear, you’ve got to find some kind of problem that’s real to him; or something that is real to him; or something that will register if you are trying to get a case entrance on a case of this kind. I get some lulus for some reason or another. This man was really a very able man. There was nothing really wrong with him, nothing specifically upsetting with his life; but his general tone, his general reality was just down—real poor.

I said, “Give me an unknown datum,” and he started reeling them off—and he came into present time with the process. He was naming abstractions, abstractions, abstractions, unknown, unknown, “I don’t know when a train leaves,” and so on— things he wasn’t looking at. Then, the next thing you know, he was giving me unknown data about the material in the immediate auditing room, and he gave me a lot of it. So, for my money, that process flattened.

That’s a very covert way of running 8-C on somebody, isn’t it? “Give me an unknown datum,” and finally he just came up splendidly and was actually looking at his environment.

Actually, just listening to the preclear and predicting about where he is going to go is quite a game. With this man I got groups, high generalities, terrific classifications; he was giving me back Scientology as he had read it out of a book. There wasn’t any thought in it at all. He wasn’t giving me name and energy, but by not addressing the point particularly, but just drumming it and keeping in two-way communication, we were suddenly getting him so specific that he was naming articles in the room.

We, as auditors, know what’s wrong with somebody. It’s a matter of time and energy to resolve it. The preclear doesn’t know what’s wrong with him, so there’s no real talking to him on the subject. If he knew what was wrong with him it wouldn’t be wrong with him! This man was glibly unaware of being there, and he saw nothing strange or peculiar in his answers to questions: “Anything,” “Everything,” and so on. In a situation like this you have to degrade the question down to actual action. If you had two universes, you would say, “What are some things you wouldn’t mind saying to your mother?”—and maybe he would find them. You would go on, and on, and on

until that was flat. And then, “Some things you wouldn’t mind saying to your mother,” and make him say them. And on, and on, and on, and you would watch those universes go up in smoke. Always find what universe he is stuck in, and then talk him out of it in this fashion—that is, make him talk himself out of it. You really can!

Now it is almost unimaginable not to be able to run this process on a preclear, and yet here was a preclear that could not run it. In such a case, you have to take the action dramatization of the communication. “What wouldn’t you mind saying to your mother?—Come on, give,” and “What wouldn’t you mind your mother saying to you?” Of course, the first answer you get in this case is the tip-off. It is: “Anything,” “Everything,” “Anywhere,” and then they’ll come up with qualifications. “Well, if we rule out pain, then I wouldn’t mind communicating with bang, and bang, and bang,” and you’d say, “Just a moment. We haven’t ruled out pain.” “Well, then—nothing! I wouldn’t communicate with anything.”

It is interesting in Spotting Spots in Space that this person is very definable. You can test him, and find this case out immediately. You simply say, “All right, let’s spot a spot in the space of this room,” and the fellow will say, “Well, it’s there.” You say, “Now, put your finger on it,” and he will say, “Oh, I couldn’t do that!” “Well, go ahead, put your finger on it,” and he will probably say, “Well—why?” And you get into that! He will not spot a single spot in space. When he does that, he also qualifies everything, he gives everything conditions, and in addition to all that it’s “Anything” and “Everything.”

When you run up against this case, then, he cannot run this process very fast or very easily: “Things your body wouldn’t mind communicating with,” and “Things you wouldn’t mind your body’s communicating with,” because he is in this “Anything Everything” class.

The thing to run then is obviously just what kind of universe he is stuck in, and to begin splitting it up with an axe!

“What wouldn’t you mind your mother saying?”

They’ll hate this process. They’ll practically, if you insist on it long enough, get down and chew the rug. “Give me some things you wouldn’t mind saying to your mother.” It’s just horrible! The thought of having to go through all that communication. But this they can’t dodge. So we can grade the process. We can say this “Anything and Everything” process wouldn’t be the optimum case, and quite possibly wouldn’t run at all “Things you wouldn’t mind so-and-so communicating with, your body communicating with,” or anything else. That process is too subjective. They can’t grasp it enough. They can’t play the game. So you make them sit there and you go on down for this other process.

How do you find out whose universe he’s in? Just ask him who he most resembles in his family.

There are two things which will create change. One of them is Postulates, and the other is Communication. A live communication, postulates, will always create change of one kind or another. Now, the point is, how ably can your preclear communicate? If he can’t communicate very ably, then you are going to have to make him dramatize communication. Mechanical two-way communication is one method of dramatizing communication—you have the preclear refusing mass, and at the same time he’s communicating. This will persuade him to communicate. But there is another way of doing this, which is what I used on this preclear successfully. I actually changed his skin tone, and did something to the universes, and there was some change on his psychometry as a result thereof.

I went further and did him a dirty trick. I gave him the same process to run, but thoroughly flat, on all members of his family, and that process was: “Give me some things you wouldn’t mind saying to you.” “Give me some things you wouldn’t mind saying to .”

Now actually, it isn’t that the sense of the thing he is saying or has said has anything to do with it. But with this process your preclear is going to do something peculiar. He is going to pick the bank clean. Any time somebody is super-generalizing on “everythings” and “nothings,” you can absolutely count on the fact that he is not capable of creating energy. He will be able to create some ideas, but this will be rather slow, and he’s lazy. So he will take actual phrases and things that occur to him when his mother really said something—anything—and things he would say to his mother.

With this particular process, we picked his bank clean of things he would say to his mother in about three minutes, and he went into a horrible comm lag. Finally he said, “Well, actually, I never say anything to her. I never did say very much to her.”

Just as a result of that processing and no other (two hours out of the five I used on that process), he had markedly changed his consideration. But if you think he had improved, you are mistaken. He had gone downhill, and the reason he had gone downhill is that he had given it all up. He had really got into “Everything and Nothing” now. He was really willing to let his body communicate with cannon balls. He was willing to let his body communicate with anything destructive. He was not yet covertly hostile to the body; he just didn’t mind communicating.

What changed this was separating the two universes.

The interesting thing about any of these cases is that a person who qualifies all statements, who can never be specific, would apparently suffer intense pain if he were to say “oatmeal” when you asked him to “Give me something you wouldn’t mind eating,” and he never seems to grasp the fact that the auditor wants him to say “oatmeal.” You can just keep on telling him that this is what you want him to say. I have actually made this test, too, by the way (not that it was as a good auditor, but as a good research man). I have sat and I have said to a preclear, “Now, I want you to name a specific kind of food that you wouldn’t mind eating. One is all I want you to name, and one is all I will allow you to name. Now, what kind of food wouldn’t you mind eating?”

“Any kind of food.”

Now, if you get that kind of conversational manifestation, it is a fellow who disperses away from every spot he tries to look at. You’ve got the case pegged, postulate-wise and mechanically. He can’t locate a single spot. You would say, “Where are you from?” and he would say, “I’m from the New England part of the country.” If you ask somebody who can spot a spot “Where are you from?” he is likely to come back with something like this: “I’m from Bramblebury, Vermont. Were you ever there?” He would suspect you had probably been there. You know, anybody could locate that place! Precision. Spotting.

But “Anything and Everything” is an imprecise spotting. It’s buttered all over the universe, and it is peculiar to the mystic. And let me assure you that it is very unusual to find a process short of Spotting Spots in Space which relieves this condition—but that process is: Figure out the universe he is in, make him say something to that universe by asking him, “Things you wouldn’t mind saying to your mother” (or father, or whoever it is). He will hate you like poison before you are through. Halfway through the process he will just as soon cut your throat as look at you. You are making him communicate, and this will break up.

I’m glad we’ve had a good look at this case. I’m glad we have some inkling of this condition, but you are going to run into it. It’s the one that makes an auditor blow his brains out most often. You give the preclear an auditing command. You KNOW this command works. Then this—everything, anything, nothing.

Now let me be very specific to you. This is the thing that drives an auditor away from using good processes. He strikes one of these high generality, unable, on high semantic sensitivity cases, and uses a process, and the auditing command does not communicate at all. He should be sure that the case is incapable of doing that process, but instead of that he will feel that the auditing command must be bad, or the process must be weak. No. It is simply that the process is above the individual’s ability to handle. Now it becomes a study of how far south can human beings go, and how far south can we reach and actually audit them.

Now you will understand that two-way communication simply makes the preclear say something to you, and you say something to him, and he says something to you. We could come up above that a little bit, and we could make him tell us things he would say to people and things people would say to him, and it becomes a “wow” of a process at that level, because you pick the universe and you blow him out of that universe. This universe he is in is probably an “Everything-Nothing” consideration, and you unburden that—and he comes on up. This is an indirect version of Two-Way Communication, and it hits straight at Universe Processing.

There is a solution to that case!

L. RON HUBBARD
Washington, D. C.



Issue 14 [1955, ca. mid-September]


The Magazine of
DIANETICS and SCIENTOLOGY
from
Washington, D.C.



Start That Practice!

L. Ron Hubbard



Here’s a new successful way to start a practice !
All over the world auditors are succeeding. However, in some areas we understand there are auditors who can’t seem to get going. In one particular area we have heard that some auditors were working at regular jobs. What a waste! In a world without assistance, real honest assistance from anyone but Dianeticists and Scientologists, the waste of ability in these lines is practically criminal!
There’s no lack of willingness on the part of these auditors. It’s finance. They can’t seem to get paying preclears. And to keep on eating they go to work.
Well, we’ve got the solution to that. We’ve been running a pilot project right here in Washington and although we haven’t gotten it all the way through, the auditor we assigned this project to has now begun to look for an assistant and he has turned over a pc to the Guidance Center.
I have been alert to this problem of starting a practice for a long time and I knew that it was crucial in many quarters. Thus when I got this idea I thought that we had better make a good test of it and see what happened and if it worked out then we had our no-practice auditor right into the swing of it.
We started this a month ago. The auditor selected had no real luck and no intensives for about two weeks and then the dam broke.
Here in essence is the project. On a three-time-a-week basis, place in the personal column of the local paper—in a city of some size—the following advertisement:

PERSONAL RELATIONS: I will talk to anyone for you about anything. Call GR 5-8906 between 4 and 6 p.m. Reverend Charles Gringle, Church of Scientology, 1899 Nevada St.

Putting in the auditor’s home phone (getting an answering service also if you want) and his own name we are now ready to go. The ad should run Tuesday, Thursday and Sunday at least or seven a week if you can afford it.
We’ve already varied the wording around to test the best and the above is the one that pulled calls.
You should expect a lull. For a few days people will read it and do nothing. They’ll think it’s a code. But when it appears over and over they will see that it’s really a service and they’ll come out of their comm lag.
Now here’s the trick. DON’T charge for their service. That isn’t where you make it. You DO talk to anyone about anything FOR the caller. You go out and take trouble with his troubles. You help him patch things up with his boss or landlady or wife or the government. And you don’t charge him anything and you don’t straight-talk at him about auditing.


Copyright (©)1955 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.

You have to hand, however, literature about Scientology. And you have, of course, your pro card (which gives your minister’s rating) and this should read, this professional card:

The Rev. Charles Gringle, HCA
Consulting Scientologist

GR 5-8906 452 Fro St.

And you have another card:

CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY

The Reverend Charles Gringle
Pastor

Meeting every Sunday Morning at
1899 Nevada Street
at 10 a.m.

Repair the ravages of the week
with Scientology services

And you hold that Church meeting even if you seem to be TOO BUSY helping people to spare that hour Sunday morning. You run the service only until 11. One hour’s basic group auditing, the simplest session in the Group Auditor’s Handbook, Session I—always that. You vary it and they’ll leave after five or six sessions. Stay with it and the congregation will stay with you.
NOW you will discover that most of the calls you get are from people in trouble which is best solved by auditing. One or the other of the people concerned will be found to need it badly.
You give them auditing on an hourly basis. You charge $10.00 per hour and carry none of it “on the cuff.” Take it cash in advance. Guarantee nothing. Make sure you stress its spiritual slant and value. Steer clear of promising cures. AND DON’T rush them into auditing. They’ll beg for it soon enough.
Actually do this to be of service to Man. Try to give it away. You’ll find you can’t. Don’t use this just because it’s a “preclear getter,” it’s a lot more than that. It will put you in financial condition and get your Church going.
Now if several auditors in an area do this there are ways and means of settling rows amongst them. Given three local papers and three auditors doing this, agree amongst yourselves who should have which paper and run one auditor to the paper. If you are too many for this then run it all through one switchboard or phone and take watches, allot the house calls, pool the auditing and cash resulting. Or do it one group per paper.
Keep that “Church of Scientology” in the ads so there’s always a trademark on the stunt and it can’t be pushed into by some untrained quack psychologist or Commie psychiatrist.
Actually run that Church!
All right, you’ll learn fast when you start it.
You need this to begin. Your ordination must be in good order. With an HCA you can get that from the Founding Church. Its cost is now $18.00. You had better have one from the Founding Church or the Church of American Science or the Church of Scientology.
Make sure you have a Church Charter. Write in to the Founding Church at 1845 “R” Street, N.W. and make your application.
If you want we’ll send you literature. We have a handout piece at the printers into which you stamp your name and address and which advertises nothing else but you.
When you’ve got these, run your ad and begin. Don’t run your ad unless you’ve got the above straight.
Now the press will contact you. The Code of a Scientologist on the subject of the press is explicit. No interviews.

BUT sooner or later make sure you do all you can to get yourself or your group a TV spot or a radio spot to talk about the calls for help you get and keep it going steadily. Press is a via. Radio and TV are straight communication, relatively speaking. So whatever you do don’t, particularly now, fall away from that Code of a Scientologist and always act within the area of Ability Major 1, “The Scientologist—A Manual on the Dissemination of Material” which you can get from the HASI for $1.00.
Now by the time you have all this started I’ll have something for you in the way of fast assists if what you’ve got isn’t fast enough for you.
In other words, wherever we can, let’s get this show on the road. We don’t care how many Churches of Scientology there are in a town. So long as there’s a leading Church. So long as they’re actually Churches. We don’t care how many ministers we have so long as they’re good auditors and good people, willing to run Churches and help their fellows.
The cost of starting all this is not high. If you’re working keep on working for a little until you get a practice started. Put your interview hours in the right place for you and work harder by putting yourself in two slots at once. If you’re not working and broke, get a job doing anything, finance your project and then cut loose from the job when you are rolling.
Well, here goes a main all-out push across the world. We want 5,000 auditors and 5,000 Churches by 1958.
There’s not a minister anywhere around that measures up to what the public thinks he should be able to do—except a Scientologist.
There’s no remedy for a case like busyness.
There’s no remedy for an attack on an outfit like a full-scale offense toward Theta goals.
Okay?






























LRH TAPE LECTURE
Washington, D.C.
14 September 1955


* 5509C14 ALS-5 The Unknown Datum—a MEST-shaking Lecture

P.A.B. No. 61
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR’S BULLETIN

The Oldest Continuous Publication in Dianetics and Scientology

From L. RON HUBBARD

Via Hubbard Communications Office
163 Holland Park Avenue, London W.11

_____________________________________________________________________

16 September 1955

SELLING


It is completely fantastic that we have to sell Dianetics and Scientology. Yet we do.

If this is so, then why, and how?

The world does not know that there is any hope for the mind, the spirit, the intelligence level, weariness and disability. If you talk to a group all about the mechanics of the spirit and fail to talk to them about “There is some hope for it,” you’ve overshot, and right there you have “entered the public case” too high. Its data level does NOT include SOMETHING CAN BE DONE ABOUT IT.

The careless driver, the faithless wife, the negligent employee are all severe problems. You could confront an individual beset by such problems and talk for half an hour about engrams and have him walk away without asking for help. Why? Because his entrance level is SOMETHING CAN BE DONE ABOUT IT. You’ll have to sell him on that before you can sell him anything else. Does it take selling? It surely does!

The world has been promised and promised and promised for centuries, with a flop every time. Today the magazines of the cheaper variety are full of psychiatric articles about the miracles of new drugs. Even legislation states that psychiatry “cures 75 percent of its cases”; an outright lie. It knows that as soon as you promise cures you’re Lying. Even the Busy Business Bureaus state that the public should suspect anyone who promises a cure for anything—by which, we believe, it includes psychiatry. So your glowing statements that you can take care of it entirely are received by the beset person not at all. He’s heard it before. He’s spent his money on patent medicine, and medicos, and quack psychologists, or he knows somebody who has, and he knows it won’t work, that there is NO HOPE.

How do we solve this impasse? We don’t over-promise our beset person. We tell him that we have known such things to be helped by Scientology; that if we were persuaded, we might take a crack at it; that the thing isn’t ENTIRELY hopeless, since Scientology, a brand-new science, has been handling things that couldn’t be handled in the past. And we go on in this vein, a sort of two-way comm, until we bring his tone up to where he thinks maybe there IS something that can be done about it if he is very lucky and if we, fortunately, will make an effort. Show him the Code of a Scientologist. But talk to him not about WHAT you can do or HOW you can do it, but that there IS some hope in the matter these days.

Another point is to de-classify Scientology as medicine, psychology, psychoanalysis or psychiatry. Classification with these will doom your point. Your beset person, or the group you are addressing, possesses experience along these lines. Punch this

Copyright (©) 1955 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.

up everywhere: SCIENTOLOGY IS THE ONLY ANGLO-SAXON-developed science of the mind and spirit. Medicine is Latin in origin. Psychology is German (Prof. Wundt, 1862). Psychoanalysis is Austrian (Freud, 1894). Psychiatry is Russian (Pavlov and others in the 1890’s). Scientology is an Anglo-Saxon exact science of the mind and spirit.

Another point is the goal of Scientology: Ability.

Now, in talking to a group, steer off from Para-Scientology. Lay off the whole track stuff, huh? Lay off the fantastic. And if you have some chap around who insists on telling people about these things, just note him down; he isn’t working for us, fellers. The quickest way to lose a beset person or a group is to load him down with phenomena. Talk, instead, about the fact that something can be done. Talk about the fact that there IS a spiritual side to Man. Talk about the fact that Scientology solves social problems. When they are very initiate and it’s all in good fun and they’ve also got their HPA or HCA, do what you like with the whole track. Or use it in private sessions. Don’t hand it out to the public raw. It’s too strong.

To establish two-way communication (as you MUST do if you are going to communicate at all), you have to talk within the UNDERSTANDING of your audience. Remember that UNDERSTANDING is the peak of ARC. And ARC includes COMMUNICATION. Communication brings about understanding, so communicate a lot. But some understanding must exist to bring about communication, so don’t tell the Ladies’ Aid Society about your whole track space opera and expect them to begin cheering your speech. If their mouths open at all it will be either to say “Huh?” or to snore. And they won’t come back again. This is so much a fact that I want you to write and tell me who and where anytime you hear somebody spout off about whole track to new audiences or to strangers, for by this we find the boys who aren’t in our camp.

Our world today, before we’re well into it, believes that you live one life and get buried, and that’s that; that you don’t go to heaven; that mechanical gimmicks work better than men; that religion was “pie in the sky” and nobody got to eat it; that SCIENCE may or may not be beneficial; that you can’t really do anything about it anyway. That’s a pretty dim and inaccurate view, but that’s the view, just the same.

When raising the tone of the pc, do it gently by small gradients. The rises can get spectacular, but not if you try it with rocket ships. And when you do it, you’ll do it by raising his UNDERSTANDING, but if you fail it was because you jumped ABOVE his understanding and so you became unreal.

Now, the first step in auditing is not a process as such. It’s FIND A PRECLEAR. And the next step is ESTABLISH THE EXISTENCE OF AN AUDITOR. That’s why you don’t do quite so well with mama. You haven’t established the existence of an auditor. To find a preclear, you have to engage what little understanding you are confronting, and then raise it.

Asking a preclear to decide to have processing is silly. You wouldn’t ask him to run Part C of SOP 8-C first, would you? No. You tell him, within his framework of understanding, that auditing is necessary to accomplish his goal, and when to report. You don’t ask an audience to decide to like Dianetics or Scientology. You tell them to like it, to trust it, to learn to hope again with it. You aren’t a scientist, and you don’t have to be wishy-washy and indefinite about what you say. Be simple. Be decisive. Be theta.

To find a pc, you have only to establish the fact that there is hope in auditing and the existence of the auditor.

You don’t have to struggle to tell people what Scientology is, what it is all about. Scientology applied the exact methods of science to the problem of the human mind and spirit, and won. It means the study of knowingness. Its immediate result in application is the bettering of ability in individuals and groups. It is a practical religion for all denominations, and doesn’t require faith in anybody until they have experienced something to have faith about. It helps people who want to be helped, and if they don’t want to be helped it doesn’t insist on helping them. It can be used to train and control people. Its goal is freedom. It has more validated cases in its files than any other practice. It is not an authoritarian science, and is of and for the people; it belongs to the little man and woman, not to huge interests.

By using Scientology you can talk better to people, and understand people better, and get things done or keep things from getting done. Scientology caps about ten thousand years of study that began in Asia and wound up with a quarter of a century of work in the Western Hemisphere. Its practitioners are ministers. These are trained for years, in school and out. These ministers abide by a Code that couldn’t be applied to the healing sciences at all by all reason of its clauses.

If people want to know a lot about Scientology, they’ll have to start from scratch like you did. You do things, you don’t just talk about them. When and if somebody starts running you and Scientology down, get amused, get superior, don’t close terminals. Scientology is like “good roads and good weather.” Everybody is for those. Somebody trying to run it down would be for bad roads and bad weather, and you appeal to that few who like things done right and running right. And so you become amused at opposition.

You don’t demonstrate Scientology on somebody before an audience just to PROVE IT WORKS. You handle this problem by insisting, if you process at all, upon processing the entire group, and you use “three points in the body, three points in the room, find three points in the body” until somebody pops out. Then you smile and hand them your card, and wonder who is running at Epsom Downs next week. Talking or processing, you are in poised control of the subject and your person or audience.

I wouldn’t credit it, if I were on Saturn and somebody told me you had to sell a science which gives the priceless gift of freedom to everyone, that such a stupid planet could exist. But it does, and you are on it.

Good selling,

Ron















LRH TAPE LECTURE
Washington, D.C.
21 September 1955


* 5509C21 ALS-6 Postulates 1, 2, 3, 4, in Processing—a new
understanding of Axiom 36

P.A.B. No. 62
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR’S BULLETIN

The Oldest Continuous Publication in Dianetics and Scientology

From L. RON HUBBARD

Via Hubbard Communications Office
163 Holland Park Avenue, London W.11

_____________________________________________________________________

30 September 1955

PSYCHIATRISTS


Don’t be terribly surprised if in the next year or two the psychiatrists start pushing auditors around with even greater antagonism. And DON’T be caught flatfooted when they do.

You know, auditor, we HAVE had a fight on our hands. And we have and WILL have a fight on our hands. The old Book One Black Panther mechanism is all right in its place, but it doesn’t do here.

Nearly all the backlash in society against Dianetics and Scientology has a common source-the psychiatrist-psychologist-psychoanalyst clique. Their patter doesn’t vary. Behind the bulwark of authority these people, when asked about you, an auditor, or about the subject or about me, usually say that it is a hoax and that you or I are really just out of an institution for the insane.

Wherever some auditor stupidly decides to co-operate with psychiatrists, he has been gobbled up very quickly. One cannot co-operate with them any more than he can “do business with Hitler.”

You think maybe I’m just sawing out a tune when I say this. Very few people believe the actual true history of our science in the past five years, the amount of attack and antagonism to which it has been subjected. But let it suffice that about two million have been spent to put Dianetics and Scientology out of the running. Because the people trying to do it are, by and large, pretty stupid, and low-toned, the campaign has not succeeded. But the amount of fast action necessary to combat that much money has been, to say the least, exhausting.

I could tell you a lot more about this: I could tell you about the strange finances of the BDR,* of DIANOTES, of other squirrel publications. I could tell you about three actual murders. I could tell you about long strings of psychotics run in on the Foundation and the Association, sent in to us by psychiatrists who then, using LSD and pain-drug-hypnosis, spun them and told everyone Dianetics and Scientology drove people insane. I could tell you about the strange politics and ambitions of psychiatry, so well covered in the book Psychopolitics, and give you a proper riddle as to why we, a small group, the only ANGLO-SAXON DEVELOPMENT IN THE FIELD OF THE MIND AND SPIRIT, have been subjected to so much attack and finance. But I am not telling you stories or being dramatic. I am inviting your co-operation in your own future security. Whether you believe this war exists, or believe the psychiatric rumor that it’s all a figment of my mind, it’s best to be safe in this battle.

[* Bristol Dianetic Review, Bristol, England.]


Copyright (©) 1955 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.

It’s best to be safe because it isn’t our battle and it isn’t our objective to ruin psychiatry or medicine. We don’t care about these. Our goals are to make more people more able, to make a rather inefficient society a lot more fun. In order to attain these goals we had better scan the river ahead for shoals and fit our craft so as to survive any, and having done that, lightheartedly continue on our way. Dianetics and Scientology are not political; they desire to overthrow no government. Each auditor anywhere is expected to continue his long-given allegiance. Dianetics and Scientology exist to serve and assist any given officialdom in a proper way. We have in view no empire of madmen all screaming for some dictator or banner. We have our place in the world of things as they are, and we can do an awful lot right in that place, seeing that we know more about the mind, the spirit and religion and even science than any other group in the world.

Granting this, then, we should act to best fit our niches, and so do our jobs. About the only thing which upsets our forward course is the fact that psychiatry and medicine sit close to the advisers of state, and these officials, on matters of the mind, turn to psychiatrists for their opinion, and the psychiatrist there can be counted upon by his cult headquarters to give the right amount of sneer to the official about Dianetics and Scientology. The public as a whole love Dianetics and Scientology. Our word-of-mouth praise is remarkable. But in the official strata, because the psychiatrist is the authority, we are likely to be mud. Similarly, the newspaper, in wanting an opinion of us, calls the local medical or psychiatric board and again gets this formulated sneer and defamation. That the public responds to us and likes us is remarkable in the face of this authoritative calumny. Reversely, the public utterly LOATHES psychiatry. You waste time if you try to defame psychiatry to the public. The public is already in a spitting frame of mind on THAT subject. Coals to Newcastle, strictly. Psychiatry stands in the public mind for ineffectiveness, lies and inhuman brutality. The public is better informed on this than you suspect. The public only avoids YOU, an auditor, when it believes you are a psychiatrist or a psychologist, so there is no team-up; there never will be. The Busy Business Bureaus, advised by psychiatry, will always give Dianetics and Scientology a bad report no matter how hard you work to get them to give a good report. The answer—ignore them. We are an organization for and of the people.

But don’t fail to take the steps to secure yourself an immunity from attack, auditor. Make sure all your papers are in good order. Make sure, no matter where you are in the world (for the last attack upon us was in Central Africa) that your ordination is in good order. Make sure that you are running a good and orderly congregation every Sunday morning. Make sure your Church is registered properly. Make SURE your literature says you make the able more able, and that insanity and illness are no more your problem than they would be the problem of any minister. Stay out of that slough of insanity and severe illness, for you don’t belong there and never will. Practically, I don’t know any auditor who ever came out unscathed entirely when he attempted to work with the severely ill or the insane. The amount of enturbulence caused by contact with such is fantastic.

Now, not to scare you but to inform you, psychiatry has armed itself with several new drugs. One of these, LSD, has the total goal of driving persons insane for 15 to 25 hours—JUST long enough to convince people that your auditing spun the preclear. When you see a process solve a case, and then the case spins, don’t even bother to look for the needle mark on the pc. The APA spent their whole May convention in Atlantic City drooling over the effectiveness of this LSD, WHICH HAS NEVER MADE ANYONE WELL AND IS WELL KNOWN TO HAVE THE TOTAL PURPOSE OF PRODUCING INSANITY. Grim? Fantastic? Ha! Ask the few auditors who’ve had this done to the pc. For the pc or his family often has a psychiatrist looking in, unknown to the auditor. And it HAS happened. Wild? It’s a lot wilder when it’s happening to you as an auditor. The answer? Don’t process people with psychotic histories. That’s simple enough.

Now if it does happen to you, don’t just abandon the case. Give the case a few exercises and observe the recurrence of the weird spin. Observe this carefully. And then bluntly inform the family or the authorities, if you are questioned or called in, THAT YOU AS PASTOR OF THE CONGREGATION TO WHICH THIS PERSON BELONGS HAVE A VESTED INTEREST IN THE LIFE AND HEALTH OF THIS PERSON AND THAT YOU BELIEVE THAT UNDUE INFLUENCE WAS USED AND THAT SPECIFICALLY YOU GAVE EXERCISES TO AND OBSERVED THE PERSON IN QUESTION TO DETERMINE WHETHER OR NOT THAT PERSON HAD BEEN GIVEN THE INSANITY DRUG LSD SO THAT YOU COULD REPORT IT TO THE PROPER AUTHORITIES. And don’t testify otherwise. Sounds wild? Well, always do it if involved in such a thing. You’ll find the family physician or psychiatrist was called in midway in processing (which consists, remember, entirely of making able people more able). You’ll find there is a vested interest somewhere in the insanity of this person. And so testify that you suspect it. We will have to hand lots of literature on LSD, in fact we’ll have the APA convention reports on it for you. If this happens to you, you, minister, are the only policeman who would suspect it. If, then, psychiatry “plants” one on you, look it over, report the sudden occurrence of insanity promptly, testify your suspicion of LSD, produce the literature on it and get the sheriff looking around for that medico or psychiatrist as fast as possible. BUT, don’t look for trouble in the first place. Leave insane people alone. I know we can do things for them. We can also shed light on how to solve the national debt, too.

DON’T ever promise people you will cure them. If they want to know if Scientology will help their arthritis, tell them it often has been known to do so, but that that isn’t an auditor’s goal. If a person becomes more able, he’ll usually feel well. But DON’T advertise that you cure things. If you HAVE to advertise, I’ll give you some tips that work. They don’t include curing ills and insanity.

You, as the most educated people on earth on the subject of the human spirit and MAN, certainly deserve a high role in the field of religion. We can reform all of religion and make it vastly better. Why clash with healing quacks?

Scientology is for the people and of the people. It belongs to them. They are receiving it. They like it. Bear with our troubles with the dull official and Authority and go out and make a happier world.

L. RON HUBBARD



LRH TAPE LECTURES
London, England
3—8 October 1955

** 5510C03 4LACC-1 Fundamentals of Scientology and Rudiments of Auditing
** 5510C03 4LACC-2 Fundamentals of Scientology and Rudiments of Auditing
5510C04 4LACC-3 1st and 2nd Postulates in Living
* 5510C04 4LACC-4 1st to 4th Postulates in Living
** 5510C05 4LACC-5 Smoothness of Auditing
5510C05 4LACC-6 Smoothness of Auditing (cont)
** 5510C06 4LACC-7 Communication and “I Don’t Know” (Confusion)
* 5510C06 4LACC-8 Stable Datum and Confusion
* 5510C07 4LACC-9 Relations to Time Continuance
* 5510C07 4LACC-10 Base Time and Time Continuum
** 5510C08 LPLS-1 Goalsof DianeticsandScientology
* * 5510C08 LPLS-2 IndividuaI to National Levels of Intention,
Confusion and Communication

4TH LONDON ADVANCED CLINICAL COURSE LECTURES
London, England
3 October—5 November 1955

“Landing suddenly and unexpectedly on September 20th (1955), L. Ron Hubbard is not only in England, but is hard at work bringing the technologies of Scientology up to date, attending to British reorganization, and lecturing to the ACC and the public, and, with all this, having his first vacation since he left Britain two years ago.

“Ron will be here for only a few weeks, but during this time he is delivering public lectures at the Lindsay Theatre, next door to the HASI Clinic, at 2:00 p.m., Saturday afternoons. He is also talking to auditors every Tuesday night at 7:00 p.m.

“His coming means new tapes and a brighter outlook for British Scientology.”

—Certainty, Volume 2, No. 11

The first Advanced Clinical Course given in England by L. Ron Hubbard personally (4th London ACC) commenced on 3 October 1955.

** 5510C03 4LACC-1 Fundamentals of Scientology and Rudiments of Auditing
** 5510C03 4LACC-2 Fundamentals of Scientology and Rudiments of Auditing
5510C04 4LACC-3 1st and 2nd Postulates in Living
* 5510C04 4LACC-4 1st to 4th Postulates in Living
** 5510C05 4LACC-5 Smoothness of Auditing
5510C05 4LACC-6 Smoothness of Auditing (cont.)
** 5510C06 4LACC-7 Communication and “I Don’t Know” (Confusion)
* 5510C06 4LACC-8 Stable Datum and Confusion
* 5510C07 4LACC-9 Relations to Time Continuance
* 5510C07 4LACC-10 Base Time and Time Continuum
* 5510C10 4LACC-11 Establishing of the Auditor
** 5510C10 4LACC-12 Communication and the Subject of Communication
5510C11 LAM History of Dianetics and Scientology
5510C11 4LACC-13 Data of Comparable Magnitude
** 5510C11 4LACC-14 Comm Bridge, Confusion, Time Factor
5510C12 4LACC-15 Communication and Intentions, Deteriorization of
5510C12 4LACC-16 The Communication Bridge
5510C13 4LACC-17 The Antiquity of Auditing
** 5510C13 4LACC-18 Affinity, Reality and Communication
5510C14 4 LACC- 19 Exteriorization and Interiorization
5510C14 4LACC-20 Further Aspects of Exteriorization
5510C17 4LACC-21 Tolerance of Havingness
** 5510C17 4LACC-22 Establishing a Session
** 5510C18 4LACC-23 Beginning and Continuing a Session
** 5510C18 4LACC-24 Processing: Level One
5510C19 4LACC-25 The Senior Desire of a Thetan
** 5510C19 4LACC-26 Third Level of a Process
** 5510C20 4LACC-27 The Pc’s Present Time Problem—the Body

5510C20 4LACC-28 An Understanding of Creative Processing
5510C21 4LACC-29 Native State and Postulates 1, 2, 3, 4
5510C21 4LACC-30 Native State and Confusion
5510C24 4LACC-31 Resume of Creative Processes
5510C24 4LACC-32 Lack of Terminals
** 5510C25 4LACC-33 Engrams
** 5510C25 4LACC-34 The Handling of Confusion
** 5510C26 4LACC-35 Stable Datum and the Study of Science
* 5510C26 4LACC-36 Solving Engrams with Stable Datum, Communication
Terminals
** 5510C27 4LACC-37 The Role of a Scientologist
5510C28 4LACC-38 The Anatomy of Terminals
5510C28 4LACC-39 Title unknown
** 5510C28 4LACC-40 Intolerance
** 5510C31 4LACC-41 How to Audit
5510C31 4LACC-42 Training of an Auditor
5511C01 4LACC-43 The Preclear’s Reality
5511C01 4LACC-44 Improvement in Technology
5511C02 4LACC-45 Title unknown
5511C02 4LACC-46 Randomity and Automaticities
5511 C03 4LACC-47 A Review of the 4th London ACC
** 5511 C03 4LACC-48 Attitude and Conduct of Scientologists
5511C05 4LACC-49 New Understanding of Universes
** 5511C05 4LACC-50 End of Course Lecture




LONDON PUBLIC LECTURE SERIES
London, England
8—29 October 1955

“In October of 1955, at the New Lindsay Theatre in London, L. Ron Hubbard gave a series of guest lectures to a crowded theatre. The attendance at these lectures was so tremendous that in addition to all standing room being occupied, a series of extension speakers had to be run to our clinic premises in order that as few people as possible should be turned away or disappointed.”
—Certainty, Volume 2, No.11

** 5510C08 LPLS-1 Goals of Dianetics and Scientology
** 5510C08 LPLS-2 Individual to National Levels of Intention,
Confusion and Communication
** 5510C15 LPLS-3 How Good You Can Get
** 5510C15 LPLS-4 The Eight Dynamics
5510C22 LPLS-5 The Goodness of Man
** 5510C22 LPLS-6 The Soul—Good and Evil
5510C29 LPLS-7 Automaticity—Cause and Effect
** 5510C29 LPLS-8 Power of Choice and Self-Determinism

P.A.B. No. 63
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR’S BULLETIN

The Oldest Continuous Publication in Dianetics and Scientology

From L. RON HUBBARD

Via Hubbard Communications Office
163 Holland Park Avenue, London W.11

_____________________________________________________________________

14 October 1955

PLAYING THE GAME


The highest activity is playing a game. When one is high toned, he knows that it is a game. As he falls away down the tone scale, he becomes less and less aware of the game, and thereby less and less.

The greatest ability of thought is DIFFERENTIATION. So long as one can differentiate, one is sane. Its opposite is IDENTIFICATION. When one begins to identify, one has “closed terminals” too closely, and believes one terminal is another terminal. The failure to differentiate between two terminals, in an electric motor, would bring about no “moting.” In a pc, it brings about no power or ability to handle power.

The legal definition of sanity is “the ability to tell right from wrong,” and that is a very sooth statement.

Therefore, the highest ability in playing a game would be the ability to know the rightness and wrongness rules of that particular game. As all rightness and wrongness are considerations, and as the game itself is a consideration, the playing of the game requires a high ability to differentiate; particularly it requires an ability to know the rules and the right-rules and the wrong-rules.

When an individual is prone to identify, he is no longer able to differentiate the right-rules and the wrong-rules, and the right-rules become wrong and the wrong-rules become right, and we have a criminal.

A criminal cannot play the game of society. He plays, then, the “game” called “cops and robbers.”

A person who strongly identifies is not necessarily a criminal, but he certainly is having trouble playing the game of society. Instead of playing that game, he “gets tired,” “gets sick.” He has these things happen because he doesn’t want to play the social game. He has a “game” of sorts in “hypochondria.”

Now, if you had a culture which was running a no-game game for anybody, a culture which itself had no game for everybody to play, a culture which had in its government a fixation on keeping anyone from playing the game THEY wanted to play, we would have as its manifestation all manner of curious ills such as those described in various ideologies like Capitalism or Communism. The entire government game would be “Stop playing YOUR game.” The degree of sanity in government would be the degree it permitted strong and active participation in the game of government, in the game of playing your game.

Copyright (©)1955 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.


But if people who can’t play the game can’t differentiate, similarly a sane person could find himself very confused to be part of a game which wasn’t differentiating and where the rightness and wrongness rules were unclearly defined. Thus, a government without exact and accurate codes and jurisprudence would discover in its citizens an inability to play the game no matter how sane they were.

Thus, the game can be crazy and its players sane, or the players can be crazy and the game sane. Either condition would affect the other. When we get crazy players and a crazy game, the end product of either of the two imbalances above, we would get anything except a game. We would get chaos. Into this chaos, then, could be injected a new game, and on this alignment we would be able to have people who could play a game playing a game that could be played.

As a useful example of this, let us take people who cannot see anything wrong with slanderous materials on the subject of Scientology. These people, perhaps, also see nothing wrong with Scientology. They read The Aberree or the Daily Worker with equal facility with Ability and see no difference. We have here people who see no difference. They don’t differentiate. They don’t differentiate because they see no game. They see no game because they can’t play a game. Or, habituated to a social structure which had no rules or rightness or wrongness, they have lost, like so many students of various universities, their criteria.

By Axiom 36: A LIE IS A SECOND POSTULATE, STATEMENT OR CONDITION DESIGNED TO MASK A PRIMARY POSTULATE WHICH IS PERMITTED TO REMAIN.

A basic rule is that to as-is a second postulate, it is necessary to as-is only the first postulate preceding it, for upon that one depends the strength of the second.

To run out all games one would only have to find where there are no old games, spotting these one after the other. He would then hit the various cognitions that a game was in progress, for the game was always preceded by no game and all games are tailored by considerations.

Various effects from games are to become “the only one” on games, to become all apathetic about games, to have the rules of the games in reverse so as to counter games.

The remedy of having no game, or not knowing a game is in progress, would be to as-is the first condition and the current condition by simply spotting here and there absences of games. Then make one.

L. RON HUBBARD


LRH TAPE LECTURES
10—13 October 1955

* 5510C10 4LACC-11 Establishing of the Auditor
** 5510C10 4LACC-12 Communication and the Subject of Communication
5510C11 LAM History of Dianetics and Scientology
5510C11 4LACC-13 Data of Comparable Magnitude
** 5510C11 4LACC-14 Comm Bridge, Confusion, Time Factor
5510C12 4LACC-15 Communication and Intentions, Deteriorization of
5510C12 4LACC-16 The Communication Bridge
5510C13 4LACC-17 The Antiquity of Auditing
** 5510C13 4LACC-18 Affinity, Reality and Communication







5510C14 4LACC-19 Exteriorization and Interiorization
5510C14 4LACC-20 Further Aspects of Exteriorization
** 5510C15 LPLS-3 How Good You Can Get
** 5510C15 LPLS-4 The Eight Dynamics
5510C17 4LACC-21 Tolerance of Havingness
** 5510C17 4LACC-22 Establishing a Session
** 5510C18 4LACC-23 Beginning and Continuing a Session
** 5510C18 4LACC-24 Processing: Level One
5510C19 4LACC-25 The Senior Desire of a Thetan
** 5510C19 4LACC-26 Third Level of a Process
** 5510C20 4LACC-27 The Pc’s Present Time Problem—the Body
5510C20 4LACC-28 An Understanding of Creative Processing
5510C21 4LACC-29 Native State and Postulates 1, 2, 3, 4
5510C21 4LACC-30 Native State and Confusion
5510C22 LPLS-5 The Goodness of Man
** 5510C22 LPLS-6 The Soul—Good and Evil

HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
1 Brunswick House,
83 Palace Gardens Terrace,
London, W.8.

OPERATIONAL BULLETIN NO.1 20 October 1955
Distribution: HAS staff, Founding Church, all Continents.



The following auditing commands are standard as of Issue Three of Six Levels of Processing, superseding all commands as of this date.

RUDIMENTS OF AUDITING:

1. Awareness of the auditor, the auditing room, that a session is in progress and that the preclear is being audited.

2. Two-way communication on a casual basis.

3. The delivery of the question.

4. Communication lag.

5. Acknowledgement of the question.

6. The duplication of that question except when using auditing commands on a two-way communication basis.

STARTING A SESSION: Establish ONE of the rudiments. Discuss the present time problem if there is one. Ask the preclear, “What could you do about that?” If this does not resolve it, ask him to imagine a problem of comparable magnitude, and ask him what he could do about the imagined problem. When he has done this exercise of resolving imagined problems several times, ask him again what he could do about the present time problem. This is the low harmonic on Level Three.

LEVEL ONE. LOCATIONAL PROCESSING: The object of Locational Processing is to establish an adequacy of communication terminals in the environment of the preclear. It can be run in busy thoroughfares, graveyards, confused traffic, or anywhere there is or is not motion of objects and people. Command: “Notice that (person).”

SEPARATENESS: The object of Separateness in Locational Processing is to establish and run out identifications. It is noteworthy that its opposite, Togetherness, does not run and is not a workable process. Commands: “Select an object from which you are separate.” “Select an object which is separate from you.” Run the first command only until the end of any given session or until the preclear “dopes off.” Then run the reverse command the next session until its end or until the preclear “dopes off.” If “dope-off” occurs, run the opposite command until pc is alert, then return to the “command of the session.” This method is used on all commands in Level One only.

SEPARATENESS FROM PEOPLE: This is used to remedy valence difficulties, to establish identities and run them out, and to raise the tone level of the preclear on the third dynamic, and to establish the fact that communication terminals exist to which one could speak. Commands: “Select a person from whom you are separate.” “Select a person who is separate from you.”

WATERLOO STATION: This process is utilized only when the earliest steps of Locational Processing have been completed when the preclear is in excellent ARC with his auditor. It is run with a great deal more acknowledgement, ARC, and two-way communication than earlier Locational processes. Commands: “Tell me something you can not-know about that (indicating or describing) person.” “Tell me something that that person can not-know about you.” It is noteworthy that the command change makes this a different process from Union Station or Victoria Station as earlier

released. Data from the HAA class at the Academy in Washington, and the 4th London ACC and additional research sources established the fact that the preclear often has difficulty understanding that he is to “un-know” something, that he either does not know already, or that he can simply wipe out. This is a rehabilitation of his ability to not-know. The first postulate evidently communicates better on not-know, but if there is any difficulty it can also be stated as “can don’t-know.” The word “can” is a demonstration that this is an ability, not a simple stir-up of the bank. The preclear too often picks up an existing don’t-know, and as in other cases such as “Invent processes,” he drains the bank of stable data. Don’t-know is a stable datum as per Axiom 53. The native state thetan is the total knowingness. In order to have a game he not-knows something, then with this as the first postulate, makes the second postulate that he knows something about it, makes the third postulate that not-ises the second postulate that he can forget about it, and finally as a fourth postulate, remembers, which is then an alter-isness of the not-isness, and is found to be not as functional in processing as it should be. In Axiom 36, Axiom 53, and Axiom 54, as well as the old Dianetic Logics, we see that stable data are necessary for the alignment of data or a confusion results. If the preclear is draining not-knowingnesses out of his bank rather than rehabilitating his ability to not-know at will, he naturally brings on himself the confusions in the bank, thus running “don’t-know.” When it is misinterpreted as pulling out old don’t-knows, it brings about more confusion; running “can—not-know” thus actually places new stable data into the bank. Because of this misunderstanding and miscommunication, Union Station, first postulate variety, Victoria Station did not produce the results on many preclears which the process itself is capable of producing.

LEVEL TWO. This level is reached when the preclear is originating communications smoothly without coaching and acknowledging the auditor’s commands well. There is no command as such. There is the subject of communication; secrets. Any idea in Scientology or process can be run on a two-way communication basis, whereby it is simply offered and discussed. At this level auditors are invited to be alert for preclears whose cases are and have been unchanging since Dianetics, since several of these cases have been found to be harbouring data and intentions towards Scientology which they felt they could not communicate to Dianetic or Scientology auditors in particular. Thus harbouring such secrets, the cases have remained static without advance. Advancing these cases is the only thing which will handle such incursions. More than twelve have been reported to date by various auditors whose cases were unchanged as they had data of bad intention toward Scientology which they could not divulge in particular to the Scientology auditor. There is no feeling or thought of revenge towards such people or punishment which should be very adequately clear to them if the matter is suspected.

LEVEL THREE. This is a subjective level. In this could be placed all former Dianetic and Scientology processes. Almost any of these will work with correct auditing but only if the person is able to handle subjective processes. It should be clearly stressed that at LEVEL THREE one is dealing with the basic present time problem with the preclear, communication. His real present time problem could be said to be any difficulty in using the body as a communication terminal.

It must also be stated that there is no such thing as a finite amount of communication. Any part of a communication formula of Creation of Human Ability and Dianetics 1955 can be too scarce but they cannot be too abundant. Attempting to increase the abundancy of these various parts of communications is the primary interest of the preclear at any and all times, but as he would rescue his body from a fire in order to use it in the future for communication, so does he feel that certain things have to be avoided if communication is to be possible. One of the things to be avoided is, for instance, knowing too much. If he knew all there was to know he would have no communication. Communication is his pay. It is the only pay he will ever get.

As the substance of the subjective level is to repair his communication terminal— body—so that he can continually use it as a communication terminal, better than before, and stop avoiding all of the various things which seek to tell him not to communicate, we see that the essence of gain and subjective processing is measured by the return of an abundance of communication potentiality.

CREATIVE PROCESSING: Creative processing is now used to get the preclear to mock up terminals. Any preclear can mock up a terminal similar to the one he already has. This terminal does not look to him a thetan, like a body, but looks to him sometimes like a black mass or a confused mass, or an invisible mass. He is asked to make mock-ups continually with no regard to throwing them away, placing them on various sides of his body to adjust dope-off in case of “stuck flows,” and using gradient scales in order to make him make better mock-ups. He is never asked to throw a mock-up away, as a psychotic patient would not give you back a sheet of paper after you handed him simply one. He will yet hand you back a sheet of paper after you have handed him successfully fifty or sixty sheets. He now has enough so that he can dispense with one. The thirst for communication terminals is such that the mock-ups hold on and snap in and will not disappear. When the individual feels that he can mock up or do something about communication terminals in general, he will then be able to get rid of the mock-ups. He can be asked to mock up not-knowing confused black terminals or anything else which seems to be indicated. This creative type processing is continued until the preclear volunteers that he has a feeling that he can possess himself subjectively of a communication terminal.

A lower harmonic of this process and one which can be used at the level of present time problem is, “What do you think is worth looking at?” This is discussed on a two-way communication basis. It will be discovered that you can remedy the preclear’s consideration and his ability to consider only when you have remedied his anxiety about communication.

The effort of the preclear will be to destroy undesirable pictures but these do not destroy easily since he already has too few pictures about which to communicate. He needs pictures for communication with the past which he feels is no longer there. He has got into a tangle about this and usually all he can think of is to obsessively make nothing of pictures and mock-ups. Making nothing of these is a version of having enough of these.

DEFINITION PROCESSING: Definition processing is done by asking the preclear to define such things as “exteriorization,” “problems and solutions,” “creativeness,” etc. The command is “What is ?”

INVENTION PROCESSING: This is done by having the preclear invent various ideas or considerations by which he creates stable data to displace aberrated stable data, and to handle confusions thusly. Commands: “Invent some problems,” “Invent some solutions,” “Assign some intentions.”

ENGRAM RUNNING: Persistent subjective situations and engrams can be handled by the following commands. “Tell me something you can not-know about that picture.” “Tell me something that that picture can not-know about you.” Creating “terrible situations,” “confusions,” “bad pictures” by means of creative processing until an abundance of the variety is established is however a superior process.

MODIFIED GITA: The entire list in Step Four of SOP 8 can be used with a not-know command as follows: “Tell me something you can not-know about .” “Tell me something can not-know about you.” This is normally used for specific and acute situations or assists.

LEVEL FOUR. Opening Procedure 8-C run as in earlier manuals.

LEVEL FIVE. Opening Procedure by Duplication First Postulate. This is done until the preclear can duplicate easily. The process is done with a book and a bottle as the two objects. It is done exactly as given in earlier manuals with the following command changes. Commands: “Do you see that book.” “Walk over to it.” “Pick it up.” “Tell me something you can not-know about its colour.” “Tell me something you can not-know about its temperature.” “Tell me something you can not-know about its weight.” “Put it down in exactly the same place.” “Do you see that bottle.” “Walk over to it.” “Pick it up.” “Tell me something you can not-know about its colour.” “Tell me something you can not-know about its temperature.” “Tell me something


you can not-know about its weight.” “Put it down in exactly the same place.” “Do you see that book.” Etc, etc. Run with good two-way communication. Do not vary commands. Does not need to be followed up by regular Opening Procedure by Duplication. Usually flattens in a couple of hours.

LEVEL SIX. Remedy of Havingness and Spotting Spots. If the lowest levels are handled well, the preclear should have been exteriorized long since. In case of exteriorization the preclear should have been talked to about it, and over it, and with it, but no further attention should have been paid to it. Separateness processing should bring about an exteriorization of the preclear if the lower levels of processing failed to do so. It would be considered unusual if the preclear had not exteriorized today, by the time he reaches Level Six. In this event the commands and levels should be utilized all over again starting at the bottom. The difficulty was probably not bringing about the rudiments in the first place, or that the preclear had things he felt he could not discuss with his auditor.

By modem processing, Remedy of Havingness and Spotting Spots are done simultaneously in addressing the drill of the exteriorized thetan. The only change would be in using showers of hellos and okays or “things you can not-know” on spots in the universe with which the preclear might have any difficulty in the Grand Tour.

L. Ron Hubbard Purposes in England

I am in England teaching the 4th London Clinical Course which is now about half-way completed. We have a large number of good auditors who are completing their training with this unit. The results in the unit itself are very spectacular as far as training auditors are concerned, and case class very good. We are making in all during the seven weeks of lecturing here—with Jack Parkhouse, DScn on the recording machine, substituting for Don Breeding at this end—seventy-eight lecture hours all on modern processing. Much of the material is new. Eight of these hours are public addresses made at the Lindsey Theatre near Notting Hill Gate. The theatre, by the way, is being swamped every Saturday afternoon and at the second lecture had sold out nearly all of the last two lectures in advance seating. A set of these tapes, made on a fifty cycle Wear-right which is capable of 12,000 cycles, will be retaped in London for use in the rental library which has just been established, and for copying in South Africa where Jack Horner has gone to teach an Advanced Clinical Course unit. A copy made on the Ampex sixty cycle machine of each of these recordings is being forwarded as made to Don Breeding in the U.S. and will be available in sets from the U.S.A. The Saturday afternoon eight hours will be put on rental library if their quality is deemed good enough. Sets of these tapes are available to DScns as they represent a complete rundown of modern Scientology and incorporate all we know in Dianetics, and contain the exact methods of auditing which are today producing the results they are producing. Training DScns will probably want these tapes.


L. RON HUBBARD

LRH :-.rd
Copyright (©) 1955 [ Operational Bulletins numbered 2 and 3 contain no
by L. Ron Hubbard data of technical interest and so have not been included
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED in these volumes. ]




551 0C24 4LACC-31 Resume of Creative Processes
5510C24 4LACC-32 Lack of Terminals
** 5510C25 4LACC-33 Engrams
** 5510C25 4LACC-34 The Handling of Confusion
** 551 0C26 4LACC-35 Stable Datum and the Study of Science
* 5510C26 4LACC-36 Solving Engrams with Stable Datum, Communication
Terminals
** 5510C27 4LACC-37 The Role of a Scientologist

P.A.B. No. 64
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR’S BULLETIN

The Oldest Continuous Publication in Dianetics and Scientology

From L. RON HUBBARD

Via Hubbard Communications Office
163 Holland Park Avenue, London W.11

_____________________________________________________________________

28 October 1955

FIRST POSTULATE


We’ve got ourselves a little piece of data here that you might be interested in. It will make this first postulate a little clearer to you.

The native state of a thetan would be the first real postulate, wouldn’t it? There is an oddity that occurs: He continues to insist on this native state clear down to the bottom of the scale.

Let’s take a look at this. Actually, in his native state, he knows everything without looking, or anything, but he doesn’t know any particulars of data. These are all invented. So what you would really call this would be a potentiality, or Pan-Knowingness.

Now as we go on down the scale, he insists upon knowingness, all the way downscale, only he puts it into the form of data, and he gets his knowingness inverted so that all he knows is data, and he loses his capability of knowing.

Another thing that occurs as he goes downscale from top to bottom: He is not looking at anything, and we discover that eventually he begins to insist upon this condition. He starts wearing glasses, not seeing, seeing blackness and so forth. All he is doing is insisting that he is not looking at anything.

We take another one of these things: In his native state he didn’t have any space, and so he goes all the way down the tone scale, clear to the bottom, insisting on no space. Only, how does he make “no space,” finally? He begins to pull in all the energy upon himself, and crowds himself in real tight, and he is making “no space” by getting everything jammed together. But he is still insisting on the native state.

There are a lot of these native states that you can look over, and you will see that you get a whole string of first postulates out of them. Here they are, native states, and they actually are first postulates.

This is peculiar, to note that thetans insist to each other that they be in their native states, and the way they do this is to say “You’re stupid,” “You don’t know about it,” “You don’t know any data,” “You ought to be in jail,” “You should have no space at all,” “You shouldn’t be moving” (cops are always objecting to people for moving, you know). And they insist, one way or the other, that he doesn’t have anything. They say, “You can’t have anything.”

In other words, the whole society will dramatize this native state to some degree, but on what a horrible harmonic! So a thetan, after a while, begins to believe that all

Copyright (©) 1955 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.

these native state postulates are bad. Therefore, he must avoid them, so therefore, he gets entangled, and trapped.

We look this over in processing, and we then move from the locational process up through Two-Way Communication, up into the subjective processes. The subjective processes, therefore, should all be first postulate processes, and the lowest of them would be “Something you wouldn’t mind forgetting.” You wouldn’t ever run “Something you wouldn’t mind remembering.”

All right, there are two other processes that go along in this subjective band which are intensely interesting. They are quite workable.

Now you understand that you do “Union Station,” or objects on locational processing, on “What don’t you know about that object?” and “What doesn’t that object know about you?” But now we have other places we can go, and one of the places we go is, of course, up into the subjective process band, which lies above Two-Way Communication.

Some of the subjective processes which are the most interesting are “Find some no-space,” “Tell me some things you are not looking at,” “Tell me some things that are not looking at you.”

You see at once that these are native state situations so these are very, very good subjective processes. They are run on a straight wire basis. So you see what a neat group that makes. But the ones that run fastest are these first postulate processes. “What aren’t you looking at?” “What isn’t looking at you?” “Locate some no-space,” “What don’t you have to locate?” “Something you wouldn’t mind forgetting”—all these are intensely workable.

We would move up from there into a new oddity, and that would be 8-C. Did you ever hear of 8-C before?

Do you know why 8-C works? 8-C works very interestingly. It is totally on a tolerance of command, and the continuous postulation of feeling or seeing something. 8-C, as a process, assumes the native state in a thetan and then tells him to go to the second postulate.

Here is a thetan. You are processing him. You are evidently assuming that he is in a native state, because you are saying “Look at the wall.” So you assumed that he wasn’t looking at the wall before you said, “Look at the wall.” You are taking over the automaticity of the second postulate. That’s why it works.

The third part of 8-C is just taking over more second postulates. He says, “I’m not looking at anything. Now I’m going to look at something. Now I look at that thing. Now I see it.”

We could probably dress up 8-C a little more workable just on this basis, but I don’t think it’s necessary, at this time, because it works, just the way it sits. But maybe you should understand it a little better just on the basis that we are assuming, all during 8-C, not that the guy is crazy, but that he is in a native state, and that his attention has to be directed to things.

So we take over all these automaticities, and he comes upscale.

Now let’s apply this native state principle to Opening Procedure by Duplication.
We are again telling him to look at one object, and telling him to look at another object.

Natively, he was able to totally duplicate the object. Now he doesn’t know anything about the object, so we could run “don’t know” in here again. We could say, “See that book? Walk over to it. Pick it up.” And now we run a higher first postulate on him: “What don’t you know about it?” “All right. Put it down in exactly the same place. Do you see that bottle? Walk over to it. Pick it up. All right, tell me something you don’t know about it.”

You could run this on this same basis on a first postulate, too, and it would be an intensely workable process.

Of course, when we go up to Remedy of Havingness, we are assuming he doesn’t have anything, and we are giving him something. So we are taking over the automaticity of having something, but we are again assuming that he is in a native state. The process assumes this, and then makes him dramatize, knowingly, the second postulate. Have something. He hasn’t got anything—now he has something.

As far as Route I is concerned, Route I is a far more native state than being in a body, and just drills on it, all by itself, of course, would accomplish a great deal. But you could take Route I and ask him what he didn’t know about these various locations on the Grand Tour and these incidents, all up the track, would blow.

Our assumption, as auditors, that the thetan is in a native state, and that we are then going to make him take over the automaticity of living by doing it himself, is a very valid one, and is evidently the one that produces the greatest result at this time.

So here is just a little change of mind in the way you look at processing. We take the native state of a thetan. We figure out “What is the thetan’s native state?” He is not in contact with space, energy, mass. He doesn’t have any dimension. We take this as the first condition. He can make a postulate out of this condition, and then he makes a second postulate, and the second postulate is a lie.

You can assume that he is in a native state, and make him make the first postulate, and you will have an intensely workable process. We assume he knows all there is to know about people, and then we say, “All right. Tell me something you don’t know about that person.” We are running the first postulate, right away.

Now if you assume a thetan is bad off, plowed in, and is not even vaguely in his native state, you will tend to run processes which will spin him in. If you are running him from the attitude that he has to come upscale to feel a wall, this is a bum deal.

The attitude you should run him from is: Here’s this poor little thetan, all stupid, and we’re going to show him a wall. We will find out that understanding of him, then, proceeds at a much higher rate.

You will get, sooner or later, a very important thing here. It is actually the auditor being there, two-way communication, and the assumption about the native state of the preclear that produces auditing.

When you particularize too solidly on a process, without paying attention to these three things, you don’t get any auditing done.

L. RON HUBBARD

CERTAINTY


Vol. 2, No. 11 [1955, ca. November]


The Official Publication of
DIANETICS and SCIENTOLOGY
in the
British Isles



The Six Levels of Processing

L. Ron Hubbard



(For the first time Certainty magazine has the scoop on new material, beating out the PAB and Ability, the only other magazines in Dianetics and Scientology which have the goals of helping people.)

BASIC THEORY
(Ref. Axiom 36, Creation of Human Ability)

There are five items in Scientology which have been discovered which make the difference between slow cases and fast cases, failed cases and successful cases. These are:

NATIVE STATE: A thetan in his native state has the potential of knowing everything. If one knows everything he cannot have a game. To have a game one must make a postulate:

FIRST POSTULATE: I do not know about ......

SECOND POSTULATE: I know about that item.

THIRD POSTULATE: I have forgotten about that item.

FOURTH POSTULATE: I remember that item.

The first postulate, because it is not perverted or denied, is the truth. The second postulate, since it denies the first postulate, is a lie. The third postulate is the not-is-ness of the second postulate. The fourth postulate is the alter-is-ness of the third postulate. Hence the act of continuous remembering brings about the changes in mass which we call ridges. The act of forgetting is putting aside and twisting something which is already a lie. The act of knowing about SOMETHING is not only an invention but a denial of the first postulate. The first postulate is a denial of the native state of a being. Hence we have the various conflicts of the mind.

CONFUSION: Random knowingness and not knowingness create when unaligned a confusion.

AXIOM 53: A Stable Datum is necessary to the alignment of data.

AXIOM 54: A tolerance of confusion and an agreed upon Stable Datum on which to align the data in a confusion are at once necessary for a sane reaction across the eight dynamics. (This defines sanity.)

Copyright (©) 1955 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.

RUDIMENTS OF AUDITING

ONE: Awareness of the auditor, the auditing room, that a session is in progress and that the preclear is being audited.

TWO: Two-way Communication on a casual basis.

THREE: The delivery of the question.

FOUR: Communication Lag.

FIVE: The acknowledgement of the question.

SIX: The duplication of that exact question.

STARTING A SESSION

Establish ONE of Rudiments.

Discuss any present-time problem. If there is one ask the preclear what he means to do about it often enough to as-is some of its confusion by injecting into it stable data or unbalancing it by deciding to make a forward motion toward it.

Follow remainder of Rudiments while doing so.

LEVEL ONE

LOCATIONAL PROCESSING:

The object of Locational Processing is to establish a stability in the environment of the preclear on the subject of objects and people. It can be run in busy thoroughfares, graveyards, confused traffic or anywhere that there is or is not motion of objects and people. It is run in the auditing room itself to orient the preclear.

Commands: “Notice the (object).”
“Pick out some people who seem especially real to you.”
“Spot a car.”

When a preclear is oriented and up in A-R-C, shift to:

SEPARATENESS:

The object of the Separateness version of Locational Processing is to establish and run out identifications. It is noteworthy that its opposite Togetherness does not run and is not a workable process.

Commands: “Select an object from which you are separate.”
“Select an object which is separate from you.”

Run the first command only until the end of any given session or until the preclear “dopes off.” Then run the reverse command the next session until its end or until the preclear “dopes off.” If grogginess or “dope-off” occurs run the opposite command until pc is alert, then return to the “command of the session.” This method is used on all commands in LEVEL ONE only.

SEPARATENESS FROM PEOPLE:

This is used to remedy valence difficulties, to establish identities and run them out, and to raise the tone level of the preclear on the third dynamic.

Commands: “Select a person from whom you are separate.”
“Select a person who is separate from you.”

WATERLOO STATlON (First Postulate Union Station):

This process is utilized only when the earlier steps of Locational Processing have been completed and when the preclear is in excellent A-R-C with his auditor. This is the power-process of the group of processes we call Locational Processing. An extraordinary amount of two-way communication and in particular acknowledgement must be used to run this process. Run at least 15 hours in frequented places.

Commands: ”Tell me something you can NOT-KNOW about that (indicating or describing) person.”
“Tell me something that person can NOT-KNOW about you.”

To not-know is an ability.

LEVEL TWO

This level is reached when the preclear is originating communications smoothly and, without coaching, acknowledging the auditor’s communications well.

There is no command, as such. There is a subject of communication: secrets. It is expected here that the preclear will now discuss freely his various problems.

LEVEL THREE

This is the subjective level. Here the preclear is invited to inspect his own “reactive bank” or his own thought processes. All the processes of Dianetics and early Scientology were subjective processes; it is noted that these did not work on some persons since no homo sapiens can actually introvert safely with a very good auditor on the job unless he has already attained this level.

DEFINITION PROCESSING:

Definition Processing is done by asking the preclear over and over, smoothly and pleasantly, keeping good two-way communication, to define such things as Exteriorization, Problems and Solutions, Creativeness, etc.

Commands: “What is ?”

INVENTION PROCESSING:

This is done by having the preclear invent various ideas or considerations, by which he creates stable data to displace aberrated stable data.

Commands: “Invent some problems.”
“Invent some solutions.”
“Assign some no-intentions.”

ENGRAM RUNNING:

The resolution of only persistent engrams is done by Level Three Engram Running. It is only done when specific difficulties are apparent from obvious engrams. The name is also given and the process used on strange manifestations in the reactive bank such as “demons” and “hallucinations.” WARNING: This process is only done when lower levels are entirely flat.

Commands: “Tell me something you can NOT-KNOW about that picture.”
“Tell me something that that picture can NOT-KNOW about you.”

These commands are run, a few of one, a few of the other, then a few of the first again, etc. The command can be varied when some other manifestation is being addressed.

MODIFIED GITA :

Run “Things you NOT-KNOW about ...” with the Expanded Gita List of SOP 8.

LEVEL FOUR

OPENING PROCEDURE 8-C:

This is run exactly as given in earlier manuals. This is the upper harmonic of Locational Processing and accustoms the preclear to taking commands, discovering that these do not create new confusions, and making decisions.

LEVEL FIVE

OPENING PROCEDURE BY DUPLICATION BY FIRST POSTULATE:

This is done until the preclear can duplicate easily. The process is done with a book and a bottle as the two objects. It is done exactly as given in earlier manuals with the following command changes:

Commands: “Do you see that book?”
“Walk over to it.”
“Pick it up.”
“Tell me something you can NOT-KNOW about its colour.”
“Tell me something you can NOT-KNOW about its temperature.”
“Tell me something you can NOT-KNOW about its weight.”
“Put it down in exactly the same place.”
“Do you see that bottle?”
“Walk over to it.”
“Pick it up.”
“Tell me something you can NOT-KNOW about its colour.”
“Tell me something you can NOT-KNOW about its temperature.”
“Tell me something you can NOT-KNOW about its weight.”
“Put it down in exactly the same place.”
“Do you see that book?”
Etc. etc.

Run with good two-way communication. Do not vary commands. Does not need to be followed by regular Opening Procedure by Duplication.

LEVEL SIX

This is the level of the remedy of havingness and spotting spots. By modern processing these are done simultaneously in addressing the drilling of the exteriorized thetan.

The only change would be in using showers of hellos and okays or “things you can NOT-KNOW” on spots in the universe with which the preclear might have any difficulty.

By modern processes the preclear should have been exteriorized some time earlier in processing without much being done about it beyond recognizing the fact clearly.

Any preclear exteriorized earlier than this release should be started at Level One and carried through all steps.

LRH TAPE LECTURES
London, England
28 October—5 November 1955


5510C28 4LACC-38 The Anatomy of Terminals
5510C28 4LACC-39 Title unknown
** 5510C28 4LACC-40 Intolerance
5510C29 LPLS-7 Automaticity—Cause and Effect
** 5510C29 LPLS-8 Power of Choice and Self-Determinism
** 5510C31 4LACC-41 How to Audit
5510C31 4LACC-42 Training of an Auditor
5511C01 4LACC-43 The Preclear’s Reality
5511C01 4LACC-44 Improvement in Technology
5511C02 4LACC-45 Title unknown
5511C02 4LACC-46 Randomity and Automaticities
5511C03 4LACC-47 A Review of the 4th London ACC
** 5511C03 4LACC-48 Attitude and Conduct of Scientologists
5511C05 4LACC-49 New Understanding of Universes
** 5511C05 4LACC-50 End of Course Lecture





















HUBBARD PROFESSIONAL COURSE LECTURES
London, England
8—10 November 1955


L. Ron Hubbard gave the following lectures to the Hubbard Professional Course in London during November, 1955:


** 5511C08 HPC N5-1 Six Levels of Processing, Issue 5, Level 1
5511C08 HPC N5-2 Six Levels of Processing, Issue 5, Level 2
5511C09 HPC N5-3 Six Levels of Processing, Issue 5, Level 3
** 5511C09 HPC N5-4 Six Levels of Processing, Issue 5, Level 4
** 5511C10 HPC N5-5 Six Levels of Processing, Issue 5, Level 5
** 5511C10 HPC N5-6 Six Levels of Processing, Issue 5, Level 6

P.A.B. No. 65
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR’S BULLETIN

The Oldest Continuous Publication in Dianetics and Scientology

From L. RON HUBBARD

Via Hubbard Communications Office
163 Holland Park Avenue, London W.11

_____________________________________________________________________

11 November 1955

FROM A LECTURE BY L. RON HUBBARD ON
MEST PROCESSING, JULY 7, 1951


A person’s self-determinism is immediately and directly established in ratio to his handling of MEST.

Self-determinism goes down as a person goes down the tone scale, so what do you finally get? You get a person around 0.5. This person’s self-determinism is OUT. They are not self-determined, they are determined by something else—not by themselves.

Furthermore, they can’t handle MEST.

The “I” confuses the organism itself with the MEST it cannot handle, and selfdeterminism deteriorates.

It happens something like this: The “I” gets to a point where it obviously can’t handle other MEST, so it can’t handle itself, either. It can’t handle space. Not only is it unable to put somebody else through space, it can’t put “self” through space. And so on!

So here you have the tug and pull below 2.0 on the tone scale.

Here is an individual riding at 1.5, and here is another individual riding at 0.5. The 1.5 is trying to make the 0.5 into the 1.5’s MEST. Here is an individual confusing an organism with MEST. Here is the 1.5 trying to take this other person and OWN him as MEST.

If you have, also, a 1.1 here, the 1.5 is trying to make the 1.1 into his MEST and the 1.1 is fighting back to the extent of trying to nullify the 1.5 to the point where the 1.5 is a 0.5—and then the 0.5 becomes the 1.1’s MEST!

Here is the leading order of the tone scale below 2.0.

Nullification is worked on the 1.5 so that the 1.5 can be owned by the person occupying the lower band on the tone scale. The 1.5 will take a 3.0 and try to move him on down to a 0.5 so that the 1.5 can OWN him.

The organism, below 2.0, is more MEST than theta, actually, and entheta, being confused and chaotic like MEST, behaves to a large degree like MEST.

Here is your battle of the strong and the weak. In other words, the battle of the 1.5’s and the 0.5’s.

Copyright (©) 1951,1955 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.

The only way you can possibly get along is up in the bracket of ARC, because these other things don’t win.

Nobody ever succeeded in owning another organism. It can’t be done.

You can own a horse—with ARC! You can be nice to the horse, and the horse understands you, and you just get along fine. The horse is very glad that you are riding him, and everything is happy—and that horse stays in good shape.

But let’s “own” the horse! “Okay, you brute, you beast, you will do exactly what I say!” Before long, you have a 0.5 horse, and that 0.5 horse will develop spavins, spasms, and everything else.

The only way 3.0’s can operate is on data, and exchange of ideas, and reaching an agreement with relationship to that data.

_____________________

This is an added observation which I now realize I have been “adding” for a long time. 2 and 2 make four unless you insist on having spots before your eyes (instead of stripes) when they make either .22 or 2.2—anyway:

Have you ever seen a person (so called) below 2.0 on the tone scale who ever accepted the fact that Scientology was REAL? I have seen them say, “Why sure, it’s wonderful,” but I have also had the privilege of processing some of these characters, and so far I have yet to see one who had any reality on it. Just an observation, but it continues to explain SO MUCH.

They will sell it, or use somebody else’s idea of its reality to make hay for their own stack (below 2.0 a barn is too much MEST to own, and they have already started in on organisms).

But for themselves? Just you try to process one on an advanced technique, and you will see what I mean.

And so, as sweet thought for the day, I give you all those “tough cases.”

Please, Sir, will you prescribe a process for the processing of processing toward reality on the subject of Scientology itself.

I have a feeling I will hit it in a tape.

When I do, I will send it to you.

L. RON HUBBARD

OPERATIONAL BULLETIN NO. 4 11 November 1955

ALL AUDITORS, ALL CONTINENTS

SIX LEVELS OF PROCESSING—ISSUE 5

NOTE: Issue 5 of SLP is not a final issue of this operating procedure and is subject to change especially in the matter of command wording. However, the processes here reproduced have been evolved into a workable state and have been run with success with the commands given. Issue 5 of SLP is released at this time because it is better than previous material, not because it is the final form of SLP.

With SLP is introduced a method of auditing and a new auditing atmosphere which articulates the attitude best calculated to maintain continuing stable data in a case. The auditing atmosphere is A-R-C, with gain marked by continuing rises in A-R-C. With SLP a somatic or boil-off means reduced A-R-C and is an indication of an auditing break in A-R-C. With SLP comes the COMMUNICATION BRIDGE, restarting sessions, maintenance of high R, and liberal use of processing outside an auditing room.

All assist type processes are outside SLP except for the present time problem. The emphasis of SLP is on bettering the pc’s reality and power of choice.

LEVEL ONE

RUDIMENTS:

These must be established at the beginning of every session. They must be re-established each time the pc tends to go out of session.

The rudiments are:

(a) Find the auditor.
(b) Find the pc.
(c) Find the session environment.
(d) Establish that a session is in progress.
(e) Accept every comm the pc originates.
(f) Acknowledge every command execution by the pc.
(g) Agree upon the process and the command form before using and do not
confuse it.
(h) Use two-way comm liberally.
(i) Follow the Auditor’s Code.
(j) Deal with present time problem which may be present at the beginning or
arise during or reoccur during a session.
(k) Use a Communication Bridge at every process or area change.
(I) Establish goals by two-way comm and the command, “Assign an intention to
(auditor indicating object).”
(m) Run SOP 8-C as given in Creation of Human Ability until pc is certainly
obeying auditing commands and is under control.

LEVEL TWO

LOCATIONAL AND NOT-KNOW PROCESSES:

Run in populated places, ambulant.

(a) Energy Sources:

Have pc spot acceptable energy sources. Do not permit him to spot statics unless he is ready for it. Run until pc can empower terminals. Command: “Spot an acceptable energy source.”

(b) Spotting Objects:
Have pc spot objects in a place with ample space and objects. Command: “Spot an object.”

(c) Spotting People:
Have pc spot people in populated places. Command: “Spot a person.”

(d) Separateness from Objects:
Have pc spot objects he is separate from, then objects separate from him. Commands:
“Locate an object from which you are separate.”
“Locate an object which is separate from you.”

(e) Separateness from People:
Have pc spot people he is separate from, then have him spot people separate from him. Commands:
“Locate a person from whom you are separate.”
“Locate a person who is separate from you.”

(f) Waterloo Station:
Have pc spot people about whom he can Not-Know something and then have him spot people he is willing to have Not-Know things about him. (Auditor selects persons.) Commands:
“Tell me something you wouldn’t mind not-knowing about that person.”
“Tell me something you wouldn’t mind that person not-knowing about you.”

LEVEL THREE

DECISIONAL PROCESSING:

Run in quiet places or auditing rooms.

(a) Think a Placed Thought:

The object is to train the pc to think thoughts exterior to his head and thetan bank to obviate the “cave-in phenomena of Axiom 51”.
Command (auditor indicating object or position): “Think a thought in(on) that_______ .”
Alternate Command: “Do you see that (object)? Think a thought in(on) it. Did the thought appear where it is?”

(b) Choice Rehabilitation:

Using the ability acquired in Level Three (a), have the pc make choices between two objects indicated by auditor. Command: “From (indicated point) make a choice between (indicated positions or objects).”

(c) Directed Decision Rehabilitation:

Using the ability acquired in (a) and (b), exercise the pc on decisions. Command: “Putting the decision on(in) that (indicated object) make a decision about it.”

(d) Permissive Decision Rehabilitation:

Using the abilities acquired in (a), (b) and (c), turn pc loose on decisions. Decisions must be outside head and bank. Command: “Decide something.”

LEVEL FOUR

OPENING PROCEDURE BY DUPLICATION:

Done in an auditing room with a book and a bottle.

Commands: “Do you see that book?”
“Walk over to it.”

“Pick it up.”
“Not-know something about its colour.”
“Not-know something about its temperature.”
“Not-know something about its weight.”
“Put it in exactly the same place.”
“Do you see that bottle?”
“Walk over to it.”
“Pick it up.”
“Not-know something about its colour.”
“Not-know something about its temperature.”
“Not-know something about its weight.”
“Put it in exactly the same place.”
“Do you see that book? (etc)”

LEVEL FIVE

REMEDY OF COMMUNICATION SCARCITY:

The object of this step is to restore abundance on any and all communication possibilities. Done in an auditing room.

(a) Create Confusion:

Command: “Mock up a confusion.”
Alternate Command: “What confusion could you create?”

(b) Creating Terminals:

The pc may have to be coached into mocking up unknown confused black terminals and thus into good terminal mock-ups. Commands:
“Mock up a communication terminal.”
“Mock up another communication terminal.”

(c) What Wouldn’t You Mind Communicating With:

Duplicate the auditing command exactly. Don’t red-herring (go chasing after facsimiles). Command:
“What wouldn’t you mind communicating with?”

(d) Creating Family Terminals:

Have pc mock up until he has an abundance of any and all persons he has ever used as anchor points. Commands:
“Mock up your (father, wife, mother, husband).”
“Mock him(her) up again.”

LEVEL SIX

REMEDY OF HAVINGNESS AND SPOTTING SPOTS IN SPACE:

Route One:

An exteriorized step done as given in The Creation of Human Ability.


LRH:ts L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright (©) 1955
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

[The above Operational Bulletin basically duplicates an issue dated 8 November 1955 titled Six Levels of Processing - Issue 5. ]



Issue 16 [1955, ca. mid November]


The Magazine of
DIANETICS and SCIENTOLOGY
from
Washington, D.C.



What Are You Going to Do About It?


L. Ron Hubbard


Scientology has several problems it really shouldn’t have. These are third and fourth dynamic problems. It should be enough that a science developed for the good of Man, and given freely into his knowledge, should simply be itself disseminated as itself, and without further intrusion into world affairs, but it so happens that the people of Dianetics and Scientology have an interest in the playing field called Earth. Looking broadly about, one does not find very many people interested in the preservation of this playing field. They do not believe that it is their responsibility. The government of country A does not believe it is their responsibility; the government of country B does not believe it is their responsibility. It is very possible, from the view of a survey recently conducted, that there will be no actual forward effort at any time, anywhere, to modify the threatened havoc of the atom bomb, unless it is done quietly and effectively by a group which is interested beyond the interest of governments.
It is the belief of Scientology that no government should be interfered with. When a government is changed, it is changed to resume its old shape. No revolution is successful. It is a maxim of Scientology that if a Scientologist is trained within the boundaries of Libya, he is expected to follow out the training and beliefs of his nationality, and to support to the last degree his own government. Similarly, a Scientologist of the U.S.A. or a Scientologist of Great Britain is expected to support his own government to the fullest possible extent. Any and all changes which occur by reason of more knowledge occur along the lines of evolution and not along the lines of revolution. Therefore, Scientology is so far from seeking changes in governments that it would contest to the ability of every last communication line any threatened change in any government anywhere.
However, there is something which is above nationality today. It is even above the level of the United Nations which has proven its inability to handle the problems. Man is confronted with a weapon of such magnitude and range that unless some solution appears for this weapon, Man will cease to exist, and all life may cease to exist upon this planet.
How does one then influence a problem of this magnitude beyond the level of nations?
The answer to this problem is communication. We have seen that an area of enturbulence ceases to exist as soon as communication is levelled into it. True, the area has a tendency to explode somewhat in our faces before it as-ises, and tames. However, the answers to such problems as the atomic bomb lie in the problem of communication.
The communication of more knowledge, the communication of better abilities itself could bring about this change in time. However, we may not have this much time before us. Therefore, it is better that we communicate specifically upon the problem of

Copyright (©)1955 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.

the atomic bomb itself, and this is what we ask the peoples of the world as our communication, “What are you going to do about it?” By communicating, and by signalizing the fact that no one is taking active responsibility for it, it may be that we can bring about vast significant changes upon the third dynamic.
There is a great deal of technology associated with this. Communication lines of great magnitude are necessary, but all these things are at this moment in preparation. We have never beheld a more sweeping forward look than we have at this time. There is no reason to suppose that we will fail. We know the thing not to do, and that is nothing.
We are not a group or organization dedicated exclusively to the bringing about of peace, but we are forced by our own impulses of self-preservation to take a hand in this game which seems too big even for nations to play. Nations cannot play this game because nations are not individuals. We are individuals and we know we are individuals, therefore, we can communicate to the world upon this problem without defying our own nationalities or enturbulating or upsetting the course of nations themselves. The bomb is bigger than nations and we ourselves as individuals, any one of us, have greater co-ordinative abilities than nations themselves. Thus the responsibility is ours, thus our campaign. We will tell you more about this. We are in deadly earnest. We have for the first time a good solid and workable answer to the problem of the atomic bomb, and we mean to use it. We know that if we communicate on the subject, we will be rewarded by solution to this gravest threat Man has ever had. We mean to do it. That’s the way it is.

Ron

HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
1 Brunswick House,
83 Palace Gardens Terrace,
London, W.8.


OPERATIONAL BULLETIN NO.5 [ca. mid-November 1955]

All HAS Offices, All Continents


LIMITED COMPANY PROCEEDING: The HUBBARD ASSOCIATION OF SCIENTOLOGISTS OF THE UNITED KINGDOM is proceeding with fair rapidity to its completion. This will be its official name even though it spells HASUK. Its offices will be located at No. 1 Brunswick House, 83 Palace Gardens Terrace, London W.8, and its phone number will be BAYswater 5780. It has passed the stage of being okayed for its company name by the Registrar of Companies in London which had some question as to calling a limited company an Association, and for a while we thought we would have to get real inventive to delete the word “Association” from the title, but it got by anyway. It will be governed by a Board of Trustees. Being a limited company it is the first entirely English and British HAS. As the Queen doesn’t mind “aliens” holding shares you can guess who has the controlling finger in the pie.

This limited company succeeds to the control of all other United Kingdom HASs—Australia, South Africa, etc. This is important, for in those countries an incorporated entity has to be incorporated in every single state and being so has no power in any other state. You would have to have five separate corporations to cover Australia (or is it seven). But by qualifying the HASUK in each, a well connected organization can thus result though each one can be autonomous. In South Africa they are holding on with a course waiting for the HASUK papers to file them for SA operation. There is an existing HAS of SA held by Albert Low which I suppose will be turned over to the HASUK by Albert depending somewhat on Albert, who will I am sure cooperate. In Australia Johnny Farrell and some other fine chaps have an HASI; it however is limited in an extreme rather than a company sense, being in only the one state, Victoria. I believe, depending somewhat on them, that they will close it out and open a new qualified HASUK and then qualify the HASUK in each one of the Australian states, appointing a resident agent for each branch and the whole being managed by a committee composed of the already existing Australian directors. Similarly the HASUK can be qualified at small expense in every state in South Africa and the whole again managed by a committee there. Those in interest on this will receive HASUK limited company certificates for their use in qualifying it in all these states. That’s a stack of qualifications for which the HASUK will pay. These papers will be forwarded in a very few weeks.

CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY GOING IN IN ENGLAND: Already having started with great success the “I will talk to anyone for you about anything” ad in London (Ray Kemp piloting), the Church of Scientology is being placed in a limited company status in the United Kingdom. CHARTERED CHURCHES will be available to qualified auditors throughout the United Kingdom. The Central UK Church of Scientology will issue the charters on a tithe basis. All ordinations will be committed by the Central Church, not the chartered churches. Ordinations must have an HPA or HCA in full force as a requisite, plus general good standing. An ordination and its certificate will cost 5 gns to those qualified. A Sunburst Cross and lapel pin will cost 8 gns. The cross is a lovely thing of pure silver about three inches high, hung with a plain silver chain from the crossbar. It is worn with any collared shirt or dress about the throat, a distinctive badge. Qualified auditors may apply now.

WHAT TO AUDIT TODAY: If there’s any doubt in anyone’s mind as to what we ought to be using on preclears, it’s SIX LEVELS OF PROCESSING, ISSUE 5. And if there’s any doubt about that, use only LEVEL ONE on any pc. And if there’s any doubt about that, use only the PRESENT TIME PROBLEM PART of Level One as far as techniques go.

AUDITING THE PT PROBLEM: A pc could be said to be a composite of a consecutive series of Level One present time problems. His body for instance is his chief p.t. problem. If you had only one process today to work on any case of any level from psycho to Op Thetan, it would be working present time problems with the “problem of comparable magnitude” process. This is called simply “Invented Problems of Comparable Magnitude”. It is a precision tool with precision commands.

It is done this way: The pc by two-way comm, having been started into session, is asked to come up with and isolate ANY present time problem of no matter what size. He is not bird-dogged on to his chronic somatic or other specific difficulty since this may be beyond his grasp at the start and because it will come up inevitably in its turn. Once the auditor has gotten the pc to articulate ANY one present time problem the auditor then says (precision commands here), “Can you invent a problem of comparable magnitude?” or “Can you invent a problem as big as that one?” When the pc does this the auditor then says (precision command wording, use no other), “What could you do about that one?”, meaning the invented problem. (The word is “could”, not “can”.) The pc is finally two-way commed into actually hazarding that he might do so-and-so and such-and-such about the invented problem, at which time the auditor says, “Fine. Now what ELSE could you do about that problem?”, again meaning the invented problem, the same one.

In such a way the pc gives solution after solution, no matter how poor and without being challenged on whether or not they would work or would solve the problem until he has solved the invented problem. IT IS VITAL THAT THE PC BE BROUGHT TO A FINAL SOLUTION TO HIS SATISFACTION OF THE INVENTED PROBLEM, UNTIL HE VOLUNTEERS THAT IT IS SOLVED: THEREIN LIES THE TRICK. Don’t go on to new invented problems until the old one is in pieces. Make the pc then invent a new problem IF HE IS STILL WORRIED ABOUT THE REAL PROBLEM HE BROUGHT UP. If, upon discussion the pc is no longer concerned with the real problem, then two-way comm him into a location or isolation of a new present time problem. If he is still worried about the old problem or first one, have him again invent one of comparable magnitude to it. If he is not worried about the old one, have him find a new problem in his life (present time) and then have him invent the “problem of comparable magnitude” again with the same commands, “Please invent a problem as big as that one,” “What could you do about the invented problem?”, having the pc get solution after solution or action after action proposed about the invented problem until he feels he’s whipped it and volunteers same to the auditor (the auditor doesn’t fish for solution-final).

An auditor will discover that a pc with higher and higher cognition ALWAYS has a present time problem no matter how many have been solved. And the composite of these problems is the pc’s case (not a composite of OLD problems). The pc’s case is a composite of present time problems. Thus the oldest axiom but one (SURVIVE) that he has is back at work: THE FUNCTION OF THE MIND IS TO POSE AND RESOLVE PROBLEMS RELATING TO SURVIVAL. And boy does this work! I really sprained a beam when I invented this “Invented Problems of Comparable Magnitude”.

SIX LEVELS OF PROCESSING, ISSUE 5: If you gaze deeply into the brief pages of SLP, Issue 5 you will find a lot of things that are good for cases, and a good clean look at Level One will give you the start-out that any cases needed. The funny part about Issue Five is that it is not necessarily a graduated scale like all its predecessors. Almost any case runs at any of its levels, and anyone who exteriorizes can run at once at Level Six. But none run without Level One.

EXTERIORIZATION TODAY: Today’s idea of exteriorization is that it happens and that it must be FULLY acknowledged but that one, acknowledgement of it and discussion of it with the startled pc done, then continues the process which the pc exteriorized on. In other words one doesn’t change his entire auditing just because of exteriorization. One notes it and carries on and it then gets better. You can’t keep them in their heads anyway with SLP, Issue 5—why, try to work them outside.

TWO-WAY COMM: An auditor (Old-time HDA) said, “I know modern auditing is an awful lot of yak....” So I finally got two-way comm across to him in this wise. “Today the auditor is a salesman who is trying to sell the pc on the idea of changing his mind about a lot of things. With two-way comm he makes this easy.” And the HDA understood.

HCA/HPA CURRICULUM: What tapes? We were giving live lectures everywhere. It’s now advanced considerably. For awhile let’s set up a tape schedule, for the training in all levels is being given a new auditing STYLE. Opening and closing sessions, the Communication Bridge, Two-way Comm et al are new to most. Thus the gradient scale of importance of what an auditor must know is as follows:

1. Reality on Scientology (by case success in himself or others and by orienting old data he has by new Scientology stable data that he selects out);

2. Auditing Style and Mechanics (as per Level One);

3. Six Levels of Processing, Issue 5;

4. Scientology Vocabulary;

5. Axioms of Scientology;

6. Auditor’s Own Case.

These are reviewed in HAA levels. Axioms are expected COLD at HAA level. The London HPA November Lectures are a must. So are the earlier 26 half-hour lectures of 1954. So are some of these ACC lectures. Therefore the instructor had better have a leading student and a tape PLAYER (so the student can’t wipe tapes) and an evening schedule to get these in. The HPA Nov. ‘55 will be airmailed for $60. (If I said £60 earlier it was a slip.) They have the ACC lectures in SA and can sell them for that area only. Silver Spring and London are both copying Hi-Fi (Silver Spring a bit higher Fi) the HPA and the 4th London ACC tapes. Both have and can furnish the 1954 HCA 26 half-hour tapes. Also there are some 15-minute lecture per step Route One tapes you can have for $23 a set. These haven’t been generally released before.

With this new auditing style and the fabulous work being done with SLP, Issue 5, we can’t be backwards in our training or old in our approach. So please modernize courses FAST. IT HAS ALWAYS BEEN MY BELIEF THAT THE SUBJECT TRAVELS AS FAST AS IT IS WORKABLE. Upon that axiom we have built up to where we are. Thus a delay in using new training material is a delay in the subject. I’m not trying to sell you tapes. We’ll never climb out of the red on these unless it’s by workable Scientology.

CLINICAL PROCEDURE: All Hubbard Guidance Centers should be using SLP, Issue 5, with emphasis on LEVEL ONE and the p.t. problem, briefer emphasis on earlier steps of Level Two, solid emphasis on WATERLOO STATION. Emphasize then SLP, Issue 5, Level One and Waterloo Station. Get each of these fully flat. First twelve hours of an intensive most cases on p.t. problems, three on assign intentions, ten on Waterloo Station, rough estimate.

ATTITUDE TOWARD PSYCHIATRY: “The medical profession, healing groups and ourselves are attempting to get psychiatry to accept on a pledge of no harmful treatment psychotics who now have to be withheld from psychiatrists and institutions because of the real danger that they will have their backs broken, their teeth knocked out or their brains damaged by shock, drugs or surgery. We and other committees are trying to get psychiatry to make such non-harmful facilities for the insane available in order to serve the medical and healing professions so that these can dispose of their insane patients without themselves being guilty of murder or mayhem upon them. It’s an international movement.”

L. RON HUBBARD
LRH: ts
Copyright (©) 1955
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

P.A.B. No. 66
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR’S BULLETIN

The Oldest Continuous Publication in Dianetics and Scientology

From L. RON HUBBARD

Via Hubbard Communications Office
163 Holland Park Avenue, London W.11

_____________________________________________________________________

25 November 1955

FIRST, SECOND, THIRD AND FOURTH POSTULATES


Identification and differentiation are the two extremes of processes. An auditor really ought to make this experiment, just to show him the way things go. He should sit a preclear down and ask him what things are like things.

Something curious occurs—he plows right on in. It’s the second postulate. “What thing is like what thing?” is the second postulate.

Now we turn around and run him on what things are different from what things and he clears right up and gets as bright as a dollar.

So if we ask somebody to look around at all those people and find people he is like, we immediately find out why old Dianetics Straight Wire had such a terrific limitation. It had this limitation simply because we were saying, “All right, who had that manifestation?” “Oh, you have a twitch there?—Well, who had that?”

It would only run for four or five questions before it would plow in, so it was a hit-and-run process. The reason for this was: we were running identification.

So, if we were to take somebody out to a railroad station and say, “All right, now pick out some people around here that you are separate from,” he would get sharp and bright, and he would feel wonderful.

Let’s just take a shadow of that now: “Get a person there that you are the same as.” “Now get some things you have that are the same as the things you have.” The same, the same, the same, and all of a sudden this guy goes “Gug!” He doesn’t like it!

So if we ask him “What do you know about that person? Something else you know about that person; something else you know about that person,” we don’t have the full effect, but we have some little echo of this identification effect.

A very searching look at whether it is better to hit and run—one person, another person—tells us immediately something that is quite interesting: that if we found a lot of things you know about that one chair, for instance, the process would be effective, but it would be only about one-tenth as effective as “What do you know about that chair?” “What do you know about that table?” “What do you know about that lamp?”

We find they fit on a scale as follows:
First Postulate: NOT- KNOW
Second Postulate: KNOW.

Copyright (©)1955 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.

So far we have been going with nothing but material objects or spaces.

Now, the third postulate is: FORGET, and the fourth postulate is: REMEMBER.

Forget and Remember stand in relationship to each other as an abstract first postulate, you might say, Forget, and the second postulate is: Remember.

Therefore, Remembering processes and Knowing processes simply make the person able to handle a second postulate. Therefore, they are long.

However, they don’t run out very well.

If we wanted to run out Knowingness, we would run Not-Knowingness.

In view of the fact that a lot of people just know things that are horrible, it would be to some advantage to run out some of this Knowingness. It is very false Knowingness, isn’t it?

So we have the consideration added to each one of these postulates: Good, Bad, Survive, Succumb, and that is added to Not-Know. Good or Bad, to Not-Know. Taking the second postulate we would have Good or Bad, Survive or Succumb, as Know. Good or Bad, Survive or Succumb, as the third postulate, Forget, and Good or Bad, Survive or Succumb, to the fourth postulate, Remember.

Now let’s look at that in conditions of existence, and we discover that an object, or something, must have presented itself, about which the individual didn’t know, and he’d have to decide that he didn’t know about it, before he would decide that he would have to know about it. So he is not-ising his Not-Knowingness, by knowing.

In order to forget about it, he has to not-is his Knowingness. So he has to not-is Knowingness, in order to forget.

To remember it, he will have to have forgotten it. Therefore, he not-ises Forgettingness.

By this pattern and scale we have all the difficulties a mind can get into. This is all a thetan can do, really.

Now we get the Curiosity, Desire, Enforce, Inhibit Scale. We are familiar with that scale. We call it the DEI Scale. Actually it has Curiosity just above Desire.

So, we find one could be Curious about, Desire, Enforce and Inhibit Not-Knowingness.

We have the consideration, which is Good or Bad, Survive or Succumb, and now we have the volition. The volition of a person about this Not-Knowingness is to be curious about it, desire it, enforce, or inhibit it—or just plain not know it. Take it as its as-isness.

But if he decided not to not-know it, it would disappear. So in order to keep it there, he decides to know something about it.

Everything you get to know anything about becomes more solid, because it is a second postulate.

Now this very tricky set of values is evidently closer to the truth than we have been before, but it has to be worked experimentally, now, to discover how much of this is valid, and how much isn’t valid.

I made a test on one preclear who has a black field and made him good and sick. So we take the fourth postulate. Now get how solid things would become if you were using a fourth postulate.

I had him look at pieces of blackness, and instead of looking, remember them. It would have been easier for him to forget them instead of looking at them—and it was.

We didn’t carry the experiment any further. We just carried this as far as forget and remember—instead of look, let’s remember. It made him good and sick. It didn’t run out his occlusion.

We can understand, if we search a little further in this, what this blackness is, then. An individual decides to KNOW what is in that blackness, and immediately that he decides to know what is in the blackness, he will get a solidity to the blackness, won’t he? It’s a second postulate.

So you see how far this ‘‘figure-figure’’ carried us.

If we run something about that person that you would be willing to not-know and something you would be willing for that person to not-know about you—we will unravel the secrets out of people this way.

The people get better, and we are running closer to the truth than we have been in the past.

I just want to repeat to you, as I often have to do, one of those primary principles that is liable to go astray: This is the principle of Mystery.

The principle of Mystery is, of course, this: The only way anybody gets stuck to anything is by a mystery sandwich. A person cannot be connected to his body, but he can have a mystery between him and his body which will connect him.

Now the oddity is that it is the desire to solve the mystery which does the connection. So, really, the Know to Mystery Scale, on this day, has become the Not-Know to Mystery Scale.

We have pushed our information up just that much further.

You have to understand this thing about the mystery sandwich. It’s two pieces of bread, one of which represents the thetan, one of which represents the body, and the two pieces of bread are pulled together by a mystery. They are kept together by a volition to know the mystery.

And then people run the Curiosity, Desire, Enforce, Inhibit Scale on that mystery. That keeps them interiorized, and this is really the secret of Interiorization. The secret is a secret. Q-and-A!

Survive and Succumb are simply a consideration. To a being who cannot possibly succumb, succumb is always a second postulate, but it is a second postulate to an actuality.

To really as-is a thing, you have to make a perfect duplicate of it, don’t you? The thing originally appeared, but was not known, so the second postulate came around and altered it into a knowingness. Therefore, in order to get the basic-basic on any chain of actual physical objects, you would simply have to say, “What could I not know about it?”

This is the cycle of alter-isness and not-isness of any perception: The Evolution of Thinkingness.

1. OBJECT (seen) NOT- KNOWN (As-is possible)

2. OBJECT KNOWN (Prevented As-is by Alter-is)

3. ABSTRACT FORGOTTEN (Not-isness)

4. ABSTRACT REMEMBERED (An Alter-is of Not-is)


If you look carefully at number four, you will find that a fixation on remembering produced that tangle which is called a mind. Now, do you see how a mind could be loused up?

Now, added to any of the four above, are the following:

Considerations: Good, Bad, Survive, Succumb.
Volition: Curiosity, Desire, Enforce, Inhibit.

This is really not a scale, it is a time-plot.

Added to all this, of course, would simply be Confidence, and at any portion of that plot you could add this factor of Confidence. But Confidence goes into Conviction. At any point you have these two things taking place: You have Confidence, which then shifts off into Conviction.

Confidence becomes Conviction, so any one of these four conditions can become fixed, and so unalterable. But you tackle anything on this scale, simply by running the first postulate.

Right now “Waterloo Station” is quite stable just the way you are running it. Actually, “Waterloo Station,” on Know, or running enough Remember, would do this terrific thing: It would make the person totally competent to handle that second postulate. He would no longer be upset about the second postulate. He could handle it or not handle it, as the case might be, but he is liable to come upscale faster if you run what he would be willing to NOT-KNOW about that person.



Issue 18 [1955, ca. late November]

The Magazine of
DIANETICS and SCIENTOLOGY
from
Washington, D. C.



Letter to Ability Editor


Dear John,
. . . I have just ended here seven good hard weeks of training, being on the platform five-and-a-half to seven hours a day, training, I am not quite sure how many students, but in excess of thirty, and for the first time in Scientology history, getting this type of comment from the students trained: “This is the first course I was ever on where I would in the last week permit anyone on the course to audit me.” This is literally true. We sweepingly made these people into fine auditors. Great Britain is now richer to that degree.
. . . The British operation is quite interesting. It occupies one-and-one-quarter floors of Brunswick House, a building on the comer of Palace Gardens Terrace and Bayswater Avenue, one of the most traffic jammed streets in London. It consists of a great many offices, classrooms and auditing rooms, and has a staff of about twenty people, there being about three hundred trained auditors certified in Great Britain. Of course, I don’t mean in the British sense that these auditors are certified, since that in Great Britain means “insane,” which is why we call them Hubbard Professional Auditors here. We have now given up the small quarters down at 163 Holland Park Avenue, because these were far too cramped, and inadequate for our purposes. The guys here took one of the large rooms and painted, carpeted, and draped, and fixed it up into a very swanky office for me which is still in a state of improvement, but which I have been using these days since the close of the ACC course. The ACC course did not give me any time whatsoever to think about occupying more office than my hat.
My first job when I first got here was immediately visible to the eye. I had to make some up-to-date crackerjack auditors. I went ahead and did so. I am still doing that on night courses and HPA courses and these people are really getting the results and coming right along. We have an auditing staff here of about five under the direct supervision of Dr. Ann Walker. It is a great oddity that almost everybody in this operation here has been with the movement since the earliest days. The ranks keep swelling, but those most intimate to the organization here are long-time and old-time Dianeticists and Scientologists, a thing which speaks very well.
. . . This scene is much less foreign to one’s eye than one would expect. London is sort of a New York of 1890, but much, much faster, with its streets jammed with fast small cars, huge fast buses. It is a very exciting town, and a very sociable town. In fact it is so sociable that I have an awfully hard time keeping my calender clear enough to get some work done. I feel like a New York debutante complaining about parties, parties, parties.
. . . Tonight is Thursday night when the second night of the week briefing course for auditors in general is held and at 8:30 I will talk to them for an hour. I am going to talk to them explaining to them that you can’t run present time problems on preclears who are low in havingness if you have them solve the problems. Such preclears can be run only by having them invent problems. Even if they invent problems of comparable magnitude, they are liable to drop too low on havingness.

Copyright (©) 1955 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.

I very much miss, despite all this sociability, my friends in Washington, since I am doing a piece of research work which is right straight down the groove. I am really shooting for the moment on this one. SLP will stay pretty much the way it is for some time to come, since it was fought for and won with the ACC and tested while training them. But what I am shooting for now will be done with the co-operation of the staff auditors here at Brunswick House. This is too early really for any general release, but I have done two things with some new processes, which make me extremely hopeful for the future of Scientology. Boy, you ain’t seen nothing yet, John.
. . . I hear good comment everywhere on Ability.

Best,
Ron.

HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
1 Brunswick House,
83 Palace Gardens Terrace,
London, W.8.
Tel. BAY 5780

OPERATIONAL BULLETIN NO. 6 [ca. late November 1955]


PROCESSING FUTURES

There is a great deal of speculation rampant concerning the direction which processing is taking. This is natural in view of the fact that six basic steps remain for so long a stable item. To old-timers the year long stability of the six basic steps was the novelty, not change in direction of processes. However, I have learned so much concerning the mind and processing in general that it is very easy at this time to immediately forecast what changes are going to occur now out of SIX LEVELS OF PROCESSING, and this is an announcement in effect of the content of SIX LEVELS OF PROCESSING, Issue 6. What we are trying to do is to stabilize a regimen of processing for use by auditors, and in particular for use in clinics and we are daily in receipt of information from various parts of the world and the centers concerning the efficacity of processes. Oddly enough, the most fruitful source of test material, the Hubbard Guidance Center in Washington, D.C., has failed to report very much about their results. This may be because their results are very good, but it is also a small hole in research. However, the auditors at Brunswick House, where we now have a complete operational clinic in operation, and the instructor, as well as former Fourth London ACC students, have been filling in the gaps. Therefore, SLP Issue 5 has had a considerable working over and I am repairing it by two additions only, from a standpoint of theory.

To SLP Issue 5 we are adding in Level One a process at the point of the present time problem which instantly and immediately remedies the havingness of the preclear and brings about considerable change, and in Level Two in all steps except Waterloo Station, we are adding the additional command “Increase it”, or “Increase him”. And, at the level of Step C of Level Three, Decisional Processing, we are changing the command to, “Make a decision about that (indicated object)”. To SLP Issue 5, in other words, we are adding in the immediate beginning of processes the remedy of havingness on a covert basis, and adding to SLP Issue 5 in general the factor of creativeness. This stems from our oldest precept which I discovered here in England many years ago, that the preclear cannot create, will not let go of anything; thus, aside from the change in Level Three which is purely for the understanding of the preclear, the total changes to date which will comprise SLP Issue 6 are the addition of creativeness at the present time problem level, by introducing a regimen to make the preclear acquire havingness rather than as-is it all with solving present time problems, and at the second level, to make the activity of spotting objects a creative process.

Substituting for the present time problem:

We discover that there are a number of preclears, those that are the furthest south, who are so low on havingness that the moment they are asked to confront objects, the physical universe tips out of plumb with them and they are considerably confused. It has been discovered on some cases that are very low on the tone scale that their lowness in terms of havingness must at once be remedied before they can even be given locational processing. Thus a regimen has been developed by which I have been making preclears begin to create, and locate themselves, and increase their havingness all at the same time. This process goes as follows: The preclear is asked to (l) Spot some things which are not thinking. When he has done this and has cognited that MEST is not thinking, he is then asked (2) “Tell me a lie about that (indicated object),” with the auditor selecting the objects, and with the preclear telling the auditor a lie about each one of them in turn. This is the lowest level of creativeness, and it will be found after a while that the preclear will be able to change to the next one, (3) “Invent a problem”. It should be understood that theta is the solver of

problems, that MEST is the problem. Whenever an individual is asked to get a problem of comparable magnitude, and is then asked to solve it, he is inventing a problem and is then as-ising any havingness which he acquired by reason of having invented a problem. If you go on and ask some preclears who are very low on havingness to solve the problem over and over by asking him what he could do about it, he has a tendency to lose far too much mass. This makes him very uncomfortable, and upsets him. The preclear runs entirely through this regimen then, and invents a bountiful supply of problems. The preclear on whom this should be run is easily spotted, since he is a person who is fixed on various set problems and cannot get off them. In other words, the individual has a scarcity of problems, and we get him to think about them first by spotting some unthinking things in the environment, then we get him to exercise the lowest level of creativeness, and at the same time, add to his mass by asking him to tell us a lie about these objects, and then we ask him when he has successfully flattened the last process, to invent problems. We do not ask him to solve any of these problems. Only then would it be safe to run the present time problem, and it really isn’t safe to run it on this preclear anyway. The next step up the line which would be run would be “Assign an intention”. This could be altered to “Invent an intention for that (indicated object)”.

Adding creativeness to spotting:

The second level of the SIX LEVELS OF PROCESSING will become tentatively in Issue 6, Creative Spotting. In order to create, anything, it must be that the preclear can first change it and then add to it, and at length will come up the gradient scale of being able to create one all by himself. In all early levels except Waterloo Station which is the last process in the second level, we have the preclear increase it in any instance. For instance, we have him spot an energy source. Then before we let him get off of it, we ask him if he could increase it. The exact auditing command is, “Spot an acceptable energy source”, and when the preclear has, “Get the idea of increasing it”. When this gets to persons, one can vary the command of increasing the person by asking the preclear to “Spot a person”, and then when he has, “Would you make him bigger”.

You see the preclear is stuck ordinarily over on the destruction end of this cycle of action. It is first necessary if we are going to change him at all, to move him out of this destructive end of the cycle, and into the change middle of the cycle, and over, if possible, into the create side of the cycle. I do not believe it is possible to make a preclear entirely well unless we rehabilitate thoroughly his ability to change, and it is certainly not possible to make him completely able without rehabilitating almost in its entirety his ability to create. You see, a preclear goes from create over to changing things, and drifts from changing things over to destruction on the cycle of action which goes create-change-destroy. When he gets over on the destruction end, the way to get him out of it and back into the creation end is to make him actively start creating things.

There is in destruction an effort to decrease the size of everything. This becomes obsessive. However if we try to run this on preclears, we discover that their havingness starts to vanish; therefore we simply and overtly by the process itself move them over into the creative end of the cycle.

I am not trying to release here SLP Issue 6 in its entirety, but these are the principal changes in it. The one I am working on, and which is the reason why I have not released it with this Operational Bulletin, is the factor of time. Time is motion or change. Everything moves the preclear. The preclear moves nothing, and I am trying to find the ways and means of getting the preclear to move not-have universes, so that he can split them adequately. One of the ways I am trying to split universes these days is to have the not-have universe, separation from the preclear being desirable without reduction, but on the contrary with increase of havingness, tell the preclear a lie. This is quite interesting as a process.

None of the foregoing means that SLP Issue 5 is in any state of flux. It merely seeks to give the direction of travel of research, and to give you a little advance information that will run a few cases even further south than those we have tackled so

far. We have gone quite a way south here in recent months in trying to pick up and undercut preclears that were giving us a great deal of trouble. Every time we do this of course, we benefit the cases on the up ranges markedly.

OPERATIONAL STABILITIES

Scientology has not even begun to reach its various goals. We have made considerable progress in these last few years. The lines of progress which have been most marked were in the level of knowledge itself. We can do more with cases today than we could ever do in the past, and we have a greater understanding of the human mind than was ever before available to man, according to our records. The point here is that we have to go through a certain regimen before we attain goal-velocity. One of these attainments is operational stability. We are making incredible progress in this direction. We have more know-how today than we ever before dreamed was possible. Our operations have been far from stable in the past for the good reason that the operation was seeking to change a wide cultural aspect which was kicking back on it and which of course was changing the operation on a Q and A basis, but we have learned many lessons. The first and foremost of these lessons is to place Scientologists prominently in all organizations. We do not let “out-siders” have the reins and key posts. It would surprise you to know that some of the fanciest talent that could be bought on the subject of public relations, management, advertising, and many other lines, has already served and failed Scientology organizations, and has been replaced with more efficient Scientologists. The blunt fact is that as unable as we sometimes consider ourselves, we are more able than the world in which we are operating, and unless we realize that fact first and foremost, we won’t get very far in our own operational organizations. Bright, intelligent people who come to us in subordinate positions either recognize what we are doing and begin to learn Scientology or they can’t do their jobs. It is almost as blunt as this. Now and then we make mistakes in personnel, even with Scientologists. It does not mean the Scientologist himself was a mistake, but it means that we have him on the wrong post or doing the wrong job.

But it is not this matter of minor personnel changes which makes Scientology unstable. It is the impact of Scientology against the Society itself. One stands up continually to the most cock-eyed ideas of the mind and of Scientology. It would do a Scientologist an enormous amount of good to have run on him, “Tell me a lie about Scientology”. For a short time it might unstabilize him entirely on the subject but he would come back more rational and more able and more capable of facing these outrageous lies which are told about Scientology. The world at this time seems to be bound on a downward curve, and we are in the lonely position of being the only organization capable of doing anything about it. One seldom objects to his own lies. These give him havingness. One always objects to somebody else’s lies. One can object to somebody else’s lies about a subject for so long that he finally interiorizes in with them. This is basically the anatomy of a squirrel. The world has hit him so hard on this subject for so long that he now believes he is the subject in a perverted form. However we have the answers for all these things, and putting the answers into effect, we are getting places. Things never looked better. Auditors were never more welcome. Operational gains were never more hopeful.

POSSIBILITY OF CONGRESS

There is at this time a possibility of a congress during Christmas Week in the United States. This has been authorized with Bill Young that a congress be given there. Announcements had better be gotten out on it in a hurry. There is also, depending on permission to stay in Great Britain, a possibility of a congress during Christmas Week in Great Britain. The tapes of congress week in Great Britain will not be available for the American congress unfortunately.

ABILITY COMING OUT SLOW

Ability needs to come out, it needs to come out regularly, and it needs to stress training and processing, and the general state of Scientology. An awful lot of letters should be carried in Ability, and an awful lot of news. If Ability will notice, Certainty and the PABs come out on regular schedule.

TAPES SPOIL IN AIRMAIL

Due to the magnetic field around travelling airplanes it is reported tapes sometimes erase or partially foul themselves up in the magnetic fields. Thus all tapes to be transported by air must, and I repeat MUST, be wrapped in tinfoil inside the box. One takes tinfoil and puts it around the tapes and then puts the tape into the box, and we won’t get any more of these bad tape qualities because of airline transport.


L. RON HUBBARD

LRH :rd
Copyright (©) 1955
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED












LONDON AUDITORS’ MEETING LECTURES
London, England
1 December 1955—14 February 1956


L. Ron Hubbard gave the following lectures at the London Auditors’ Meetings, beginning 1 December 1955. These lectures are listed here together for convenience. They are also shown on other pages at the dates at which they occurred.


** 5512C01 LAM-1 The Lowest Level Case
** 5512C01 LAM-2 The Fundamentals of Auditing Style
5512C15 LAM-3 Exteriorization by Separateness from Weakest Universe
** 5512C22 LAM-4 Matching Auditing to Tone
5601C03 LAM-5 Solution to Body Behavior, Part 1
5601C03 LAM-6 Solution to Body Behavior, Part 2
5601C10 LAM-7 Auditor Insight
5601C12 LAM-8 Anglo-Saxon Thought
5601C16 LAM-9 Repair and Remedy of Havingness
5601C19 LAM- 10 Exteriorization
5601C24 LAM-11 The Role of Creation in Aberration
5601C24 LAM-12 The Role of Creation and Destruction in Havingness
5601C31 LAM-13 Basic Lecture on Havingness [see page 491 ]
5601C31 LAM-14 G.E. Scientology
** 5602C07 LAM-15 The Game of Life (Exteriorization and Havingness)
** 5602C09 LAM-16 Sixth Dynamic Decisional Processing
5602C14 LAM-17 Aims and Goals of Scientology 1956
5602C14 LAM-18 Games Processing Applied to Auditing

HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
1 Brunswick House,
83 Palace Gardens Terrace,
London, W.8.
BAY 5780

OPERATIONAL BULLETIN NO. 7 6 December 1955


INTENSIVE IN PROGRESS

As an item on the First Dynamic, which we seldom discuss, I am fifteen and a half hours deep on an intensive being given me by Mary Sue. I am just a little bit astonished to note that two or three processes which we went by swiftly in the last year or two are most intensely workable. It is not a bad idea to get some subjective reality on some of these things, before drawing up anything like a final issue of SLP. If you want to ask auditors who have run me, I audit like a well-greased wheel. It is rather amusing, therefore, to have the GE picked out of an incident auditor Dick Saunders left it stuck in, in July of 1950. That gives you some idea of how fundamental our newer processes are, if they can even remedy 1950.

HASUK

The Hubbard Association of Scientologists of the United Kingdom is still in a state of formation, but the British public has not yet learned that the old organization has all but disappeared, and the new organization has taken its place. People and even a couple of staff members are still reacting towards the organization as though it was the same old grind. This is a case of doing too smooth a job of change-over, without making enough fireworks. We are left with the job of informing the British public very directly that the HASUK bears little if any resemblance to the HAS of old.

In the first place take the matter of Clinic. We closed the HAS Clinic many, many months ago saying we were going to open it again in December of this year. We have done just exactly that, but on its opening, we find an entirely different programme than we had before, entirely different processes, and different methods of handling people. We are hand-picking our auditors, and we are supervising the auditing of cases right down the middle. This of course does not even vaguely compare with the way we were handling cases a short time ago where we were farming them out. But that, remember, was the HAS, and this is the HASUK. The Clinic at Brunswick House is turning out more results faster than are being turned out anywhere else in Great Britain.

People have also overlooked the purpose of a central clinic. Its purpose is to clean up cases which are left in distress, and to produce sufficiently excellent results to alert the public at large to the benefits of Scientology. As far as cases in distress are concerned, we have all that locked up. If any more exist in the British Isles that we have not patched up, and put way up the tone scale, then we do not at this moment know about them. We do not include in this a case or two that were in terrible condition a decade ago and on which we are still working with success. As far as results are concerned, we are making absolutely sure of these results by giving psychometric tests before and after each intensive. We have no idea whatsoever of letting a preclear get away without having benefited appreciably from processing.

The public does not know this. Free group processing, lecture service, a free basic course given by LRH for auditors now in progress and an evening professional, and a day professional course, plus publishing and general Scientology organization, have altered with the general organizational plan of SERVICE. We admit there were many things left to be desired by the HAS, but the HASUK is in there pitching and the like of this we have not seen in a very long time. It remains for all of us to do enough talking to convince the auditors themselves and the public at large that we are a different organization, that we are operating differently, and that we are getting results. That they must be told this, and that it must be demonstrated to them becomes obvious when one realizes that preclears in London are going to a rather distant part of the world when they could have better auditing at less right here in London.

PROCESS STABILITIES

Aside from the slight change in command wording in SLP, we have levels three, four, five and six of this series of processes taped, which is to say they are just about the way they’re going to be. However, levels one and two are still being overhauled. Two more basic processes evidently fit on level one below the level of present time problem. One of these processes is “What wouldn’t mind obeying you?” “What wouldn’t you mind obeying?” The other one is an old one: “Tell me something in this environment you could have.” Either one of these is more workable than spotting or assigning intentions or 8-C.

Oddly enough, there is some possibility, for various reasons, that the “What wouldn’t you mind obeying?” “What wouldn’t mind obeying you?”, however phrased, is one of those all-the-way processes. I stumbled onto it recently and it has now been under test for a month, and is showing every sign of being the bright-haired process of the future. This process and “What could you not-know about that?”, run almost at random on a case, are rivals for the most productive sessions. However, stuck cases seem to progress best by getting them to tell you lies about the environment. Also it appears that havingness processes, even Opening Procedure of 8-C, should be preceded exhaustively with “Tell me something around here you could have.” I won’t go into the mechanics of why, but we have been running people, and making people spot the environment who could not have the environment but could have a subjective bank. When they can have the environment they don’t have to have the subjective bank, and that’s about the end of it.

There are some recent philosophic advances in Scientology which are compelling interest, as they bear very intimately on the question, “Can a thetan get along in this